The URL can be used to link to this page

32C-141 (68) .m ow, SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL Limit the length of any flexible connection to 4 feet maximum. Where circuitry passes through duct walls, include, in accordance with instructions issued in the field, airtight sealing provisions, which allow for a relative movement between the circuitry and the duct walls. MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUITRY Except as noted below, select materials exactly as specified for feeders. Utilize #14 AWG THWN conductors throughout; except in conjunction with a manual starter, utilize conductors equal in size to those in the power circuit. Motor control circuit wires may be run in the same conduit as the wires of motor power circuits; however, abide by the following: Exclude motor control wires from enclosures (other than motor starter enclosures), which contain power circuit over current protection, and switching devices; also from pull boxes and junction boxes containing the wires of main and sub-main feeders. Utilize auxiliary pull boxes to separate motor control wires from motor power circuit wires before the power circuit wires enter the items from which motor control wires are excluded. SPLICES Make splices for#10 or smaller conductors with UL approved solder less connectors based on 3M Co. "Scotch-lock" Type Y, R, G or B, Buchanan, or T&B "Stakon". Make splices, cable taps, and terminals for#8 or larger conductors with UL approved bolted pressure conductors of bronze or copper construction equal to those manufactured by T&B or Burndy. END OF SECTION Electrical 16000 Genesis III Page 32 .� SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL Wiring device plates shall be galvanized sheet steel or cast ferrous metal except that in finished spaces, they shall be of type 302 non-magnetic stainless steel. Plates for toggle switches and receptacles shall have gasketed snap-shut covers. Final connections of flexible conduit shall be of the neoprene-sheathed type. Enclosures, junction boxes, pull boxes, cabinets, cabinet trims, wiring troughs and the like, shall be fabricated of galvanized sheet metal, shall conform to the following: They shall be constructed with continuously welded joints and seams. Their edges and weld spots shall be factory treated with cold galvanized compound. Their connection to circuitry shall be by means of watertight hub connectors with sealing rings. Enclosures for individually mounted switching and over current devices shall be NEMA Class IV (watertight) construction. The covers, doors, plates and trims used in conjunction with all enclosures, pull boxes, outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets and the like, shall be equipped with gaskets. All enclosures, cabinets, junction and pull boxes (larger than outlet box size) and the like, shall be equipped with breather and drain fittings. The following shall be treated as damp or wet locations within building confines, regardless of whether or not a high ambient moisture level is found to exist: Spaces where any designations indicated weather-proof(SP) or vapor proof(VP) appear on the drawings. Outside of waterproofing in foundation walls in contact with grade. Electric work in slabs, walls or suspended ceilings which bound on a space defined as a damp or wet location shall meet the damp or wet location requirements if it enters into, or opens into the damp or wet location in any way. OR REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING ELECTRIC WORK IN AIR HANDLING SPACES Within air handling ductwork or plenums (other than spaces within suspended ceilings used for air handling purposes): Abide by the requirements specified for electric work in damp locations within building confines. Electrical 16000 Genesis III Page 31 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL 5x400 (5x600)MCM max. 1600 3/0 250MCM 400 (600)MCM 6x500 (6x750)MCM max. 2000 3/0 250MCM 500 (2x250)MCM 8x500 (8x750)MCM max. 3000 3/0 250MCM 2x500 (2x250)MCM 11x500(11x750)MCMmax .4000 3/0 250MCM 2x500 (2x750)MCM 14x500(14x750)M CM max. 5000 3/0 250MCM 3x400 (3x600)MCM Connections of ground wires shall be in accordance with the following: LOCATION GROUND WIRE CONNECTION Main switchboard Switchboard ground bus Junction box at which non-metallic Metal body of junction box conduits terminate Secondary voltage to secondary Transformer ground stud voltagetransformer REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING ELECTRIC WORK IN DAMP OR WET LOCATIONS WITHIN BUILDING CONFINES Abide by the requirements specified for normal electric work conditions except: Exclude armored cable. Utilize watertight compression gland type fittings only on electric metallic tubing. The finish for threaded steel conduit shall be galvanized only. Outlets and outlet size boxes and fittings shall be of galvanized cast ferrous metal only. Conductors for pulling into raceways for lighting and appliance branch circuitry purposes shall have permissible insulation types limited to "XHHW", "TW", "THW" and "THWN". Conductors for pulling into raceways for main feeders, sub-main feeders and branch feeders shall have permissible insulation types limited to "XHHW", "THW' and "THWN". Apply one layer of half lapped plastic electric insulating tape over wire nuts used for joining the conductors of wires. Exclude split insulating casings for insulating joints and taps in conductors of wires and cables. Electrical 16000 Genesis III Page 30 -• SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL SIZING OF EQUIPMENT AND RACEWAY GROUNDING CONDUCTORS AND LOAD SIDE OF SERVICE BONDING JUMPERS OVERCURRENT DEVICE GROUNDING CONDUCTOR OR BONDING JUMPER FUSE OR TRIP SIZE SIZE -- CU (AL) (AMPS)** 15 - 20 #12 (#10) 25 - 60 #10 (# 8) 70 - 100 # 8 (# 6) 110 - 200 #4 (#4) 225 -400 # 2 (1/0) 500, 600 * 2 x #1 (2 x 2/0) 700, 800 * 2 x 1/0 (2 x 3/0) 1000 * 3 x 2/0 (3 x 4/0) 1200 *4 x 3/0 (4 x 250) MCM 1600 * 5 x 4/0 (5 x 350) MCM 0 2000 * 6 x 250 MCM (6 x 400) MCM * Adjust quantity (if needed) to match number of conduits in run. ** Where phase leg conductor ampacity exceeds over-current device, increase grounding conductor as if the over current device size matched the phase leg ampacity. Grounding electrode conductor and conductors used for bonding on the supply side of the service device shall be sized in accordance with the following table: OF SIZING OF GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS AND MAIN (AND SUPPLY SIDE OF SERVICE) BONDING JUMPERS SERVICE CONDUCTOR GROUNDING ELEC- BONDING JUMPER SIZE CABLE BUS TRADE CONDUCTOR SIZE -------- , , CU (AL) SIZE--CU (AL) CU (AL) #2 (1/0) MCM 100 #8 #6 #8 (#6) 3/0 (250) MCM max. 200 #4 #2 #4 (#2) 500 (700) MCM max. 400 1/0 3/0 1/0 (3/0) 2x350 (2x500)MCM max. 600 2/0 4/0 2/0 (4/0) 2x500 (2x700)MCM max. 800 2/0 4/0 2/0 (4/0) 4350 (4x500)MCM max. 1200 3/0 250MCM 250 (350)MCM Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 29 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL Architect/Engineer to make reasonable changes in arrangement of equipment, piping, etc., prior to roughing-in, if interference is found, without additional cost to the Owner. dw Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 28 +• SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL Fixtures located on exterior of building shall be installed at a uniform height from the floor and hang plumb. Each fixture shall be completely wired in an approved manner wih No. 12 AWG copper standard wire, 600 volt, with type AF insulation; recessed lain fixtures to be furnished with 7 ft. 0 in. no. 14 AF wire and 6 ft. 0 in. greenfield. Circuit wiring running through the fixtures shall be No. 12 AWG with type AF insuletion. There shall be no joints in the wires other than those absolutely required. The fixture wires shall be of sufficient length for making approved connections at the fixture outlets and at the lampholders or ballasts. Joints and splices within fixtures to be either soldered and taped with plastic electrician's tape or secured by wire nuts or indent type lug fasteners. Upon completion of the installation of the lighting fixtures and lighting equipment, they must be in first-class operating order and in perfect condition as to finish, etc. Check for proper operation and appearance, alignment of fixtures and proper placement of lenses, louvers, lamps and other light controlling or modifying appurtenances. OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES Receptacle boxes unless otherwise noted, shall be approximately 20 in. above finished floor. Switch outlets shall be forty-four (44) inches above finished floor, unless otherwise noted. The Electrical Subcontractor shall check with Architectural and Structural Plans for irterference's. Junction and outlet boxes, where exposed to weather and wet locations, shall be of the threaded hub type and provided with watertight screw-on cover and gasket. Pull boxes shall be adequate size to accommodate the conductors installed therdn without excessive bending of the conductors, which would damage the conductor insulation. INSTALLATION This Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as to cause no delay in the construction work by other trades. This Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the correctness of it. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements and those shown on the plans. If, in layout of his work, this Contractor finds that the work of other trades might interfere with him, the Architect/Engineer shall be notified at once. The right is hereby reserved by the Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 27 go .. SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL Conduit shall be fished and cleaned and dry before pulling wires and shall be suitably protected against entrance of dirt and moisture during construction. Ends of all conduits shall be reamed and all joints made waterproof. Connections to junction boxes shall be double locknut and bushing, using insulated bushings on all conduit 1'/4' or larger. Grounding bushing shall be provided at all panel connections. Conduit connections to motor frames shall have a minimum of 18 inches of greenfield to eliminate vibrations and noise being transferred to other parts of the building, with cable jumper across greenfield and fittings. Bushings shall be provided on all conduit stubs. LIGHTING FIXTURES Installation of all lighting fixtures shall be done by experienced mechanics. Lighting fixtures shall not be installed where finished coat of paint has been applied to ceiling and walls until paint is thoroughly dry. Lighting fixtures in equipment rooms shall not be installed until after all piping and ductwork is in place. Lighting fixture layout shown on the drawings is typical layout but may be modified to provide adequate lighting of the equipment space according to find construction conditions. Any relocation of fixtures due to duct or piping interference shall be as directed by the Architect/ Engineer, at no expense to the Owner. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for proper coordination of all lightirg fixture locations. Provide separate support for all fixtures mounted on or recessed in hung ceiling. He shall confer with Ceiling Contractor and Ventilating Contractor to coordinate lighting system with other trades. *" Fixtures shall be rigidly mounted to fixture stud in outlet boxes. Malleable iron hickies or extension pieces shall be provided where required. Provide and install suitable cover plate or canopy for each fixture outlet box where the fixture does not provide a suitable cover. Where fixtures are installed in dropped ceilings the contractor shall provide junction boxes as indicated on the plans. The fixture whip to the fixture shall provide sufficient slack to allow the relocation of the fixture 4' in any direction. Looping from fixture to fixture with slack cable attached to structure above in not acceptable. •� Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 26 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL Grounding insulating bushings, equal to O.Z. type 'BLG', shall be provided on all feeder conduits connecting to panels, switchboards, motor control centers and transformers. A grounding conductor shall be secured in each bushing lug and to a cable lug, which is securely bolted or welded to the cabinet. Motor frames of motors over 150 volts to ground shall be grounded with a separate ground wire to the closest outlet or rigid conduit system. For parking lot or decorative lighting standards located remolle from building, ground by means of individually driven ground rods where continuous metallic conduit system is not available and where code permits. Transformers remote from building shall be grounded to driven ground rods - for neutral ground, where cold water pipe is not available. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed noncurrent carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductor in non-metallic raceways and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall be grounded. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment and shall be extended to the point of entrance of the metallic water service and to driven rods on the exterior of the buildings. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all materials required for the grounding and/or bonding in the building of all equipment, power and lighting systems. The Electrical Subcontractor shall make tight and proper all metallic components and equipment to one another and to ground, using a positive foolproof system of connections. Provide and install bonding and grounding conductors with approved termination where required, conforming with latest National Electric Code and other applicable specification standards. A #12 AWG insulated equipment ground conductor shall be installed in each length of flexible metallic conduit connecting to motors, recessed lighting fixtures and other equipment components for continuity. Positive ground connections with ground wire shall be made at each outlet box, lighting fixture, and motor and other equipment components by means of positively secured ground clamp in each. CONDUITS AND FITTINGS All conduits shall be installed so as to provide the straightest possible run with not more than the equivalent of four (4) 90-degree bends in a single run. Where more bends are necessary, the Electrical Subcontractor shall provide suitable pull boxes. Electric metallic tubing with approved fittings will be accepted in lieu of heavy wall conduit inhere so approved by the National Electrical Code. EMT may not be used where exposed to weather. Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 25 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL PART 3 - EXECUTION . GENERAL This Contractor shall endeavor to layout and perform his work in such a manner as to cause no delay in the construction work by other trades. This Contractor shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the correctness of it. No allowance will be made for differences between actual measurements and those shown on the plans. If, in laying out his work, this Contractor finds that the work of other trades might interfere with him, the Architect/Engineer shall be notified at once. The right is hereby reserved by the Architect/Engineer to make reasonable changes in arrangement of equipment, piping, etc., prior to roughing-in, if interference is found, without additional cost to the Owner. All work shall be installed in such a manner as to be readily accessible for maintenance, repair and operation. The Architect/Engineer must approve deviations from the plans without additional cost to the Owner. The locations of outlets, apparatus and equipment are approximate only and the runs of feeders, mains and branches are not necessarily to be made exactly as shown on the plans. The exact locations of such work shall be determined after full consideration has been given to work of other trades and without changes in the design of the systems. The entire installation shall conform to the latest issue of the National Electric Code and local inspection authorities. Electrical equipment, such as junction and pull boxes, controls and apparatus, shall be made accessible. GROUNDING Ground all conduits, supports, cabinets, equipment, services, transformer secondary containing a neutral, and emergency standby systems containing a neutral in accordance with all applicable codes and ordinances. Ground conductor shall be insulated copper conductor(s) and shall be run in conduit. Ground shall be connected to an accessible continuous underground cold water main not smaller than 2-inch trade size by means of approved ground fittings. Adjacent to the ground clamp provide an additional ground clamp on the cold water main and connect to driven copper weld ground rods, minimum 10-feet long, in sufficient quantity to reduce resistance to ground to less than 5 ohms. Rods shall be driven as close as possible to the cold water main and shall be connected to **� each other and to the clamp on the cold water main with #4/0 bare copper Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 24 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL 8. Beacon SL 5. 9. Knox Box 3200 series. 10.Mini Horn Strobe GXS-24-1575 D. WIRING 1.Provide in accordance with the manufacturers instruction all wiring, conduit and outlet boxes as required for the installation of a complete system as described herein and shown in the drawings. 2.Final connections between the equipment and the wiring system shall be made under the supervision of a representative of the manufacturer. E. FINAL TEST 1. The final test must be conducted by an underwriters laboratories listed UUJS Company. A copy of the final test shall be submitted upon completion. Provide File number with submittal. F. GUARANTEE 1. All equipment and wiring shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 23 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL contacts to be 20 amps, 120 or 208 volts as required. Coil voltage shall be as .. indicated on the plans or as required by manufacturers. B. Approved manufacturers: Asco, Arrow Hart of Magnacraft. TELEPHONE SERVICE Furnish and install telephone raceways, cables, jacks and plywood boards, and final connections at telephone terminals. Terminals provided by the E.C. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. GENERAL 1. Contractor shall furnish and install a complete system as described herein and as shown on the drawings. 2. All panels and devices shall be the standard product of a single manufacturer. The catalog numbers specified under this section are those of Notifier and .W constitute the type, quality and desired operation. 3. All equipment shall be UL listed and all fire equipment shall meet the requirements of NEPA 72. B. SYSTEM OPERATION 1. The actuation of any automatic or manual fire device shall cause the following: a. All supervised fire alarm horn and strobes to sound and flash. b. Indicate the zone in alarm at the main control panel. c. Notify the local fire department via communicator. C. EQUIPMENT 1. Supply and install an SFP-1024 Alarm System. .� 2. Batteries PS 1270 for 60 hours standby. 3. Smoke 2400 Photo. 4. Apartment smoke Gentex 9120 or 713cs. .R 5. Pull station NBG-12. 6. Horn- Strobe P24110. 7. Strobe S241575 Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 22 �** SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL Manual starters shall be fractional horsepower type with thermal overload relay, red pilot light to - indicate power"ON" and hand-off-auto switch where indicated on plans. Starter shall be Square D Class 2510 or equal by GE, Westinghouse or ITE. Magnetic Starters: Magnetic starters shall be FVNR type with interchangeable thermal overload relays. Size starters with capacity to handle load. Provide proper size ambient compensated thermal overloads in each phase leg. Coil voltage shall be 120 volt maximum. e Provide hand-off-automatic switch integral with each starter as noted on plans. Provide control transformer sized as required in starter to properly operate control devices. Provide NEMA 1, NEMA 3R, or NEMA 4 enclosure as noted on drawings. Starters shall be Square D Class 8536 or equal by GE, Westinghouseor ITE. COMBINATION STARTER/DISCONNECT SWITCH u Provide combination full voltage non-reversing magnetic starters and fusible disconnect switch where indicated on the drawings. Wall mount or provide unimstrut channels secured to the structure for mounting. Devices shall have HOA switch and one set of N.O. and N. C. auxiliary contacts. Starters shall have replaceable thermal overload units in each phase leg. Coil voltage shall be 120V maximum. Provide control transformers sized as required to properly operate control devices. Combination devices shall be in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosure as noted on the drawings. Combination devices shall be SQ. D. Class 8538 or equal by Allen Bradley, Westinghouse, GE or ITE. RELAYS A. Furnish and install solid-state relays as shown and detailed on the plans. Relays to be in steel housing with a hinged cover as detailed on the plans. Relay Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 21 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL Firesafing and smoke seal is required for all pipes, ducts or conduit penetrations through rated walls or partitions, and at positions separating smoke zones from each other -- if smoke zones or plenums are employed in the building. Each of the principle trades -- plumbing, sprinklers, HVAC and electrical -- are to provide their own pipe and duct sleeves and to do their own foreseeing and smoke seal work. Foreseeing and smoke seal of pipe and duct penetrations through non-rated secondary walls within a rated larger area need not require foreseeing and smoke seal work until they penetrate the rated walls. Foreseeing and smoke seal materials are as follows: "Poke-through" fire containment, USG "THERMAFIBER", fire test CEG 4- 11-78; USG 6-2-76; CEG 8-7-85. USG "THERMAFIBER" Rigid-type, various thicknesses. USG "THERMAFIBER" SMOKE SEAL COMPOUND-- UL No. R11327-L; UL No. R11327-R. SAFETY SWITCHES Heavy-duty UL listed single throw, quick make-quick break operating mechanism with padlock provisions of"OFF" position. NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R or NEMA 4 enclosure as called for on the plans. Fused or non-fused type and ampere rating as called for on the plans. UL class fuse shall be R, J or L for 100,000 AIC listing of switch. 240 VAC for 120/208V systems and equipment as called for on plans. Furnished and installed by Electrical Subcontractor. Approved manufacturers: Square D, I.T.E. or General Electric, and Westinghouse. STARTERS Manual Starters: *� Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 20 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL Provide 6" additional gutter space in all panels where double lugs are required, or where cable size exceeds bus size. Minimum bottom gutter space shall be 6" high. Provide additional 6" side gutter space for feed thru lug panels. Maximum depth of panels shall be 53/4". Before energizing panel boards, retighten all accessible bolted connections per Article "Equipment Bolted Connections". Panel boards shall be Square D NQOD Series or equal by GE, ITE, Benjamin or Westinghouse. SLEEVES AND INSERTS The Contractor shall furnish and install all sleeves and inserts required for his work, prior to the #1" pouring of the concrete. The Architect shall approve any conduits passing through footings or grade beams. Should the Contractor neglect to install sleeves and inserts before concrete is poured, he shall, at his own expense, cut and patch the building construction as required for the installation of his work. DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS Disconnect and remove all existing electrical equipment and systems and parts thereof and appurtenances, which are made obsolete by this renovation whether or not shown on drawings to be removed or unless otherwise noted or shown to remain. All obsolete materials shall be disconnected and removed including hangers and supports and shall be taken to an area designated by the General Contractor. The General Contractor shall remove the materials from site and dispose of in accordance EMPTY CONDUIT SYSTEMS: +s Furnish and install empty conduit systems with outlet boxes, pull wires and bushings on all open ends for wiring by others. All empty conduits shall terminate in mechanical room unless otherwise indicated. FIRESAFING AND SMOKE SEAL Firesafing and smoke seal is required where pipes, ducts and conduits leave or enter any vertical pipe/duct shaft way at all floors and through all walls above or below any Class "A" acoustical tile ceiling, or any space without any type of finish ceiling. Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 19 an ow SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL All circuit breakers providing protection for bedroom receptacles shall be arc-fault protection type in •m accordance with 210-12 of the 2002 National Electrical Code. Load centers and related circuit breakers shall be equal in all respects to Cutler Hammer 'BR' series throughout. Load centers by I.T.E., SQ.D. or General Ebctric will be acceptable. PANELBOARDS Panel boards shall be furnished with sub-breakers as shown on panel schedule, hinged lockable doors, index cardholders and aluminum bussing. Panel boards shall be fabricated of sheet steel of the following minimum gauges: Door and Trim #12, enclosure code gauge steel. Surface mounted panels shall be finished with a coat of metal primer and a finish coat of gray enamel baked on. Flush mounted panels shall be galvanized. Fronts shall be given two coats of metal primer and shall not be installed on the cabinets until after finish coats of paint have been applied to the walls and the fronts, and are thoroughly dry. Panels located in common areas shall be .. delivered primed only to the site. The G.C. will field paint. All panel boards shall be furnished with flush locks and with key rings. All panel boards shall be keyed alike. All panel boards shall be provided with hinged front to box for access to panel interior. Lighting panel boards shall be 120/240 volt, single phase, 4 wire S/N 20" wide by 5'/2" deep units. Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type and shall have an interrupting capacity equal to or greater than the AIC of the panel board as indicated on schedule. AIC rating shall be for the voltage listed in the panel schedule. All panel boards and breakers shall be fully rated. Series rated equipment will not be acceptable. Panels shall be equipped with ground bus welded to panel and the neutral (when required) shall be insulated from the box. Provide isolated ground bus in panel where indicated. Where two pole breakers occur in lighting panels, the multimpole breakers shall be common trip units, and shall be rated at 240 or 480 volts if circuit does not require a neutral. Single pole breakers with tie-bar between handles will not be accepted. Circuit breakers shall be arranged in the panels so that breakers of the proper trip settings and numbers correspond to the numbering in panel schedules on the drawings. Circuit numbers of breakers shall be black on white micarta tabs, or other approved method. Breaker handles shall indicate trip size. Where branch circuit breakers supply power to high intensity discharge fixtures, fluorescent fixtures (including outdoor fixtures), motors, control circuits, and signd systems, the breakers shall be furnished with locking facilities so that each individual breaker can be locked off with a padlock. Where time switches, contactors, relays, etc. are indicated below panel schedules, they shall be installed in separate compartments above panel board under separate lockable door. ON Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 18 *" SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL ELECTRIC SERVICE ENTRANCE The new electric service is rated 600A, 120/240V, single-phase, four-wire. The Electrical Contractor will be responsible for providing the following: 4" conduits with feeders as indicated on the plans. on Concrete encased 4" conduits under paved areas for secondary electric service, as indicated on the plans. so All secondary feeders and raceways from modular metering center and up utility pole. 4" rigid conduit sweeps and risers 10'-0" up utility pole leaving sufficient slack with ow connectors for final connections to pole mounted transformers by MECO. Pay all fees associated with the new service. The Utility Company will provide the following: All terminations at the transformers. Overhead wiring extension from existing utility poleto new utility pole and its exact location. All necessary meters. APARTMENT UNIT LOAD CENTERS on Load Centers shall be rated as indicated in the panel board schedules as to type and voltage class. Load centers shall be plug-on type with plated bus assembly running full length. Load centers shall have main lugs only, have fronts with door and be provided with a typewritten directory for circuit identification. Load center shall have a solid neutral assembly as well as a separate equipment ground bus assembly. The AIC rating shall be 10,OOOAIC for all load centers. No series rated equipment will be acceptable. Load center fronts with door shall be delivered primed only to the site. The G.C. will field paint. Apartment load centers shall be UL listed and meet all NEMA standards and applicable federal specifications. Circuit breakers shall be plug-on type and full size. Half size or tandem breakers will not be accepted. Provide handle padlock attachment and padlock with key as indicated on the schedub. All padlocks shall be keyed alike and a minimum of six keys shall be delivered to the owner. Where GFI breakers are indicated the E. C. shall provide a separate neutral for circuit. Electrical ,�„ Milbank Affordable Housing Page 17 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL Provide 10% spare lamps for all types specified. •. Installation of all lighting fixtures shall be done by experienced mechanics. Lighting fixtures shall not be installed where finished coats of paint have been applied to building and walls until paint is thoroughly dry. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for proper coordination of all lighting fixture locations. Fixtures shall be rigidly mounted to fixture stud in outlet boxes. Malleable iron hickies, or extension pieces shall be provided where required. Support shall be provided for all fixtures mounted on or recessed in hung ceiling. Provide and install suitable cover plate or canopy for each fxture outlet box where the fixture does not provide a suitable cover. Circuit wiring running through the fixture shall be No. 12 AWG with Type AF insulation. There shall be no joints in the wires other than those absolutely required. The fixture wires shall be of sufficient length for making approved connections at the fixture outlets and at the lamp holders or ballasts. Joints and splices within fixtures shall be either soldered and taped with plastic w electrician's tape or secured by wire nuts or indent type lug fasteners. Upon completion of the installation of the lighting fixtures and lighting equipment, they must be in first-class operating order and in perfect condition as to finish, etc. Check for proper operation and appearance, alignment of fixtures and proper placement of lenses, louvers, lamps and other light controlling or modifying appurtenances. Lighting fixtures and lamps shall be as described in the Lighting Fixture Schedule located on Contract Drawing. (Refer to Section 16 of the Spedfication, paragraph, Reference to Materials by Name.) ELECTRIC SERVICE ENTRANCE Building main disconnect and residential metering center shall be equal in all respects to a Square D "EZM" modular metering system' and shall be arranged as indicated on the contract drawings. Complete assembly shall be listed by UL and shall be rated for short circuit fault currents as determined by WMECO. Service entrance voltage characteristics shall be 120/240V., 1-phase, 4 wires. Rain tight Metering Center shall be. Square D #EZM1600CB 600 amp 1 phase main breaker, NEMA 3R. Square D #EZMR114125 4 high single-phase ringlets type sockets. Square D #EZMR113125 3 high single-phase ringlets type sockets. Square D #Q02100VH 100 amp 2 pole circuit breakers '** Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 16 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL Wiring devices and wall plates by Arrow-Hart or Pass & Seymour will also be acceptable. LIGHTING FIXTURES All luminaries and other lighting equipment shall be delivered to the job complete, wired and including all supporting means such as plaster frames, supports, hangers, canopies, sockets, holders, all current or voltage modifiers, such as ballasts, starters, all light control materials; specifically diffusers, louvers, lenses, reflectors and refractors. All lighting fixtures shall be constructed and installed in accordance with local building codes and directives by the National Board of Fire Underwriters and shall bear the label of approval of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. All materials shall be new and of best grade of approved manufacturing standards. Workmanship shall be of the highest order to assure trouble-free operation and durability of equipment. All fluorescent fixtures shall be provided with Class P thermally protected rapid start electronic ballasts. Electronic ballast shall be manufactured by Magnetic Triad or Valmont and be UL listed and on Utility company rebate list. Compact and double twin tube fluorescent ballasts shall be electronic or higi power factor indoors and shall be 0 degrees ballast outdoors. Circle line ballasts shall be Rapid start HPF. 2D ballasts shall be electronic HPF ballasts for indoor application and cold weather start ballast to-25°F for exterior applications. HID ballasts shall be high power factor type CWA designed for minus 20°F operation. Fluorescent lamps shall be equal to Osram/Sylvania Octron 800 Series T8 lamps: 36" lamp • F025/35K, 2225 lumens, 48" lamp FO32/35K, 3000 lumens; 24" lamp F017/35K, 1400 lumens. Incandescent lamps shall be equal to Osram/Sylvania Capsylite "A" line or Par Series. Compact fluorescent and double twin tube fluorescent lamp shall be equal to Osram/Sylvania's compact and twin tube fluorescent lamps with a color temperature of 3500K. arcline lamps shall be equal to Osram/Sylvania Rapid Start Designer 3000K Series. 2D lamps shall be equal to GE 4 pin lamps with 2700K colors. All HID lamps to be a recommended by fixture manufactu For each fixture with exposed fluorescent lamps, provide Detch Electric No. GL-40 lamp locks for bi-pin lamps and No. Super 1217 lamp locks for single pin or power groove lamps. All fixtures shall be installed complete with lamps of stated type. All lamps of each type shall be by the same manufacturer to insure uniformity of color. All fixtures shall be independently supported from building structu Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 15 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL Ground fault circuit interrupter-duplex receptacles: In bathroom and kitchen locations - 20 amp, Leviton #6898-1 (ivory) with #84401-40 S.S. wall plate. All outdoor locations - 20 amp, 125 volt, Leviton #6899 (brown) with Tay Mac #20570 weatherproof cover or approved equal. Range receptacles shall be 3 pole, 4 wire 50A, 250V flush mount for 4" square box. Leviton #5374 with#84026 S.S. wall plate. Coordinate with range supplier. Dryer receptacles shall be 3 pole, 4 wire, 30A. 250V flush mount for 4" square box. Leviton #278 with #84026 S.S. wallplate. Coordinate with dryer supplier. Toggle switches shall be NEMA WD-1 rated, meet Federal Spec. W-S-896E as verified by UL, be 20 amp, 120/277 VAC self-grounding type "Commercial Grade". Single pole to be Bryant#4521-1 (ivory). Three-way to be Bryant#4523-1 (ivory). Four-way to be Bryant#4524-1 (ivory). Single pole switch with pilot light to be Leviton #5336-1 (ivory). Two pole switch to be Bryant#4522-1 (ivory). Single pole lock to be Leviton #1221-21L Apartment fan/light switch shall be equal to Braon#V67. Wall plates shall be as follows: In all kitchens, bathrooms, maintenance, mechanical and laundry areas install satin finish stainless steel (.040") wall plates. Garages or other areas where exposed metal boxes are used Raco %2" exposed-work raised cover plates. In all other area of building interiors install Leviton high abuse nylon throughout, color to match wiring device color. Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 14 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL MC cable shall have aluminum armor with 90°C rated THHN copper conductors. Cable shall have integral green insulated copper ground. All conductors shall be wrapped with a 3000 volt/mil dielectric tape. Cable shall be rated at 600V. Cable to be as manufactured by Alflex, AFC, GE or equal. Non-metallic (NM) sheathed cable shall be suitable for operation at 600V. Cable assembly, plus paper separation to be jacketed with 75°C rated PVC compound. Conductors shall be copper with color-coded insulation. OUTLET. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all outlet, pull and junction boxes required for the proper installation of all components of the electrical systems. Each outlet, junction or pull box installed in the raceway systems shall be of the proper type, class and construction to suit the specific conditions encountered. Outlet, pull or junction boxes shall be furnished and installed in conformance with the Massachusetts Electrical Code. Boxes occurring at plastered or drywall surfaces shall have a suitable plaster or extension ring installed. Boxes, which are to support fixtures, shall include a 3/8" fixture stud. Where multiple devices are located at one point, gang-type boxes shall be used. Outlet, pull and junction boxes, whether surface or flush, shall be galvanized code gauge steel with flush knockouts. All boxes shall be as manufactured by Raco, Appleton, Midland-Ross or approved equal. Where type NM cable is installed, non-metallic boxes will be acceptable. All boxes shall be as manufactured by Carlon or Slater. WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES The Electrical Subcontractor shall install devices where shown on the plans. Where two or more + • devices occur at one location, they shall be provided with a garg-type plate. All devices of each type shall be by a single manufacturer. Receptacles shall be NEMA WD-1 rated, meet Federal Spec. W-C-596d as verified by UL, be 2- pole, 3-wire, 20 amp, 125 volt, heavy-duty self-grounding type, back and side wired. " Specification Grade". Single receptacles to be Leviton #5351-1 (ivory). Duplex receptacles to be Leviton #5352-1 (ivory). wo Electrical „ , Milbank Affordable Housing Page 13 an on SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL All feeder cables shall be color coded with plastic tape according to the following: 120/240 Volts Phase A - Blue Phase B - Black Neutral - White Ground - Green .,. All wiring and cable shall be manufactured by Triangle/PWC, Anaconda, Southwire or ITT except as may be noted for special system wiring. RACEWAYS Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be galvanized Republic, Triangle, Allied Tube or approved equal. EMT shall be electro-galvanized and meet ANSI standards. Couplings and connector shall be thread less-type specifically designed for the purpose. Exposed raceway shall be run parallel to and at right angles to building features Refer to wiring system and Part 3 of these specifications. EMT may not be installed outdoors. Flexible metallic conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized steel, Alflex Triangle, Fourslide or approved equal. Fittings shall be of the twist in locking type of cadmium-plated steel, Tomic or equal. Fittings, which use a screw to bind against the tubing, will not be accepted. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall have flexible galvanized steel core, over which a polyvinyl chloride cover shall be extruded, and shall be Underwriters' Laboratories approved. Integral copper bond conductor shall be provided in all sizes where available. Provide separate bond wire where integral conductor is not available. Fittings shall be liquid-tight, and shall seal and ground conduit. Use Anaconda, Electro-Flex, Flexi-Guard or approved equal. Rigid non-metallic conduit shall be PVC Schedule 40 and shall be rated at 90°C. Buried rigid nor+ metallic conduit shall be encased in a 2" concrete envelope where vehicular traffic passesover it. Where rigid non-metallic conduit is to be encased in concrete, conduits may be PVC, Type A thinwall in sizes less than 2" and shall be PVC type EB-P & C duct for sizes 2" and greater. Install grounding wire in all non-metallic conduits and bond at both ends of run. Intermediate metallic conduit shall be galvanized Allied Tube, Triangle, Cyprus or approved equal. Couplings, locknuts, etc., shall be hot-dipped galvanized or equal and shall be threaded fittings. Rigid metal conduit shall be used in areas subject to corrosion and where exposed on walls, as required by code and as indicated in wiring system and Part 3 of these specifications. Rigid steel conduit and conduit fittings shall be hotdipped galvanized with factory-galvanized threads. Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 12 "'* erg SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL PART 2 - PRODUCTS WIRE AND CABLE All conductors shall be soft drawn copper, and shall have a conductivity of not less than 98% of the USASI standard annealed copper. All conductors shall bear the markings of the Underwriter's Laboratories, the AWG size, the type irsulation, maximum permissible voltage, the manufacturer's name and trademark. Minimum insulation voltage rating shall be 600 VAC at 75°C. All branch circuit neutral conductors shall be full capacity unless specifically noted otherwise on Drawings. Branch circuit wiring throughout apartment interiors may be non-metallic sheathed cable (type NM copper with equipment ground conductor) except where indicated otherwise on drawings or specifications. Minimum size to be #12 AWG unless otherwise noted on drawings. Conduit and wire shall be used in all mechanical and electrical room areas, and maintenance room where exposed and MC cable where concealed. Minimum size conductors to be #12 AWG. Feeder cables to the unit load centers in the individual units througlout the facility shall be 100 Ampere SER cable. All conductors shall be copper, rated for 600V and have a temperature rating of 75°C in wet locations and 90°C for dry locations. Branch circuits feeding range receptacles and electric dryers shall be SER copper cable. • All conductors shall be copper, rated for 600V and have a temperature rating of 75°C in wet locations and 90°C for dry locations. Provide 30A. for dryers and 60A. for ranges. ,. All feeder cables shall be type "THWN/THHN" and shall be copperwith 600V insulation. All conductors between transformer pad and the main device shall be type THHN/THWN and shall be copper with 600V insulation. All special system wiring shall be of a type and size as required by manufacturer or equipment. Conductors#12 AWG and smaller shall be solid. Conductors #10 AWG and larger shall be stranded. 0W Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 11 .. .r SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL GUARANTEE WARRANTY •* The Electrical Subcontractor shall and hereby does warrant that all work executed and all equipment furnished under this section shall be free from defects of workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance of this work. The Electrical Subcontractor further agrees that he will, at his own expense, repair and replace all such defective work and all other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective ,■, during the term of the Guarantee Warranty. In addition to the guarantees called for under this specification and the requirements of the "General Conditions", and "Supplementary General Conditions", the Contractor shall guarantee his work as follows: For factory-assembled equipment and devices on which the manufacturers furnish standard published guarantees as regular trade practice, the Contractor shall obtain such guarantee and/or warranty, and deliver same to the Owner, along with operating manuals required under other paragraphs of the specifications. Fluorescent lighting fixture ballasts shall be guaranteed for a minimum of two (2) years, after final acceptance of project by Owner, for material and labor. All work for which materials are furnished, fabricated or erected by the Contractor, all factory-assembled equipment for which no specific manufacturer's guarantee is furnished, and all work in connection with installing manufacturer's guaranteed equipment, shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for a period of one (1) year from final acceptance of thework, against defects in materials and defective workmanship of any kind. In the event of failure of any work, equipment or device during the life of the guarantee, the Contractor shall repair or replace the defective work and shall remove, replace or restore at '* his expense, any parts of the structure or building which may be damaged as the direct result of the Contractor's defective work or in the course of the Contractor's making replacement of his defective work or materials. Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 10 40 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL operating installation, whether mentioned or not, omitting only those items which are specifically excluded. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to relocate any equipment or device prior to ' actual installation at no extra cost to the Owner. ANCHORING EQUIPMENT All floor-mounted equipment shall be securely anchored to the floor with sufficient anchors to resist a horizontal force equal to the weight of the equipment. All floor-mounted equipment 6 feet or more in height shall be anchored to the wall near the top of the equipment, if mounted against the wall with sufficient anchors to resist a horizontal force equal to the weight of the equipment. EQUIPMENT BOLTED CONNECTIONS Before energizing switchboards, panel boards, etc., the Contractor shall tighten or retighten all accessible bolts in the electrical conductive paths using a torque device to the torque recommended by the manufacturer. PRELIMINARY OPERATION (CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES) Operate electrical systems with required supervision for at least two full days prior b substantial completion. Make necessary adjustments, and check proper operation. TESTS PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Representatives of Electrical Sub-contractor, equipped with instruments required to demonstrate the following, shall attend tests: Equipment installed and operating in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and instructions and with these specifications. Safety controls operating as specified. Motors equipped with proper overload protection and not operating under overload. Obtain ammeter readings. Submit report in triplicate listing system tested, date, results and description of fault corrections, if any. Report shall be included in the operation and maintenance manuals required under"Operating Instructions". Electrical ,��„ Milbank Affordable Housing Page 9 w SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL As a condition for acceptance of the work, deliver three (3) copies of "A&Built" shop drawings, catalog data, wiring diagrams, and descriptive literature covering operation and maintenance, parts lists, source for parts and service, and warranty cards, to the Architect's representative for the Owner. All data shall be neatly bound in suitable folders. Include copies of receipts for all items delivered to Owner's representative. The Electrical Subcontractor shall instruct Owner's representative in the operation of all electrical apparatus and systems. RECORD DRAWINGS Provide and keep up-to-date a complete as-built set of blue line prints. Correct daily to show every change from the original drawings and specifications including the size and kind of equipment, panel schedules, lighting fixture schedule, and runs of all conduits including dimensional location of all underground runs, and all addenda and/or change orders. Prints for this purpose may be obtained from the Architect. Keep this set of drawings on the work and use only as a record set. On completion of the work, obtain a set of reproducible electrical drawings from the Architect and incorporate all changes as noted above on plans. Submit plans for review and approval as "As Built Drawings". Pay the cost of all blueprinting. TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER " Temporary electrical facilities shall be furnished by the General Contractor as described in section, TEMPORARY FACILITIES. The General Contractor to pay for electrical energy. PRELIMINARY OPERATION (OWNER RIGHTS) The Owner reserves the right to operate portions of the electrical system on a preliminary basis without voiding the guarantee or relieving the Contractor or his responsibility. ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS AND MINOR DEVIATIONS Symbols shown on the Drawings illustrate the approximate location of equipment to be installed. See "Drawing and specifications section". The exact location shall be governed by structural conditions and obstructions. This is not to be construed to permit redesign of the system. All outlets shall be interconnected as shown on the Drawings. "* It is not intended that the accompanying plans and specifications cover every detail of the required installation. Furnish and install equipment, materials, and labor as shown or specified, as are usually furnished, or as are needed to make a complete and satisfactorily Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 8 40 M SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL Telephone jacks and cabling. Heavy-duty fused safety switches. Combination Disconnects and starters. "In use"flush weatherproof-keyed cover, for exterior receptacles. Wire and cable, identify area of use for each. Range and dryer power receptacles including P ower supply cord sets, unless equipped with range and dryer and the E.C. matches receptacles to these plugs. PRODUCT DELIVERY The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials to the building site when required, so as to carry out his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. TOOLS SCAFFOLDING, ETC. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide all necessary tools, machinery, scaffolding, and transportation for completion of this contract. WASTE MATERIAL The Electrical Subcontractor shall remove all rubbish created by the Electrical Subcontractor. PROTECTION This Electrical Subcontractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss, which may occur, shall be made good without additional expense to the Owner. This Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for the wr proper protection of all his materials until the Owner accepts the building. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 7 W .. SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL Submit shop and erection drawings and descriptive and supportive literature for all work in •• accordance with the General Conditions. Approval by the Architect/Engineer must be obtained prior to delivery of materials to the site. No fabrications, ordering, delivery to the site or other steps shall be taken with respect to those items requiring shop drawings or manufacturer's detail drawings to be submitted or submittals of information for review, all to the Architect, until he returns such to the submitter carrying either the notation "Approved" or "Approved as Corrected" as indicated by the Architect or his Engineer. An "Approved as Corrected" notation means that changes as indicated must be incorporated or the qualifying acceptance will be considered void. If a resubmittal of Shop Drawings is required due to substitution by the Contractor of equipment not equal to the specified equipment, the Engineer reserves the rigft to directly bill the Contractor and receive payment for review of these shop drawings prior to their release at a rate of$75.00 per hour with a two (2) hour minimum. Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings during the review do not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to comply with the requirements of the drawings and specifications. This review is only to check for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor remains responsible for: Confirming and correlating all dimensions and quantities; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating the work of the trades; and performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner. Shop drawings listing various manufacturers to be considered subject to availability are not acceptable and will be rejected. Within thirty (30) days of award of contract this Subcontractor shall submit for the Arch itect/Engineer's approval, six (6) copies of the manufacturer's shop drawings, detail prints, and data sheets for the following items: Panel boards, enclosed circuit breakers, metering centers and circuit breakers. Load centers and circuit breakers. Wiring devices and all wall plates for all devices. .. Lighting fixtures and lamps. Fire Alarm System. Photoelectric controls, time clocks and contactors. Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 6 OPP SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL It is intended that outlets shall be located symmetrical with architectural elements notwithstanding the fact the locations shown on the drawings may be distorted for clearness in representation. In rooms having acoustic tile ceilings, it is the intention that all ceiling outlets shall bear a symmetrical relationship to joints in acoustic tile work. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor under the Electrical Section of the specifications to check with the installers of the acoustic tile work to insure that all ceiling outlets are precisely centered with relation to acoustic tiles either exactly on a joint or exactly between joints. If any doubt exists as to the proper location of the outlet, the Architect shall be consulted. Discrepancies between different drawings, between drawings and actual field conditions or between drawings and specifications, affecting the progress of the work, shall be promptly brought to the attention of the Owner's representative for decision, and all work on affected areas shall be stopped, subject to resolution of the conflict. SITE VISITATION Before submitting his bid, the Electrical Subcontractor shall visit the site with the plans and specifications and shall become thoroughly familiar with all conditions affecting his work, since he will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. OPERATING PROCEDURE The Electrical Subcontractor shall at all times have a foreman on the project authorized to make decisions and receive instructions. The foreman or superintendent shall not be removed or replaced without the expressed approval of the Architect/Engineer after construction work begins. COORDINATION OF TRADES All trades are required to attend a minimum of three coordination meetings. Refer to Specification Section 01040 PROJECT COORDINATION. Overall coordination drawings are not required, however coordination drawings and sketches to resolve conflicts shall be required for some areas. Areas requiring coordination drawings shall be determined during the coordination meetings. Coordinate the work of different trades so that interference between mechanical, electrical, architectural and structural work, including existing services, will be avoided. SUBMITTALS Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 5 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL Upon completion of the work, the Contracbr shall make any tests necessary to satisfy the Owner and the Architect or his representative that the true intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications has been carried out. Contractor shall provide all instruments and labor necessary to make such tests. Such tests shall include voltage tests at incoming 40 service and at every panel and switchboard. Any work showing faults under test, and any work not in accordance with the specifications, shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense. QUALIFICATIONS Materials and workmanship shall be the best of their respective kinds and in full accordance with the most modern construction methods. Electrical materials and equipment of types for which there are Underwriter's Laboratories Standards,shall conform to their requirements and be so labeled. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS The Electrical Subcontractor shall refer to the drawings for a full comprehension of the work to be done and for conditions affecting the locations and placement of his equipment and materials. These drawings are intended to be supplementary to the specifications, and any work indicated, mentioned or implied in either is to be considered as specified by both. Should the character of the work herein contemplated or any matter pertaining thereto be not sufficiently explained in the specifications or drawings, the Subcontractor may apply to the Engineer for further information and shall conform to such when given as it may be consistent with the original intent. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in location prior to installation at no expense to the Owner. All items are diagrammatic and exact locations are subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer. For the purpose of clearness and legibility, the drawings are essentially diagrammatic, and although the size and location of equipment is shown to scale wherever possible, make use of all the data in all the contract documents and finally verify this information at the building and site. The Architect shall determine the exact location of all conduits, outlets and equipment. The drawings show the required size and points of termination of the conduits and the number and size of wire therein, and suggest the proper routes of conduits. However, it is not the intention of the drawings to show all necessary offsets, and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to install the conduits in such a manner as to conform to the structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom, maintain required accessibility, satisfy the requirements of governing codes and keep openings and passageways clear. *�* Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 4 ■* SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL PERMITS AND FEES Obtain all permits, pay all fees, give all proper autfiorities all required notices, and comply with all rules and regulations affecting the work of the Electrical Subcontractor. All wiring materials shall be furnished and installed in accordance with latest Massachusetts Electrical Code, National Electrical Code, local codes, OSHA and all other applicable codes. Where code requirements exceed those shown on the Contract Drawings and/or in the specification, code requirements shall prevail. The Electrical Subcontractor shall comply with the Electrical Inspedor's and Fire Chiefs instructions and requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Equality of Materials- Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this Section will be determined in accordance with the approval of the Engineer. REFERENCE TO MATERIALS BY NAME Specific reference in the specification, or on contract drawings, to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form, or type of construction, etc., by name, make or catalog number shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality, and shall not be construed as limiting the competition. The Contractor may at his option use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction that, in the judgment of the Architect/ Engineer, is equal to that named. Approval for any manufacturer's product not specifically mentioned shall be obtained as described below. If the Contractor intends to provide equipment, products or materials by an alternate manufacturer not listed as an equal, the Engineer prior to the close of bidding must approve the alternate manufacturer. An Addendum will be issued to allow all bidders the opportunity to bid using approved alternate manufacturers. Equipment cuts of both" the specified manufacture and the Electrical Contractor shall provide the alternate manufacture to the Engineer. The above cuts shall be in the possession of the Engineer a minimum of ten days prior to the close of bids. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any submittals of alternate manufacturers if the above provisions are not complied with 'in full". TESTS All wiring and connections shall be tested for continuity, grounds and short circuits before the fixtures, devices and equipment are connected. Electrical �,� Milbank Affordable Housing Page 3 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL Make final connections of power and/or control wiring as required by equipment installed by other trades. �. Power wiring and connections to owner-furnished kitchen, laundry, and other equipment. Heavy-duty fused safety switches. Starters & combination starter/disc. switch. Fire safing and smoke seals. Obtaining, completing and submitting all paperwork and complying with all inspections required for Utility complying with all inspections required for Utility Company rebate. Rebate will be sent to the Owner. Install CATV system cables and jacks provided by AT & T Broadband. Install Telephone cables and jacks at all locations shown and provide sufficient slack cable at telephone terminals. Removal of all existing electrical rendered obsolete by renovations. .. WORK BY OTHERS The following work, in conjunction with the work done under this section of the specifications, shall be done under sections of the specifications by the Contractor so designated. This work shall be done at no expense to the Electrical Subcontractor. All cutting, patching, preparation and painting of finish work will be done by the General Contractor. Any drilling of holes through walls, floors or structural members will be by the General *� Contractor. The Mechanical Contractors shall furnish all of their equipment complete and ready for wiring by the Electrical Subcontractor, complete with wiring diagrams where apoicable. All excavation and backfill as required, for the installation of the Electric, Telephone and +. CAN Service and Fire Alarm cable runs, will be by the General Contractor. Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 2 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SCOPE OF WORK The work required under this Section, without limiting the generality thereof, includes the furnishing and installing of all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably incidental to the complete installation of the Electrical work. All work as described tereinafter and as shown on the drawings, and as set forth in these specifications is required. The word "provide" used elsewhere in these specifications or on the drawings shall be taken to mean furnish, move into place, install and connect. In general, the electrical work shall consist of, but not be limited to, the following items: Underground conduits where indicated for new electric service, CATV and telephone service including pull rope. Refer to site plan SE.1 New service entrance, metering center, enclosed circuit breakers, panel boards and circuit • breakers. Load centers and circuit breakers. Lighting fixtures and lamps, to include time clocks. New fire alarm system and replacement of existing systems. Wiring devices, wall plates and branch circuit wiring. CAN outlets and wiring. Telephone outlets and wiring. New fire alarm system. Electrical Milbank Affordable Housing Page 1 SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING a. Brake horsepower. b. Voltage and phase, nameplate and actual amperage for each phase. c. Design and actual GPM. d. Design and actual pressure differential. 2. Coil and Radiation Performance Data: a. GPM flow. b. Supply water temperature. c. Return water temperature. g. Water balance procedure shall include: 1. Setting all balance valves to design requirements. 2. Mark all balance valves in their final positions. 3. Balance all pumps to design requirements. END OF SECTION 15600 Page 54 Millbank Affordable Housing op SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 1. Setting all dampers taking care not to "choke" system and cause objectionable noise. Balancing in this manner will not be acceptable. 2. Mark all manual volume dampers in their final positions. 3. Setting all automatic dampers to correct percentage of total stroke. 11. Perform water balancing as follows: a. Balancing Contractor shall perform all necessary adjustments to balancing devices and pumps to obtain flows indicated or called for in the Contract Documents in accordance with ASHRAE and standards of good practice. b. Prior to start of balancing, Balancing Engineer shall perform the following: c. Check rotation of all pumps. d. Check position of all shut-off valves. e. Check position of all balance valves. OF f. Compile the following data for each pump and system: 1. Pump Descriptive Data: 2. System identification. W„ a. Location or area served. b. Pump manufacturer. c. Pump size and model number. d. Pump horsepower. e. Motor safety factor. IM f. Heater size and manufacturer. 1. Pump Performance Data: Page 53 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING h. Final sheave position. 2. Fan Design and Delivered Conditions: a. Fan and motor RPM. b. Brake horsepower. c. Voltage and phase, nameplate and actual amperage for each phase. d. Total, suction and discharge static pressure. e. Supply, return and exhaust CFM. ... f. Outside and return air percentages. g. Pressure drop across each filter bank and coil. h. Cycle used for system balance. i. Duct size, number velocity readings and average velocity. j. Velocity pressure in mains and trunks. k. System Design and Delivered Conditions: '" I. Identify each register/grille/ diffuser, and VAV terminal. m. Register/grille/diffuser size, factor, free area, core or neck area. n. Design CFM and FPM. o. Final CFM and FPM. p. Manufacturer and type. q. Instrument and method used. 40 d. Air balance procedure shall include: Page 52 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 8. Upon completion of work, Balancing Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of balancing report for review and approval, and shall certify all systems are W properly balanced within five percent (5%) of design conditions. 9. Balancing Contractor shall be available at the project during final inspection to verify balancing data if required by Engineer. 10. Perform Air Balancing as follows: a. Prior to submitting fan and system performance data for approval, Balancing Contractor shall perform all necessary adjustments to obtain air flow and distribution of air as called for in Contract Documents, in accordance with ASHRAE, AABC, NEBB and standards of good practice. b. Prior to start of balancing, Balancing Engineer shall perform the following: 1. Check rotation of fans. 2. Verify all fire/smoke dampers are open and equipped with fusible link. 3. Align all pulleys and adjust belts. 4. Adjust fan speed to design conditions. c. Compile the following data for each fan and system: 1. Fan Descriptive Data: a. System identification. b. Location or area served. c. Fan manufacturer. d. Fan size and model number. e. Fan horsepower. f. Motor safety factor. g. Heater size and manufacturer. Page 51 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING D. Mechanical Contractor shall not perform system balance unless he can substantiate his ability, performance, certification by AABC or NEBB, and instrumentation, and obtain written approval by Engineer prior to bid. E. Work shall include balancing and adjusting of all mechanical apparatus, air distribution systems and appurtenances, and all water circulating systems and appurtenances. F. Provide all instruments, gauges, sensing and flow devices, and accessories required to perform the tests and shall make their own provisions for insertion of testing instruments. G. All holes made in ductwork shall be drilled, no punching allowed. Contractor shall plug all holes in an approved manner. H. All instruments used in procedure shall be certified to have been calibrated within six month period prior to work. Types, series numbers, and dates of .. calibration shall be included in report. I. Mechanical Contractor shall perform the following: , 1. Provide correct pulleys and drive belts where required to obtain the specified air quantities at no additional cost. Balancing Contractor shall install same. 2. Furnish and install water balancing devices where required to obtain desired water flow for each system and branch. 3. Replace dirty filters on new equipment with new to prevent excessive static pressure resistance. 4. Arrange to have Sheet Metal Contractor available to assist Balancing Contractor and to furnish and install manual air volume dampers, splitters, turning vanes, and other devices for air supply, return and exhaust ducts necessary to obtain specified air quantities. 5. Arrange to have Temperature Control Contractor available to assist Balancing Contractor and make necessary adjustments to control systems. ..R 6. Furnish the Balancing Contractor with a complete set of mechanical plans, specifications, equipment shop drawings and other necessary information. .� 7. Notify Engineer prior to start of work, and arrange for meeting with all concerned parties to review the desired system operation and method of ••' balancing. Page 50 Millbank Affordable Housing w SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING G. Flexible duct connections shall be installed where ductwork connects to vibrating or moving equipment. Flexible connections shall be not less than three inches (3") wide with a three inch (3") strip of galvanized steel permanently attached to each edge. H. Install all duct transformations required to connect thermostatic control dampers, roof curbs, registers, etc. I. Install all flexible duct with lengths as short as possible, maximum 6 ft on low pressure systems and 4' on medium pressure system. with supports 4' to 6' o.c. to structure. Any duct runs over 10 ft. shall be solid sheet metal ducting. Duct shall not rest or be supported on ceiling or suspension system. J. Fabricate smokepipes welding all seams and joints and connect to boiler and water heater outlets. Elbows shall be five pieces. Provide gasketed access door bolted to flange. K. Install removable type dryer strainer in liquid line with 3-valve by-pass. 3.12 DUAL WALL METAL CHIMNEYS A. Install supports and run chimney sections from equipment areas to termination above roof and install top. B. Install starter tee and connect to appliance gas vents. C. Seal all sections per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.13 SYSTEM BALANCING A. After completion of systems installation and prior to acceptance, systems shall be balanced to design conditions shown on drawings or specified by an independent agency operating and specializing in testing and balancing of air and water systems. Systems to be balanced shall including the following: B. All air handling and fan systems. C. All hydronic piping systems. 1. Balancing Contractor shall be a certified AABC or NEBB independent agency specializing in testing and balancing of air and water systems. 2. Engineer shall approve agency. Page 49 Millbank Affordable Housing so SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING VW assumed by any other party unless previously approved by the Consulting Engineer in writing. 2. Authorized manufacturers service representative shall furnish One (1) Year of Warranty Burner Service on the Burner(s) and Control(s), which shall commence from the Date of Original Lightoff and shall continue Warranty Burner Service coverage up to and including the First Anniversary of Burner Lightoff. 3. Warranty burner service shall include labor and materials to replace any parts or controls, which might fail in service as the result of a defect in materials or manufacture. Normal wear and tear on parts as the result of daily operation will not be included as "no charge" items (nozzles, igniters, etc.) and other such devices, which may require replacement as the result of operation during the Warranty Service Contract shall not be included. Preventative maintenance, in the form of yearly tune-up and bi-yearly cleanings and adjustments shall be the responsibility of the Installing Contractor throughout the duration of the Warranty Contract while the equipment is under his control. Preventative maintenance, cleaning and routine adjustments shall not be performed by the warranty service Contractor but by the Owners obligated Service Company. 3.11 SHEET METAL WORK A. All ductwork shall conform to SMACNA manuals and NFPA bulletins and shall be made leaktight. B. Provide a complete duct system as indicated on the plans for connecting supply and return air, exhaust air fans, outside air or exhaust openings, making all necessary changes in cross section, offsets, etc. whether specifically indicated to meet building conditions, and installing a damper at every branch take-off from main truck. Provide air turns where center line of elbow is less than 150% of width shown on plans. ®* C. Install all motorized dampers, registers, grilles, diffusers, fire/smoke dampers, and attenuators. D. Ductwork shall be arranged to clear other trades. No pipe shall pass through ducts. If the duct cannot be run as shown on the drawings, the Contractor must install the duct between the required points by any route available, subject to the approval of the Engineer. E. Types of joints and details of reinforcing shall be submitted for approval. F. Duct-mate or equal type connection systems are approved with gaskets and sealants. Page 48 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING perform such tests as may be directed by these Contract Documents and as required by the Consulting Engineer and the State Boiler Inspector. I. An initial hydrostatic pressure test of 80 PSI shall be conducted on each Boiler for a period of not less than 5 hours. Tests shall be of such duration as necessary and as directed by the Consulting Engineer to ensure that the Boilers have been installed and piped correctly with no leaks or other improper operating conditions. J. Installing Contractor shall contact and notify the State Boiler Inspector when the installation of the Boiler(s), Burner(s) and controls is substantially complete. Installing Contractor shall request an inspection of the Boilers to be conducted by the State Boiler Inspector and to have a Certificate of Inspection issued upon satisfactory inspection. K. After receipt of certificate of Inspection, Installing Contractor shall furnish a suitable glass front frame in which to place said certificate. Frame, with Inspection certificate inserted therein, shall then be placed on or posted in a suitable location within the Boiler room in which the new Boilers have been installed. L. Installing Contractor shall maintain all apparatus in satisfactory operating condition. Perform periodic Burner tune-up and cleaning of the Boiler fireside surfaces when dirty, provide preventative maintenance, perform turndown tests, conduct tests for Flame Safeguard, Combustion Efficiency, Draft tests, Limit Control tests and Safety Valve tests, check the ignition system and adjust, repair or replace any as necessary while the heating system is under his ownership and control a and until such time as the Owner accepts the equipment, issues the Final certificate of Payment and assumes the full obligation of Ownership. M. Installing Contractor shall note that any Warranty Service (Hereinafter specified) op as may be absorbed by the authorized Service representative shall in no way absolve the Installing Contractor from any and all responsibility for the Care, Service and Preventative Maintenance for Materials furnished to this Contract, while the Heating System is under his Control, and until final acceptance by the Owner. N. Installing Contractor shall guarantee the entire installation for a period of One (1)Year from the date of Owner Acceptance and beneficial usage by the Owner and Date of Final Payment. 1. Factory Authorized Service representative shall provide the initial Burner lightoff and One (1) Year of Warranty Burner service. This requirement shall not be waived, nor shall the responsibility for the Service Contract be Page 47 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING complete with a short nipple and blowoff valve installed. Each blowoff valve shall be Brass, ball type, not less than 1-1/4" inch minimum and rated equal to the pressure stamped on the Boiler and to a temperature rating of not less than 250° F. and all blowdown discharges shall be arranged so as to allow the Operator to view the water that is discharged to drain. Ends of blowdown piping shall be cut at a 450 Degree angle to prevent a cap or plug from being installed. C. All Boiler discharges shall be piped to floor drains or as indicated by the Consulting Engineer. Furnish and install all necessary pipe and fittings to connect the pressure relief valve discharge full size (Minimum Acceptable) to floor drain. Discharge shall be arranged so that there will be no danger of scalding Boiler room personnel in the event of a pressure relief situation. Size and arrangement of discharge piping shall be such that any pressure that may exist or develop will not reduce the relieving capacity of the relief valve below that required to protect the Boiler. All such discharge piping shall be supported by hangar or standoff to prevent the valve body from undue stress or strain. D. Installing Contractor shall utilize capped tees at all turns in the return piping to the back section of each Boiler for cleaning of the return piping at or near each Boiler. Feedwater, makeup water and/or water treatment shall be introduced into the Boiler water through the return piping only. Provisions shall be made for **� the expansion and contraction of all hot water mains connected to each Boiler by providing substantial anchorage at suitable points and by providing swing joints so there will be no stress or strain transmitted to any Boiler. E. After final assembly and connection, each Boiler shall be thoroughly cleaned internally following the manner described within the Boiler manufacturers installation instructions, or by ASME Section VI, either method acceptable by the Engineer. F. The process of cleaning the Boiler(s) shall include the use of a boil-out compound of Caustic Soda or Tri-Sodium Phosphate at the rate of one (1) pound of either chemical per 50 Gallons of total water in the system being • cleaned. This cleaning shall include Boiler Cleanout, Surface Blowoff, Blowdown and a wash as directed and detailed in referenced instructions. G. The process of cleaning the Boiler(s) shall be repeated as often as necessary and as directed by the Consulting Engineer to ensure that all mill scale, core sand, rust, dirt and debris, cutting oils and thread sealers or any other contaminants have sufficiently been eliminated from the Boiler(s) and to produce a condition of the Boiler water that is clean and considered acceptable to the Consulting Engineer. „ H. All field tests after the Boiler(s) have been installed and connected to the system shall be limited to not more than 80 PSI. Installing Contractor shall .� furnish all equipment, piping, labor, staging, fittings, valves, hoses and other materials and shall pay all required permits for Inspection as may be required to Page 46 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 3.9 FIRESAFING AND SMOKE SEAL A. Clean surfaces to receive firestopping materials. Remove dirt, grease, oil, loose _ materials, rust or other substances that may affect installation of the fire resistance. IN B. Refer to Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. (UL) Fire Resistance Directory; "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ)" and "Fill Void or Cavity Materials (XHHW)" for Manufacturers UL System plates. Also refer to 3M Fire Protection Products "Applications and Specifier's Guide". " C. Install firestopping materials as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective fire stop. E. Install firestopping materials so that void opening 4 inches (101,6mm) or larger will support the required floor load, unless the opening is protected from possible loading or traffic. F. Examine firestopping areas to ensure proper installation prior to concealing or enclosing firestopped areas. G. Areas of work shall remain accessible until inspection (and approval) by applicable code authorities. H. All sealants and compounds shall be neatly applied to each end of opening of ceiling, floor or wall penetrations and in accordance with code requirements. All penetrations shall be minimum size possible. I. All firesafing and smoke seal shall be performed as work progresses so as to protect each area, room or floor in the building. 3.10 BOILER/BURNER SYSTEM A. Install each Boiler in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and recommendations. Boiler manufacturer shall provide the services of a Representative to supervise the installing contractor with the assembly and erection of each Boiler. Upon completion of the Boiler assemblies, the Boiler manufacturers representative shall certify the proper assembly and connection of each Boiler prior to startup. B. Boiler drain valves shall be connected to the lowest water space available and shall be installed with pipe and fittings to connect the bottom blowoff full size to drain. Furnish and install 3" inch by 1-1/4" inch eccentric reducer in the lower left or right hand tappings of the front section of each forced hot water Boiler, Page 45 Millbank Affordable Housing ow SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ,,A K. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure as possible. 3.8 INSULATION A. Insulate piping with material specified. Unions shall not be insulated. Piping within radiation covers shall not be insulated. B. Fittings and valves shall be insulated to equal thickness with flexible matching insulation and covers applied. C. Provide wood blocking or calcium silicate insulation sections at all hanger protection saddles so as not to crush insulation. D. Insulate ducting with material specified. E. All insulation shall be installed to provide a neat and finished appearance with no unfinished edges, tears, raw ends or peeling tape. F. Maintain vapor barrier integrity throughout. G. Install finish jacket on all exposed and exterior ducting. H. Wipe dirt from all insulation surfaces prior to applying tapes and adhesives. Any .. improperly applied insulation jackets, tapes, or covers shall be removed and replaced. I. Insulation on ducting shall be adhered with noncombustible insulation bonding adhesive applied as recommended by manufacturer. Insulation shall be additionally secured to bottom of square or rectangular ducts over 24" wide and •� to all sides of ducting with any dimension greater than 36" with mechanical fasteners spaced at 18" on center. J. Seal all duct joints and seams with pressure-sensitive tape or glue after stapling. K. All sealants and adhesives shall be NFPA and NBFU labeled and approved for use. L. All insulation shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Page 44 , Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 3.7 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. All vibration isolators must be installed in strict accordance with the z. manufacturers written instructions and all certified submittal data. B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment. C. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that degrades the noise and vibration control system herein specified. D. The contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, or duct which makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. "Building" includes, but is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls. E. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. F. Any conflicts with other trades, which will result in rigid contact with equipment or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions, should be brought to the architects/engineers attention prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible contractors expense. G. Bring to the architects/engineers attention any discrepancies between the specifications and the field conditions or changes required due to specific equipment selection, prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at the responsible contractors expense. H. Correct, at no additional cost, all installations that are deemed defective in workmanship and materials at the contractors expense. I. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of overhead support of equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the structural engineer of record for approval. Generally bracing may occur from 1. Flanges of structural beams. 2. Upper truss cords in bar joist construction. 3. Cast in place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete anchors. J. Drill-in concrete anchors for ceiling and wall installation shall stud wedge type. Drill-in concrete anchors for floor mounted equipment shall be female wedge type. Page 43 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING M. Size hangers for full thickness insulation over 2'/2' pipe size. N. Install insulation protection saddles on hangers. 3.3 GAUGES A. Install on all pump suction and discharge piping. B. Each gauge shall be furnished with a gauge cock. 3.4 THERMOMETERS A. All thermometers installed 6-0" or more above floor shall be installed at an oblique angle, to be readable from floor. B. Install each with separable well so that thermometer may be removed without draining system. .� 3.5 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES A. Install pumps with valve on suction and triple-duty valves on discharge; connect piping with flexible connectors. B. Align pumps per manufacturer's directions. C. Install air separator, connect piping. D. Install expansion tank. E. Install PRV with 3-valve by-pass. 3.6 FIN-TUBE RADIATION A. Installation shall be complete with all accessories required. B. Secure back plate to wall, run level. C. Install element, connect piping with control, shut-off and balance valves and vents. D. Align valves and vents with access door locations. E. Install cover, align with all joints flush and tight. Page 42 Millbank Affordable Housing on SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING O. Install balancing valve on each item of hydronic equipment, i.e. coils, convectors, cabinet and unit heaters, pumps and fin-tube radiation. P. Eccentric fittings shall be used at all changes in pipe size. Q. Weld-O-Let fittings may be used where branches connect to mains. R. All piping entering or leaving building shall be made watertight. S. Provide strainers at inlet of all control valves, traps and as shown. T. Provide di-electric fittings where dissimilar pipes connect, i.e., steel to copper. 3.2 SUPPORTS, BRACKETS AND HANGERS A. Fabricate all supports and brackets required for installation of equipment, piping and ductwork. B. Provide all rods, steel angles, channels, beams and flat stock as required. C. Adequately secure all supports, brackets and hangers to structure with proper devices to suit construction. D. Support pipes independently of each other and in accordance with details. E. Support piping with structurally adequate hangers and supports. F. Support piping to equipment and control valves to permit removal of equipment without additional support of pipes. G. Support piping at intervals indicated on straight runs and at changes of direction. Support copper tubing to 1 inch size, 6 feet or less on centers. H. Do not use wire or wood fasteners for pipe supports. I. Supports shall be attached to top chord of joists. " J. Support pipe from concrete structure by concrete inserts, or expansion shields. Support horizontal piping with malleable iron universal-type supports. ' ! K. Support grouped pipes with trapeze supports. L. Riser clamps shall be wrought steel, to fit tightly around pipes, with extension lugs. Page 41 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING A. Minimum pipe size shall be 3/4' unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Piping as indicated on drawings is diagrammatic and exact locations are subject to the approval of the Architect/ Engineer. C. Pipe shall be run straight and true at the proper pitch and shall be firmly supported without undue stress. D. All elbows shall be long-radius type. E. All piping shall be new unless otherwise noted. No piping or devices shall be �* reused. F. Install flanges where required with gaskets. G. Ream ends of all pipes. Pipe compounds on male ends only. H. All connections to pieces of equipment and all changes in direction of mains shall be made with screwed, welded or flanged fittings. Allow for expansion or contraction. " I. No mitered fittings will be approved. J. Install all valves furnished by Temperature Control Subcontractor. K. Provisions for expansion in mains and risers shall be made by the installation of expansion joints and/or expansion compensators, offsets, or pipe loops with anchors and guides, wherever indicated on the plans, or as may be required. L. Install anchors and pipe guides as detailed and as per manufacturer's recommendations. M. Vent all high points and drain all low points in hot water piping system. Pitch all piping to drain and provide hose end drain valves each with cap. Extend vent lines to accessible location or drain and terminate with petcock. N. Install isolating valves on each item of equipment and on all branch mains and risers. Page 40 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Page 39 Millbank Affordable Housing ,. SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 111e 1. Shop drawings are to be complete with all devices identified by numbers and letters and those same identifying numbers used in the description of operation for positive ease in cross-referencing. Descriptive bulletins shall be included for all devices; these bulletins identified by the same key numbers and letters shall be used on the control layout. Description bulletins and/or control layout shall include data on sensitivity, pressure ranges, temperature ranges, means of adjustment, means of calibration, ranges, and all other data necessary for the Architect-Engineer to check use and function of each device for its intended application. 2. At the completion of the job, final corrected "As Installed" record shop drawings shall be furnished complete with all final settings, ranges, temperature ranges, sample times, throttling ranges, and temperature control settings. In addition, a print out of all control strategies which match the above drawings will be submitted as part of the "As-Installed" drawings. *+"" These are to be sent to the Architect-Engineer for review prior to submitting them to the Owner. D. Adjustment, Calibration, and Coordination with Other Trades: 1. On completion of the job, the ATC Subcontractor shall completely adjust, ready for use, all thermostats and valves. 2. Provide coordination with equipment manufacturer, HVAC Subcontractor, and Electrical Subcontractor for proper sequence of operation. E. Material Standards 1. Thermostats a. Thermostats for the residential units shall be equal to Honeywell T827 heating only thermostat. F. Owner's Instructions: 1. The ATC Contractor shall provide the services of competent instructors to provide full instructions to designated personnel in the operation and of the systems. The training shall be specifically oriented to the system and interfacing equipment installed. 2. Residential Heating and Ventilation a. Automatic control valves on the finned tube radiation shall modulate to meet the setting on the thermostat. �. b. Bathroom fan / lights shall be controlled by a wall switch. Page 38 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 2. Fire Dampers located above ceilings shall be marked by colored dots approximately '/4" in diameter applied to the ceiling grid. The color code shall be orange 2.36 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. General Requirements: 1. Control shall be provided for all mechanical systems — boilers and condensing furnaces. Exhaust fan control shall be by the electrical subcontractor unless noted otherwise on the drawings. 2. The system shall be a properly integrated system installed by competent mechanics. Control wiring shall be run from each boiler for furnace to new thermostat shown on the drawings. Thermostats shall be heating only. 3. Control systems for the Boiler/Burners and the Condensing Furnaces are furnished under other paragraphs. This systems shall be installed and adjusted by the ATC contractor. 4. All wiring, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, etc., necessary for the temperature control system shall be furnished and installed by the ATC Subcontractor and shall conform to all standards and codes as described under Section 16000 - ELECTRICAL WORK. Wiring shall be in metal raceways where required by prevailing codes. 5. Provide nameplates for all control devices. Devices on panels to have "Lamicoid" nameplates, isolated control valves, relays, etc. to be marked with stamped tape. B. Scope: 1. The ATC Subcontractor shall furnish and install all equipment, accessories, wiring, instruments, and appurtenances required for a complete and functioning system. a. The system, as specified, shall independently control the building's HVAC equipment to maintain a comfortable environment in an energy efficient manner. b. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured for this and/or other systems, and not custom designed especially for this project. All components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use. C. Shop Drawings: Page 37 Millbank Affordable Housing on SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non-accessible enclosures. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers. D. Valve Identification: 1. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, and similar rough-in connections of end-use and units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system. 2. Tagging Schedule: Comply with requirements of"Valve Tagging Schedule" at end of this section. 3. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in machine rooms where indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, where directed by Architect/Engineer. E. Mechanical Equipment Identification: 1. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise specified for each item or device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational devices: a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. b. Meters, gages, thermometers and similar units. c. Fuel-burning units including boilers, and heaters. d. Pumps, and similar motor-driven units. e. Fans, and blowers. f. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units. Page 36 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING C. All other equipment including fans, AHD's, pumps, sound attenuators, condensing units, heat exchangers, etc. shall be provided with a suitable laminated plastic nameplate with 1/4' letters fastened with appropriate screws or rivets. D. Provide framed in glass, typed charts for valves and install where directed. 2.35 IDENTIFICATION, COLOR CODING & FLOW DIRECTION A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces, which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment. B. Ductwork Identification 1. General: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief ductwork with duct markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing ductwork service and direction of flow, in black or white (whichever provides most + * contrast with ductwork color). a. Location: In each space where ductwork is exposed, or concealed only by removable ceiling system, locate signs near points where ductwork originates or continues into concealed enclosures (shaft, underground or similar concealment), and at 50' spacing along exposed runs. C. Piping System Identification: 1. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow: a. Stenciled markers, including color-coded background band or rectangle, and contrasting lettering of black or white. Extend color band or rectangle 2" beyond ends of lettering. b. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this section. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated pipes. 2. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible ! !' maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations. Near each valve and control device. Near each branch, excluding Page 35 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 3. The vent shall include an integral, annular insulating air space, 1/4" thick for sizes 3" to 8" diameter and 1/2" thick for sizes 10" to 30" diameter. 4. Edges of inner and outer walls shall be hemmed prior to final assembly to prevent pipe and fittings from having exposed sharp edges. Walls shall be attached to maintain spacing and prevent separation of inner and outer �Aef walls. 5. All fittings, flashing, storm collar, cap, and appliance adapter required to .� install the vent shall be included. 6. Vent shall be tested and listed for a minimum clearance to combustibles of 1"for sizes 3" to 24" diameter and 2" for sizes 26" to 30" diameter. 7. Vent shall terminate as required by code. 8. Vent shall be Model M as manufactured by Metal-Fab, Inc. or equal by Van Packer or Selkirk Metalbestos 9. B-Vent shall be installed in accordance with the vent manufacturer's installation instructions. 2.33 FLEXIBLE PIPING CONNECTORS .. A. As manufactured by Keflex, Flexonics or Anaconda. Model number is Keflex. B. Type KSSPC-FLG braided flexible connector. Constructed of stainless steel annular corrugated metal surrounded with a woven wire braid of high tensile stainless steel. C. Carbon steel plate flanges ASA 150# bolt hole patterns on all pipes 3" and over, carbon steel male nipples to 2%2' sizes. .. D. Flexible Connectors shall not be used to correct misalignment. 2.34 TAGS, NAMEPLATES AND CHARTS A. Each valve, control, switch and piece of apparatus installed under this contract shall be properly identified. Valves shall be provided with a 1%2' diameter brass tag with %2' high numbers and/or letters fastened with nylon ties. Beaded chain will not be acceptable. �• B. Valve tag identification shall conform to valve chart listing. Page 34 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING D. Application Criteria: 1. Temperature range: 0 to 250°F internal. 2. Maximum working velocity, fpm: 2400 for low pressure, 5000 for medium and high pressure systems. 3. Minimum working pressure, inches of water gauge: E. Low pressure systems: 2" positive, 1-1/2" negative. F. Medium pressure systems: 6" positive. G. Duct Clamps: 100 percent nylon strap, 175 pounds minimum loop tensile strength manufactured for this purpose or stainless steel strap with cadmium - plated worm gear tightening device. Apply clamps with sealant and as approved for UL 181, Class I installation. 2.31 LOUVERS A. Furnish extruded aluminum drainable stationary louvers. Louvers shall be 4" deep and assembled completely by welding. Blades and frame shall be 12 k" gauge (.081") extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T52. Louvers shall be fitted with 1/2" mesh. 16 gauge (.063") aluminum bird screen in folded extruded aluminum frames. All materials shall be factory finished after assembly with "Knar 500" coating in a color selected from the manufacturer's color chart. Louvers shall bear "AMCA licensed rating seals" for air performance and water penetration. Manufacturer shall submit "AMCA licensed" data on a 4' x 4' louvers showing it provides a minimum of 5.37 square feet of free area, shall pass 800 fpm free area intake velocity at a pressure drop not exceeding 0.10" W.G. Water penetration shall not exceed 0.15 ounces of water per square foot of free area when tested for 15 minutes per AMCA Standard 500. 2.32 BREECHINGS A. The vent shall be of the doublewall, factory built type for use with approved Category I appliances burning natural or LP gas, which produce flue gases exhausted at temperatures not exceeding 550° F. 1. The vent shall be constructed of an outer wall of galvanized steel, .018" thick G-90 for sizes 3" to 8" diameter, .020" thick G-90 for sizes 10" to 16" diameter, and .026" thick G-90 for sizes 18" to 30" diameter. 2. The inner wall, forming the flue gas carrying pipe, shall be constructed of aluminum alloy, .012" thick for sizes 3" to 6" diameter and .018" thick for sizes 7" to 30" diameter. Page 33 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 2.27 GRAVITY ROOF HOODS A. Provide gravity roof hoods as shown on the drawings. Hoods shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum with a one piece curb cap. Hoods shall be equal to Greenheck Model GRS. B. Provide a pitched roof cap for each roof hood. 2.28 ACCESS PANELS A. Steel access panels, as manufactured by Karp, Milcor or Wilkinson for access R, to valves, dampers, vents, controls, etc. Panel door shall have flush screw driver lock. 16-gauge frame, 13-gauge hinged door; rating of door shall be equal to the fire rating of wall, ceiling or floor, which it is installed into. B. Install in each location where valves, dampers, vents, controls, etc. are concealed by construction to non-accessible areas of walls, ceilings and floors. 2.29 FILTERS A. Filters shall be furnished for all equipment requiring same, sizes as required for equipment and minimum 4" thickness for AHU's. B. Filters shall be Purolator H1-E40 medium efficiency pleated or equal by Kock or Farr. C. Furnish two complete sets for all new and existing equipment, one to be installed at job start-up; other set to Owner for spare. 2.30 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT A. General: Factory fabricated, complying with NFPA 90A. Flexible ducts shall not *■ penetrate any fire or smoke barrier, which is required to have a fire resistance rating of one hour or more. Provide approximate lengths indicated on the drawings. Provide insulated acoustical air duct connectors in supply air duct + systems and else where as shown. B. Flexible ducts shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., complying with UL 181. Ducts larger than 8 inches in diameter shall be Class 1. Ducts 8 inches in diameter and smaller may be Class 1 or Class 2. C. Insulated Flexible Air Duct: Factory made including mineral fiber insulation with maximum C factor of 0.25 at 75°F mean temperature, encased with a low permeability moisture barrier outer jacket, having a puncture resistance of not .� less than 50 Beach Units. Acoustic insertion loss shall not be less than 3 dB per foot of straight duct, at 500 Hz, Based on 6 inch duct, of 2500 fpm. Page 32 � Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING shall provide his own pipe and duct sleeves and do his own firesafing and smoke seal work. B. Elastomeric intumescent firestopping material as manufactured by 3M Construction Markets, Dow-Corning, or approved equal. C. Components to be used as follows: 1. 3M Brand Fire Barrier CP 25N/S No Sag Caulk. 2. 3M Brand Fire Barrier CP 25S/L Self Leveling Caulk. 3. 3M Brand Fire Barrier CP 25WB Caulk. 4. 3M Brand Fire Barrier FS-195 Wrap/Strip. 5. 3M Brand Fire Barrier CS-195 Composite Sheet. 6. 3M Brand Fire Barrier 7900 Series Penetration Sealing Systems. 7. 3M Brand Fire Barrier MPS-2 Moldable Putty Stix. 8. 3M Brand Fire Barrier MPP-4S Moldable Putty Pads. D. Firestopping material shall be asbestos-free and capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with the requirements of ASTM E814, UL 1479, and UL Fire Resistance Directory. E. Materials shall meet and be acceptable for use by BOCA, Massachusetts state code and all other applicable codes. Assemblies shall be UL listed. F. Materials shall meet the requirements of NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code and NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. G. Materials shall be suitable for the firestopping of penetrations made by steel, glass, plastic and insulated pipe. H. On insulated pipe, the fire-rating classification must not require removal of the insulation. I. The rating of the firestops shall be 1, 2, 3, & 4 hour(s), but in no case less than the rating of the time-rated floor or wall assembly. Page 31 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 2.25 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Spring hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1 1/4" thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid spring height. The neoprene element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers or the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 300 arc from side to side before contacting the rod bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger drawing showing the 300 capability. Hangers shall be type 30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. B. Precompressed spring hangers shall be as described above, but they shall be precompressed and locked at the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic upstop to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Submittals shall include a drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability. Hangers shall be type PC30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. C. Stud wedge anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, not from *" undersized wire that is "rolled up" to create the thread. The stud anchor shall also have a safety shoulder, which fully supports the wedge ring under load. The stud anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying its allowable loads. Drill-in stud wedge anchors shall be type SAS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. D. Female wedge anchors are preferred in floor locations so isolators or equipment can slide into place after the anchors are installed. Anchors shall be manufactured from full diameter wire, and shall have a safety shoulder to fully support the wedge ring under load. Female wedge anchors shall have an evaluation report number from the I.C.B.O Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying to its allowable loads. Drill-in female wedge anchors shall be type SAB as •. manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 2.26 FIRE SAFING AND SMOKE SEAL A. Firesafing and smoke seal is required for all pipes, ducts and conduit penetrations through all walls, floors, partitions or leaving or entering any vertical pipe/duct shaftway at all floors and through all walls. This Subcontractor Page 30 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PM 2.23 FIRE DAMPERS A. Fire Dampers: Type "B" 1'/z hour rated and stamped, UL label and construction m curtain style, horizontal and vertical with sleeve and 165°F fusible link. For square, rectangular, oval or round ducts. B. Fire dampers in dishwasher exhaust and locker room exhaust shall be stainless steel construction, all others may be galvanized steel. 1. The damper frame may be of design and length as to function as the mounting sleeve, thus eliminating the need for a separate sleeve, as allowed by UL 555. Otherwise provide sleeves and mounting angles, minimum 14 gage, required to provide installation equivalent to the damper manufacturer's UL test installation. 2. Submit manufacturer installation instructions conforming to UL rating test. C. As manufactured by Ruskin, National Controlled Air, or Air Balance. 2.24 REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS A. Shall be manufacturer, model and types as scheduled on drawings. Sizes as indicated on drawings. B. Select grilles, diffusers and registers with neck velocities and noise ratings equal to or less than those used for design. C. All supply air devices shall be used designed to diffuse the specified air quantities uniformly throughout the conditioned space. D. Ratings shall be certified and tested in accordance with Air Diffusion Council Test Code 1062R2, or another approved test procedure. E. Equipment shall be sound performance tested and rated in accordance with W ASHRAE-36B Standard for sound power measurement. F. Location of air distribution devices installed in ceilings shall be as indicated. See W reflected ceiling plans. G. Opposed blade volume dampers shall have removable adjusting key or wrench. H. All air distribution equipment shall be steel with baked enamel finish as indicated, except where indicated otherwise. I. As manufactured by Titus, Metalaire or Krueger. Page 29 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 1. Rectangular ductwork shall be galvanized steel G-60, ASTM Standards A525 and A527. 2. Gauges, reinforcement, and joints for rectangular duct systems shall conform with SMACNA 1985 Manual for duct systems of 2"WG Table 1-5. 3. Elbows shall be constructed either with the inside radius equal to the duct width or provide square elbows with single thickness turning vanes. All in compliance with SMACNA Manual 1985 Edition. 4. All fittings for rectangular ductwork shall be fabricated in compliance with SMACNA Section 2. All connections on branches to mains shall use a 450 clinch collar, or fittings for round ducting with bellmouth and heavy duty regulators as manufactured by Buckley model HD-BMD or equal. 5. All joints shall be sealed with Class C duct sealant for 2" W.G. application. Installed in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and SMACNA manuals. 6. All ducts shall be supported as recommended by SMACNA Section 4. Duct hangers shall be spaced at not less than 5 ft. on center and at each fitting. Hangers shall be secured to steel structure. 7. Volume dampers of splitters shall be constructed in accordance with details shown in the SMACNA Duct Manual, Section 2. Dampers shall be equipped with locking quadrants with position indicator. C. Round Ducts: 1. All round ductwork shall be round spiral lockseam construction. Spiral duct gauges shall be in accordance with SMACNA standards. 2. Spiral duct shall be provided in continuous lengths wherever possible. Except when interrupted by fittings, duct sections shall not be less than twelve feet long. .w 3. Spiral duct and fittings shall be by the same manufacturer to insure good fit of slip joints. 4. Elbows: Diameters 3 through 8 inches shall be two section die stamped, all others shall be gored construction, maximum 18° angle, with all seams continuously welded. Coat galvanized areas of fittings damaged by welding with corrosion resistant aluminum paint or galvanized repair compound. 5. Provide bellmouths, conical tees, laterals, reducers and other low loss fittings as shown in SMACNA Standards. Page 28 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 5. Fittings and valves shall be covered with pre-formed fitting covers of high- impact, UV-resistant poly-vinyl chloride vapor retarding jackets. Covers IM shall be installed with staples. Equal by Zeston. B. Ductwork: 1. Insulate all ductwork as described with materials and thickness as specified. SERVICE THICKNESS Supply air ducting 1 Y? Return air ducting 1%i Ducting in attic 2" IP 2. Duct insulation in all mechanical rooms and where exposed shall be flexible fiberglass with FSK vapor barrier, 1-1/2 lb. density with "K" factor of .23 at 75°F. mean temperature; 25-50 UL rating. All joints and seams tape or glue sealed to maintain vapor barrier integrity. 3. Duct insulation in all concealed spaces shall be flexible fiberglass 1.5 lb density with FSK vapor barrier facing. Staple and seal all seams and joints with self-adhering foil tape. 4. Ductwork insulated as follows: O a. Supply air: All ducting from furnaces. b. Return air: All ducting in attic and in uninsulated duct shafts. 5. Insulation as manufactured by Owens-Corning, Knauf, Certain-teed, or SPI. 6. Duct insulation tape as manufactured by Compac type 110-7 or equivalent grade approved equal. 7. All insulation pipe and duct sealants, adhesives, coatings as manufactured by Childers, 3M, or MEI and UL approved. 2.22 SHEET METALWORK A. Ductwork: Fabricated from galvanized zinc-coated sheet steel in accordance with NFPA and SMACNA manuals. Gauges as listed in SMACNA manuals; minimum gauge shall be 24. B. Rectangular Duct Systems: Page 27 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 2.20 GAS FIRED CONDENSING FURNACES A. Provide high efficiency up flow or horizontal condensing furnaces as scheduled on the drawings by Carrier or approved equal. Furnaces shall be of a compact type with full height blower compartment allowing side return. B. Wiring shall be quick connect type. C. Furnace shall have induced combustion system with inshot main burners and electronic ignition. D. Motor shall be psc— multiple speed, direct drive with large blower. E. Primary heat exchanger shall be tubular aluminized steel. F. Unit shall be factory assembled, wired and tested. 2.21 INSULATION A. Piping �. 1. Insulate all piping including: heating water supply and return, condensate drains, cold water make-up, and all fittings and valves. Insulation thickness •+ as indicated below: SERVICE PIPE SIZE THICKNESS Heating water runouts to 12 ft. up to 1" %2' Heating water All 1 %' Cold water All 1/2" Condensate Drain All %" 2. Piping insulation except condensate drain shall be heavy density rigid fiberglass with an "R" value of 4.5 per 1" thickness at 75°F mean temperature and flame spread rating of 25, smoke developed 50. Owens- Corning, Knauf or Certainteed. Condensate piping shall be flexible unicellular. 3. Fittings and valves shall be insulated with equal thickness flexible fiberglass of pre-formed rigid fiberglass. 4. Insulation shall be covered with a Kraft reinforced ASJ jacket having longitudinal stapled seams. Self sealing butt strips shall be installed on circumferential joints and shall be stapled. UL 25/35 rating. Page 26 Millbank Affordable Housing qW SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING D. Each Boiler shall be furnished with trim and instruments including: 1. 1-1/2" diameter combination Temperature/Pressure gauge. 2. ASME schedule pressure relief valve set at 30 psi. 3. AGA certified draft hood, Vent damper. 4. High Limit Aquastat. E. Each boiler shall be constructed and tested for 30 PSI Maximum water working pressure in accordance with the ASME Section IV Rules for the Construction of Heating Boilers. Individual sections shall each have been subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test of 75 psi at the factory before assembly and they shall be marked, stamped or cast with the ASME Code Symbol. After section assembly, the entire block shall be hydrostatically tested at 75 psi prior to shipment. F. Boiler sections shall be surface ground to ensure smooth positive mating surfaces and cast iron nipples must be utilized to assemble the Boiler. As Boiler blocks are to be assembled at the Factory, use of composition, ceramic or rubber gaskets, which are susceptible to over compression, water side oil base cleaners, pipe thread compounds, chemical water treatments, anti-freeze and flue gas corruption, to seal airways between the sections shall be prohibited. G. Provide low limit water cut off and connect at outlet of boiler. H. Boiler drain valve shall be connected to the lowest water space available. Blowoff valve shall be a Brass drain cock with hose end fitting, rated equal to the pressure stamped on the Boiler and to a temperature rating of not less than 250 Deg. F. I. Provide all appurtenances required for proper venting of boiler. 1. Boiler Type 1: Cast Iron Boilers shall be designed for direct venting. Provide with a stainless steel venting system as required by the manufacturer. 2. Boiler Type 2: Cast Iron Boilers shall be designed for atmospheric combustion of Natural Gas and shall be equipped with 24 volt control for standing pilot. The high efficiency stack damper shall be driven to an open position and it shall be closed automatically at the end of each firing cycle. Page 25 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 3. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate with water treatment company and pump manufacturer so as to provide proper chemicals and level of treatment which will not damage pumps, pump seals, boilers, piping or equipment. 4. Inhibitor: Provide sodium silicate, sodium nitrite/borate, or other approved proprietary compound suitable for make-up quality and make-up rate and which will cause or enhance bacteria/corrosion problems or mechanical seal failure due to excessive total dissolved solids. Shot feed manually. Maintain inhibitor residual as determined by water treatment laboratory, taking into consideration residual and temperature effect on pump mechanical seals. 5. pH Control: Inhibitor formulation shall include adequate buffer to maintain pH range of 8.0 to 10.0. 6. Performance: Protect various wetted, coupled, materials of construction including ferrous, and red and yellow metals. Maintain system essentially free of scale, corrosion, and fouling. Corrosion rate of following metals shall not exceed specified mills per year penetration; ferrous, 0.5; brass, 0.2; copper, 0.15. Inhibitor shall be stable at equipment skin surface temperatures and bulk water temperatures of, respectively, not less than 250 degrees F and 125 degrees Fahrenheit. Heat exchanger fouling and capacity reduction shall not exceed that allowed by fouling factor 0.0005. 7. All chemicals shall be environmentally safe and approved for use. 8. By Barclay Chemical Company, Betz Entec, Culligan or ChemTreat. 2.19 HEATING BOILERS A. Furnish and install as herein specified, shown and scheduled on the Contract Drawings, new Boilers for forced hot water heating service and arranged for completely automatic operation firing Natural Gas and design certified for installation on combustible flooring without heat shield, approved and listed by the Massachusetts Gas Regulatory Board. B. Boiler shall be a factory fire tested and packaged appliance completely assembled with insulated metal jacket; heavy duty foundation complete with stainless steel burners installed at the factory; high limit control, transformer/relay control, trim and instruments mounted and wired at the factory. '* C. Boiler shall be furnished with the standard circulator. Packaged assembly shall be bolted to a wood skid at the factory to facilitate handling, sealed in plastic " and crated for protection prior to and during delivery. Page 24 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING C. Covers shall be furnished with baked enamel finish; color by Architect. D. Fin-tube radiation shall be Sterling or equal by Rittling, or Vulcan. 2.17 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES A. Expansion Tank: Furnish and install, of size and capacity as shown on plans, a pre-charged vertical steel expansion tank with integral heavy duty Butyl rubber diaphragm. The tank shall have a charging valve connection (standard tire valve) to facilitate the on-site charging of the tanks to meet system requirements. The tank must be constructed in accordance with Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and be stamped for 125 psi working pressure. Tank shall be Armstrong, Amtrol, or approved equal. Tank shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation and charging procedures. B. Air Separator: 125 psig rated ASME construction, size as noted on drawings. The air separators shall be of steel body with flanged connections. The units shall be sized Based on manufacturers published flow information. The units shall be Armstrong Model VAS or approved equal. C. Pressure-Reducing Valve: Setting as noted on drawings, all bronze. D. Triple-Duty Valves: Straight pattern valve to perform the functions of non-slam check, throttling valve, shut-off valve, calibrated balancing valve and system flow meter. The valve shall be heavy-duty cast iron construction with standard flanged connections and rated for a maximum working pressure of 175 psig. The valve shall be fitted with a bronze seat replaceable bronze disc, stainless steel stem and chatter preventing springs. The valve design shall permit repacking under system full pressure. Each valve shall be equipped with brass readout valves with integral checks. Valves shall be Armstrong Pump or approved equal OR 2.18 WATER TREATMENT A. A water treatment company under contract to Mechanical Contractor shall provide the necessary chemicals, supervision, chemical treatment and tests for flushing and refilling of hydronic piping systems and new boilers.. B. Closed Systems 1. A written report shall be submitted to the Engineer indicating initial and final conditions. 2. All side loops and low points shall be drained and flushed. Page 23 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 2. Include meter or equipment number, manufacturer's name, meter model, flow rate factor and design flow rate in gpm. G. Portable Water Flow Indicating Meters: 1. Minimum 6-inch diameter dial, forged brass body, beryllium-copper �. bellows, 250 psig working pressure. 2. Bleed and equalizing valves. « 3. Vent and drain hose and two 3000-mm (10 feet) lengths of hose with quick disconnect connections. 4. Factory fabricated carrying case with hose compartment and a bound set of capacity curves showing flow rate versus pressure differential fir each device used on the project. 5. Provide one portable meter for each range of differential pressure required for the installed flow devices. 2.15 VENTS A. Radiation Vents: Armstrong Model 72. Equal by Sarco or Taco. #. B. System Vents: Brass petcock for all coils and system high points. Extend piping to accessible location and/or nearest drain. .. C. Large Capacity Air Vents (Located at Air Separators) 1. Float actuated modulating high capacity air vent with positive shut off to 150 psig at a maximum temperature of 250 degrees. The design of the vent shall not allow air to be drawn into the system if the system pressure were to drop below ambient pressures. The vent shall be constructed of cast iron with type 313 stainless steel, brass, EPDM and silicone rubber. The vent shall be Armstrong Model AAE-750 or equal. 2.16 FIN-TUBE RADIATION A. Radiation enclosures shall be wall to wall unless otherwise noted or shown and include wall sleeves, end caps, splice plates, slide cradle radiation supports and back plates as specified on drawings. Radiation shall be IBR rated. B. Elements, covers and capacities shall be indicated on drawings; lengths indicated shall be full active length of element. Page 22 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 3. Valves shall be Milwaukee M series or equal by Centerline, Stockham or Nibco. 2.14 WATER FLOW MEASURING DEVICES A. Minimum overall accuracy plus or minus three percent over a range of 70 to 110 percent of design flow. Select devices for not less than 110 percent of design flow rate. B. Venturi Type bronze, steel, or cast iron with bronze throat, with valved pressure sensing taps upstream and at the throat. C. Wafer Type Circuit Sensor: Cast iron wafer-type flow meter equipped with readout valves to facilitate the connecting of a differential pressure meter. Each readout valve shall be fitted with an integral check valve designed to minimize system fluid loss during the monitoring process. D. Self-Averaging Annular Sensor Type: Brass or stainless steel metering tube, shutoff valves and quick-coupling pressure connections. Metering tube shall be rotatable so all sensing ports may be pointed down-stream when unit is not in use. E. Flow Measuring/Balance Valve 1. Minimal read out accuracy plus or minus 5%. Valve manufacturer shall furnish with submittal a valve schedule showing service, flow rate, pressure drop and valve size. 2. Balancing Valves shall be equal percentage globe style valves. 90 degree stoke valves shall not be acceptable. Valves shall be available in sweat or soldered configuration in 1/2" to 2" diameter and with grooved or flanged ends in 2 1/2" through 12" diameter. Valves shall have two pressure read out ports and two drain ports. Read out and drain ports shall be interchangeable. To allow for future modifications valves with fixed orifices shall not be considered acceptable. Valve manufacturer shall furnish on hot or chilled water service a pre-formed insulation kit that shall meet ASTM flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke development rating of 50 or less. 3. Acceptable manufacturers are Armstrong Pumps Inc., Tour Anderson, Amtrol, and MNG.Flow F. Flow Measuring Device Identification: 1. Metal tag attached by chain to the device. Page 21 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING C. Gate valves 3" and over: Class 125 SWP, 200 PSI, WOG, flanged ends, rising stem, solid wedge, C.I. body, bronze trim, OS&Y, bolted bonnet, T-head stem/wedge combination, meeting MSS SP70. Model IR-1140Check chain operators on Gate Valves D. Globe valves: Class 125 SWP, 200 PSI, WOG, screwed ends, B-62 bronze " body bonnet and stem, malleable iron handwheel, meeting MSS SP80. Model I B-440. E. Check valves up to 2%': Class 125 SWP, 200 PSI, WOG, screwed ends, 5 degree swing check, B-62 bronze body and cap, meeting MSS SP80. Model 16- 904. F. Check valves 3" and over: Class 125 SWP, 200 PSI, WOG, flanged ends, C.I. body, bronze trim swing check, meeting MSS SP71. Model IR-1124. G. Ball valves up to 2": Rated 150 SWP, 600 PSI, WOG, meeting WWV 35C Type II, Class A, Style 3. Two-piece threaded body, solid or tunnel drilled, large port, chrome ball. Teflon seats and seals. Blowout proof stem design with threaded adjustable packing follower. Packing retained under full working pressure with handle or handle nut removed. Zinc plated handle with plastisol grip. Model 8501. H. Drain valves: Class 125 SWP, 200 PSI, WOG, bronze, screwed or solder end, ' threaded bonnet, adjustable packing nut, hose adapter with cap, malleable iron handwheel. I. Boiler drain: Same as Ball valves as specified above. J. Butterfly Valves 1. The valves shall be designed and tested in accordance with Manufacturers A Standardization Society (MSS) standard MSS-SP-67 and American Petroleum Institute API-609. Valves to 12" size shall be rated for 200 psig. Valves 14" and larger shall be rater 150 psig .. 2. Butterfly Valves shall be cast iron body, full lug design, with stainless steel disc. Valves shall have stainless steel stems supported on 3 self-lubricated bronze or TFE coated stainless steel bearings. Valve seats and liners shall be EPDM. Valve operators shall be lever lock handle for 4" and under and weatherproof worm gear operators on valves 5" and larger. Valves in exposed locations that are 6 feet (center line) above the floor shall be provided with chain wheel operators.. All valves shall be provided with extended necks to allow 2" of insulation. Page 20 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 2.9 UNIONS A. Steel Pipe: Shall be malleable iron with bronze seats. B. Copper Pipe: Shall be cast brass. 2.10 GASKETS A. Gaskets and sheet packing shall be Garlock, Crane or Johns-Manville Co.'s make, designed for service, pressure and temperature for their respective use. Use best quality 1/16" thick sheet rubber, cut to bolt circle and notched on bolts. 2.11 GAUGES A. Gauges: American Ashcroft Model 1000, Crosby, Ernst, or equal. B. Size: 4'/2' diameter, steel case, brass connections and petcock. C. Compound type: On pump suctions. D. Range: Select for needle pointer at mid-range 2.12 STRAINERS A. Strainers shall be as manufactured by Hayward, Mueller, Sarco or Armstrong. Strainers used with steel pipe shall be cast iron body. Strainers used with copper pipe or tube shall be bronze body. B. Y Strainers: Strainers shall be provided with stainless steel screens. Screens for water service and 3" and under pipe size shall have 0.045 inch perforations. For pipe sizes larger than 3" perforations shall be 0.125 inch. Screen shall have a minimum area of 2.5 times the pipe cross sectional area. Strainers 2-1/2" and smaller shall be threaded end connections with a pressure rating of 125 psi (Steam Working Pressure). Strainers 3" and larger shall be flanged with a pressure rating of 150 psi (Steam Working Pressure). 2.13 VALVES A. As manufactured by Hammond or equal by Stockham, or Nibco; model numbers are Hammond. B. Gate valves up to 2'/2': Class 150 SWP, 300 PSI, WOG, screwed ends, rising stem, solid wedge, bronze stem, bronze body, malleable iron handwheel, meeting MSS SP80. Model I13-646. Page 19 Millbank Affordable Housing w SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING E. Brazing alloy for oil piping shall be cadmium free silver solder, American Welding Society Bag series. 2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. As manufactured by Grinned, C & P or Crane; numbers are Grinned. .. 1. Steel pipe to 21/2', Figure 65 or 260. .. 2. Pipe roll stand, all sizes, Figure 271, 3. Pipe saddle, all sizes, Figure 258. 4. Copper and brass pipe, Figure CT-99C. , 5. Riser clamp, Figure 261. MW 6. Pipe Alignment Guides Figure 255 or 256 2.7 HANGER RODS A. Secured to structure with adequate anchors, bolts, unistrut or concrete inserts. PIPE SIZE THREADED ROD DIAMETER MAXIMUM SPACING U p to 1'/4' '/4' 8'-0" 1Y2" to 2" 3/8" 8'-0" 2%2" & 3" '/2" 8'-0" w� 4" —6" %" 10'-0" B. Maximum spacing is recommended as a guide. The requirements shall be in accordance with the Manufacturers Standardization Standard (MSS) SP-69. Provide additional hangers where required to adequately support piping, valves, short lengths of pipe, and where flexible connections would be subject to strain from weight of piping. 2.8 THERMOMETER A. Adjustable angle 9" red reading, mercury-filled tube, 301 to 240°F scale for hot water and 00 to 100°F scale for chilled water, 3'/2' stem length with C33 lagging extensions, 3/" NPT, as manufactured by Taylor, Weksler or Ernst. Page 18 .w Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING E. Refrigerant Piping: Copper type ACR, seamless hard drawn conforming to ASTM 82808 ., F. Vents: Black Steel Schedule 40 G. Sleeves: Black Steel Schedule 40 H. Drains: Black Steel Schedule 40 2.4 PIPE FITTINGS A. Steel pipe to 2'/z': B. 150 pound malleable iron, ANSI 816.3. 125 pound cast iron, ANSI B16.4, may be used in lieu of malleable iron, except for steam piping. Bushing reduction of a single pipe size, or use of close nipples, is not acceptable. 1. Steel pipe 3"and larger: C. Butt Weld fittings: ANSI B16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting piping. Elbows shall be long radius type unless otherwise noted. 1. Copper pipe 2. Cast bronze or brass sweat fittings, 95/5 lead-free solder. D. Flanges 1. Weld neck or slip-on, plain face, 150 pound, conforming to ASTM A105, gasketed with temperature rating suitable for the service. Flange bolting: Carbon steel machine bolts or studs and nuts, ASTM A307, Grade B. 2.5 JOINTS AND FLANGES + A. Screwed Joints shall be made tight with a Teflon tape or compound applied to the male threads only. B. Welded Joints shall mate properly and have continuous leak-tight weld. C. Flanged Fittings shall be used for connection to all equipment requiring same, + ► flanges and drilling to match the mating joint, 150 psi rating. Fitted with machine bolts of proper size and number with locking washer under each hexagon nut. *■ D. Soldered Fittings shall be neat and wiped clean of excess solder and paste. w Page 17 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND SPECIALTIES A. Materials specified for the work on all systems shall be new, unless specifically noted otherwise, and shall be manufactured in conformance with the specified codes or standards. Where materials are not specified, the Mechanical Contractor shall furnish the best of the respective kind. 2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORTS A. Provide all necessary steel and fabricate brackets, hangers and supports stands as required for all ceiling and floor-mounted equipment such as fans, heaters, ductwork, piping, air handling units, etc. B. Hangers: Adequate to support equipment and not cause vibrations. C. Anchoring: Properly secured to building structure by Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Contractor, by welding, nuts and bolts, clamps, etc. D. Any improperly secured or fabricated supports shall be removed and replaced if in the Architect or Engineer's opinion they are inadequate. 2.3 PIPING A. Hot Water Piping, 2%2" & under: 1. Black Steel schedule 40 ERW or seamless conforming to ASTM A53 Grade B 2. Copper type L, seamless hard drawn conforming to ASTM B88 B. Hot Water Piping above grade 3"-12": Black Steel schedule 40 ERW or seamless conforming to ASTM A53 Grade B C. Condensate drains: 1. Copper Type "M" or type L conforming to ASTM B88 2. Copper type DWV conforming to ASTM B306 D. Domestic cold water: Copper type L, seamless hard drawn conforming to ASTM B88 Page 16 ., Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 1.24 GUARANTEE WARRANTY A. The Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Subcontractor shall and hereby does warrant that all work executed and all equipment furnished under this section shall be free from defects of workmanship and materials for a period of one (1)year. B. Any equipment or material, which offers extended guarantee/warranty, shall be issued to Owners at completion of the project. 1.25 SHEET METAL SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit complete drawings of all ductwork indicating sizes, elevations and coordination with piping and piping of other trades where pertinent. Coordinate and indicate electrical cable tray location. Drawings shall be 1/4"=1'-0" minimum. 1.26 SUBSTITUTIONS A. All engineering time required to modify design or construction documents to accommodate substituted materials shall be billed to the HVAC contractor at an hourly rate of $75.00 per hour. When submitting substituted materials the ft contractor will be provided with estimates of engineering time associated with the substitutions. Substantial Completion will not be granted until all bills associated with additional engineering services, due to substitutions, have been paid. Page 15 Millbank Affordable Housing �w .. SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ., 1.21 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Electrical work will be the responsibility of the Electrical Subcontractor, unless .� specifically required otherwise by this specification. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install motor starters. Wiring of motor starters shall be by the Electrical Contractor. B. Provide diagrams and instructions necessary for the Electrical Subcontractor to make connections properly. C. Electrical work required under this contract shall be done in accordance with Electrical Specifications and applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code and local ordinances. D. Verify all electric characteristics prior to ordering equipment. 1.22 DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS A. Demolition and disconnection of services will be performed by the HVAC Contractor. B. The Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Subcontractor shall thoroughly examine the site prior to bid to determine the total extent of demolition and removals required. C. The site will be abated of all hazardous materials prior to start of any new construction. D. Piping concealed in walls and not exposed during construction shall remain, •■ although piping shall be cutoff where exposed and capped or plugged behind the surface of any new finished wall, ceiling, or floor. E. Comply with all regulations of the Federal Clean Air Act for venting, recovering and recycling of refrigerants. 1.23 WELDING A. All welding shall be performed by certified welders. B. Protect all adjoining work with welding operations by erecting protection barriers or use of welding blankets. �* C. Maintain a fire watch during and after all welding operations. Page 14 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING conflict between manufacturer's instructions and the contract documents, notify the Architect/Engineer before proceeding. No equipment installation or connections shall be made in a manner that voids the manufacturer's warranty. E. Install all work in a neat and workmanlike manner using only workmen thoroughly qualified in the trade or duties they are to perform. Rough work will be rejected. + F. All material shall be new. No old pipe, ductwork or equipment shall be used. G. It is the intent of these specifications to provide complete systems, which are free from objectionable generating noise or of excessive vibration. In the opinion of the Mechanical Engineer, any items found in either of these conditions shall be corrected and noises or vibration dampened as directed. 1.20 VIBRATION ISOLATION A. All mechanical equipment noted on the equipment schedule or in the specification shall be mounted on vibration isolators to prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. "► Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflections. The contractor shall correct any variance or non-compliance with these specification requirements in an approved manner. B. The work in this section includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Vibration isolation for equipment. 2. Flexible piping connections. C. Submittal Data Requirements 1. The manufacturer of vibration isolators shall provide submittals for products as follows: a. Catalog cuts or data sheets on vibration isolators detailing compliance with the specification. b. Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment. Page 13 Millbank Affordable Housing w SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 13. All balance test reports. 14. As-Built drawings for each trade drawn using a computer - aided drafting (CAD) software package. Drawing files and corresponding hard copies of each drawing shall be provided. 1.17 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. At the time of final acceptance, the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Subcontractor shall furnish four (4) sets of equipment manuals for all equipment for delivery to the Owner. B. The Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Subcontractor shall instruct Owner's representative in the operation of all heating apparatus and systems to the satisfaction of Owner's representative and shall provide videotapes of all instructions, maintenance, and service procedures. 1.18 SPARE PARTS A. The Contractor shall provide spare parts for mechanical equipment as follows: 1. One (1) set of belts for each belt driven fan. 2. One (1) spare set of filters for each air handling unit. B. The spare parts required shall be labeled or identified with manufacturers information as well as the equipment identification number and location. 1.19 INSTALLATION OF THE WORK A. Examine the site and all the drawings before proceeding with the layout and installation of this work. B. Arrange the work essentially as shown, except layout to be made on the job to suit actual conditions. Confer and cooperate with other trades on the job so all work will be installed in proper relationship. Precise location of parts to coordinate with other work is the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor. C. Arrange for required chases, slots and openings. D. Indicated equipment connections are based on equipment of a given manufacturer. Contractor assumes responsibility for proper arrangement of pipes, ducts, etc. to connect approved equipment in a proper and approved manner. Follow equipment manufacturer's detailed instructions and recommendations in the installation and connection of all equipment. In case of Page 12 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING item of equipment shall be installed without damage to the building, building equipment, or the item of equipment. 1.16 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. The Contractor will furnish and submit.the instruction manuals in accordance with Section 01700 containing the following additional materials: 1. Brief description of each system. 2. Manufacturer's name, model number and Manufacturer's literature describing all components of the system listed on the equipment schedule drawing, control and wiring diagrams on controllers. 3. Provide a list of the mechanical contractor and all major subcontractors who have worked on the HVAC Portions of the project. Also provide a list of the Manufacturers representative for all equipment listed on the schedule drawings. The list shall include Company Name, Address, Telephone Number and Contact Person. 4. Chart of the numbers, location and function of each valve. Additionally the contractor shall provide a set of record drawings with the service, function and location of each valve. 5. Step by step operating instruction including preparation for starting, summer operation, winter operation, shutdown and draining. 6. Maintenance instructions. 7. Possible breakdowns and repairs. 8. A filter chart shall be provided. The chart shall list the quantity, size, efficiency and original supplier and model number of each filter. The filters shall be listed on a per unit basis. 9. As installed control diagrams by the control manufacturer. 10. Description of sequence of operation by the control manufacturer. r .11. Parts list of major equipment, including recommended items to be stocked as spare parts. 12. As installed, color-coded wiring diagrams of all electrical motor controller connections and interlock connections. Page 11 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING .. 1.14 PROTECTION A. This Subcontractor shall, at all times, fully protect his work and materials from «. injury or loss by others. Any injury or loss that may occur shall be made good without additional expense to the Owner. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper protection of all his materials until the Owner accepts the project. ` B. This Subcontractor shall also protect building and equipment from damage by installation of his work, and shall pay for all damages thereto. .� 1.15 COORDINATION OF TRADES A. All trades are required to attend a minimum of three coordination meetings. Refer to Specification Section 01040 PROJECT COORDINATION. B. Overall coordination drawings are not required, however coordination drawings and sketches to resolve conflicts shall be required for some areas. Areas requiring coordination drawings shall be determined during the coordination meetings. C. Where required, coordination drawings showing the size and location of mechanical pipes, ducts, equipment and appurtenances, relative to the work of other trades shall be prepared before materials are purchased or work is begun. Any work installed prior to approval of coordination drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk. D. Coordinate the work of different trades so that interference between mechanical, electrical, architectural, and structural work, including existing services, will be avoided. E. Within the limits indicated on the drawings, the maximum practicable space for operation, repair, removal, and testing of mechanical and other equipment will be provided. F. Pipes, ducts, and similar items shall be kept close as possible to joists, above walls and columns, to take up a minimum amount of space. Pipes, ducts, equipment, and similar items shall be located so that they will not interfere with the intended use of eyebolts and other lifting equipment. G. Furnish and install all offsets, fittings and similar items necessary in order to accomplish the requirements of coordination. H. All equipment, such as the pumps, air handling equipment, filters, etc., shall fit the space shown on the project drawings, and provide accessibility for servicing, repairing and inspecting apparatus at least equal to that shown. Each Page 10 .� Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS A. As work progresses, maintain complete and separate set of blackline prints of Contract Drawings at job site at all times. Record work completed and changes from original Contract Drawings, clearly and accurately. Valve tags shall be IP recorded as they are installed. B. At completion of work the Contractor shall submit As-Built drawings for each trade to Architect for review and approval.. As-Built drawings are to be drawn using a computer - aided drafting (CAD) software package. Contractor shall provide drawing files and corresponding hard copies of each drawing. s. 1.11 REFERENCE TO MATERIALS BY NAME A. Specific reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form, or type of construction, etc. by name, make, or catalog number shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality, and shall not be construed as limiting the competition, and the Contractor in such cases, may at his option use any article, device, product, materials, fixture, form or type of construction which, in the judgment of the Architect/Engineer, is equal to that named, and further provided approval of any manufacturer's product not re specifically mentioned is obtained prior to the close of the interpretation period. ! 1.12 WASTE MATERIAL A. The HVAC Subcontractor on a regular basis and at least once each week shall ? ! remove all rubbish created by the HVAC Subcontractor. B. All material shall be-properly disposed of in accordance with all prevailing codes, rules and regulations. 1.13 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. This Subcontractor shall refer to the drawings for a full comprehension of the work to be done and for conditions affecting the location and placement of his equipment and materials. These drawings are intended to be supplementary to the specifications, and any work indicated, mentioned or implied in either is to be considered as specified by both. Should the character of the work herein !" contemplated or any matter pertaining thereto be not sufficiently explained in the specifications or drawings, this Subcontractor may apply to the Architect/Engineer for further information and shall conform to such when given as it may be consistent with the original intent. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in location prior to installation at no expense to the Owner. All lines are diagrammatic and exact locations are subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer. Page 9 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 6. American Gas Association (AGA). 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). �. 8. National Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU). 9. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL). 10. United States of America Standards Association (USAS). 11. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 1.8 PERMITS AND FEES A. The Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Subcontractor shall obtain all +*� necessary permits and approval of the work by the local authorities. The HVAC Subcontractor shall obtain all other permits, licenses or certificates of approval, arrange for all inspections and pay all fees and charges in connection therewith. 1.9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Work of this Section is shown primarily on the following Drawings: M1.1 through M1.3 and M2.1. Additionally the HVAC contractor is responsible for the information shown on all the drawings in the contract set. B. Listing of HVAC Drawings above does not limit responsibility of determining full extent of work required by Contract Documents. Refer to Architectural, " Plumbing, Electrical, Structural and other Drawings and other Sections that indicate types of construction in which work must be installed and work of other trades with which work of this Section must be coordinated. Locations shown on ++ the HVAC Drawings shall be checked against general and detailed Drawings of the construction proper. C. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangement of systems and work included in Contract. Information and components shown on riser diagrams but not shown on plans, and vice versa, shall apply or be provided as *� if expressly required on both. It is not intended to specify or to show every offset, fitting, or component; however, Contract Documents require components and materials whether or not indicated or specified as necessary to make .�• HVAC installation complete and operational. D. Address questions regarding Contract Documents to Architect in writing prior to +• award of contract. Otherwise, Architect's interpretation of meaning and intent of Contract Documents shall be final. Page 8 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials used under this section of the specifications shall be new and the u. best product of the manufacturer. All materials are to be without defects and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended. B. This Subcontractor shall employ only competent and experienced tradesmen, thoroughly experienced in the installation of all materials specified under this section of the specifications and able to work in harmony with all other tradesmen employed on the project. C. This Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his material to the building site when required so as to carry on his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. 1.6 EQUALITY OF MATERIALS A. Equality of materials or articles other than those named or described in this section will be determined in accordance with the approval of the Engineer. 1.7 CODES, STANDARDS, ORDINANCES A. All work shall conform to the requirements of all codes and regulations governing such work, as may be required by local and state ordinances. 1. Where the provisions of the Contract Documents conflict with any codes, rules or regulations, the latter shall govern. 2. Where the Contract Documents are in excess of applicable codes, rules or regulations, the Contract Provisions shall govern unless otherwise directed by the Architect. B. Any material or operation specified by reference to the published specifications of a manufacturer of any of the following shall comply with the requirements of the current specifications or standard listed. 1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 3. Institute of Boiler Rating (IBR). Rrr 4. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA). Page 7 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 1. Boiler/burners 2. Pumps and hydronic specialties 3. Valves, strainers, vents, piping, fittings and accessories 4. Hangers and guides 5. Thermometers, gauges 6. Water Treatment 7. Vibration isolators 8. Registers, grilles, diffusers, louvers, fire dampers, and ducting accessories 9. Fin-tube radiation 10. Insulation for pipes, ducts and equipment 11. Pre-fabricated dual wall metal chimneys 12. Firesafing 13. All caulking, sealants, adhesives and tapes 14. Valve tags and pipe identification 15. Heating Controls ®" 16. All wiring diagrams B. No fabrications, ordering, delivery to the site or other steps shall be taken with respect to items requiring shop drawings, manufacturer's detail drawings or submittals of information until the items are reviewed and approved. C. If a resubmittal of Shop Drawings is required due to substitution by the Contractor of equipment not equal to the specified equipment, the Engineer reserves the right to directly bill the Contractor and receive payment for review of these shop drawings prior to their release at a rate of$75.00 per hour with a two (2) hour minimum. Page 6 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING f 2. Condensing furnaces 3. Pre-fabricated chimneys 4. Heating controls 5. All other systems and equipment requiring manufacturers installation review. { C. Related Sections: 1. The following items are not included in this section and will be performed under the designated sections. a. Cutting and patching. b. Excavation and backfill. c. Flashing and counter flashing unless noted otherwise noted or shown. d. Concrete Bases. e. Painting. f. Louver installation. g. Motor Starters h. All electrical wiring to equipment installed under this contract including starters and disconnect switches, unless specifically noted herein. All temperature control wiring shall be under Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Contractor's section of work and shall be by Temperature Control Subcontractor, including 4P transformers from 120 VAC to control voltage and any 120 VAC control wiring required to power operators, etc. 2. Reference to Drawings: Work to be performed is shown on Drawings listed for work of this section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Quantity of shop and/or manufacturer's drawings as called for in General 0 Provisions shall be submitted to the Architect for review, for the following: Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING c. Registers, grilles and ducting accessories 2. Building Two - New Construction: a. Hot water heating system including boiler/burners, pumps, hydronic specialties, valves, accessories and piping. b. Water Treatment for heating system c. Fin-tube radiation d. Exhaust ducting and ducting accessories e. Pre-fabricated dual wall metal chimneys 3. Building Three— Renovations to 79 Michelman: a. Replacement of existing heat pump and fan coils with new condensing furnaces. 4. Common to all buildings: a. Piping and ductwork insulation + !� b. Firesafing for all piping and ducting c. Heating controls d. Water and air balancing e. Start-ups, test and shake down of systems f. Valve tags, charts, pipe identification g. Maintenance manuals h. Guarantee .R B. This contractor shall include as part of his contract, all charges for start-up, checking, adjusting and field inspections and service representatives for all special systems and equipment. Provide signed documentation for above procedures from factory or service representative. Systems included: 1. Boiler/burner Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The drawings and conditions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and all Division 1 sections, apply to the work of this Section. Work to be done under this Section is shown on the contract drawings listed at the front of the specifications. The listing of Contract drawings and Specifications shall not limit the Sub-Contractors responsibility to determine the full extent of his work as required by all Contract drawings and Specifications. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The GENERAL DOCUMENTS, as listed on the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of Division 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, shall be included K in and made a part of this Section. B. Examine Drawings and other Specification Sections for requirements that affect work of this Section. C. As used in this Section, "provide" means "furnish and install" and "HVAC" means "Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning". D. Where an item is referred to in singular number in Contract Documents, provide as many such items as are necessary to complete the work. E. Before starting work, visit the site and examine the conditions under which work must be performed including preparatory work performed under other Sections or Contracts, or by Owner. Report conditions that might adversely affect work in writing through Contractor to Architect. Do not proceed with work until defects have been corrected and conditions are satisfactory. Commencement of work shall be construed as complete acceptance of existing conditions and preparatory work. 1.3 SUMMARY A. Work included: Provide labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the work of this section, including, but not limited to the following: 1. Building One— Renovations to 18 Michelman: a. Gas fired condensing furnaces and all appurtenances b. Systems of supply, return and exhaust ducting Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 2.19 INLINE HOT WATER PUMPS Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.20 HEATING BOILERS 24 2.21 INSULATION 26 2.22 SHEET METAL WORK 27 2.23 FIRE DAMPERS 29 2.24 REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS 29 2.25 VIBRATION ISOLATORS 30 2.26 FIRE SAFING AND SMOKE SEAL 30 2.27 GRAVITY ROOF HOODS 32 2.28 ACCESS PANELS 32 2.29 FILTERS 32 2.30 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT 32 2.31 LOUVERS 33 2.32 BREECHINGS 33 2.33 FLEXIBLE PIPING CONNECTORS 34 2.34 TAGS, NAMEPLATES AND CHARTS 34 2.35 IDENTIFICATION, COLOR CODING & FLOW DIRECTION 35 2.36 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 37 .� PART 3 - EXECUTION 40 3.1 PIPING 40 3.2 SUPPORTS, BRACKETS AND HANGERS 41 3.3 GAUGES 42 3.4 THERMOMETERS 42 3.5 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 42 3.6 FIN-TUBE RADIATION 42 3.7 VIBRATION ISOLATORS 43 3.8 INSULATION 44 3.9 FIRESAFING AND SMOKE SEAL 45 3.10 BOILER/BURNER SYSTEM 45 3.11 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER INSTALLATION _Error! Bookmark not defined. 3.12 SHEET METAL WORK 48 3.13 DUAL WALL METAL CHIMNEYS 49 3.14 SYSTEM BALANCING 49 .. Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15600 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PART 1 - GENERAL 3 1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 3 1.2 REFERENCES 3 1.3 SUMMARY 3 1.4 SUBMITTALS 5 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 7 1.6 EQUALITY OF MATERIALS 7 1.7 CODES, STANDARDS, ORDINANCES 7 1.8 PERMITS AND FEES 8 1.9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 8 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS 9 1.11 REFERENCE TO MATERIALS BY NAME 9 1.12 WASTE MATERIAL 9 1.13 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 9 1.14 PROTECTION 10 1.15 COORDINATION OF TRADES 10 1.16 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 11 1.17 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 12 1.18 SPARE PARTS 12 1.19 INSTALLATION OF THE WORK 12 1.20 VIBRATION ISOLATION 13 1.21 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 14 1.22 DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS 14 1.23 WELDING 14 1.24 GUARANTEE WARRANTY 15 1.25 SHEET METAL SHOP DRAWINGS 15 1.26 SUBSTITUTIONS 15 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 16 2.1 MATERIALS AND SPECIALTIES 16 2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORTS 16 2.3 PIPING 16 2.4 PIPE FITTINGS 17 2.5 JOINTS AND FLANGES 17 2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 18 2.7 HANGER RODS 18 2.8 THERMOMETER 18 2.9 UNIONS 19 2.10 GASKETS 19 2.11 GAUGES 19 2.12 STRAINERS 19 2.13 VALVES 19 2.14 WATER FLOW MEASURING DEVICES 21 2.15 VENTS 22 2.16 FIN-TUBE RADIATION 22 2.17 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 23 2.18 WATER TREATMENT 23 Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15400- PLUMBING All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. TAGS, NAMEPLATES AND CHARTS Each valve, control, switch and piece of apparatus installed under this contract shall be properly identified. Valves shall be provided with A 1Y2" diameter polished and lacquered brass tag with black indented stamping %2' high, fastened with brass chain. Beaded chain will not be acceptable. Valve tag identification shall conform to valve chart listing. All other equipment shall be provided with a suitable laminated plastic nameplate fastened with appropriate screws or rivets. END OF SECTION PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING PAGE 20 *� SECTION 15400- PLUMBING Install pipe hanger to support all horizontal above-ground piping. Install riser clamps at each floor level. Anchor hangers and clamps securely to building construction. BUILDING SYSTEM TESTS AND CLEANING All piping shall be flushed clean before tests are applied. No portion of the hot water, cold water, waste, sanitary, gas, or compressed air system piping shall be covered, concealed, used or correction or replacement until tests thereof have been satisfactorily completed in the presence of the Architect's authorized representative. This Subcontractor must accommodate his testing operations to the progress of the project as a whole. Correct all defects appearing under test and repeat the test until all parts of the work have withstood them successfully. Screwed piping shall be made tight without caulking. When the work is presented for acceptance, all valve stem PP packing must be new and without leaks, all gauges and thermostats must be in place and reading accurately. This Subcontractor shall furnish all labor, material and services for testing, including plugs, pumps and compressors, shall make and remove all temporary piping connections required RX for the tests, and shall dispose of test water and all wastes after tests. Leave all work in good order, ready for full use. Upon completion of roughing in, all outlets in the soil, waste and vent piping systems shall be temporarily capped and made tight. The piping shall then be filled with water up to the roof or minimum of ten foot (10') head and must remain full without additional pumping, for a period of one (1) hour without showing any leakage of water. Upon completion of roughing in, all outlets in the hot water, hot water recirculating, cold water piping systems inside building shall be temporarily capped and made tight. The piping shall then be filled with water, and shall be made tight under a hydrostatic pressure of 125# per square inch gauge maintained for one (1) hour without additional pumping. All gas piping shall be tested with air at 100 PSI pressure, for a minimum of 24 hours. The system shall be checked for leaks. Defective pipe and fittings disclosed in the test shall be repaired and test repeated, until the test result is satisfactory. Air test shall be with oil-free dry air. STERILIZATION Each unit of domestic water service line and distribution system shall be sterilized with chlorine before acceptance of domestic operation. The amount of chlorine applied shall be such as to provide a dosage of not less than 50 parts per million. The chlorinating material shall be introduced to the water lines and distributing systems in a manner approved by the Water Department. If possible to do so, the lines shall be thoroughly flushed before introduction of the chlorinating material. After a contact period of not less than eight (8) hours, the system shall be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 1.0 parts per million. PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING PAGE 19 no to SECTION 15400- PLUMBING This Subcontractor shall be responsible to furnish and install all sanitary piping, up to 10'-0" outside foundation wall for continuation by General Contractor. on All excavation, backfill, trenching, pipe bending, etc. shall be by the General Contractor. an SITE WATER PIPING INSTALLATION This Subcontractor shall be responsible to furnish and install the new 2" water service up to 10'-0" outside foundation wall, continuation by General Contractor. WATER METER The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install a 1 1/4" compound meter from the Town of Northhampton and pay all necessary fees for the new water service out to 10' from foundation •■ wall. PART 3 - EXECUTION INSTALLATION Insulate all concealed water piping and fittings before closing in. Piping shall be tested before insulation is applied. Install complete hot and cold water systems for all equipment and fixtures under this phase. All connections to water serviced equipment and to hot water heater shall be equipped with shut-off valves and unions. Piping to be pitched to low points to permit positive drainage. Install shutoff valves on each piece of equipment on both hot and cold water. Install all 4" and larger horizontal soil and waste piping at a slope of 1/8" per foot in direction of flow or as noted. 3" and smaller at 1/4" per foot slope. Piping concealed in partitions must be properly aligned to obtain absolute concealment. Piping not properly concealed must be removed and replaced at this Contractor's expense. Cleanouts must be installed in the soil, and waste piping: At all upper terminals of all horizontal soil and waste piping; ** At each change in direction of more than 451; At bottom of each stack. PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING PAGE 18 .. SECTION 15400- PLUMBING Firesafing and smoke seal is required for all pipes, ducts and conduit penetrations through all walls, floors, partitions or leaving or entering any vertical pipe/duct shaftway at all floors and through all walls. This Subcontractor shall provide his own pipe and duct sleeves and do his own firesafing and smoke seal work. Elastomeric intumescent firestopping material as manufactured by 3M Construction Markets. Components to be used as follows: 3M Brand Fire Barrier CP 25N/S No Sag Caulk. 3M Brand Fire Barrier CP 25S/L Self Leveling Caulk. 3M Brand Fire Barrier CP 25WB Caulk. 3M Brand Fire Barrier FS-195 Wrap/Strip. 3M Brand Fire Barrier CS-195 Composite Sheet. 3M Brand Fire Barrier 7900 Series Penetration Sealing Systems. 3M Brand Fire Barrier MPS-2 Moldable Putty Stix. 3M Brand Fire Barrier MPP-4S Moldable Putty Pads. Firestopping material shall be asbestos-free and capable of maintaining an effective barrier against frame, smoke and gases in compliance with the requirements of ASTM E814, UL 1479, and UL Fire Resistance Directory. Materials shall meet and be acceptable for use by all three model building codes, Basic/National Building Code, Uniform Building Code, and Standard Building Code Per NER-243. Materials shall meet the requirements of MFPA 101 - Life Safety Code and NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. _ Materials shall be suitable for the firestopping of penetrations made by steel, glass, plastic and insulated pipe. On insulated pipe, the fire-rating classification must not require removal of the insulation. The rating of the firestops shall be [1] [2] [3] [4] hour(s), but in no case less than the rating of the time-rated floor or wall assembly. ON-SITE SANITARY AND STORM PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING PAGE 17 SECTION 15400- PLUMBING GECR-2521 Single compartment stainless steel sink, 25" x 21" O.D., 5 3/8" deep bowl, 20-gauge, self-rimming, , sound deadened bottom and LK-35 strainer. Ledge shall be 4 hole punched, Left rear corner drain opening. Just or Franke as equals. Delta 400 8" center deck-mounted faucet with swing spout, and aerator. Cambridge Brass or Moen as equals. Provide offset drain assembly, P-trap and angle supply stops. Hold P- trap and water risers back as close to rear wall as possible. Supply with flexible tube risers and extra length slip-joint waste piping, for adjustment of sink height on site. Insulate all hot and cold water, and waste piping with P-trap below counter with "Lav-guard" insulation kit - premolded fittings as manufactured by Truebro. Furnish and install garbage disposal unit as indicated on plans. Mop Receptor Fiat-MSB-2424 24" X 24" X 10" molded-stone mop receptor color selected by Architect, unit shall be furnished with 974 dome strainer and lint basket, 3" drain. E-77-A Vinyl bumperguards. 830-AA Chrome-plated service faucet with vacuum breaker, integral stops, adjustable wall brace, pail hood and 3/4" hood and 3/4" hose thread on spout. Bradley or Acron as equals. Washer Valve *� W-600 Symmons or approved equal. FIRESAFING AND SMOKE SEAL PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING PAGE 16 SECTION 15400- PLUMBING indicated on Architectural drawings. Typical with RE4830 L/R Kohler or Lasco as equals. 1548-SHP Delta temptrol pressure balancing mixing valve with volume control, blade lever handle, service stops, shower head with arm and flange. Tub filler with diverter, chrome finish. For Tub/Shower units. 1524-SHP For Shower Units. Shower/Tub Unit &Valve Assembly (Handicap Accessible Unit) 7911 Clarion, Institutional Tub/Shower Unit, complete with Clarion drop seat, soap dish and all required grab bars, slip resistant bottm. Valve and accessories installed per architectural drawings. S-96-500-X-L-V Symmons temptrol pressure balancing mixing valve with integral volume control, blade lever handle, service stops, super shower head with arm and flange. Wall/hand w/flexible metal hose. Kitchen Sinks LR-2521 Elkay, Stainless steel, single component sink, 21" X 21" O.D., 8" deep bowl, 18-gauge, self-rimming, , sound-deadened bottom and LK-35 strainer. Ledge shall be punched with 4 holes. Just or Franke as equals. Delta 400 8" center deck-mounted faucet with swing spout, and aerator. Cambridge Brass or Moen as equals. Provide P-trap and angle supply stops. Hold P-trap and water risers back as close to rear wall as possible Provide angle supply stops with loose keys, flexible tube risers, 1- �„ 1/2" P-trap with cleanout plugs and all wall escutcheons. Furnish and install garbage disposal unit as indicated on plans. Kitchen Sinks (Handicap Accessible Unit) PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING PAGE 15 SECTION 15400- PLUMBING #44 "Olsonite" closed front seat with cover. Provide supply riser with angle stop. Furnish and install chrome-plated loose key angle supply stops. Lavatory (Handicap Accessible Unit) 0177.034 American Standard, Roma (Countertop) vitreous china, high back, contoured front with front overflow lavatory, drilled for 4" center faucet. Provide concealed arm carrier to suit construction. 2529-HDF Delta 4" centerset, chrome plated faucet with blade handles, pop-up drain assembly Symmons or Moen equal. Furnish and install chrome-plated P-trap with cleanout plug and chrome- .. plated loose key angle supply stops. Insulate all hot and cold water, and waste piping with P-trap below counter with "Lav-guard" insulation kit - premolded fittings as manufactured by Truebro. Lavatories 0186.403 American Standard, Savona (Countertop) vitreous china, high back, contoured front with front overflow lavatory, drilled for 4" center faucet. Provide concealed arm carrier to suit construction. 524 Delta 4" centerset, chrome plated faucet with clear single handle, pop-up drain assembly Symmons or Moen equal. .� Furnish and install chrome-plated P-trap with cleanout plug and chrome- plated loose key angle supply stops. Shower Units & Shower/Tub Unit & Valve Assembly RE4830 L/R Clarion, one piece fiberglass shower module, 47 7/8" W X 32" Dp. X 78" high. Elevated back wall shelve, slip-resistant bottom. Install shower head supply pipe through wall above fiberglass shower wall. Kohler or Lasco as equals. RE7933 LH Clarion, one piece fiberglass tub/shower module, 60" W X 30" Dp. X 74" high. Elevated back wall shelve, slip-resistant bottom. Install shower head supply pipe through wall above fiberglass shower wall. Provide RE7934 RH or RE7933 LH Unit where PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING PAGE 14 go SECTION 15400- PLUMBING Furnish and install pressure gauges and thermometers where indicated on the drawings. Gauges shall be U.S. Gauge Model P-500, Marsh or Ashcroft with 4'/2' dial, or approved equal. Thermometers shall be Ashcroft Model, all with 2'/z' stem and 3" dial, or U.S. Gauge. CLEANOUTS AND FLOOR DRAINS Furnish and install cleanouts and floor drains as manufactured by Zurn, Wade or Jay R. Smith or approved equal. Models based on Zurn. Flashing for all drains by General Contractor. Floor Drain "A" ZN-415, dura-coated cast iron with bottom outlet, combination invertible membrane clamp and adjustable to floor level, nickel- bronze B 4" diameter strainer. Floor Cleanout ZN-1400-2 round nickel bronze, scoriated top, cast-iron body. Adjustable to finish floor. PLUMBING FIXTURES ' A. Furnish and install all fixtures shown on plans or specified herein, providing chrome- plated piping for all exposed piping and trimmings. Each fixture shall have separate key stops for hot and cold water. The following list is based on American Standard plate numbers to establish type and quality of material. Fixtures made by Kohler Company or Eljer Company approved equal. OR Water Closets 2998.012 American Standard, Cadet 16 %" , floor mounted, floor outlet. Flushes on 1.5 gallons. Color by Architect. ear #44 "Olsonite" closed front seat with cover. Provide supply riser with angle stop. Furnish and install chrome-plated loose key angle supply stops. Handicap Water Closets 2898.014 American Standard, Cadet 14" , floor mounted, floor outlet. Flushes on 1.5 gallons. Color by Architect. PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING PAGE 13 SECTION 15400- PLUMBING Globe valves 3 inches and larger shall be Class 125 SWP, flanged end, cast iron body, bronze trim meeting MSS SP85. Hammond IR-116, Stockham G-512, or Nibco F718-B. Ball valves 2 inches and smaller shall be rated 150 SWP, 600 WOG meeting WWV 35C Type II, Class A, Style 3. Valves shall be two piece threaded body, solid or tunnel drilled, large port, chrome ball. Seats and seals shall be teflon. Stem shall be of blowout-proof design with threaded adjustable packing follower. Packing shall be retained under full working pressure with handle or handle nut removed. Hammond 8501, Apollo Series 70, or Nibco T-585. Furnish and install anti-siphon vacuum breakers on hose bibbs where shown on drawings and toilet room, Woodford Model 34-H or approved equal. Vacuum breaker - Furnish and install pressure-type vacuum breaker Watts Model 800 where supply is under constant water pressure. Size as indicated on plan. Furnish and install strainers as manufactured by Watts Regulator Company, Model 777, size and location as indicated on plan. TRAP PRIMER Furnish and install trap primers with distribution units where indicated on the plans, as manufactured by Precision Plumbing Products or approved equal. Based on Precision Plumbing Products. HOSE BIBBS Hose Bibbs shall be 1/2", chrome plated vacuum breaker, key handle, Woodford model 24P or approved equal. "' SHOCK ARRESTOR Furnish and install shock arrestors as manufactured by Zurn or approved equal. Zurn Series Z- 1700. Size as indicated on plans. WALL HYDRANTS Wall Hydrants shall be Woodford model 27, automatic draining, anti- freeze wall hydrant with vacuum breaker. Zurn or Josam as equals. PRESSURE GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS •�. PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING PAGE 12 '"" SECTION 15400- PLUMBING 6. As an option piping insulation concealed in chases can be insulated with flexible, closed-cell elastomeric tubular insulation with a thermal conductivity of 0.270 at 75°F mean temperature and a flame spread rating of 25, smoke developed 50. Insulation shall be Armstrong, Owens-Corning or Halstead Industries. Fittings and valves shall be insulated with equal thickness insulation. Longitudinal seams shall be self-sealing or joined with an adhesive. Butt joints shall be sealed with an adhesive. Electrical tape will not be accepted. 7. Insulate all exposed hot water, cold water and waste piping underneath handicap lavatories and sinks with Handi-Lav-Guard insulation kit as manufactured by Truebro or approved equal. W VALVES Valves shall be installed where shown on the drawings and shall be the type noted. Valves 3 inches and smaller shall have screwed end. Valves larger than 3 inches shall have flanged ends. Gate, globe and ball valves shall be installed with the stems upright and within 15 degrees of vertical whenever possible. Butterfly valves shall be mounted with the stem in the horizontal wherever possible. Gate valves 2'/2 inches and smaller shall be Class 125 SWP, 200 WOG, rising stem, B-62 bronze body, bronze stem, solid wedge, meeting MSS SP80, with handwheel. Hammond IB-640, Stockham B-100, or Nibco T-111. Gate valves 3 inches and larger shall be Class 125 SWP, flanged end, cast iron body, bronze trim, OS&Y valves, meeting MSS SP70. Stem/wedge connections shall be T-head connection. Pinned connections are not acceptable. Hammond IR-1140, Stockham B- 623, or Nibco F617-0. Check valves 2%2 inches and smaller shall be rated Class 125 SWP, 5 degree swing check type, meeting MSS SP80. Body and cap shall be B-62 bronze. Hammond IB-904, Stockham B-319, or Nibco T-4138. Check valves 3 inches and larger shall be Class 125 SWP, flanged end, cast iron body, u!r bronze trim, swing check meeting MSS SP71. Hammond IR-1124, Stockham G-931, or Nibco F918-13. Globe valves 2'/2 inches and smaller shall be Class 125 SWP, valves meeting MSS SP80. Body, bonnet and stem shall be B-62 bronze with handwheel. Hammond IB-440, Stockham B-16, or Nibco T211-B. PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING PAGE 11 SECTION 15400- PLUMBING This Contractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required. Where pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, etc., all sleeves shall be steel pipe. Where uncovered pipes pass through finished ceilings, partitions, walls and floors, heavy chromium escutcheons shall be provided. ACCESS PANELS Furnish access panels for wall or ceiling installation as manufactured by Karp, Milcor, or Zurn, size 10" x 10", or as indicated on plans. Units shall be prime-coated, hinged and lock. *� PIPING INSULATION All Water Piping: A. Piping A. 1. Insulate all new and existing piping including: domestic hot water, cold water; and all fittings. Insulation thickness as indicated below: SERVICE PIPE SIZE THICKNESS Hot Water All" 1 �. Cold water All 1/2" 2. Piping insulation shall be heavy density rigid fiberglass with an "R" value �. of 4.5 per 1" thickness at 75°F mean temperature and flame spread rating of 25, smoke developed 50. Owens-Corning, Knauf or Certainteed. Chilled water shall be Foamglas. Condensate shall be flexible unicellular. 3. Fittings and valves shall be insulated with equal thickness flexible fiberglass of pre-formed rigid fiberglass. 4. Insulation shall be covered with a Kraft reinforced ASJ jacket having longitudinal stapled seams. Self sealing butt strips shall be installed on circumferential joints and shall be stapled. UL 25/35 rating. 5. Fittings and valves shall be covered with pre-formed fitting covers of high- impact, UV-resistant poly-vinyl chloride vapor retarding jackets. Covers shall be installed with an staples. Equal by Zeston. w Will PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING PAGE 10 am SECTION 15400- PLUMBING All new horizontal water piping mains and branch runouts shall be supported with over-sized carbon steel hangers, the hangers shall be installed on the outside of pipe insulation with 18 gauge protection saddle between pipe insulation and hanger: PIPE SIZE ROD SIZE MAX. SPACING HANGERS '/2' - 11/4' 3/8 inch 5 feet Fig. 269-Ring. 1'/2 or larger '/2 inch 10 feet Fig. 65-Clevis All new horizontal gas piping shall be supported with carbon steel Clevis Hanger Figure 260 as follows: PIPE SIZE ROD SIZE MAX. SPACING Up to 3 inch '/2 inch 5 feet 4 inch 5/8 inch 5 feet 6 to 8 inch 3/4 inch 5 feet All vertical piping shall be supported off walls or building structure with suitable clamps and anchor rods. PIPE IDENTIFICATION MARKERS Furnish and install pipe identification markers to comply with OSHA Standards including direction of flow arrows, as manufactured by Seton or approved equal. Install identification markers on the following systems: +w "Cold Water". "Domestic Hot Water" "Low Pressure Gas". ±w SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING !" PAGE 9 SECTION 15400- PLUMBING PART 2 - PRODUCTS SOIL. WASTE VENT PIPING All below floor piping shall be service weight cast iron pipe and fittings with lead and oakum or resilient gasket joints. ABS piping is acceptable where allowed by Code. All above-floor soil, waste 2" and larger shall be service weight cast iron, joints shall be made up with lead and oakum, or no-hub pipe with stainless steel couplings. ABS piping is acceptable where allowed by Code. Above-floor soil, vent and waste 2" and smaller shall be type "M" copper pipe and fittings or DWV pipe and fittings. All above floor slab vent piping 2" and larger shall be PVC, Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and fittings Schedule 40, or ABS. Piping and a fittings shall meet all requirements of ASTM, CS and/or NSF Standards. WATER PIPING (WITHIN BUILDING) All hot, cold piping above floor slab shall be hard copper, type "L" seamless drawn tubing of 99.9% copper assembled with sweated fittings. All piping shall be supported in an approved manner and shall be graded to drain back to drainoff cocks,joints made up with 95/5 silver solder. All below ground water piping, 2" and smaller, including trap primer discharge piping, shall be type "K" soft-rolled copper tubing and fittings. GAS PIPING Gas piping from gas meters to all gas equipment shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe and fittings. There shall be no flexible connections used to make final connection. - Gas piping 2%' and larger shall have welded joints and fittings. Valves shall have threaded joints. - Gas piping 2" and smaller shall be threaded pipe and fittings. - Provide bronze gas cocks on piping 2" and smaller and cast iron lubricated plug valves on piping 2%2' and larger. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING PAGE 8 "'" SECTION 15400- PLUMBING Welding A. All welding shall be performed by certified welders. B. Protect all adjoining work with welding operations by erecting protection barriers or use of welding blankets. C. Maintain a fire watch during and after all welding operations. wir PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING ! " PAGE 7 SECTION 15400- PLUMBING The Plumbing Subcontractor shall instruct Owner's representative in the operation of all Plumbing apparatus and systems. TEMPORARY FACILITIES This Contractor shall provide connections for water for construction use. COOPERATION WITH OTHERS This Contractor shall cooperate to the fullest extent with all other trades so as best to expedite the entire project. ., This Contractor shall furnish all information pertaining to his materials as to sizes, locations, means of support, etcetera, to all other trades requiring such information. COORDINATION OF TRADES All trades are required to attend a minimum of three coordination meetings. Refer to Specifications Section 01040 PROJECT COORDINATION. Overall coordination drawings are not required, however coordination drawings and sketches to resolve conflicts shall be required for some areas. Areas requiring coordination drawings shall be determined during the coordination meetings. .. CUTTING AND PATCHING Cutting and patching in general shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. The Subcontractor is expected to inform the General Contractor sufficiently in advance to allow incorporation of insets and the like and to otherwise prevent any appreciable cutting and patching. Where such is caused by lack of sufficient notice on the part of the Subcontractor, to the General Contractor, a back-charge will be in order from the General Contractor to the Subcontractor for such cutting and patching. GUARANTEE WARRANTY The Plumbing Subcontractor shall and hereby does warrant that all work executed and all equipment furnished under this section shall be free from defects of workmanship and materials for a period of one year from date of final acceptance of this work. The Plumbing Subcontractor further agrees that he will, at his own expense, repair and replace all such defective work, and all other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the term of the Guarantee Warranty. PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING PAGE 6 SECTION 15400- PLUMBING Trap Primer No fabrication, ordering, delivery to the site or other steps shall be taken with respect to those items requiring shop drawing or manufacturer's information for review, all to the Architect, until he returns such to the submittor carrying either the notation "Approved" or "Approved as Corrected" as indicated by the Architect or his Engineer. An "Approved as Corrected" notation means that t changes as indicated must be incorporated or the qualifying acceptance will be considered void. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Electrical work, including furnishing and installation of starters, will be the responsibility of the Division 16000 Contractor, unless specifically required otherwise by this specification. PRODUCT DELIVERY The Plumbing Subcontractor shall provide for the delivery of all his materials to the building site when required, so as to carry out his work efficiently and to avoid delaying his work and that of other trades. TOOLS AND SCAFFOLDING All necessary tools, machinery, scaffolding and transportation for completion of this contract shall be provided by the Plumbing Subcontractor. WASTE MATERIAL All rubbish created by the Plumbing Subcontractor shall be removed by the Plumbing Subcontractor. PROTECTION OF WORK All pipes left open during the progress of the work shall be capped or plugged at all times. All fixtures shall be protected by boarding over or by the application of a standard protective paste covering which is non-injurious to the fixtures. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS At the time of final acceptance, the Plumbing Subcontractor shall furnish three (3) sets of operating instructions for all equipment for delivery to the Owner. PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING '" PAGE 5 SECTION 15400- PLUMBING mentioned of implied in either is to be considered as specified by both. Should the character of the work herein contemplated or any matter pertaining thereto be not sufficiently explained in the specifications or drawings, the Plumbing Subcontractor may apply to the Architect/Engineer for further information and shall conform to such when given as it may be consistent with the original intent. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to make any reasonable changes in location prior to installation, at no expense to the Owner. All lines are diagrammatic and exact locations are subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer. SITE VISITATION Before submitting his bid, the Plumbing Subcontractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the conditions affecting his work, since he will be held responsible for any assumption he may make in regard thereto. , » SUBMITTALS Submit shop and erection drawings and descriptive and supportive literature for all work in accordance with the General Conditions. Approval by the Architect/Engineer must be obtained prior to delivery of materials to the site. Within thirty (30) days of award of contract, the Plumbing Sub-contractor shall submit for the Architect/Engineer's approval, six (6) copies of the manufacturer's shop drawings, detail prints, and data sheets for the following items: Floor Drains Fixtures and Trims Valves Cleanouts Insulation Wall Hydrants Backflow Preventer Vacuum Breaker Shock Arrestors Hose Bibb Vacuum Breaker Water Heaters Hose bibbs Balance Valves Gas Pressure Regulators Pressure Gauges Pressure Reducing Valve Pipe Supports and Hangers Strainers PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING PAGE 4 '"" SECTION 15400- PLUMBING Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) American Water Works Association (AWWA) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) American Gas Association (AGA) e�w REFERENCE TO MATERIALS BY NAME Specific reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form, or type of construction, et cetera, by name, make, or catalog number shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality, and shall not be construed as limiting the competition, and the Contractor in such cases may, at his option, use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which, in the judgement of the Architect/Engineer, is equal to that named, and further provided approval of any manufacturer's product not specifically mentioned is obtained prior to the close of the interpretations period. MATERIAL AND CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY All materials used in the contract shall be new and first-class in every respect, without defects, and designed to function properly in that portion of the work for which they are intended. This Contractor shall employ only competent and experienced workmen at a regular working schedule in harmony with other tradesmen on the job. He shall also exercise care and supervision of his employees in regard to the proper and expeditious laying out of his work. LAYOUT OF WORK The arrangement of all piping indicated on the drawings is diagrammatic only, and indicates the minimum requirements of this work. Conditions at the building shall determine the actual arrangements of runs, bends, offsets, etcetera. This Contractor shall layout all work and be responsible for the accuracy of same. Conditions at the building shall be the determining factor for all measurements. All overhead piping shall be laid out so as to obtain maximum headroom. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS The Plumbing Subcontractor shall refer to the drawings for a full comprehension of the work to be done and for conditions affecting the location and placement of his equipment and materials. These drawings are intended to be supplementary to the specifications, and any work indicated, PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING '' PAGE 3 SECTION 15400- PLUMBING Fire Safe and Smoke Seal .R WORK BY OTHERS The following work in conjunction with the work done under this section of the specifications shall be done under sections of the specifications by the Contractor so designated. This work shall be done at no expense to the Plumbing Subcontractor. All cutting, patching, preparation and painting of finish work will be done by the General Contractor. Flashing of all roof penetrations. Access panels installed by General Contractor in sizes and locations as shown on the plumbing drawings or as required. Power wiring, connections, motor starters and disconnects. Water heater vent piping by HVAC Subcontractor. PERMITS AND FEES The Plumbing Subcontractor shall obtain all necessary permits and approval of the work by the local authorities. He shall obtain all other permits, licenses or certificates of approval, arrange for all inspections and pay all fees and charges in connection with all plumbing, inside and outside of building. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with all codes and standards applying to the work of this contract. The installation shall conform in all respects to the latest regulation of the National Building Code, State and Local Plumbing Code and to any City, Municipal or State regulations covering such work. Any material or operation specified by reference to the published specifications or standards of any of the following agencies shall be complied with: American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Institute of Boiler Rating (IBR) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) National Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) United States of America Standards Institute (USAS) PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING PAGE 2 SECTION 15400- PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS The general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Section, apply to this section. PROJECT DESCRIPTION Work of this Section: The work referred to under this Section includes all labor, materials and equipment and transportation for the satisfactory installation and completion of all work referred to herein and/or as may be shown on the contract drawings and not specifically mentioned in this Section. The following schedule is part, but not necessarily all-inclusive, of the items in this section of the contract. WORK INCLUDED Furnish and install complete hot and cold system for domestic use in building, as indicated on plans. Furnish and install complete soil, waste, and vent systems for building and fixtures. Furnish and install water service entrance for building as indicated on the plans, including domestic water meter. Furnish and install gas-fired water heaters. Furnish and install fixtures and trim. Furnish access panels, installation by General Contractor. ' Insulating all cold water, hot water piping. Insulating water and waste piping under handicap lavatories and kitchen sinks. Furnish and install gas piping inside building to gas-fired equipment. Furnish and install garbage disposals in each unit as indicated on plans. Furnish and install cold water make-up piping for boilers to all and make all final connections. Furnish and Install complete sump pump system in Basement Area as indicated on plan. t PLUMBING 15400 MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING !?�"� PAGE 1 SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP A. All work shall be installed in a first class fashion consistent with the best current trade practices. All materials shall be installed plumb and or level with the exception of piping which shall be graded to points of drainage. All piping shall be concealed in finished areas. B. All sprinklers shall be protected from paint and joint compound. The Sprinkler Contractor shall advise the Painting and Finishing Contractors of this. All sprinklers that have been painted or damaged shall be replaced at no additional cost to the owner. 3.02 TESTS A. Flush the system and test all work in the presence of the Architect and/or Engineer and as required by NFPA. All piping shall be hydrostatically tested. Exterior piping shall be hydrostatically tested at 200 psi for a period of two hours. END OF SECTION 15300 Page 7 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION f. Adjustable drop nipple: Black steel, 64mm to 127mm, consisting of body, nipple, retaining ring, O-ring, and rollers. UL and FM approved, 175 psi SWP. g. Hooking collar assembly: May be optionally used to connect sprinkler or drop nipples to sprinkler pipe. Housing shall be malleable iron or ductile iron. UL or FM approved, 175 psi SWP. h. Sections of branch lines, cross-mains, feed mains, or risers may be welded subject to limitations outlined in NFPA-13. i. Schedule 40 CPVC socket weld fittings ASTM F438 2.02 TAMPER SWITCHES A. Furnish and install supervisory switches that are UL and FM approved. Tamper switches shall be provided on all normally open control valves. 2.03 PRESSURE SWITCHES A. Furnish and install pressure gauges in locations indicated and those required by NFPA No.13. The pressure gauges shall be at least 88 mm, bronze bourdon tube type, with steel case and retard. Each gauge shall be provided with a 6mm" soft seated globe valve upstream of the gauge. There shall be provisions for draining between the gauge and the valve. 2.04 SPRINKLER HEADS A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all new sprinkler heads. The heads shall be quick response residential type. 2.06 SPRINKLER CABINET A. Complete with sprinklers and special wrenches in accordance with NFPA No. 13. 2.07 BACKFLFOW PREVENTOR A. Furnish and install backflow prevention as required by 248 CMR, The .. Massachusetts Plumbing Code and local requirements. Provide rebuild kits for each backflow preventer and permitting as required by the local authority. Page 6 Millbank Affordable Housing .� SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION PART 2 —PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING A. Interior 1. Pipe: a. Black steel, Schedule 40, ASTM A53, or A795; Schedule 10, ASTM A795, CPVC ASTM F442 2. Joints: a. Schedule 40, black steel, pipe: Screwed joints, ANSI B2.1, welded joints, AWS D10.9, mechanical grooved couplings, joined by a UL or FM approved combination of bolted couplings, gaskets, and grooves. Grooves may b rolled or cut and be dimensionally compatible with the coupling. b. Schedule 10, black steel pipe: Welded joints, AWS D10.9, and be UL and FM approved mechanical couplings. Couplings may be of the bolted rolled grooved type. Grooves shall be rolled only. C. CPVC, solvent welded 3. Fittings: a. Cast iron screwed: ANSI 1316.4. b. C.I. flanged: ANSI B 16.1. C. Malleable iron screwed: ANSI B 16.3. d. Steel weld fitting: ANSI B16.5, ANSI B16.9, ANSI B 16.11, ASNI B 16.25, and ASTM A234. e. Grooved couplings and mechanical fitting; UL and FM listed, malleable iron, 500 psi working pressure; ASTM A47. Coupling gaskets shall be butyl rubber or EPDM Compound. Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION B. Elastomeric intumescent firestopping material as manufactured by 3M , Construction Markets, Dow-Corning, or approved equal. C. Firestopping material shall be asbestos-free and capable of maintaining an F effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with the requirements of ASTM E814, UL 1479, and UL Fire Resistance Directory. E. Materials shall meet and be acceptable for use by BOCA, Massachusetts state code and all other applicable codes. Assemblies shall be UL listed. 1.09 RUBBISH REMOVAL A. This Contractor shall, at the conclusion of each day's work, clean up and stockpile on the site, at location designated by the Owner, all rubbish, debris and trash, which may have accumulated during the day as a result +�+ of work of this Contract and of his presence on the job. The Contractor will be responsible to remove stockpiled rubbish. 1.10 SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Hydraulic Calculations ** 1. Calculations shall be prepared with a summary sheet, detailed work sheet and a hydraulic graph. Calculations shall conform with the procedures of NFPA 13R. The contractor shall perform a flow test to be used as a basis of design. Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing ., SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION 1.03 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall keep careful record of any and all changes made during the progress of the installation, and at the conclusion thereof shall prepare a set of record reproducible drawings indicating the "as-built" manner of installation of all fire protection work. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings for the following equipment. No work shall proceed without approval of these submittals, six copies of each submittal is required. Refer to Section 01300 for additional submittal requirements. 1. Pipe and fitting material list 2. Sprinkler heads 3. Valves 4. Tamper switches 5. Hangers and supports 6. Test connections 7. Alarm Check Valve including all trim B. Submit fire protection drawings and hydraulic calculations to the Architect/Engineer only after they have been approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. C. Where modifications are required to obtain approvals, they shall be provided without extra cost to the Owner. 1.05 COORDINATION OF TRADES A. Coordinate the work of different trades so that: 1. Interferences between mechanical, electrical, architectural, and structural work, including existing services, will be avoided. 1.08 FIRE SAFING AND SMOKE SEAL A. Firesafing and smoke seal is required for all pipe penetrations through all walls, floors, partitions or leaving or entering any vertical pipe/duct shaftway at all floors and through all walls. This Subcontractor shall provide his own pipe sleeves and do his own firesafing and smoke seal work. Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION limitations of space and capacity shown or specified. Rebuilt materials and equipment will not be acceptable. Responsibility for conflicts due to space limitations is not relieved by approval of a substitution. If revision of wiring, piping or arrangement of other equipment is required because of a substitution, such revisions shall be accomplished at no change in contract cost. E. The work under this Section shall be performed only by a fire protection firm licensed by jurisdictional authority, and whose workmen are experienced and regularly engaged in the installation of fire protection systems. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. This Section includes a wet pipe sprinkler system complete, including piping, equipment and accessories designed in accordance with NFPA 13R. B. All equipment, materials and accessories shall be Factory Mutual .� approved and shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., and bear the UL label. C. Any previously installed piping, equipment or structures that are damaged or disturbed in any way during construction shall be repaired immediately in the manner prescribed by the Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. D. If it is determined before, during, or after the work is completed that exiting piping or construction must be relocated or changed due to conflicts. This should be called to the immediate attention of the Architect for his decision. E. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating interferences with other crafts and with structural space limitations for installation of all fire protection equipment and piping. F. Clean the inside of all pipes of all dirt, dust and other foreign material. G. Protect installation from damage and foreign objects with plugs, caps and covers until accepted. Similarly, close open ends of pipe at the end of each day's work. H. Install all items, which require periodic maintenance in an accessible location. Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing ,, SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 —GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Furnish design build services for a complete and operable fire protection system in accordance with NFPA 13R for three buildings as depicted on the Architectural Drawings. The General Conditions, supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to the work of this Section. B. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to perform the work of this section. The work included, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Sprinkler heads 2. Piping and fittings 3. Hangers and supports 4. Sprinkler cabinet 5. Backflow preventor 6. Alarm Check Valve including all trim 7. Valves 8. Tamper Switches and Pressure Switches 9. System Identification 10. Flushing and Testing 11. Hydraulic calculations and drawings. C. Related Work of Other Sections: 1. Cutting and Patching 2. Painting, except for factory finished, is specified in DIVISION 9— FINISHES. 3. Electrical work is specified in DIVISION 16—ELECTRICAL WORK. All items of electrical equipment furnished under this section shall be wired by the Electrical Contractor. D. All equipment and materials shall be the latest and approved design, new, un-deteriorated, and the first quality standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such material and equipment. The manufacturers mentioned in the specifications are intended to indicate the quality desired. Any substitutions shall be as approved by the Architect as herein provided by the "or equal" clause in addition to meeting the Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing 12491 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS required to prevent deflection in headrail. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds and for operating glazed opening's operation hardware, if any. B. Head Mounted: Install headrail on underside face of opening head. + " 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Replace damaged blinds that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 12491 OR Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing 12491 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS A. Product Standard and Description: Comply with AWCMA Document 1029, unless otherwise indicated, for each horizontal louver blind designed to be self-leveling and consisting of louver slats, rails, ladders, tapes, lifting and tilting mechanisms, cord, cord ** lock, tilt control, and installation hardware. B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. ., 1. Lifting and Tilting Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts. C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F: 1. Blind Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than head-to-sill dimension of opening in which each blind is .� installed. 2. Blind Units Installed Outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between blinds of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings. D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for supporting headrail, valance, and operating hardware, and for hardware position and blind mounting method indicated. E. Installation Fasteners: Not fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use. ,■, F. Component Color: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and exposed-to-view metal and plastic matching or coordinating with slat color, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND INSTALLATION A. Install blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so exterior louver edges in any position are not closer than 1 inch to interior face of glass. Install intermediate support as Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing �, 12491 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, PVC LOUVER SLATS + A. Louver Slats: Lead-free, UV-stabilized, integrally colored, opaque, permanently flexible, extruded PVC that will not crack or yellow, antistatic, dust-repellent treated; with crowned profile. 1. Nominal Slat Width: 1 inch for miniblinds with slat spacing not less than every 44 mm for 6.9 slats or more per foot. 2. Slat Finish: Two colors as indicated, one per side of slat. B. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing operating mechanisms on three sides and ends; capacity for one blind per headrail, unless otherwise indicated . C. Tilt Control: Consisting of enclosed worm gear mechanism and linkage rod, for the following operation. 1. Tilt Operation: Manual with clear plastic wand. 2. Length of Tilt Control: Full length of blind . 3. Tilt: Full. D. Lift Operation: Manual, cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind at any position in ascending or descending travel. ` E. Tilt-Control and Cord-Lock Position: Right side and left side of headrail, respectively , unless otherwise indicated. F. Ladders: Manufacturer's standard-width cloth tapes. Evenly spaced to prevent long- term louver sag. 1. Tape Color, Texture, and Pattern: Color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. a G. Valance: Manufacturer's standard. 1. Finish Color Characteristics: Match color, texture, pattern, and gloss of louver slats H. Mounting: Head and/or End mounting permitting easy removal and replacement without damaging blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes; with spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated. 1. Provide intermediate support brackets if end support spacing exceeds spacing recommended by manufacturer for weight and size of blind. 0 I. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard, as indicated. 2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS FABRICATION Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing 12491 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 1. Methods for maintaining horizontal louver blinds and finishes. 2. Precautions about cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. �. 3. Operating hardware. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ,w A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide horizontal louver blinds with the fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701. C. Corded Window Covering Product Standard: Provide horizontal louver blinds complying with WCMA A 100.1. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire- test-response characteristics, lead-free designation, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and dirty finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Horizontal Louver Blinds: Before installation begins, for each size, color, texture, pattern, and gloss indicated, full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed. ■* Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing .� 12491 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS SECTION 12491 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of venetian blinds and accessories: 1. Miniblinds with PVC louver slats. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting horizontal louver blinds and accessories. 2. Division 8 Sections for windows, with horizontal louver blinds mounted on window frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Miniblind: Venetian blind with nominal 1-inch- wide louver slat. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of horizontal louver blinds. Include elevations, sections, details, and dimensions not shown in Product Data. Show installation details, mountings, attachments to other Work, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining work. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, prepared on Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. 1. Louver Slat: Not less than 12 inches long. 2. Tapes: Full width, not less than 6 inches long. 3. Horizontal Louver Blind: Full-size unit, not less than 16 inches wide by 24 inches long. D. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing 12356 KITCHEN CASEWORK B. Install casework without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are aligned. Complete installation of hardware and accessories as indicated. C. Install casework and countertop level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet. D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing. 1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches o.c., with toggle bolts through metal backing behind gypsum board. " E. Fasten plastic-laminate countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Form seams using splines to align adjacent surfaces, and secure with glue and concealed clamping devices designed for this purpose. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ! A. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. B. Clean casework on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 12356 Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing 12356 KITCHEN CASEWORK 2. Grade for Backer Sheet: BKL. B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. C. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded. 40 2.5 CASEWORK HARDWARE A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, material, size, and finish as selected from manufacturer's standard choices. B. Hinges: Concealed European-style hinges. C. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are closed; with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers; and complying .o with BHMA A156.9, Type B05091. 2.6 CABINET CONSTRUCTION ■' A. Face Style: Overlay; door and drawer faces cover cabinet body members or face frames. B. Door and Drawer Fronts: 1/2-inch- thick, oak face. C. Exposed Cabinet Ends: oak-faced plywood. D. Factory Finishing: To greatest extent possible, finish casework at factory. Defer only final touchup until after installation. 2.7 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Plastic-Laminate Substrate: Particleboard not less than 3/4 inch thick. 1. For countertops at sinks and lavatories, use phenolic-resin particleboard or WA exterior-grade plywood. 2. Build up countertop thickness to 1-1/2 inches at front, back, and ends with additional layers of particleboard laminated to top. B. Paper Backing: Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION .. A. Install casework with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match casework face. Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing 12356 KITCHEN CASEWORK 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of blocking and reinforcement in partitions for support of kitchen casework. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cabinets: 2. Plastic Laminate for Countertops: a. Formica Corp. w B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cabinets that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. TriPac; Model 1XL. 2. Truwood Cabinets. 2.2 COLORS, TEXTURES, AND PATTERNS A. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for these characteristics. 2.3 CABINET MATERIALS to A. Exposed Materials: Comply with the following: 1. Oak B. Semiexposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Oak veneer plywood. C. Concealed Materials: Comply with the following: 1. Solid Wood or Plywood: Any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or utility. Hardwood and softwood lumber kiln dried to 7 and 10 percent moisture content, respectively. 2.4 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3. 1. Grade: HGP. Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing 12356 KITCHEN CASEWORK C. Samples for Verification: For the following materials; in sets showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected: 00 1. Plastic laminate for countertops, 8 by 10 inches. 2. One unit of each type of exposed hardware. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Cabinets: Obtain cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Designations: Drawings indicate size, configurations, and finish material of casework by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' casework of similar sizes, similar door and drawer configurations, same finish material, and complying with the Specifications may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." C. Quality Standards: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the following standards: 1. Cabinets: KCMA A161.1. a. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit and showing compliance with the above standard. 2. Plastic-Laminate Countertops: KCMA A161.2. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install kitchen casework until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the �* construction period. B. Established Dimensions: Where kitchen casework is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where casework is to fit. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Provide fillers and scribes to allow for trimming and fitting. C. Field Measurements: Where kitchen casework is indicated to fit to existing construction, verify dimensions of existing construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Provide fillers and scribes if necessary. D. Field Measurements for Countertops: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing ,�, 12356 KITCHEN CASEWORK SECTION 12356 - KITCHEN CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Oak kitchen cabinets. 2. Oak vanity cabinets. 3. Plastic-laminate countertops. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 11 Section "Residential Appliances" for appliances mounted in kitchen casework. 2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for sink units mounted in countertops. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including visible surfaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors. B. Semiexposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces behind opaque doors or drawer fronts, including interior faces of doors and interiors and sides of drawers. Bottoms of wall cabinets are defined as "semiexposed." C. Concealed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces not usually visible after installation, including sleepers, web frames, dust panels, bottoms of drawers, and ends of cabinets installed directly against and completely concealed by walls or other cabinets. Tops of wall cabinets and utility cabinets are defined as "concealed." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Cabinets. 2. Plastic-laminate countertops. 3. Cabinet hardware. B. Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge and backsplash profiles, cutouts for plumbing fixtures, and methods of joining countertops. Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing ` 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. GE; JV347X with filter kit at apartments, ducted at townhouses. E. Top-Mount Refrigerator TMR-1: Where this designation is indicated, provide refrigerator/freezers complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. GE; TBX18JAB. b. TMR-2; GE side-by-side, TFX20JAB (at H/C unit only). F. Clothes Washer/Dryer: Where this designation is indicated, provide unitized washer/dryer complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. Clothes washer: GE; WPXH214A. All washers to have heavy duty braided hoses. b. Clothes dryer: GE; DPXH46EA. Provide with stacking kit at common laundry rooms, side-by-side at H/C unit. G. Air Conditioner Sleeve — 1,: Two wall cases/sleeve, GE RAB48 — includes wall case, exterior grille, steel closure panel and two layers of insulation. END OF SECTION 11451 Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing .w 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate ,. equipment. D. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical requirements. wa 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed. ••� C. Remove packing material from residential appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation. 3.4 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCE SCHEDULE A. Electric Range ER-1: Where this designation is indicated, provide electric ranges .. complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. GE; JBP26WB. B. Electric Cooktop EC-1: Where this designation is indicated, provide electric cooktops complying with the following: .. 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. GE; JP326WV. C. Electric Wall Oven EWO-1: Where this designation is indicated, provide electric wall ovens complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: a. GE; JRP15WW. D. Exhaust Hood EH-1: Where this designation is indicated, provide exhaust hoods complying with the following: .� Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing ,� 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, appliances that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the Residential Appliance Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.2 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES A. Electric Range: Freestanding electric range with four-burner cooktop and oven with broiler, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. B. Electric Cooktop: Built-in, countertop-mounted, electric cooktop with four burner elements, listed by UL and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. C. Electric Wall Oven: Built-in, electric wall oven with broiler unit, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. " D. Exhaust Hood: Wall-mounted, undercabinet exhaust hood, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. E. Top-Mount Refrigerator/Freezer: Freestanding, two-door refrigerator with top-mounted freezer, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. F. Clothes Washer: Freestanding, top-loading, automatic clothes washer, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. G. Electric Clothes Dryer: Freestanding, front-loading, electric clothes dryer, listed by UL, and complying with requirements specified in the Residential Appliance Schedule. 1. Color: Match clothes washer. 2.3 FINISHES A. Porcelain-Enamel Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied porcelain- enamel finish over cleaned and pretreated steel sheet. If no color is indicated, provide white. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range a. Where residential appliances by more than one manufacturer are installed in the same space, provide units with color matching largest equipment item. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing, mechanical, and electrical services, with Installer present, to verify actual locations of services before residential appliance installation. Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing on 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES + * 1. Provide products from the same manufacturer for each type of appliance required. 2. To the greatest extent possible, provide appliances by a single manufacturer for entire Project. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of residential appliances and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers' appliances with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." D. Electrical Appliances: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards. F. AHAM Standards: Provide appliances that comply with the following AHAM standards: 1. Refrigerators and Freezers: Total volume and shelf area ratings certified "" according to ANSI/ARAM HRF-1. G. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy-cost in analysis (estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the Federal Trade Commission. am 1.5 DELIVERY A. Deliver appliances only after utility rough-in is complete and construction in the spaces to receive appliances is substantially complete and ready for installation. 1.6 WARRANTIES .0 A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranties: Written warranties, executed by manufacturer of each appliance specified agreeing to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 40 1. Electric Range: Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on surface-burner elements. 2. Refrigerator/Freezer: Five-year limited warranty on the sealed refrigeration system. 3. Clothes Washer: 10-year limited warranty for in-home service on the inner wash basket and outer tub, and five-year limited warranty for in-home service on the balance suspension system and drive transmission. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Page 2 Milibank Affordable Housing ,�„ 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES SECTION 11451 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary► Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Y A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cooking equipment, including ranges, cooktops, and wall ovens and microwave ovens. ` 2. Range hoods. 3. Refrigerator/freezers. 4. Clothes washers and dryers. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 11 Section "Unit Kitchens" for small, compact kitchen units. 2. Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Piping" for plumbing connections to residential appliances. 3. Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Piping" for drainage plumbing connections to residential appliances. so 4. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for kitchen sinks, waste disposers, and instant hot-water dispensers. 5. Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for services and connections to residential appliances. C. Alternates: Refer to Division 1 Section "Alternates" for description of Work in this Section affected by alternates. £ 1.3 SUBMITTALS "" A. Product Data: For each appliance type required indicating compliance with requirements. Include complete operating and maintenance instructions for each appliance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the residential appliance manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of appliances required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances through one source from a single manufacturer. Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES C. Mirror Unit TBA-1: Where this designation is indicated, provide mirror unit complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: 2. Stainless-Steel, Channel-Framed Mirror: Fabricate frame from stainless-steel channels in manufacturer's standard satin or bright finish with square corners mitered to hairline joints and mechanically interlocked. 3. Recessed Mirror/Medicine Cabinet: Nutone 267B reversible, 24 inches high, enameled steel cabinet, with stainless steel frame mirrored door. D. Shower Curtain Rod TBA-1: Where this designation is indicated, provide stainless steel shower curtain rod with 3-inch stainless-steel flanges designed for exposed fasteners, in length required for shower opening indicated, and complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: 2. Normal-Duty Rod: 1-inch OD; fabricated from nominal 0.0375-inch- thick stainless steel. • E. Robe Hook TBA-1: Where this designation is indicated, provide robe hook complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: 2. Double-Prong Unit: Stainless-steel, double-prong robe hook with rectangular wall bracket and backplate for concealed mounting. " F. Towel Holder TBA-1: Where this designation is indicated, provide towel holder complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: 2. Towel Bar: 24-inch- long, stainless-steel, copy/match grab bar specifications. G. Mop and Broom Holder TBA-1: Where this designation is indicated, provide mop and broom holder complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: 2. Mop and Broom Holder with Utility Shelf: 36-inch- long unit fabricated of minimum nominal 0.05-inch thick stainless steel with shelf; support brackets for wall mounting; three hooks for wiping rags; four spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam-type, mop/broom holders mounted on front of shelf; and approximately 1/4-inch- diameter, stainless-steel rod suspended beneath shelf for drying rags. '? END OF SECTION 10801 Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES .� G. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 IV, when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. sm 3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A. Toilet Tissue Dispenser TBA-1: Where this designation is indicated, provide toilet tissue dispenser complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: 2. Type: Single-roll dispenser . 3. Mounting: Surface mounted with concealed anchorage . 4. Material: Chrome-plated zinc alloy (zamac) or steel. 5. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with mfr's standard spindle 6. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch- diameter-core tissue rolls . B. Grab Bar TBA-1: Where this designation is indicated, provide stainless-steel grab bar complying with the following: 1. Products: Available products include the following: .. 2. Stainless-Steel Nominal Thickness: Minimum 0.05 inch. 3. Mounting: Concealed with manufacturer's standard flanges and anchors. 4. Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard slip-resistant texture. 5. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches for heavy-duty applications. Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES E. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), nickel plus chromium electrodeposited on base metal. F. Baked-Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss-white, baked-acrylic-enamel coating. G. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-411. H. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. I. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed. 2.3 FABRICATION - A. General: One, maximum 1-1/2-inch- diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number. B. General: Names or labels are not permitted on exposed faces of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface of each accessory, provide W printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number. C. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous stainless-steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible. D. Recessed Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all-welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, stainless-steel hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed. E. Framed Glass-Mirror Units: Fabricate frames for glass-mirror units to accommodate glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that permits rigid, tamper-resistant glass installation and prevents moisture accumulation. 1. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch and full mirror size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material. F. Mirror-Unit Hangers: Provide mirror-unit mounting system that permits rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, as follows: 1. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. 2. Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove. Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing mow 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances . required for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.6 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Manufacturer's Mirror Warranty: Written warranty, executed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within minimum warranty period indicated. .� 1. Minimum Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering accessories that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Toilet and Bath Accessories: a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be *�^ incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products; ASTM B 16, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; ASTM B 30, castings. C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold rolled, commercial quality, 0.0359-inch minimum nominal thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60. �. Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: r 1. Toilet and bath accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions, profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of accessory specified. B. Samples: For each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements. ' 1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work. C. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates, substrate , r preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices. D. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by Architect. B. Product Options: Accessory requirements, including those for materials, finishes, * dimensions, capacities, and performance, are established by specific products indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule. 1. Products of other manufacturers with equal characteristics, as judged solely by Architect, may be provided. 2. Other manufacturers' products with equal characteristics may be considered. See Division 1 Section "Substitutions." 3. Do not modify aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. OF Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing so 10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES E. Replace postal specialties that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain postal specialties. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 10550 Page 6 Millbank Affordable Housing 10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with r requirements for installation tolerances, roughing-in openings, clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of work. IP 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. B. Examine walls for suitable conditions where units will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1p 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install postal specialties level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions and roughing-in drawings. 1. Metal Protection: Where aluminum and copper alloys will contact grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 2. Final acceptance depends on compliance with USPS requirements. B. Horizontal Apartment Mailboxes: Install horizontal apartment mailboxes with center of tenant-door lock cylinder not more than 67 inches above finished floor and bottom of lowest compartment not less than 28 inches above finished floor. 1. Arrange compartments in groups, with not more than 35 and not less than 4 compartments operated by 1 master lock. 2. Install removable-core door lock cylinders. IF 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as postal specialties are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of postal specialty installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as 4„ recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace postal specialties that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by postal specialty manufacturer. Page 5 Miilbank Affordable Housing am 10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES ... 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide accessories fabricated by same .� manufacturer as apartment mailboxes. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Preassemble postal specialties in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Form postal specialties to required shapes and sizes, with true lines and angles, square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges and corners free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch. B. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. C. Drill or punch holes required for fasteners and remove burrs. Use security fasteners where fasteners are exposed. If used, seal external rivets before finishing. D. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded joints of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. E. Fabricate doors of postal specialties to preclude binding, warping, or misalignment. F. Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by .. painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish postal specialties after assembly. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Unless otherwise indicated, finish steel surfaces exposed to view with baked-enamel or powder-coated finish. B. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing 10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES 2.3 HORIZONTAL APARTMENT MAILBOXES A. USPS-Approved, Front-Loading, Horizontal Apartment Mailboxes: Consisting of multiple compartments with fixed, solid compartment backs, enclosed within recessed wall box. Provide access to compartments for distributing incoming mail from front of unit by unlocking master lock and swinging side-hinged master door to provide accessibility to entire group of compartments. Provide access to each compartment for removing mail by swinging compartment door. Comply with USPS STD-413. 1. Available Products: a. Auth-Florence Manufacturing Co., A Florence Company. b. Salsbury; Model 3505. 2. Mail Delivery: USPS. 3. Compartments: 4. Front-Loading Master Door: Fabricated from extruded aluminum and braced and framed to hold compartment doors; with master door lock and concealed, full- length, stainless-steel piano hinge on one side. Fabricate master door to remain open while mail is deposited. a. Master Door Lock: Prepare master door to receive lock furnished by local postmaster. 5. Compartment Doors: Fabricated from aluminum sheet reinforced with vertical stiffeners. Equip each compartment door with lock, tenant identification, and concealed, full-length, flush hinge on one side. Provide one compartment with outgoing mail slot and prepared for master door lock. a. Tenant Identification: 2-inch-wide by 5/8-inch- high, clear-plastic cardholder set in recessed slot in face of compartment door. Provide cardboard strip and self-adhesive numbers. b. Compartment Door Locks: 5-pin tumbler, cylinder locks capable of at least 1000 key changes; with 2 keys for each compartment door. Key each compartment differently. 6. Frames: Fabricated from extruded aluminum or aluminum sheet; ganged and nested units. 7. Snap-on Trim: Fabricated from same material and finish as compartment doors. OR 8. Concealed Components and Mounting Frames: Aluminum or steel sheet. 9. Aluminum Finish: Finish surfaces exposed to view as follows: a. Anodic Finish: Clear Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing 10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver lock keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service with a record of each corresponding lock and key number. B. Deliver combination-lock combinations to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service with a record of each corresponding lock and combination. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of postal specialties with wall construction. B. Templates: Obtain and distribute to parties involved templates for installing postal '"" specialties. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of postal specialties that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: .. a. Structural failures. b. Faulty operation of hardware, except door locks. .. C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows: 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221. B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers. Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing e 10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES SECTION 10550 - POSTAL SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Horizontal apartment mailboxes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for recessed framing. 2. Division 9 Section "Siding" for vinyl siding and trim. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of postal specialty. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of postal specialty. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include identification sequence for compartments. C. Other Informational Submittals: Final USPS local postmaster approval for installed postal specialties to be served by USPS. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of postal specialty manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain postal specialties through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of postal specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing 10520 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb. C. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection specialties are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written .� installation instructions. B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that .� integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-protection cabinet manufacturer. E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 10520 Page 6 Millbank Affordable Housing 40 10520 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES we B. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. „ 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods. B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed. B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet. B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire- protection cabinets. Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing 10520 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES , 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees. L. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire �. extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Vertical. M. Finishes: *� 1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: a. Exterior of cabinet door and trim, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. b. Interior of cabinet and door. 2. Steel: Baked enamel. a. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing .. 10520 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES B. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet indicated. 1. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. C. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container. D. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled- steel container. 2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET A. Basis-of-Design Product: or a comparable product by one of the following: B. Available Manufacturers: 1. General Accessory Mfg. Co. 2. JL Industries, Inc. C. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. D. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. E. Cabinet Material: Enameled-steel sheet. F. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4-to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth. G. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door. H. Door Material: Steel sheet. I. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame. J. Door Glazing: Acrylic sheet. 1. Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet. 2. Acrylic Sheet Color: Clear transparent acrylic sheet painted red on unexposed side. K. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. W 1. Provide projecting door pull and friction latch . Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing 10520 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES +. 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of portable fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each product is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. .� B. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 1.5 mm thick, with Finish 1 (smooth or polished). 2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Ansul Incorporated. 2. Badger Fire Protection. Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing .. 10520 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES SECTION 10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ' Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: +! 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire-protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. B. Owner-Furnished Material: Fire extinguishers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection cabinets. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed factory-applied color finish required for fire-protection cabinets, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Size: 6 by 6 inches square. C. Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing w 10100 SHELVING SECTION 10100 - SHELVING PART 1 - GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS on Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. SUMMARY OF WORK Extent of shelving and closet rod combinations is shown on plans and described herein. Generally, all new closets in 34 Michelman are to receive shelving as scheduled below, and any newly constructed closets in 18 Michelman are to receive shelving as scheduled below: Unit/Apartment Closets: Vinyl coated steel rod shelving. Entry/Coat Closets: Shelf and rod. Linen: 5 shelves, 16 " deep Bedroom closet: Shelf and rod. Utility: 5 shelves, 16" deep Janitor Closet: Vinyl coated steel rod shelving - 2 shelves, 16" deep. Laundry Rooms: Vinyl coated steel rod shelving. 1 coat rod and shelf 16" deep. 1 Utility shelf 16" deep. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Product Description: Furnish vinyl coated with integral rod where specified and all accessories recommended by manufacturer including support brackets, anchors, caps. Finish to be white vinyl. Provide intermediate support brackets for spans of 4'-0" in length and over. Manufacturer: Vinyl covered rod shelves: Provide shelving and rods manufactured by Closet Maid Corporation, Sani-Shelf by Schulte Corp., or Shelf Mate by Cox. Metal Shelves: New Tech or Lyon Metal Products- double track, metal shelves (5) with floor-to-ceiling uprights or wall mounted heavy duty brackets. Op PART 3 - EXECUTION Installation: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Locate mounting heights as directed by Architect. Pagel ,, Millbank Affordable Housing 09912 PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 1. Waterborne Stain Full-Gloss Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of waterborne clear full-gloss varnish over a sealer coat and interior wood stain. Wipe filler before applying stain. a. Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler. b. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain. C. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer. d. Finish Coats: Interior waterborne clear gloss varnish. END OF SECTION 09912 40 40 Page13 Millbank Affordable Housing 09912 PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) *�! 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Wood Trim: Provide the following finish systems over exterior wood trim: ` 1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior wood primer for acrylic enamels. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel. B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items. 1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel. 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel. B. Plaster: Provide the following finish systems over new interior plaster surfaces: 1. Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior plaster primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel. *�+ C. Wood and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new interior wood surfaces: 1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a wood undercoater. a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic-enamel and semigloss alkyd-enamel finishes. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. 3.9 INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL-FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE A. Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new interior woodwork: Page12 Millbank Affordable Housing ,� 09912 PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. J. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor to Provide testing for lead paint, conform to lead paint removal/handling guidelines as required by state and local laws; including closeout testing to ensure all surfaces are free of dust/contamination. Testing to be contracted under Allowance # One; Soils and Materials testing. B. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of Contractor. 2. Owner may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. Pagel1 Millbank Affordable Housing 09912 PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as 40 recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Uninsulated metal piping. 2. Uninsulated plastic piping. 3. Pipe hangers and supports. 4. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 5. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. 6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket material. 7. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. „ G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Switchgear. *� 2. Panelboards. 3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. H. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. I. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Page10 Millbank Affordable Housing 09912 PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior. 10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. Y B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give Page9 Millbank Affordable Housing fa ma 09912 PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide + surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. *�* 2. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. C. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on back side. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. ,,, 3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. b. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. ■• D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Page8 Millbank Affordable Housing 09912 PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 2.7 INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND VARNISHES A. Open-Grain Wood Filler: Factory-formulated paste wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Paste Wood Filler No. 238. !' 2. Pittsburgh Paints; none required. * B. Interior Wood Stain: Factory-formulated alkyd-based penetrating wood stain for interior application applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore- Benwood Penetrating Stain No. 234. 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-560 Rez Interior Semi-Transparent Oil Stain. C. Clear Sanding Sealer: Factory-formulated fast-drying alkyd-based clear wood sealer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick-Dry Sanding Sealer No. 413. 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-10 SpeedHide Quick-Drying Interior Sanding Wood Sealer and Finish. D. Interior Waterborne Clear Gloss Varnish: Factory-formulated clear gloss acrylic-based polyurethane varnish applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Interior Wood Finishes Polyurethane Finishes High Gloss No. 428. 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 77-45 Rez Full-Gloss Acrylic Clear Polyurethane. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. _ 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION Page7 Millbank Affordable Housing w 09912 PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) A. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer No. 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils . 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil . B. Interior Plaster Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer No. 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils . 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil . C. Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic-Enamel and Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finishes: Factory-formulated alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Underbody and Primer Sealer No. 245: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils . ++ 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-855 SpeedHide Latex Enamel Undercoater: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil . 2.5 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss waterborne acrylic- latex enamel for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House & Trim Paint No. 170: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils . 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils . 2.6 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 274: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils . 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-400 Series SpeedHide Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.25 mils . B. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic-latex enamel for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 276: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils . 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-500 Series SpeedHide Interior Semi-Gloss Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil . Page6 Millbank Affordable Housing . 09912 PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL !' A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other r manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 EXTERIOR PRIMERS A. Exterior Wood Primer for Acrylic Enamels: Factory-formulated alkyd or latex wood primer for exterior application. 1. 'Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Exterior Primer No. 176: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils . 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-609 SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Wood Primer 100 + ! Percent Acrylic Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils . B. Exterior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated rust-inhibitive metal primer for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils . 2. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-712 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils . 2.4 INTERIOR PRIMERS Pages Millbank Affordable Housing 09912 PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. ** 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F . Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. �* 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F . B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F . C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. MW 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. ,o 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS my A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. ON 1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. 4* PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Page4 Millbank Affordable Housing 09912 PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) ; Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. B. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application. 3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and - texture only: a. Painted Wood: 8-inch- square Samples for each color and material on hardboard. b. Stained or Natural Wood: 4-by-8-inch Samples of natural- or stained- wood finish on representative Pine surfaces. C. Ferrous Metal: 3-inch- square Samples of flat metal and 6-inch- long Samples of solid metal for each color and finish. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service P performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals. 1. Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. a. After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature. 3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples. Page3 Millbank Affordable Housing so 09912 PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) an e. Pipe spaces. f. Duct shafts. g. Elevator shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. C. Chromium plate. d. Copper and copper alloys. e. Bronze and brass. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. C. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop priming interior architectural woodwork. 2. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and frames. 3. Division 8 Section "Custom Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and frames. 4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies"for surface preparation of gypsum board. E. Alternates: Refer to Division 1 Section "Allowances" for testing of paint materials. •• 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 2. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 3. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Page2 Millbank Affordable Housing -- 09912 PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) SECTION 09912 - PAINTING (PROFESSIONAL LINE PRODUCTS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. air 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Architectural woodwork. b. Acoustical wall panels. C. Metal toilet enclosures. d. Metal lockers. e. Unit kitchens. f. Elevator entrance doors and frames. g. Elevator equipment. h. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. i. Light fixtures. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. C. Ceiling plenums. d. Utility tunnels. �s Pagel Millbank Affordable Housing 09680 CARPET 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION F A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of in equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09680 Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing 09680 CARPET .. 2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated �. to receive carpet installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or ** dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down Installation." B. Stretch-in Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11, "Stretch-in Installation." C. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. 1. Bevel adjoining border edges at seams with hand shears. 2. Level adjoining border edges. D. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. E. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. F. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. I. Install carpet cushion seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams. Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing 09680 CARPET 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES ' A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement- based formulation provided by or recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. C. Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood in strips as required to match cushion thickness and that comply with CRI 104, Section 11.3. D. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. E. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified. B. For wood subfloors, verify the following: 1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing 09680 CARPET . B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to ** authorities having jurisdiction. C. Product Options: Products and manufacturers named in Part 2 establish requirements for product quality in terms of appearance, construction, and performance. Other manufacturers' products comparable in quality to named products and complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items. . 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor +*� under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Carpet Cushion Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet cushion manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet cushion that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failure includes, but is not limited to, permanent indentation or compression. •' 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing 09680 CARPET SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Woven carpet. 2. Carpet cushion. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings. 2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet. 3. Division 9 Section "Carpet Tile." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate required. B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet: 12-inch- square Sample. C. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES .. 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. .� a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from .. construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Apply protective floor polish to stair accessory surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer. a. Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer. b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. 2. Cover stair accessory products with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion. 3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over stair accessories. Place plywood or hardboard panels over surfaces and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. END OF SECTION 09653 Page 6 Millbank Affordable Housing �. 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. F. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Resilient Stair Accessories: 1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 3. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint between units. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES �► B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Stair-Tread-Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Stair Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. *� 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing 09653 00 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES F. Height: 4 inches. G. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. H. Outside Corners: Job formed. I. Inside Corners: Job formed. J. Surface: Smooth. 2.4 RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES pe A. Treads: FS RR-T-650. 1. Johnsonite B. Material: Vinyl, Composition B. C. Surface Design: 1. Type 2 Design: Raised-rib pattern. D. Nosing Style: Square, adjustable to cover angles between 60 and 90 degrees. E. Nosing Height: 1-1/2 inches. F. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece. G. Risers: Smooth, flat, toeless, height and length to cover risers; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads. 1. Thickness: 0.125 inch. H. Stringers: Of same thickness as risers, height and length after cutting to fit risers and treads and to cover stair stringers; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads. 2.5 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Description: Carpet bar for tackless installations; carpet edge for glue-down applications, nosing for carpet, nosing for resilient floor covering, reducer strip for resilient floor covering, and/or joiner for tile and carpet. 1. Johnsonite B. Material: Vinyl. 2.6 INSTALLATION MATERIALS ' A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturers for applications indicated. Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing .. 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than .� 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor the during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861. 1. Johnsonite B. Type (Material Requirement): TV (vinyl). C. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid, homogeneous). D. Style: Cove (with top-set toe). E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary" Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wall base. 2. Stair accessories. 3. Molding accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances". 2. Division 9 Section "Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering". 3. Division 9 Section "Carpet". 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide resilient stair accessories with a critical radiant flux classification of Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing 09652 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 1. Apply protective floor polish to surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer. 2. Cover floor coverings with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion. 3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor coverings. Place plywood or hardboard panels over floor coverings and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. END OF SECTION 09652 Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing 09652 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Unroll sheet vinyl floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. B. Lay out sheet vinyl floor coverings as follows: 1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. C. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. D. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor coverings as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other .. nonpermanent marking device. F. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of floor coverings installed on covers. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. G. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from floor covering surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum floor coverings thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop floor coverings to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash floor coverings until after time period recommended by manufacturer. B. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing �„ 09652 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS D. Sheet Width: As standard with manufacturer. E. Seaming Method: Standard. F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by floor covering manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor covering and substrate conditions indicated. • PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of floor coverings. B. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. D. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing 09652 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS ** 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store rolls upright. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than �* 70 deg F or more than 85 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. .A 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each color, pattern, and type of floor covering installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERING A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of following: .� 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Congoleum Corporation, 3. Mannington Mills, Inc. C. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing , , 09652 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS SECTION 09652 - SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sheet vinyl floor coverings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances". 2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with sheet vinyl floor coverings. 3. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for underlayment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor covering indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of installation accessories involving color selection. C. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections of each different color and pattern of floor covering required. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Maintenance Data: For floor coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project that are competent in heat-welding techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project that are trained or certified by floor covering manufacturer for heat-welding techniques required. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire- exposure behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. u B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: 1. Level 5: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire surface. 3.6 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture finish manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 09260 Page 7 Millbank Affordable Housing 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES C. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Attach gypsum panels to studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. F. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. G. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. H. Cover both faces of stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4-to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. I. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. J. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications. 3.3 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A. Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire- resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. B. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. 40 Page 6 Millbank Affordable Housing ow 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows: 0. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other ob- jects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceil- ing suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss ob- structions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplay- ing, or other equally effective means. 1. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum pro- duces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent de- '"" vices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced stan- dards. 2. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to struc- tures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are se- cure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause " them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 3. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. B. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated, but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing installation stan- dard. 1. Wire Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. C. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceil- ings so that cross-furring or grid suspension members are level to within 118 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) as measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. D. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports. E. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring mem- bers to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES .� 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. C. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." 2.8 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow- metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 0.1 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. 1. Regular Type: a. Thickness: As indicated. b. Long Edges: Tapered. w C. Location: As indicated. 2. Type X: a. Thickness: As indicated. b. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Location: As indicated. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. t 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. b. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound; use at exposed panel edges. C. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing .o 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES m, 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and .. other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS on 2.1 MANUFACTURERS an A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. National Gypsum Company. b. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Grid Suspension Assemblies: *� a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Chicago Metallic Corp. *�* C. USG Interiors, Inc. d. Worthington Steel Company (formerly National Rolling Mills). 2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. General: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B. Wire Ties: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641 M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062 inch thick. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641 M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, *w 0.162-inch diameter. D. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, manufacturer's standard direct-hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross- furring members that interlock to form a modular supporting network. .. Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing . 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Textured ceiling finishes — building at 18 Michelman Avenue only. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation "for insulation and vapor retarders installed in gypsum board assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing 08711 DOOR HARDWARE 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees. 2. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. B. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer shall perform the following: 1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. s 2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance procedures. 3. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of door hardware units. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08711 Page13 Millbank Affordable Housing 08711 DOOR HARDWARE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI All 15-W series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Key Control System: Place keys on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted. Page12 Millbank Affordable Housing .� - 08711 DOOR HARDWARE nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications: a. Mortise hinges to doors. b. Strike plates to frames. C. Closers to doors and frames. 3. Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire-rated applications, unless door blocking is provided: a. Surface hinges to doors. b. Closers to doors and frames. C. Surface-mounted exit devices. 4. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors. 5. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 2.12 FINISHES A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.18. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. Pagel1 Millbank Affordable Housing 08711 DOOR HARDWARE B. Silencers for Wood Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum 5/8 by 3/4 inch ; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. C. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch ; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. 2.9 DOOR GASKETING A. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 2. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. B. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283. C. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke-control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke- labeled doors. D. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 10B or NFPA 252. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F. Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702. 2.10 FOLDING DOOR HARDWARE A. Folding Door Hardware: Provide complete sets consisting of overhead rails, hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated. 1. Interior Doors: Provide door hardware for interior bifolding doors when not furnished as part of door package. B. Bifolding Door Hardware: Rated for door panels weighing up to 50 lb. 2.11 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable Page10 Millbank Affordable Housing 08711 DOOR HARDWARE a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five. P4 C. Grand Master Keys: Five. F. Key Control System: BHMA Grade 1 system, including key-holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers. Contain system in metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish. 1. Portable Cabinet: Tray for mounting in file cabinet, equipped with key-holding PF panels, envelopes, and cross-index system. 2. Capacity: Able to hold keys for 150 percent of the number of locks. Y 3. Cross-Index System: Set up by key control manufacturer, complying with the following: a. Card Index: Furnish four sets of index cards for recording key information. Include three receipt forms for each key-holding hook. !!*' b. Computer Software: Furnish cross-index software for recording and reporting key-holder listings, tracking keys and lock and key history, and printing receipts for transactions. Include instruction manual. 2.5 STRIKES A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 2.6 OPERATING TRIM A. Materials: Fabricate from brass, unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 CLOSERS A. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. ! 2.8 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Floor Stops: For doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. 1. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. Page9 Millbank Affordable Housing .m 08711 DOOR HARDWARE .. 2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: 1. Number of Pins: Seven. 2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam. 3. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 4. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. " a. High-Security Grade: BHMA Grade 1A, listed and labeled as complying with pick- and drill-resistant testing requirements of UL 437 (Suffix A). ., B. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following: 1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and usable with other manufacturers' cylinders. 2. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware. C. Construction Keying: Comply with the following: 1. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys. 2. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores, as directed by Owner. b. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. D. Keying System: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a factory-registered keying system complying with the following requirements: 1. Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, and a grand master key. 2. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. 3. Existing System: Re-key Owner's existing master key system into new keying system. 4. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to the same change key. a. Cylinders shall be master keyed. E. Keys: Provide nickel-silver keys complying with the following: 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE." 2. Quantity: In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide the following: Page8 Millbank Affordable Housing on 08711 DOOR HARDWARE 00 1. Hospital Tips: Slope ends of hinge barrel. 2. Maximum Security Pin: Fix pin in hinge barrel after it is inserted. 3. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the following applications: a. Outswinging exterior doors. b. Outswinging corridor doors with locks. 4. Corners: Square . G. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 0M 3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. 2.2 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Lock Trim: Comply with the following: 1. Lever: Wrought. 2. Knob: Wrought. 3. Escutcheon (Rose): Wrought. 4. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons. B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows: 1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw. 2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw. 3. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw. C. Rabbeted Doors: Provide special rabbeted front and strike on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles. D. Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 EXIT DEVICES A. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable ! " to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. B. Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder ; material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated. Pagel Millbank Affordable Housing 08711 DOOR HARDWARE 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish full-size units of door hardware described below, before installation begins, that ., match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. 2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. 3. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. 4. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. B. Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: Metal Thickness (inches) Maximum Door Size Hinge Standard Heavy (inches) Height Weight Weight (inches) 32 by 84 by 1-3/8 3-1/2 0.123 - 36 by 84 by 1-3/8 4 0.130 - 36 by 84 by 1-3/4 4-1/2 0.134 0.180 42 by 90 by 1-3/4 4-1/2 0.134 0.180 48 by 120 by 1-3/4 5 0.146 0.190 C. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. D. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Entrance Doors: Heavy-weight hinges. 2. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges. 3. Interior Doors: Standard-weight hinges. E. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 2. Interior Hinges: Steel, with steel pin. 3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin. F. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule or on Drawings: Page6 Millbank Affordable Housing 08711 DOOR HARDWARE 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system. D. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. C. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. 1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original products. Page5 Millbank Affordable Housing 08711 DOOR HARDWARE a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. +*� b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 Ibf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 IV applied parallel to door at latch. 3) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 Ibf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. b. Door Closers: Not more than 30 Ibf to set door in motion and not more than 15 IV to open door to minimum required width. F. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. *� 1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure. G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. 3. Requirements for key control system. 4. Address for delivery of keys. H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Review methods and procedures related to electrified door hardware including, but not limited to, the .,. following: 1. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by other trades. "` 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 3. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures. Page4 Millbank Affordable Housing 08711 DOOR HARDWARE f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. 5. Submittal Sequence: Submit initial draft of final schedule along with essential Product Data to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule after Samples, Product Data, coordination with Shop Drawings of other work, delivery schedules, and similar information has been completed and accepted. E. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations. +* F. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. C. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by the Door and Hardware Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. • D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: 1. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1, FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards," as follows: Page3 Millbank Affordable Housing no 08711 DOOR HARDWARE go G. Installation: General types and approximate quantities of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule to help estimate installation and other Work not included in door hardware allowance. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of door hardware indicated. C. Samples: For exposed door hardware of each type indicated below, in specified finish, full size. Tag with full description for coordination with the Door Hardware Schedule. Submit samples before, or concurrent with, submission of the final Door Hardware Schedule. 1. Door Hardware: As follows: .. a. Hinges. b. Locks and latches. C. Exit devices. d. Cylinders and keys. e. Operating trim. f. Closers. g. Stops and holders. h. Door gasketing. 2. Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying ... requirements. D. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. .w Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. Page2 Millbank Affordable Housing ,,, 08711 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08711 - DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY NAMING PRODUCTS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary !* Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: u 1. Commercial door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. b. Folding doors. C. Other doors to the extent indicated. 2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for astragals provided as part of a fire-rated labeled assembly and for door silencers provided as part of the frame. 2. Division 8 Section "Panel Doors" for astragals provided as part of a fire-rated labeled assembly. 1.3 DOOR HARDWARE ALLOWANCE A. Door Hardware Selection: Furnish door hardware selected by Architect, in quantities specified in this Section and in Division 1 Section "Allowances." B. Allowance Bidding: After Architect selects door hardware and issues the Door Hardware Schedule, request bids from prequalified door hardware suppliers. 1. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Comply with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance"Article. C. Allowance Award: Architect will select door hardware supplier from bids furnished by Contractor. Award purchase order to selected door hardware supplier. D. Allowance Adjustment: A Change Order will be issued to adjust difference between door hardware allowance and selected bid from door hardware supplier. E. Submittals: Coordinate and process Submittals and templates for door hardware in same manner as Submittals for other Work. F. Coordination: Coordinate door hardware with other Work. Furnish Shop Drawings of other Work where required or requested to coordinate installation. Pagel Millbank Affordable Housing 08550 Vinyl Windows C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. D. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified in "Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in Appendix B in AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and ' weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. 3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, s dirt, and other substances. C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. END OF SECTION 08550 Pagel Millbank Affordable Housing 08550 Vinyl Windows •.� indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. B. Fabricate vinyl windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Double-Hung Windows: Provide weather stripping only at horizontal rails of operable sash. D. Factory machine windows for openings and hardware that is not surface applied. E. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units. F. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united inches, glaze vinyl windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/l.S.2. 1. Groove Glazing: Factory-glazed units without removable stops or other provision permitting convenient field disassembly to facilitate replacement of broken glass will not be accepted. G. Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap-on glazing stops, provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. I. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. ON PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION s. A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances; rough opening dimensions; levelness of sill plate; coordination with wall fleshings, vapor retarders, and other built-in components; and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 inches of opening. .., B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components; Drawings; and Shop Drawings. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. Page6 Millbank Affordable Housing "" 08550 Vinyl Windows other metals. Where exposed, provide die-cast zinc with special coating finish B. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Comply with AAMA 902. 1. Sash-Balance Type: Concealed spiral-tube type of size and capacity to hold sash stationary at any open position. No C. Limit Devices: Provide concealed friction adjustor, adjustable stay bar limit devices designed to restrict sash or ventilator opening. 1. Safety Devices: Limit clear opening to 4 inches for ventilation; with op custodial key release. 2.5 INSECT SCREENS A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight- fitting, removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Locate screens on outside of window and provide for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. 1. Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens: Comply with SMA 1004, "Specifications for Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens for Windows," Architectural C-24 Monumental M-32 class. B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. 1. Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll-formed from aluminum sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated. 2. Finish: Baked-on organic coating in manufacturer's standard color. 3. Finish: Baked-on organic coating in color selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard. C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 or 18-by-16 mesh of PVC-coated, glass- _ fiber threads; woven 'and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656. 1. Mesh Color: Charcoal gray . C. Wickets: Provide sliding or hinged wickets, framed and trimmed for a tight fit and durability during handling. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Grilles (False Muntins): Provide grilles in designs indicated, for removable application to inside of each sash lite. 1. Material: Vinyl r 2. Design: Diamond. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate vinyl windows, in sizes indicated, that comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for performance class and performance grade Pages Millbank Affordable Housing .w 08550 Vinyl Windows 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL B. Vinyl: Consisting of a rigid PVC sheath, made from PVC complying with ASTM D 4726, not less than 35-mil average thickness, in permanent, integral color. C. Vinyl Trim and Glazing Stops: Material and finish to match frame members. D. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with wood window members, cladding, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. Cadmium-plated steel fasteners are not permitted. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. E. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. F. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, nickel/chrome- plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. G. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and completely concealed when wood window is closed. 1. Weather-Stripping Material: Elastomeric cellular preformed gaskets complying with ASTM C 509. 2. Weather-Stripping Material: Dense elastomeric gaskets complying with ASTM C 864. 3. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. H. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. Comply with AAMA 701/702. 1. Weather Seals: Provide weather stripping with integral barrier fin or fins of semirigid, polypropylene sheet or polypropylene-coated material. H. Replaceable Weather Seals: Comply with AAMA 701/702. 2.3 GLAZING A. Glass: Clear, insulating-glass with low-e coating or film units complying with Division 8 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal. 2.4 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion- resistant material compatible with vinyl; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock vinyl windows and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with Page4 Millbank Affordable Housing "" 08550 Vinyl Windows s 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. F. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, "Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and vinyl windows and Glass Doors," for minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Provide AAMA-certified vinyl windows with an attached label. G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify wood window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating vinyl windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace vinyl windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Failure to meet performance requirements. 2. Structural failures including excessive deflection. 3. Water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. 4. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. 5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 6. Insulting glass failure. " B. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Warranty Period for Glass: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Vinyl Windows: a. Double-Hung Windows: 1) National Vinyl Window „ 2) Harvey Industries Page3 Millbank Affordable Housing 08550 Vinyl Windows 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of window indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other Work, operational clearances, and the following: 1. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners. 2. Joinery details. 4 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Flashing and drainage details. 5. Weather-stripping details. in 6. Thermal-break details. 7. Glazing details. C. Samples for Verification: For wood window components required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finish. 2. Weather Stripping: 12-inch- long sections. 3. Architect reserves the right to require additional samples that show fabrication techniques, workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed ' within the last four years by a qualified testing agency, for each type, grade, and size of window. Test results based on use of down-sized test units will not be accepted. E. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash operating hardware weather stripping and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the •• testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. C. Source Limitations: Obtain vinyl windows through one source from a single manufacturer. „ D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for vinyl windows' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of vinyl windows and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." Page2 Millbank Affordable Housing 08550 Vinyl Windows PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following vinyl window product types: 1. Double-hung windows. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. R: Residential. B. Performance grade number, included as part of the AAMA/NWWDA product designation code, is actual design pressure in pounds force per square foot used to determine structural test pressure and water test pressure. C. Structural test pressure, for uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of design pressure. D. Minimum test size is smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size). Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to comply with requirements for performance class. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1P A. General: Provide vinyl windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified and that are of test size indicated below: 1. Minimum size required by AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. 2. Minimum size required by gateway performance requirements for determining compliance with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for both gateway performance requirements and optional performance grades. 3. Size indicated. B. AAMA/NWWDA Performance Requirements: Provide vinyl windows of the performance class and grade indicated that comply with AAMA/NWWDA 101/l.S.2. 1. Performance Class: R. 2. Performance Grade: Minimum for performance class indicated. 3. Performance Grade: 35. - 4. Exception to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2: In addition to requirements for performance class and performance grade, design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length at design pressure based on the following: a. Testing performed according to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, Uniform Load Deflection Test. b. Structural computations. C. Thermal Transmittance: Provide vinyl windows with a whole-window U-value maximum indicated at 15-mph exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to AAMA 1503. 1. U-Value: Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. Pagel Millbank Affordable Housing 08212 PANEL DOORS C. Job-Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Field-Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements: 1. Division 9 Section "Painting." 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08212 Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing 08212 PANEL DOORS 4. Edge Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge construction for improved screw-holding capability and split resistance as compared to edges composed of a single layer of treated lumber. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform ■* clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/2 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 3/8 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI Al 15-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and quality of construction. 2.4 SHOP PRIMING A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime exposed portions of doors for paint finish with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing 08212 PANEL DOORS PART 2 - PRODUCTS " 2.1 MANUFACTURERS } A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Solid Core Doors - Birch Veneer, natural finish, fire-rated. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. Morgan C. Hollow Core Doors (Hardboard, paneled): Masonite Corp. — Colonist D. Solid Core Doors (Hardboard, paneled): Masonite Corp. - Colonist 2.2 INTERIOR WOOD DOORS ! A. Fire-Rated Solid Core Doors: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Faces and Grade: Provide faces and grade to match non-fire-rated doors in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction as required to provide fire-resistance rating indicated. 3. Blocking: Provide composite blocking designed to maintain fire resistance of door but with improved screw-holding capability of same thickness as core and with ' minimum dimensions as follows: 1) 5-inch (125-mm) top rail blocking. 2) 5-inch (125-mm) bottom rail blocking. 3) 5-by-18-inch (125-by-450-mm) lock blocks. 4) 5-inch (125-mm) midrail blocking. Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing MM 08212 PANEL DOORS ■ 3. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain doors from one source and by a single manufacturer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Mark each door with individual opening numbers used on Shop Drawings. Use removable tags or concealed markings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet-work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Door manufacturer's warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the „ Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 75-mm) span, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards. .� 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time after date of Substantial Completion. 1) Solid Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. 2) Hollow Core Interior Doors: Two years. Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing 08212 PANEL DOORS SECTION 08212 - PANEL DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary !' Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ,- A. This Section includes the following: 1. Solid core doors with wood veneer faces. 2. Hollow core doors with hardboard paneled faces (prehung). B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Painting. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of construction and glazing. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data, including those for stiles, rails, panels, and moldings; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain doors through one source from a single manufacturer. WP B. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard: 1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute for grade of door, core, construction, finish, and other requirements. 2. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors that comply with NFPA 80; are identical in materials and construction to units tested in door and frame assemblies per ASTM E 152; and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing 08163 ALUMINUM-STORM DOORS 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing aluminum-framed glass doors. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealants, dirt, and other substances. B. Clean glass of factory-glazed doors immediately after installing aluminum-framed glass doors. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels from glass surfaces. C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during the construction period. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect aluminum-framed glass doors from damage or deterioration until time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08163 to Page7 Millbank Affordable Housing w 08163 ALUMINUM-STORM DOORS 2.6 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" ., for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; • Organic Coating: as specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting. 1. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic enamel primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 603.8 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils , medium gloss. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION . , 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings before installation. Verify that opening is correct and sill plate is level. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. •�+ 1. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound and well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in the opening and within 3 inches of the opening. 2. Coordinate door installation with wall flashings and other built-in components. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing doors, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Set doors level, plumb, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames and panels. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. 1. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified in "Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in Appendix B to .� AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating panels, screens, and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate • hardware and moving parts. Page6 Millbank Affordable Housing 08163 ALUMINUM-STORM DOORS 3. Closer/Hold Open: Provide manufacturer's standard closer with hold open mechanism. 2.4 INSECT SCREENS A. Insect Screens: Comply with SMA 2006. 1. Glass-Fiber Mesh: 18-by-14 or 18-by-16 mesh of vinyl-coated glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656. a. Mesh Color: Charcoal gray. 2. Insect Screen Frames: Provide manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum or formed-tubular-aluminum members, with concealed fasteners, adjustable rollers, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. a. Finish: Match sliding aluminum-framed glass door members. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate aluminum-framed glass doors in sizes indicated that comply with requirements and that meet or exceed AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for performance requirements indicated and for performance class specified below. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring doors. 1. Performance Class: R. B. Fabricate aluminum-framed glass doors that are reglazable without dismantling panel framing. C. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. + * D. Weather Stripping: Provide operable panels with a double row of sliding weather stripping in horizontal rails and single- or double-row weather stripping in meeting or jamb stiles, as required to meet specified performance requirements. Provide compression-type weather stripping at the perimeter of each movable panel where sliding-type weather stripping is not appropriate. 1. Provide weather stripping locked into extruded grooves in panels. E. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum-framed glass doors in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. F. Insect Screens: Provide framed removable insect screen for door panel. Design doors and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting removable arrangement, on inside of door, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Au Page5 Millbank Affordable Housing 08163 ALUMINUM-STORM DOORS finish, but not less than 22,000-psi ultimate tensile strength and not less than 0.062- inch thickness at any location for the main frame and panel members. B. Fasteners: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum-framed glass door members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch thick, reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish • of member or hardware being fastened, as appropriate. C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Provide anchors, clips, and aluminum-framed glass door accessories of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 (severe) service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated. D. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and completely concealed when sliding aluminum-framed glass door is closed. 1. Weather-Stripping Material: Elastomeric cellular preformed gaskets complying with ASTM C 509. 2. Weather-Stripping Material: Dense elastomeric gaskets complying with ASTM C 864. 3. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. .. 2.2 GLAZING �* A. Glazing System: Provide manufacturer's standard removable storm panel glazing system. 2.3 HARDWARE A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with aluminum; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock aluminum-framed glass doors. Do not use aluminum in frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide solid bronze; extruded, cast, or wrought aluminum; solid white metal with special coating finish; or nonmagnetic stainless steel. 1. Door Pulls: Provide manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum pull grips. 2. Locks: Install manufacturer's standard pull and keyless locking device on each movable panel, lockable from the inside only. Adjust locking device to allow unobstructed movement of the panel across adjacent panel in the direction indicated. Page4 Millbank Affordable Housing 08163 ALUMINUM-STORM DOORS E. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with written recommendations of glass manufacturers and GANA's "Glazing Manual," unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify aluminum-framed glass door openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum-framed glass doors without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed glass doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures, including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. 2. Faulty operation of movable panels and hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. 5. Warranty Period for Glass: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 6. Warranty Period for Metal Finishes: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ± 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum-framed glass door manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required Page3 Millbank Affordable Housing no 08163 ALUMINUM-STORM DOORS so C. Water Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/NWWDA referenced test methods at a water test pressure equaling 20 percent of positive design pressure, but not more than 12 Ibf/sq. ft., when tested according to AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, Water �. Resistance Test. D. Operating Force: Adjust each moving panel before performing tests so maximum force to open panel is 30 Ibf and maximum force required to maintain motion is 20 Ibf . 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of aluminum-framed glass door indicated, including the following: 1. Construction details and fabrication methods. 2. Profiles and dimensions of individual components. 3. Data on hardware, accessories, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of aluminum-framed glass door indicated. Include information not fully detailed in manufacturer's standard Product Data and the following: 1. Fabrication, layout, and installation details, including anchors. 2. Typical door elevations. 3. Hardware. 4. Glazing details. 5. Accessories. " C. Samples for Verification: Architect reserves the right to require additional Samples that show fabrication techniques, workmanship, and design of glass door, hardware, and accessories. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed aluminum-framed glass door installations similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum-framed glass doors through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and aesthetic effects of aluminum-framed glass doors and are based on the specific doors indicated. Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered provided deviations in size, profile, and dimensions are minor and do not alter the aesthetic effect. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." D. Aluminum-Framed Glass Door Standard: Comply with provisions of AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for standards of performance, materials, components, and fabrication, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Provide AAMA-certified aluminum-framed glass doors with an attached label. �. Page2 Millbank Affordable Housing 08163 ALUMINUM-STORM DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL e 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes aluminum-framed glass storm doors for exterior locations. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors & Frames" 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. R: Residential. B. Structural test pressure, for uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum-framed glass doors capable of complying with v performance requirements indicated based on testing manufacturer's doors representative of those specified and of the test size indicated below: 1. Minimum size required by AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. 2. Minimum size required by gateway performance requirements for determining compliance with AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 for both gateway performance requirements and optional performance grades. 3. Size indicated. B. Structural Performance: Provide aluminum-framed glass doors capable of withstanding the following, including wind loads based on passing AAMA/NWWDA 101/l.S.2, Uniform Load Structural Test, at the basic wind speed indicated: 1. Deflection: Based on passing AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, Uniform Load Deflection Test. 2. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of the edges of the glass to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length at design pressure based on structural computations. 3. Basic Wind Speed: As indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade. Determine wind loads and resulting design pressures applicable to Project according to the following, based on mean roof heights above grade as indicated on Drawings: Pagel Millbank Affordable Housing 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES + 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80. 2. Smoke-Control Doors: Install to comply with NFPA 105. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings +�+ from doors and frames. END OF SECTION 08110 Page 6 Millbank Affordable Housing ,� 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES L. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded comers . 2. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars. M. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. N. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8. O. Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard, formed from 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick steel sheet. 1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. P. Astragals: As required by NFPA 80 to provide fire ratings indicated. 2.6 FINISHES go A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 3. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. 4. For openings 90 inches (2286 mm) or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs. C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI Al 15.1G. Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing so 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES am E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable. �» 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. B. Exterior Door Construction: For exterior locations and elsewhere as indicated, fabricate doors, panels, and frames from metallic-coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. C. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door complying with SDI standards. D. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) at bottom. E. Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80. F. Single-Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Square edge G. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel .. Doors and Frames." H. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. I. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval .A heads for exposed screws and bolts. J. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value of 0.41 Btu/sq. ft.x h x deg F (2.33 W/sq. m x K) or better. K. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed .� hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcement, and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable. Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A40 (ZF120) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher-leveled standard of r flatness. D. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591 M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher- leveled standard of flatness where used for face sheets. 2.3 DOORS A. General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. B. Exterior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: 1. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C, (Standard Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). C. Vision Lite Systems: Manufacturer's standard kits consisting of glass lite moldings to accommodate glass thickness and size of vision lite indicated. 2.4 FRAMES A. General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. + " B. Frames of 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick steel sheet for- 1. Level 1 steel doors. 2. Wood doors where indicated. C. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double- door frames. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick, r electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177-inch- (4.5-mm-) diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M) may be used in place of steel sheet. Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing w 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure. 2. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size. 3. Temperature-Rise Rating: Where indicated, provide doors that have a temperature-rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C) maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch- (100-mm-) high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Doors and Frames: a. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company. b. Pioneer Industries Inc. C. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand. 2.2 MATERIALS Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing .� 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel doors. 2. Steel door frames. 3. Fire-rated door and frame assemblies. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Panel Doors" for wood doors installed in steel frames. 2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" for door hardware and weather stripping. 3. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting factory-primed doors and frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes. t B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. ® 2. Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details. 3. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles. 4. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections. C. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing ± schedule for doors and frames. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing 07710 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES „ 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive work of this Section and with vapor retarders, roofing insulation, roofing membrane, flashing, and wall construction, as required to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor products securely to structural substrates to withstand lateral and thermal stresses and inward and outward loading pressures. B. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units contact dissimilar metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces or provide other permanent separation as recommended by aluminum producer. C. Expansion Provisions: Install running lengths to allow controlled expansion for movement of metal components in relation not only to one another but also to adjoining dissimilar materials, including flashing and roofing membrane materials, in a manner sufficient to prevent water leakage, deformation, or damage. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean exposed metal surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings. B. Protection: Provide protective measures as required to ensure work of this Section will be without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07710 wo Page4 Millbank Affordable Housing OR 07710 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment. C. Finish manufactured roof specialties after fabrication and assembly if products are not fabricated from prefinished metals. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are unacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from the full range of industry colors and color densities. 2.6 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized steel sheet fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard 2-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors "* and glosses. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof edge system installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Promptly remove protective film, if any, from exposed surfaces of finished metals. Strip with care to avoid damage to finish. w Page3 Millbank Affordable Housing on 07710 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES on PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 , 6063-T5 alloy and temper, or as recommended by manufacturer for use intended and as required for proper application of finish indicated. B. Galvanized Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; commercial quality; at least 0.034 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS A. Provide gutters and downspouts in shapes and sizes indicated, with mitered and welded corners. Include steel straps formed from at least 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized steel sheet; hangers or other attachment devices; screens; end plates; and trim and other accessories indicated or required for complete installation. B. Additional Features: Provide items below fabricated from the same metal as gutters and downspouts. 1. Downspout starters (fascia sump) with downspout starter hole. C. Provide gutters and downspouts fabricated from the following metal: 1. Extruded aluminum in thickness indicated, but not less than 0.060 inch . 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessories designed and manufactured to match and fit roof edge treatment system indicated. B. Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel, nonmagnetic, of manufacturer's standard type and size for product and application indicated. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. C. Concealed Fasteners: Same metal as item fastened or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. E. Foam-Rubber Seal: Manufacturer's standard foam. , F. Adhesives: Type recommended by manufacturer for substrate and project conditions, and formulated to withstand minimum 60-Ibf/sq. ft. wind-uplift force. 2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. Page2 Millbank Affordable Housing 07710 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES SECTION 07710 - MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Gutters and downspouts. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Asphalt Shingles." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, joining, profiles, accessories, anchorage, flashing connections, and relationship to supporting structure and to adjoining roof and wall construction. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's sample finishes showing the full range of colors and textures available for units with factory-applied color finishes. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide manufactured roof specialties capable of withstanding wind loads, ` structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of manufactured roof specialty from one source and by a single manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS „w A. Coordinate work of this Section with adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation to ensure best-possible weather resistance and protection of materials and finishes against damage. Pagel Millbank Affordable Housing .�o 07460 SIDING *� 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. *s B. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. Center nails in elongated nailing slots without binding siding to allow for thermal movement. Overlap joints to shed water away from direction of prevailing wind. B. Install vinyl siding, soffit, and accessories according to ASTM D 4756. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective siding materials with new materials complying with specified requirements. *�* B. Clean finished surfaces according to siding manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. �. END OF SECTION 07460 Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing 07460 SIDING 2.2 SIDING A. Formed Vinyl Siding: Solid vinyl siding and accessories complying with ASTM D 3679. 1. Horizontal Pattern: 8-inch exposure in double 4-inch style. 2. Texture: Plain. ` 2.3 SOFFIT A. Vinyl Soffit: Solid vinyl soffit and accessories complying with ASTM D 4477. 1. Pattern: 8-inch exposure in double 4-inch style. 2. Ventilation: Provide perforated soffit where indicated. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Siding Accessories: Provide starter strips, edge trim, window head flashing, corner cap, and other items as recommended by manufacturer for building configuration; match type of siding. B. Decorative Accessories: Provide the following types of decorative accessories as indicated: 1. Door and window casings. 2. Corner trim casings. 3. Fixture trim/mounting blocks. C. Fasteners: Noncorrosive aluminum siding nails, in sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch into substrate. Provide prefinished fasteners in color to match siding where face nailing is unavoidable. 2.5 COLORS AND TEXTURES A. Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated, provide siding and accessories complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and textures for siding and accessories of type indicated. Accessories may be required to match siding or to be of a different color or texture as selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for substrates, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of siding. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing 07460 SIDING 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's unopened packages or bundles with labels intact. B. Store materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storage, handling, and protection. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS �. A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with siding installation only if existing and forecasted weather conditions permit siding to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and if substrate is completely dry. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by siding manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace siding that fails in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, cracking, deforming, fading, or otherwise deteriorating beyond normal weathering. Fading is defined as loss *�* of color, after cleaning with product recommended by manufacturer, of more than 4 color-difference units as measured according to ASTM D 2244. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS .■ A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish full lengths of siding in a quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, ••a the following: 1. Vinyl Siding: a. Alcoa Building Products. b. CertainTeed Corp.; Vinyl Building Products Group. C. Wolverine Technologies, Inc. Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing ,X 07460 SIDING SECTION 07460 - SIDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl siding. 2. Vinyl soffit. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for sheathing and air-infiltration barrier. 2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing, gutters, and other sheet metal work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include identification of materials; dimensions of individual components; installation instructions; and available profiles, textures, and colors. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's sample finishes showing the full range of colors, profiles, and textures available. C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of siding and trim indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified. 1. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width sample of siding. 2. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width sample of trim. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed siding installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations for Siding and Accessories: Obtain each color, texture, pattern, and type of siding and related accessories from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing wi 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES go d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; f. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and ** g. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner. 2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with +* penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this <Insert day> day of <Insert month>, <Insert year>. 1. Authorized Signature: <Insert signature.> 2. Name: <Insert name.> 3. Title: <Insert title.> END OF SECTION 07311 Page 8 Millbank Affordable Housing ,,�, 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES E. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of four roofing nails located according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Woven Valleys: Extend succeeding asphalt shingle courses from both sides of valley 12 inches beyond center of valley, weaving intersecting shingle-strip courses over each other. Use one-piece shingle strips without joints in the valley. 1. Do not nail asphalt shingles within 6 inches of valley center. G. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to IP penetrate sheathing. x H. Ridge Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. 1. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow. 3.5 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY A. WHEREAS <Insert name> of <Insert address>, herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project: 1. Owner: <Insert name of Owner.> 2. Address: <Insert address.> 3. Building Name/Type: <Insert information.> 4. Address: <Insert address.> !' 5. Area of Work: <Insert information.> 6. Acceptance Date: <Insert date.> 7. Warranty Period: <Insert time.> 8. Expiration Date: <Insert date.> B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to'warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period, C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions ! " herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said w work in a watertight condition. D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of F the building, and to building contents, caused by: a. lightning; b. peak gust wind speed exceeding <Insert wind speed> mph; C. fire; Page 7 Millbank Affordable Housing 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES 9. Roof Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches on each roof slope. C. Concealed Woven Valley Lining: Comply with ARMA and NRCA recommendations. Install a 36-inch- wide felt underlayment centered in valley. Fasten to roof deck with felt underlayment roofing nails. 1. Lap roof deck felt underlayment over valley felt underlayment at least 6 inches. 2. Install a 36-inch- wide strip of granular-surfaced valley lining centered in valley, with granular-surface face up. Lap ends of strips at least 12 inches in direction to shed water, and seal with asphalt roofing cement. Fasten to roof deck with roofing nails. 3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The *�+ NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B. Step Flashings: Install with a headlap of 2 inches and extend over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. Fasten to roof deck only. C. Rake Drip Edges: Install rake drip edge flashings over underlayment and fasten to roof deck. D. Eave Drip Edges: Install eave drip edge flashings below underlayment and fasten to roof sheathing. E. Pipe Flashings: Form flashing around pipe penetrations and asphalt shingles. Fasten and seal to asphalt shingles as recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION A. Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip with tabs removed at least 7 inches wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge. 1. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 inch over fascia at eaves and rakes. 2. Install starter strip along rake edge. C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure. D. Install asphalt shingles by single-strip column or racking method, maintaining uniform exposure. Install full length first course followed by cut second course, repeating alternating pattern in succeeding courses. , Page 6 Millbank Affordable Housing , , 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 3 - EXECUTION !" 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and ! " penetrations through asphalt shingles. 3. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. PP B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install single layer of felt underlayment on roof deck perpendicular to roof slope in parallel courses. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with felt underlayment roofing nails. 1. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches in direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches over self-adhering sheet underlayment. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated on Drawings, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches. Lap ends not op less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. 1. Prime concrete and masonry surfaces to receive self-adhering sheet P1 underlayment. _ 2. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 36 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall. IP 3. Rakes: Extend from edges of rake 24 inches beyond interior face of exterior wall. 4. Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches on each side. 5. Hips: Extend 18 inches on each side. 6. Ridges: Extend 36 inches on each side without obstructing continuous ridge vent slot. 7. Sidewalls: Extend beyond sidewall 18 inches and return vertically against sidewall not less than 4 inches. 8. Dormers, Chimneys, Skylights, and other Roof-Penetrating Elements: Extend beyond penetrating element 18 inches and return vertically against penetrating element not less than 4 inches. P1 Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing lP 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES a. Johns Manville International, Inc.; Roof Defender. b. Owens Corning; WeatherLock M. C. Granular-Surfaced Valley Lining: ASTM D 249, Type I, organic-felt-based, asphalt roll roofing; 36 inches wide. we 2.4 RIDGE VENTS A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard rigid section high-density polypropylene or other UV-stabilized plastic ridge vent with nonwoven geotextile filter strips and with w external deflector baffles; for use under ridge shingles. 1. Available Products: a. GAF Materials Corporation; Cobra Rigid Vent II. b. Owens Corning; VentSure Ridge Vent. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free. B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-inch- diameter, barbed shank, sharp-pointed, with a minimum 3/8-inch- diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 inch through OSB or plywood sheathing. 1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing. C. Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized steel wire with low profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch minimum diameter. 2.6 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Sheet Metal: Coil-coated aluminum B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item. �* 1. Step Flashings: Fabricate with a headlap of 2 inches and a minimum extension of 4 inches over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. 2. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet with 2-inch roof deck flange and 1-1/2-inch fascia flange with 3/8-inch drip at lower edge. C. Vent Pipe Flashings: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, at least 1/16 inch thick. Provide lead sleeve sized to slip over and turn down into pipe, soldered to skirt at slope of roof and extending at least 4 inches from pipe onto roof. Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES Installer agrees to repair or replace components of asphalt shingle roofing that fail in materials or workmanship within the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Asphalt Shingles: 100 sq. ft of each type, in unbroken bundles. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2.2 ORGANIC-FELT-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Laminated-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 225, laminated, multi-ply overlay construction, organic-felt reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing; passing ASTM D 3161 for wind resistance. 1. Available Products: a. CertainTeed Corporation b. TAMKO — Heritage Series 2. Butt Edge: Straight cut. 3. Strip Size: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Algae Resistance: Granules treated to resist algae discoloration. 5. Color and Blends: As indicated by manufacturer's designations . B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles. pe 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felts: ASTM D 226 , Type I, asphalt-saturated organic felts, nonperforated. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40-mil- thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBS- '" modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied. 1. Available Products: Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual that is approved, authorized, or licensed by asphalt shingle roofing system manufacturer to install roofing system indicated. B. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles ridge vents through one source from a single asphalt shingle manufacturer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide asphalt shingle and related roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof slopes indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight location according to asphalt shingle manufacturer's written instructions. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double-stack rolls. 1. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members. B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when roofing work is not in progress. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit asphalt shingle roofing to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. 1. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by manufacturer. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Materials failures include manufacturing defects and failure of asphalt shingles to self-seal after a reasonable time. .. 1. Material Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with first 5 years nonprorated. 2. Workmanship Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Project Warranty: Roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by roofing Installer, covering Work of this Section, in which roofing Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES SECTION 07311 - ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY �s A. This Section includes the following: 1. Asphalt shingles. 2. Felt underlayment. 3. Self-adhering sheet underlayment. 4. Ridge vents. B. Related Sections include the following: „ 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry ” for roof deck wood structural panels. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to verify color selected. 1. Asphalt Shingle: Full-size asphalt shingle strip. 2. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Full-size ridge and hip cap asphalt shingle. 3. Ridge Vent: 12-inch- long Sample. 4. Self-Adhering Underlayment: 12 inches square. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing „ agency, for asphalt shingles. D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing OR 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. . Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c. r - C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. E. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07210 Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing no 07210 BUILDING INSULATION go C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION .� A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Place loose-fill insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown, either by pouring or by machine blowing to comply with ASTM C 1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively. C. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. D. For wood-framed construction, install mineral-fiber blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows: 1. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling ** flanges to sides of framing members. 2. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to produce airtight installation after concealing finish material is .. in place. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. . 1. If not indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 48 inches below exterior grade line. B. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying protection board. Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing 07210 BUILDING INSULATION D. Type I below is available in sizes 12 by 18 inches (305 by 457 mm) and 18 by 24 inches (457 by 610 mm). Type IV is available in sizes 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1219 mm). See Evaluations for available thicknesses. E. Cellulosic-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 739, chemically treated for flame- resistance, processing, and handling characteristics. 2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm. B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. " 2.4 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including !!!"' removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. B. Close off openings in cavities receiving poured-in-place insulation to prevent escape of insulation. Provide bronze or stainless-steel screens (inside) where openings must be maintained for drainage or ventilation. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing .o 07210 BUILDING INSULATION manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS �. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS .» A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, w the following: 1. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: a. Dow Chemical Company. b. Owens Corning. 2. Glass-Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville Corporation. C. Knauf Fiber Glass. d. Owens Corning. 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's ■*! standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively: 1. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft., unless otherwise indicated. C. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from glass; with maximum flame- spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing 07210 BUILDING INSULATION SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Insulation under slabs-on-grade. 2. Cavity wall insulation. 3. Loose-fill building insulation. 4. Vapor retarders. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry". 3. Division 15 Sections "Duct Insulation," "Equipment Insulation," and "Pipe Insulation." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. op 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. PR 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing om 07190 WATER REPELLENTS 1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those used in the work. D. Test Application: Before performing water-repellent work, including bulk purchase and delivery of products, prepare a small application in an unobtrusive location and in a oft manner approved by Architect to demonstrate the final effect (visual, physical, and chemical) of planned application. Proceed with work only after Architect approves test application or as otherwise directed. No 1. Revisions of planned application, if any, as requested by Architect, will be by Change Order if they constitute a departure from requirements of Contract Documents at the time of contracting. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Apply a heavy-saturation spray coating of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment using low-pressure spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for using airless spraying procedure, unless otherwise indicated. B. Apply a second saturation spray coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory-authorized technical service representative to inspect and approve the substrate before application and to instruct the applicator on the product and application method to be used. 3.4 CLEANING A. Protective Coverings: Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces and other protected areas. B. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water-repellent application as work progresses. Repair damage caused by water-repellent application. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning VM instructions. END OF SECTION 07190 Page4 Millbank Affordable Housing „� 07190 WATER REPELLENTS 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the applicator and water repellent manufacturer, covering materials and labor, agreeing to repair or replace r materials that fail to provide water repellency within the specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of coating due to unusual weather phenomena, failure of prepared and treated substrate, formation of new joints and cracks in excess of 1/16 inch wide, fire, vandalism, or abuse by maintenance equipment. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER REPELLENTS A. VOC-Complying Water Repellents: Products complying with local regulations controlling use of VOCs, as certified by manufacturer. B. Low-Solids Acrylic: Water-clear, breathing coating of acrylic resins; water-based, solvent-based, or acrylic emulsion solution containing less than 15 percent solids by volume. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of substances that might interfere with penetration or performance of water repellents. Test for moisture content, according to repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure surface is sufficiently dry. u. 1. Clay Brick Masonry: Clean clay brick masonry per ASTM D 5703. ±! B. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and grass. C. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured. Page3 Millbank Affordable Housing 07190 WATER REPELLENTS 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications, surface preparation and application instructions, recommendations for water repellents for each surface to be treated, and protection and cleaning instructions. Include data substantiating that materials are recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated and comply with requirements. B. Samples: Of each substrate indicated to receive water repellent, 12 inches square, with specified repellent treatment applied to half of each sample. ' C. Applicator Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that the applicator complies with requirements. D. Certification by water repellent manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of VOCs. ** 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who employs only persons trained and approved by water repellent manufacturer for application of manufacturer's products. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with experience and capability to conduct testing indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article without delaying the Work, per ASTM E 548. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable rules of pollution-control regulatory agency having jurisdiction in Project locale regarding VOCs and use of hydrocarbon solvents. D. Field Samples: Architect will select one representative surface for each substrate to receive water repellents. Apply water repellent to each substrate, with either partial or full coverage as directed. Comply with application requirements of this Section. 1. Obtain Architect's approval of field samples before applying water repellents. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent under any of the following conditions, except with written instruction of manufacturer: 1. Ambient temperature is less than 40 deg F. 2. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for less than 28 days. 3. Rain or temperatures below 40 deg F are predicted within 24 hours. 4. Application is earlier than 24 hours after surfaces have been wet. 5. Substrate is frozen or surface temperature is less than 40 deg F. 6. Windy condition exists that may cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be coated. Page2 Millbank Affordable Housing 07190 WATER REPELLENTS SECTION 07190 - WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes clear water-repellent coatings for the following vertical and nontraffic horizontal surfaces: 1. Brick masonry. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Sections for brick, concrete unit masonry, stone, and masonry and stone restoration and cleaning. PR 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide water repellents with the following properties based on testing manufacturer's standard products, according to test methods indicated, applied to substrates simulating Project conditions using same materials and application methods to be used for Project. 1. Absorption: Minimum 90 percent reduction of absorption after 24 hours in comparison of treated and untreated specimens. a. Brick: ASTM C 67. 2. Water-Vapor Transmission: Maximum 10 percent reduction in rate of vapor transmission in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM E 96. 3. Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: Maximum 90 percent reduction in leakage rate in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM E 514. 4. Durability: Maximum 5 percent loss of water repellency after 2500 hours of weathering in comparison to specimens before weathering, per ASTM G 53. 5. Permeability: Minimum 80 percent breathable in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM D 1653. Pagel Millbank Affordable Housing 07115 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 1. Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and down a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) over outside face of footing. 2. Extend 12 inches (300 mm) onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed. 3. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners, changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," " by embedding an 8-inch- (200-mm-) wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing. Dampproofing coat required for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required. 3.4 COLD-APPLIED, CUT-BACK ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING ' A. On Concrete Foundations: Apply two brush or spray coats at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.5 Usq. m) for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.4 Usq. m) for second coat, or one trowel coat at not less than 4 gal./100 sq. ft. (1.6 Usq. m). 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing. END OF SECTION 07115 Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing we 07115 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING „ a. Gardner Asphalt Corporation. b. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc. 2.2 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING A. Cold-Applied, Cut-Back (Solvent-Based) Asphalt Dampproofing: 1. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 4586, Type I. 2. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 4479, Type I. .� 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION �* A. Examine substrates, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Begin dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes and drains. B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer. 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing. 1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or required to achieve coverages indicated. 2. Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent coats. B. Apply dampproofing to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall faces building interior whether indicated or not. Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing 07115 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING SECTION 07115 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes cold-applied, cut-back asphalt dampproofing applied to the following surfaces: 1. Exterior, below-grade surfaces of concrete foundation walls. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for so method of application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit asphalt dampproofing to be .performed according to manufacturers'written instructions. B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has thoroughly cured. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cold-Applied, Cut-Back (Solvent-Based)Asphalt Dampproofing: Pagel Millbank Affordable Housing �^ 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK � B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and smnniaxposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END C)F SECTION OO4O2 � Page - K8iUbaOk Affordable Housing 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. *� D. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with recommendations of chemical treatment manufacturer, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full- length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base, if finished. 2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. 3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches. G. Stairwork and Rails: Cut carriages to accurately fit treads and risers and securely anchor to supporting substrates. Glue treads to risers, and glue and nail treads and risers to carriages. Support wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. 1. Install stairwork with treads and risers no more than 1/8 inch from indicated position and no more than 1/16 inch out of position for adjacent treads and risers. Install rails with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch variation from a straight line. * 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. Page 6 Millbank Affordable Housing 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Economy grade interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. E. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. F. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops. 2.5 INTERIOR ORNAMENTAL WORK FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 700. "! B. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood . 2.6 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 900. B. Wood Species: Any closed-grain hardwood . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK A. General: Where indicated, use materials impregnated with fire-retardant chemical formulations indicated by a pressure process or other means acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to produce products with fire-test-response characteristics specified. 1. Do not use treated material that does not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard or that is warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. .�. 2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants in solution to distinguish treated material from untreated material. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood), for woodwork items indicated as fire- retardant treated. Use the following treatment type: ` 1. Exterior Type: Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln- drying. 2. Interior Type A: Low-hygroscopic formulation. 3. Mill lumber after treatment, within limits set for wood removal that does not affect listed fire-test-response characteristics, using a woodworking plant certified by testing and inspecting agency. 4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork. 5. Kiln-dry material before and after treatment to levels required for untreated material. C. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Nonpressure Process: Apply nontoxic, water-soluble, fire-retardant treatment by dip, spray, roller, curtain coating, vacuum chamber, or soaking to achieve flame-spread rating of 25 or less and smoke- developed rating of 450 or less per ASTM E 84. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln- .R dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. C. Rough Carriages for Stairs: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." Kiln-dry to less than 15 percent moisture content. *■ D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. E. Handrail Brackets: Extruded from aluminum with wall flange drilled for exposed anchor and with support arm for screwing to underside of rail. Sized to provide 1-1/2- inch (38-mm) clearance between handrail and wall. Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork 1!" without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. - 1.8 COORDINATION "! A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products) " to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS i A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood . C. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. 2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS z. Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing am 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK ., 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other items installed in architectural woodwork. D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production and installation of interior architectural woodwork. D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified. E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated, provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions"Article. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS a Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior ornamental work. 2. Stairwork and rails. 3. Interior frames and jambs. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and ' hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 2. Division 8 Section "Stile and Rail Wood Doors." 3. Division 8 Section "Wood Windows" for stock wood windows. 4. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field finishing of interior architectural woodwork. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. B. Rough carriages for stairs are a part of interior architectural woodwork. Platform framing, headers, partition framing, and other rough framing associated with stairwork are specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including handrail brackets,. B. Product Data: For plywood, handrail brackets,. op 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large- scale details, attachment devices, and other components. Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing .w 06176 METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES H. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams. I. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1. J. Do not cut or remove truss members. K. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements. 1. Do not alter trusses in field. 3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Protective Coating: Clean and prepare exposed surfaces of metal connector plates. Brush apply primer, when part of coating system, and one coat of protective coating. 1. Apply materials to provide minimum dry film thickness recommended by coating system manufacturer. END OF SECTION 06176 Page 6 Millbank Affordable Housing 06176 METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS PR A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. B. Truss designer shall provide drawings for any additional special bracing requirements. Materials used in bracing are to be furnished by the erection contractor. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints. B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated. C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated. 1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1. D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured. B. Before installing, splice trusses delivered to Project site in more than one piece. C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not to damage truss members orjoints by out-of-plane bending or other causes. D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated. E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction. Install temporary bracing per truss manufacturer's requirements. F. Space trusses 24 inches o.c. as indicated; adjust and align trusses in location before po permanently fastening. G. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal framing anchors. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchor according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions. Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing 06176 METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation; Designation SS, Grade 33, and not less than 0.036 inch thick. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where trusses are exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME 618.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 325, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. 2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, w type, and size indicated, and as follows: 1. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in effect for Project. 2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation. C. Truss Tie-Downs: Bent strap tie for fastening roof trusses to wall studs below; refer to drawings for size/mounting requirements. D. Roof Truss Clips: Angle clips for bracing bottom chord of roof trusses at non-load- bearing walls. Clip is fastened to truss through slotted holes to allow for truss deflection, see drawings for all details/devices. Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing .,, 06176 METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying progress of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Metal Connector Plates: a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. 2. Metal Framing Anchors: a. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. b. USP Connectors 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive natural or stained finish, omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, manufactured to actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. 4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. B. Grade and Species: Provide dimension lumber of any species for truss chord and web members, graded visually or mechanically, and capable of supporting required loads without exceeding allowable design values according to AFPA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement." 2.3 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES A. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1 from metal complying with requirements indicated below: Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing 06176 METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES **� 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation and registered as a structural engineer in the State of Massachusetts. C. Product Certificates: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses, signed by officer of truss fabricating firm. D. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum , allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member .� of TPI and that complies with TPI quality-control procedures for manufacture of connector plates published in TPI 1. 1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering .. services needed to assume engineering responsibility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that involves inspection by SPIB, Timber Products Inspection, TPI, or other .■ independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. C. Source Limitations for Connector Plates: Obtain metal connector plates through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following �* publications: 1. TP1 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction." 2. TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 3. TPI HIB, "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling, Installing & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." E. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AFPA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with TPI recommendations to avoid damage and lateral bending. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. *� Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing �„ 06176 METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES SECTION 06176 - METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes wood roof trusses and truss accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry"for roof sheathing and dimension lumber for supplementary framing and permanent bracing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of metal- plate-connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to Project site. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: Top Chord Live Load: 35 psf snow, Top Chord Dead Load: 15 psf, Bottom Chord Dead Load: 7 psf. See Mass State Building Code for drifting and unbalanced snow loading with special attention at DormerNalley locations. 2. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads: a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 11360 of span. w, b. Roof Trusses: Horizontal deflection at reactions of 1-114 inches. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal-plate connectors, metal framing anchors, bolts, and fasteners. B. Shop Drawings: Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required; species, sizes, and stress grades of lumber; splice details; type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal connector plates; and bearing details. Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. Sheathing: a. Nail to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. C. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. d. For roof sheathing provide H clips at edge condition not to exceed 2 per •• space. 3. Underlayment: a. Staple to subflooring. b. Space panels 1/32 inch apart at edges and ends. C. Fill and sand edge joints of underlayment receiving resilient flooring just before installing flooring. 3.9 BUILDING WRAP APPLICATION A. Cover wall sheathing with building wrap as indicated. 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Cover upstanding flashing with 4-inch overlap. 3. Seal seams, edges, and penetrations with tape. 4. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape. END OF SECTION 06100 Page 12 Millbank Affordable Housing „ 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 1. Where ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, provide additional short joists parallel to rafters from wall plate to first joist; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to first joist or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide 1-by- 8-inch nominal- size or 2-by-4-inch nominal- size stringers spaced 48 inches o.c. crosswise over main ceiling joists. B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and use metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers. 1. At valleys, provide double-valley rafters of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against valley rafters. C. Provide collar beams (ties) as indicated or, if not indicated, provide 1-by-6-inch nominal- size boards between every third pair of rafters, but not more than 32 inches o.c. Locate below ridge member, at third point of rafter span. Cut ends to fit roof slope and nail to rafters. D. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions, if any. 3.7 STAIR FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if not indicated, to comply with the following requirements: 1. Stringer Size: 2-by-12-inch nominal- size, minimum. 2. Notching: Notch stringers to receive treads, risers, and supports; leave at least 3- 1/2 inches of effective depth. 3. Stringer Spacing: At least 3 stringers for each 36-inch clear width of stair. B. Provide stair framing with no more than 3/16-inch variation between adjacent treads and risers and no more than 3/8-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each flight. 3.8 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural- use panels and applications indicated. 1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above-referenced guide. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Subflooring: a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. Page 11 Millbank Affordable Housing 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY indicated or, if not indicated, according to Table 602.7 in the International One- and Two-Family Dwelling Code. E. Provide bracing in walls, at locations indicated, full-story height, unless otherwise indicated. Provide one of the following: 1. Diagonal bracing at 45-degree angle using metal bracing. �. 2. Plywood panels not less than 48 by 96 inches applied vertically. 3.5 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches on masonry. .. Attach floor joists as follows: 1. Where supported on wood members, by using metal framing anchors. 2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if not indicated, by using metal joist hangers. B. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches. C. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to one-sixth depth of joist, one-third at ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist; do not locate closer than 2 inches from top or bottom. D. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unless nailed to header or band. E. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than �• 4 inches or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist over supports. F. Provide solid blocking between joists under jamb studs for openings. G. Under non-load-bearing partitions, provide double joists separated by solid blocking equal to depth of studs above. ■* 1. Provide triple joists separated as above, under partitions receiving ceramic tile and similar heavy finishes or fixtures. H. Provide bridging of type indicated below, at intervals of 96 inches o.c., between joists. 1. Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel-cut, 1-by-3-inch nominal- size lumber, double-crossed and nailed at both ends to joists. 2. Steel bridging installed to comply with bridging manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters. Page 10 Millbank Affordable Housing , 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 3.3 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Do not splice structural members between supports. D. Where built-up beams or girders of 2-inch nominal- dimension lumber on edge are required, fasten together with 2 rows of 20d nails spaced not less than 32 inches o.c. Locate one row near top edge and other near bottom edge. 1. For continuous members, stagger end joints at quarter points between supports. 3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Arrange studs so wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates ,. using members of 2-inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions. Anchor plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- size wood studs spaced 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal- size wood studs spaced 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. -- C. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at ceiling line of top story. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted wood blocks of 2-inch nominal- thick lumber of same width as framing members. D. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs. 1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs with headers not less than 4-inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch nominal depth for openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8-inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width. 2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 72 inches and less in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth Page 9 Millbank Affordable Housing .■ 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY D. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG- 01 ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers. PART 3 - EXECUTION no 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 3. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel *" Roof Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in the Uniform Building Code. 4. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in the BOCA National Building Code. 5. Table 2306.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the Standard Building Code. •� 6. Table 602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table 602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in the International One-and Two-Family Dwelling Code. E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required. F. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement. Page 8 Millbank Affordable Housing 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 1. Strap Width: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Thickness: 0.050 inch. E. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.062 inch thick, length to suit joist size and spacing. F. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch above base and with 2-inch- minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch thick, and standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch thick. G. Joist Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports. 1. Width: 3/4 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.050 inch. 3. Length: 16 inches. H. Rafter Tie-Downs: Tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below; refer to drawings. Tie fastens to side of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below. I. Rafter Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below; refer to drawings. Tie fits over top of rafter or truss and fastens to both sides of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below. J. Floor-to-Floor Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying upper floor wall studs to band joists and lower floor studs; refer to drawings. K. Hold-Downs: Brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to foundation walls with anchor bolts or to other hold-downs with threaded rods and designed with first of two bolts placed seven bolt diameters from reinforced base. 1. Bolt Diameter: Per manufacturer 2. Width: Refer to drawings. 3. Body Thickness: Refer to drawings. 4. Base Reinforcement Thickness: Refer to drawings. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Building Wrap: Air-retarder sheeting made from polyolefins; cross-laminated films, woven strands, or spun-bonded fibers; coated or uncoated; with or without perforations; and complying with ASTM E 1677, Type I. 1. Thickness: Not less than 3 mils. 2. Permeance: Not less than 10 perms. ' 3. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 4. Allowable Exposure Time: Not less than three months. B. Building Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. C. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. Page 7 Millbank Affordable Housing t 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY B. Underlayment, General: Provide underlayment in nominal thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/4 inch over smooth subfloors and not less than 3/8 inch over board or uneven subfloors. C. Plywood Underlayment for Resilient Flooring: Rockwood Underlayment/NordFly Baltic Birch 5 ply Plywood. 2.9 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples- ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. ,w D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. .� 2.10 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide framing anchors made from metal indicated, of structural capacity, type, and size indicated, and as follows: 1. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in effect for Project. 2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation. C. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- long seat and 1-1/4-inch- wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth. 1. Thickness: 0.050 inch. D. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member. Page 6 Millbank Affordable Housing , , 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Cants. 3. Nailers. a, B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2.6 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: A composite of wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. Product has the following allowable design values as determined according to ASTM D 5456: 1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, (Fb): 2900 psi. 2. Modulus of Elasticity, (E): 2,000,000 psi. 3. Fc II: 2600 psi. 4. Fc I: 750 psi. 5. Fv: 285 psi 2.7 SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0. 2. Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch. B. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0. 2. Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch. 2.8 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT A. Plywood Subflooring: Exterior, Exposure 1, Structural I single-floor panels or sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 16" o.c. 2. Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch. Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY + + 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not .� comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece, or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment ** compliance issued by inspection agency. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with •�+ earth. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade and the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. C. Load-Bearing Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade and the following species: 1. Southern pine; SPIB. D. Exposed Exterior Framing: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics that would impair finish appearance. 1. Species and Grade: As indicated above for load-bearing construction of same type. E. For Structural Framing (2 to 4 inches thick, 5 inches and wider): No. 2 or better and A the following species: 1. Southern Pine. Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing �, 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2.2 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. n 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. lop B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Wood Structural Panels: 1. Plywood: DOC PS 1. 2. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness indicated. 3. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial." 4. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard. 2.3 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and one of the following: a. Chromated copper arsenate (CCA). b. Ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate (ACZA). C. Ammoniacal, or amine, copper quat (ACQ). d. Copper bis (dimethyldithiocarbamate) (CDDC). e. Ammoniacal copper citrate (CC). f. Copper azole, Type A (CBA-A). g. Oxine copper (copper-8-quinolinolate) in a light petroleum solvent. Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY w retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type .� of treatment. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. B. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: a. Georgia-Pacific Corporation. b. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. "' C. Trus Joist MacMillan. 2. Building Wrap: a. Celotex Corporation (The); Building Products Division. b. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company). 3. Metal Framing Anchors: a. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. b. USP Lumber Connectors. Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY t PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Wood blocking and nailers. 4. Sheathing. 5. Subflooring and underlayment. 6. Building wrap. 7. Blocking for truss uplift clips. 8. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses." 2. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry"for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Exposed Framing: Dimension lumber not concealed by other construction. C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing go 04901 CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING B. Architect's Project Representatives: Architect will assign Project representatives to help carry out Architect's responsibilities at the site, including observing progress and quality of portion of the Work completed. Allow Architect's Project representatives use of scaffolding, as needed, to observe progress and quality of portion of the Work completed. C. Notify Architect's Project representatives in advance of times when lift devices and scaffolding will be relocated. Do not relocate lift devices and scaffolding until Architect's Project representatives have had reasonable opportunity to make observations of work areas at lift device or scaffold location. END OF SECTION 04901 w W Page 10 Millbank Affordable Housing , 04901 CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING standing water. If rinse water dries, dampen masonry-joint surfaces before pointing. 2. Apply pointing mortar first to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 3/8 inch until a uniform depth is formed. Fully compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. 3. After low areas have been filled to same depth as remaining joints, point all joints by placing mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch. Fully compact each layer and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing bricks have worn or rounded edges, slightly recess finished mortar surface below face of masonry to avoid widened joint faces. Take care not to spread mortar over edges onto exposed masonry surfaces or to featheredge mortar. 4. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing. F. Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 hours including weekends and holidays. 1. Acceptable curing methods include covering with wet burlap and plastic sheeting, periodic hand misting, and periodic mist spraying using system of pipes, mist heads, and timers. 2. Adjust curing methods to ensure that pointing mortar is damp throughout its depth without eroding surface mortar. G. Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing masonry, allow mortar to harden at least 30 days before beginning cleaning work. 3.6 FINAL CLEANING A. After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar and foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water, spray applied at low pressure. 1. Do not use metal scrapers or brushes. 2. Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners. B. Wash adjacent woodwork and other nonmasonry surfaces. Use detergent and soft brushes or cloths. C. Clean masonry debris from roof; remove debris from gutters and downspouts. Rinse off roof and flush gutters and downspouts. D. Sweep and rake adjacent pavement and grounds to remove masonry debris. Where necessary, pressure wash surfaces to remove mortar, dust, dirt, and stains. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and prepare test reports. Allow inspectors use of lift devices and scaffolding, as needed, to perform inspections. Page 9 Millbank Affordable Housing 04901 CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 2. Scrub masonry with detergent solution using medium-soft brushes until soil is thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes to remove soil from mortar joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure that adequate fresh detergent is used and that masonry surface remains wet. 3. Rinse with cold water applied by low -pressure spray to remove detergent solution and soil. 4. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established by mockup. 3.5 REPOINTING MASONRY A. Rake out and repoint mortar joints to the following extent: 1. All joints in areas indicated. 2. Joints where mortar is missing or where they contain holes. 3. Cracked joints where cracks can be penetrated at least 1/4 inch by a knife blade 0.027 inch thick. 4. Cracked joints where cracks are 1/8 inch or more in width and of any depth. 5. Joints where they sound hollow when tapped by metal object. 6. Joints where they are worn back 1/4 inch or more from surface. 7. Joints where they are deteriorated to point that mortar can be easily removed by hand. 8. Joints, other than those indicated as sealant-filled joints, where they have been filled with substances other than mortar. B. Do not rake out and repoint joints where not required. C. Rake out joints as follows: 1. Remove mortar from joints to depth of 2 times joint width, but not less than 1/2 inch or not less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar. 2. Remove mortar from masonry surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals +�+! with square backs and to expose masonry for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum, or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris. 3. Do not spall edges of masonry units or widen joints. Replace or patch damaged masonry units as directed by Architect. a. Cut out center of mortar bed joints using angle grinders with diamond- impregnated metal blades. Remove remaining mortar by hand with chisel and mallet. Strictly adhere to written quality-control program. Quality- control program shall include provisions for demonstrating ability of operators to use tools without damaging masonry, supervising performance, and preventing damage due to worker fatigue. D. Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids in mortar joints, cracks, loose masonry units, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items. E. Point joints as follows: 1. Rinse masonry-joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time rinsing application so, at time of pointing, joint surfaces are damp but free of Page 8 Millbank Affordable Housing „� OPP 04901 CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 2. If item cannot be removed without damaging surrounding masonry, cut off item flush with surface and core drill surrounding masonry and item as close around item as practical. 3. Patch holes where items were removed unless directed to remove and replace units. 3.3 CLEANING MASONRY, GENERAL A. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom of each scaffold width and from one end of each elevation to the other. OR B. Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each masonry material and location. 1. Do not use wire brushes or brushes that are not resistant to chemical cleaner being used. Do not use plastic-bristle brushes if natural-fiber brushes will resist chemical cleaner being used. 2. Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure indicated, measured at spray tip. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning methods do not damage masonry. a. Equip units with pressure gages. 3. For water spray application, use fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of 25 to 50 degrees. 4. For high-pressure water spray application, use fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of at least 40 degrees. 5. For heated water spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining temperature between 140 and 160 deg F at flow rates indicated. C. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without streaking or damaging masonry surfaces. D. Preliminary Cleaning: Before beginning general cleaning, remove extraneous substances that are resistant to cleaning methods being used. Extraneous substances include paint, calking, asphalt, and tar. 1. Carefully remove heavy accumulations of material from surface of masonry with a sharp chisel. Do not scratch or chip masonry surface. E. Water Spray Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, hold spray nozzle at least 6 inches from surface of masonry and apply water in horizontal back and forth sweeping motion, overlapping previous strokes to produce uniform coverage. F. After cleaning is complete, remove protection no longer required. Remove tape and adhesive marks. 3.4 CLEANING BRICKWORK A. Detergent Cleaning: 1. Wet masonry with cold water applied by low-pressure spray. Page 7 Millbank Affordable Housing 04901 CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING M+ 3. Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N, unless otherwise indicated; with cementitious material content limited to portland cement and lime. "* PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION A. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm resulting from masonry restoration work. 1. Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian and vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during course of restoration and cleaning work. B. Comply with chemical cleaner manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building and other surfaces against damage from exposure to its products. Prevent chemical , cleaning solutions from coming into contact with pedestrians, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be harmed by such contact. 1. Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist chemical cleaners used unless chemical cleaners being used will not damage adjacent surfaces. Use materials that contain only waterproof, UV-resistant adhesives. Apply masking agents to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove masking to prevent adhesive staining. 2. Keep wall wet below area being cleaned to prevent streaking from runoff. *� 3. Do not clean masonry during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to unprotected surfaces. 4. Dispose of runoff from cleaning operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors. C. Prevent mortar from staining face of surrounding masonry and other surfaces. 1. Cover sills, ledges, and projections to protect from mortar droppings. 2. Keep wall area wet below rebuilding and pointing work to discourage mortar from adhering. 3. Immediately remove mortar in contact with exposed masonry and other surfaces. 4. Clean mortar splatters from scaffolding at end of each day. .,. 5. Provide temporary rain drainage during work to direct water away from building. 3.2 UNUSED ANCHOR REMOVAL A. Remove masonry anchors, brackets, wood nailers, and other extraneous items no longer in use unless identified as historically significant or indicated to remain. 1. Remove items carefully to avoid spalling or cracking masonry. Page 6 Millbank Affordable Housing �, 04901 CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 1. Color: Provide natural sand; of color necessary to produce required mortar color. 2. For pointing mortar, provide sand with rounded edges. 3. Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar sand as closely as possible. Blend several sands, if necessary, to achieve suitable match. F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides, compounded for mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. G. Water: Potable. 2.3 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Water for Cleaning: Potable. B. Hot Water: Heat water to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F. C. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium polyphosphate (TSPP), 1/2 cup of laundry detergent, and 20 quarts of hot water for every 5 gal. of solution required. 2.4 MORTAR MIXES A. Preparing Lime Putty: Slake quicklime and prepare lime putty according to appendix to ASTM C 5 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious materials and sand in a dry condition by volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known measure. Mix materials in a clean, mechanical batch mixer. 1. Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious materials and sand together before adding any water. Then mix again adding only enough water to produce a 7P damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 15 to 30 minutes. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within one hour of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material. VP C. Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using selected ingredients. Do not alter specified proportions without Architect's approval. 1. Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not exceed .a pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10 by weight. D. Do not use admixtures of any kind in mortar, unless otherwise indicated. E. Mortar Proportions: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions: 1. Pointing Mortar for Brick: 1 part portland cement, 6 parts lime, and 12 parts sand. a. Add mortar pigments to produce mortar colors required. 2. Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar: Same as pointing mortar. Pe Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing 04901 CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Order replacement materials at earliest possible date, to avoid delaying completion of the Work. B. Order sand for repointing mortar immediately after approval of mockups. Take delivery of and store at Project site a sufficient quantity of sand to complete Project. C. Perform masonry restoration work in the following sequence: 1. Repair existing masonry, including replacing existing masonry with new masonry materials. 2. Rake out joints that are to be repointed. 3. Point mortar joints. 4. Inspect for open mortar joints and repair before cleaning to prevent the intrusion of water and other cleaning materials into the wall. 5. Remove paint. 6. Clean masonry surfaces. 7. Rake out joints that are to be repointed. 8. Point mortar joints. " D. As scaffolding is removed, patch anchor holes used to attach scaffolding. Patch holes in masonry units to comply with Part 3 "Masonry Unit Patching" Article. Patch holes in mortar joints to comply with Part 3 "Repointing Masonry"Article. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified. 2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II. 1. Provide white cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Quicklime: ASTM C 5, pulverized lime. D. Factory-Prepared Lime Putty: Screened, fully-slaked lime putty, prepared .from pulverized lime complying with ASTM C 5. E. Mortar Sand: ASTM C 144, unless otherwise indicated. .. Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing 04901 CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING b. Allow a waiting period of not less than seven days after completion of sample cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions. 3. Rake out joints in two separate areas approximately 36 inches high by 36 inches wide for each type of repointing required and repoint one of the two areas. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver other materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers, labeled with manufacturer's name and type of products. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store hydrated lime in manufacturer's original and unopened containers. Discard lime if containers have been damaged or have been opened for more than two days. D. Store lime putty covered with water in sealed containers. E. Store sand where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Repoint mortar joints and repair masonry only when air temperature is between and 40 and 90 deg F and is predicted to remain so for at least 7 days after completion of work. B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for masonry repair and mortar-joint pointing: 1. When air temperature is below 40 deg F, heat mortar ingredients, masonry repair materials, and existing masonry walls to produce temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. 2. When mean daily air temperature is below 40 deg F, provide enclosure and heat to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F within the enclosure for 7 days after repair and pointing. C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect masonry repair and mortar-joint pointing when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and repair materials. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F and above. D. Patch masonry only when air and surface temperatures are between and 55 and 100 deg F and are predicted to remain above 55 deg F for at least 7 days after po completion of work. On days when air temperature is predicted to go above 90 deg F, schedule patching work to coincide with time that surface being patched will be in shade or during cooler morning hours. E. Clean masonry surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and is predicted to remain so for at least 7 days after completion of cleaning. Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing ..4 04901 CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING *�* 2. Each type of pointing mortar in the form of sample mortar strips, 6 inches long by 1/2 inch wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels. a. Include with each sample a list of ingredients with proportions of each. Identify sources, both supplier and quarry, of each type of sand and brand names of cementitious materials and pigments if any. 3. Each type of masonry patching compound in the form of briquettes, at least 3 inches long by 1-1/2 inches wide. Document each sample with manufacturer and stock number or other information necessary to order additional material. '" 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ,. A. Restoration Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced, preapproved masonry restoration and cleaning firm to perform work of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. At Contractor's option, work may be divided between two specialist firms: one for cleaning work and one for repair work. 2. Field Supervision: Restoration specialist firms shall maintain experienced full- time supervisors on Project site during times that clay masonry restoration and cleaning are in progress. Supervisors shall not be changed during Project except for causes beyond the control of restoration specialist firm. 3. Restoration Worker Qualifications: Persons who are experienced in restoration work of types they will be performing. B. Chemical Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm regularly engaged in producing masonry cleaners that have been used for similar applications with successful results, and with factory-trained representatives who are available for consultation and Project-site inspection and assistance at no additional cost. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of material for masonry restoration (face brick, cement, sand, etc.) from one source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. D. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to test the following. Provide test specimens and assemblies as indicated. E. Mockups: Prepare mockups of restoration and cleaning as follows to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Prepare mockups on existing walls under same weather conditions to be expected during remainder of the Work. 1. Repair an area as indicated for each type of masonry material indicated to be rebuilt or replaced. 2. Clean an area approximately 25 sq. ft. in area for each type of clay masonry and surface condition. a. Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse reactions unless cleaners and methods are known to have deleterious effect. Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing �„ 04901 CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING SECTION 04901 - CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes restoration and cleaning of brick as follows: ! 1. Repairing clay masonry, including replacing damaged units. 2. Repointing mortar joints. 3. Cleaning exposed clay masonry surfaces. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Water Repellents" for water repellents applied to clay masonry. C. Unit Prices: Unit prices for clay masonry restoration and cleaning are specified in Division 1 Section "Unit Prices." 1. Unit prices apply to authorized work covered by quantity allowances. 2. Unit prices apply to additions to and deletions from Work as authorized by Change Orders. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi (690 to 2750 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4 L/s). B. Medium-Pressure Spray: 400 to 800 psi (2750 to 5500 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4 L/s). C. High-Pressure Spray: 800 to 1200 psi (5500 to 8250 kPa); 4 to 6 gpm (0.25 to 0.4 L/s). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for application and use. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements. B. Samples for Verification: Before erecting mockup, submit samples of the following: 1. Each type of sand used for pointing mortar. a. For blended sands, provide samples of each component and blend. b. Identify sources, both supplier and quarry, of each type of sand. Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing IF 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE floating.Keep burlap moist until the concrete is ready for finishing.Uncover only a small area at a time,just ahead of the finishers. Begin curing as soon as possible. d. Use monomolecular films to reduce evaporation between the various placing and finishing operations. 1. Postpone each step of finishing(and its inherent reworking of the surface)as long as possible without endangering results. 2. Discontinue the use of vapor barriers if possible. END OF SECTION 1p 71 op Page-17 Millbank Affordable Housing .. 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 1. Pavement: Stiff broom finish using new street broom.Bristle marks shall be perpendicular to direction of traffic, unless otherwise noted. Finish after concrete is placed, screeded, and steel troweled to a smooth,even surface. Bring sufficient mortar to the surface for the finish. 2. Curb: Trowel finish. F. Remove forms while concrete is"green". Protect from damage construction operations. Replace and repair damaged work as directed by the Architect/Engineer. No use for a minimum of 3 days after construction. Clean thoroughly all surfaces, and keep clean until the completion of this Contract. 3.20 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundation as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations,complying with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 1. Grout base plates and foundations as indicated,using specified non-shrink grout. Use nonmetallic grout for exposed conditions,unless otherwise indicated. ww 3.21 PROTECTION AND CURING A. Protect finished work as required. B. Fresh concrete shall be adequately protected from premature drying,heavy rains,flowing water, and mechanical injury in accordance with ACI 308,"Curing Concrete".Provisions must be made for maintaining new concrete in a continuously moist condition for at least seven days after placement. wu C. Provide cold weather protection of concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 306. D. Provide hot weather protection of concrete in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 305. E. Curing shall immediately follow the finishing operation to prevent rapid drying of the concrete. F. Concrete which has not been properly placed, cured, or protected, and which consequently cracks, shall be replaced or may,at the Architect/Engineer's discretion,be filled with an approved crack sealer. G. All foundation walls and footings to receive an approved liquid curing compound if formwork is removed prior to required 7-day curing time. H. All flatwork shall be cured for a minimum of 7 days after finishing using heavyweight burlap,cotton mats, rugs, or waterproof sheet materials. L If rate of evaporation is expected to exceed 0.2 lbs./ft.z(as determined in ACI 306)during placement and o- finishing concrete,the Contractor is to make provisions to reduce water evaporation to a level below 0.2 lbs./ft. . Method of reducing water evaporation may consist of a combination of the following: 1. Dampen the subgrade. OR 2. Dampen the aggregates,especially if they are dry and absorptive. 3. Erect windbreaks. 4. Erect sunshades. 5. Cool aggregates and mixing water before mixing. 6. Prevent rapid drying by one of the following: a. Protect concrete with moisture-retaining coverings during any delay between placing and finishing. b. Use a fog spray judiciously above the surface before final finishing and start of cutting. c. Cover with damp burlap or with white polyethylene sheet immediately after screeding and bull Page-16 Millbank Affordable Housing ** 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE G. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope,in addition to smoothness,using a template having required slope. 1. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which affect durability of concrete. Surface defects,as such, include crazing,cracks in excess of 0.01"wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections regardless of width,spalling,pop-outs,honeycomb,rock pockets and other objectionable conditions. 2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding,after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during,or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Proprietary patching compound may be used when acceptable to Architect. H. Repair defective areas,except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1"diameter,by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean,square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4"clearance all around.Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. I. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over I"in diameter by dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust,dirt and loose compound.Mix dry-pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve,using only enough water as required for handling and placing.Place dry-pack after bonding compound has dried.Keep patched area continuously moist for not less then 72 hours. J. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure,using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. " K. Repair methods not specified above may be used,subject to acceptance of Architect. 3.17 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required levels and lines,details,and elevations. B. Repair or replace,as directed by the Architect/Engineer,concrete not properly placed or of the specified type. 3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed as outlined in this Section. 3.19 CONCRETE WALKS AND CURB No A. Clear steel forms. True to line.Firmly staked in place. Strong enough to resist pressure of concrete without springing. Tight enough to prevent mortar leakage.Tops at exact finished grade. OR B. Spade concrete thoroughly along forms and expansion joints. Vibrate,tamp,and screen to a dense mass. Lay with expansion joints coinciding with the pattern indicated on the plans.Pour in alternate sections(400 sq. ft.maximum)with expansion joints between pours. C. Provide 1/2"wide expansion joints. Form with pre-molded joint filler. Cut back filler 1/4"below finish of pavement. Provide additional expansion joints around utility structures in concrete pavement and where concrete abuts other structures. a D. Score joints using scoring tool minimum 12"long. Cut between expansion joints to complete the pattern shown on the plans. Cut while concrete is workable. E. Finishes: Page-15 Millbank Affordable Housing .. 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE s. 2. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone and water to expose nonslip aggregate. 3.15 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. Construction joints shall be located only as herein specified,or where shown on the Drawings,or as indicated by the Engineer. 1. Wall Construction Joints: Vertical construction joints shall be provided for all concrete walls as shown on the Drawings or at intervals not exceeding 30 feet for a single pour.Refer to Drawings for joint specified. Provide a 3-day time delay between adjacent pours for below-grade walls.Provide a 7-day delay between adjacent wall pours in above-grade,exposed walls.All wall construction joints shall be made only where indicated on the Drawings. Maximum unsupported wall height shall be 25 feet.All intermediate floor slabs shall be in place before placement of next lift of wall. .� 2. Slab-On-Grade Construction Joints: Slab construction joints within the building area to be formed according to details on Drawings. Contractor to supply plans for construction joint layouts according to shop drawing submittals with a maximum joint spacing of 25 feet. 3. Slab-On-Grade Contraction Joints(Saw Cut Joints): Contraction joints shall be saw cut accomplished by using a"Soff-Cut"saw or approved equal. Saw cutting shall begin immediately after final finishing. B. Reinforcement shall be discontinuous through construction joints unless otherwise specified. C. Construction joints shall be clean and free of foreign matter and concrete laitance. 3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS: A. Notify Architect/Engineer to inspect concrete surface immediately upon removal of forms.Patch imperfections as directed. B. Immediately after removing forms,inspect and repair all concrete surfaces and any poor joints,voids,stone pockets, or other surface defects before concrete is thoroughly dry. Repair shall be in accordance with ACI 301. Do not patch, fill,touch-up,repair,or replace exposed architectural concrete except upon express direction of Architect/Engineer for each individual area. C. Permission to repair any surface defect shall not be considered a waiver of the defective work if the repair does not,in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, satisfactorily restore the quality and appearance of the surface. D. Patching Defective Areas:Repair and patch defective area with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms,when acceptable to Architect. �. 1. Cut out honeycomb,rock pockets,voids over 1/4"in any dimension and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but,in no case to a depth of less than one(1)inch.Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surfaces. Thoroughly clean,dampen with water and brush-coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar after bonding compound has dried. 2. For exposed-to view surfaces,blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that,when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding.Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify ■ mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface. E. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects,as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles,honeycomb,rock pockets; fins and other projections on surface;and stairs and other discoloration that cannot be removed by cleaning.Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. F. Repair concealed formed surfaces,where possible,that contain defects that affect the durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired,remove and replace concrete. Page-14 Millbank Affordable Housing WR 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 2. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces and apply grout to coat surfaces and fill small holes.Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing. E. Sandblasted Surface Finish:At vertical sitting wall surfaces and where called for on the details,exposed concrete surfaces shall receive a light commercial(sand,glass)blasting finish. F. Related Unformed Surfaces:At tops of walls,horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces,strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. 3.14 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES: A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolith slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile,Portland cement terrazzo and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material and as otherwise indicated. 1. After placing slabs,plane surfaces so that depressions between high spots do not exceed 1/2"under a 10' straightedge. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.After leveling,roughen surfaces before final set,with stiff brushes,brooms or rakes. PW B. Float Finish:Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing,or sand-bed terrazzo and as otherwise indicated. Pw 1. After screening,consolidating and leveling concrete slabs,do not work surfaces until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats,or both. Consolidate surfaces with power-driven floats,or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane so that depressions between high spots do not exceed 1/4"under a 10' straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains.Immediately after leveling,refloat surface to a uniform,smooth,granular texture. C. Trowel Finish:Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed-to-view and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring carpet, ceramic or quarry tile,paint or other than film finish coating system. 1. After floating,begin first trowel finish operation using power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks,uniform in texture and appearance and with a level surface plane tolerance not exceeding 3/16"in 10' when tested with a 10' straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-set mortar,apply trowel finish as specified,then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface by fine brooming. E. Nonslip Broom Finish:Apply nonslip broom finish to exposed concrete platforms, steps and ramps and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after trowel finishing,slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. F. Nonslip Aggregate Finish:Apply nonslip aggregate finish to concrete stair treads,platforms,ramps and elsewhere indicated. 1. After completion of float finishing and before starting trowel finish,uniformly spread 25 lbs. of dampened nonslip aggregate per 100 sq.ft. of surface. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel,but do not force below surface.After broadcasting and tamping,apply trowel finishing as herein specified. Page-13 Millbank Affordable Housing 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE E. Ensure that reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts,and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. .sA F. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing per ACI requirements: G. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction and control joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. *, H_ Thoroughly compact concrete during placement operation. Work into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement using spades. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine.Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6"into preceding layer.Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. I. Separate interior and exterior slabs-on-grade from vertical surfaces with pre-molded joint filler.Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/4 inch of finished slab surface. J. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable.Notify Architect/Engineer upon discovery. K. Do not place concrete footings in standing water or soft material. L. Place saw-cut control joints as soon as concrete is hard enough to begin saw-cutting without dislodging aggregate and when the edges of the cut do not ravel.Use 3/16-inch thick blade, cutting 2/4 into depth of slab thickness.Flush joints immediately. To protect edges of joint and to allow fur curing,joints shall be temporarily filled with stand. Joints shall not be permanently filled until just prior to completion of the project. Fill all saw-cut joints in concrete slabs which are to remain exposed with joint sealant.Slabs which are to be covered with tile or carpeting will have joints filled with cement grout flush to slab surface. Joints to be flush to provide a smooth surface, continuous with adjacent slabs. See plans for layout of saw-cut joints. 3.13 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES: A. Rough Form Finish:For formed concrete surfaces not exposed-to-view in the finish work or by other construction,unless otherwise indicated. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form facing material used with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4"in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Smooth Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed-to-view,or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete,or a covering material applied directly to concrete such as waterproofing,dampproofing,painting or other similar system. This is as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form facing material,arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams.Repair and patch defective areas with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed. .� C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces which have received smooth formed finish treatment,not later than one day after form removal. 1. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with Carborundium brick or other abrasive until uniform color and texture is produced. 2. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Grout Cleaned Finish:Provide grout cleaned finish to exposed surfaces which have received smooth form finish treatment. 1. Combine one-part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand by volume and mix with water to consistency of thick paint.Propriety additives may be used at Contractor's option. Blend standard portland cement and white portland cement,amounts determined by trial patches,so the final color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Page-12 Millbank Affordable Housing '""' 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE G. Support footing mat reinforcing and grade beam reinforcing on precast blocks to maintain three(3)inch cover required for concrete cast against earth. H. Coordinate and place dowels for masonry walls with the Architectural Drawings. 1. Anchor rods and other embedded items to be placed with ACI tolerances. J. Welded wire fabric in slabs on grade to be supported off of subgrade with approved support system.Pulling of welded wire fabric in these areas is not permitted. K. In sloped slabs, secure reinforcing in position so that the reinforcing is located at a constant depth in the slab or beam section. L. Welded wire fabric for supported slab on form deck to be supported on approved support system. 3.11 PREPARATION FOR CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Prepare previously place concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent.Apply bonding * agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. At locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work,drill holes in existing concrete,insert steel dowels,and pack solid with non-shrink grout. C. Coordinate all work with other trades, including electrical,mechanical and plumbing.Verify that all required sleeves,conduits, slab openings,or embedded items are in place prior to placing of concrete. go D. Coordinate and locate all slab depressions and recesses with Architectural Drawings. - 3.12 PLACING CONCRETE A. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concrete operations. B. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301. 1e C. Cold Weather Placing:Protect work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions,or low temperatures,in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein specified. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F(4 deg C),uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C),and not more than 80 deg F(27 deg C)at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride,salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators,unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. D. Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete,place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg F (32 deg Q.Mixing water may be chilled,or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing.Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. 3. Fog spray forms,reinforcing steel and subgrade just before concrete is placed. 4. Use water-reducing retarding admixture(Type D)when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions. Page-11 Millbank Affordable Housing 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE D. Do not damage concrete surfaces during form removal. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers,or tools against concrete. E. Remove formwork in same sequence as concrete placement to achieve similar concrete surface coloration. F. Store reusable forms for exposed architectural concrete to prevent damage to contact surfaces. G. For exposed concrete surfaces, do not reuse wood formwork more than two(2)times.Do not patch formwork. H. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams,walls, columns and similar parts of the work,may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F(10 deg C)for 24 hours after placing concrete,provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. 1. Formwork supporting weight of concrete,such as beam soffits,joints, slabs and other structural elements, .. may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. w. J. Form facing material may be removed four(4)days after placement only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. ,w 3.08 CLEANING FORMS/FORMWORK A. Clean forms to remove foreign matter as erection proceeds. *■ B. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through cleanout ports. C. During cold weather,remove ice and snow from forms.Do not use de-icing salts.Do not use water to clean w out completed forms unless formwork and construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air to remove foreign matter. D. Patch and repair surface defects of reusable form material to maintain good quality finish. w E. Discard form materials which when reused will not provide desired finish. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inform Architect/Engineer when formwork is complete and has been cleaned to allow for review. Obtain review 24 hours prior to placing concrete. B. Allow Architect/Engineer to inspect each section of formwork prior to reuse. C. Coordinate placement and locations of sleeves,bolts,and other embedded items, and verify they are accurately placed and secured against displacement. 3.10 REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. Before placing concrete,clean reinforcement of foreign particles or coatings. wa B. Place,support,and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from alignment or measurement. C. Place reinforcement to provide for concrete cover specified elsewhere in this Section. D. Unless permitted by the Architect/Engineer,reinforcement shall not be bent after being embedded in hardened concrete. E. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum of 24 hours prior to time reinforcing can no longer be inspected due to formwork placement and/or concreting. F. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier required by this Section. Page-10 Milibank Affordable Housing ■* 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE H. Do not install formwork which will interfere with inspection of in-place reinforcing until after inspection has been completed. ! ► I. Provide smooth form finish,as outlined in Section 10.2.2 of ACI 301,to all exposed walls.Form facing material shall produce a smooth,hard,uniform texture on the concrete;the arrangement of facing material shall be orderly and symmetrical,with the number of seams kept to a practical minimum. It shall be supported by studs or other backing capable of prevent excessive deflection-see 3.12 for tolerances. Materials with raised grain,tom surfaces,worm edges,patches,dents,or other defects which may impair concrete surfaces shall not be used. Tie holes and defects shall be patched. All fins shall be completely removed. J. Provide a cast form finish to all concrete which is not exposed. K. Arrange forms to allow stripping without the removal of principal shores where required to remain in place. 3.04 FORMWORK ERECTION A. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Strengthen formwork liable to be overstressed by construction loads. B. Provide temporary ports in formwork to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. Close ports with tight-fitting panels,flush with inside face of forms, neatly fitted so that joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. C. Align joints and make watertight to prevent leakage of mortar and disfigured appearance of concrete. Keep form joints to a minimum. D. Provide chamfer strips on corners of exposed beams and where indicated on Drawings. E. Construct formwork to maintain the tolerances in accordance with ACI 301. 3.05 APPLICATION OF FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.Apply prior to placing reinforcing steel,anchoring devices,and embedded items. B. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces are scheduled to receive special finishes or applied coverings which may be affected by agent. Soak contact surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces wet prior to placing concrete. 3.06 INSERTS,EMBEDDED PARTS,AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for work embedded in or passing through concrete. B. Coordinate work of other sections in forming and setting openings, slots,recesses,chases,sleeves,bolts, anchors,and other inserts. C. Install accessories included in this Section or furnished by others in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,level and plumb.Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. D. Install waterstops continuous without displacing reinforcing.Heat seal joints to waterproof. E. Coordinate work of other sections,where plumbing inverts conflict with bottom of footing elevations,drop bottom of footings and run lines over the footings and through the wall. 3.07 REMOVAL OF FORMS,SHORINGS,AND RESHORING A. Notify Architect/Engineer 24 hours prior to removing formwork. " B. Construct and remove all formwork, shoring,and reshoring in conformance with ACI 301 and ACI 307. C. Remove formwork progressively so that no unbalanced loads are imposed on the structure. Page-9 Millbank Affordable Housing oft 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE F. Provide concrete for roof crickets and rat slabs with the following characteristics: Unit/Lightweight Concrete Measurement Compressive Strength(28 days) 2500 psi Aggregate Size(maximum) 5/8- inch Lightweight Aggregates Maximum Slump 4 inches Sacks of Cement(minimum) 5 sacks/cubic yd G. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 3091,3.8 by Method 1,trial batches or Method 2,field test data. Mix design for concrete to be pumped shall be submitted separately. H. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer. Use of w admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. Calcium chloride may be used only with written consent of Architect/Engineer. I. Use set-retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer. J. Specified slumps for proposed pump mixes shall not be exceeded at the discharge of the pump. K. Use water-reducing admixture only when approved by the Architect/Engineer. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.0 1 INSPECTION A. Verify lines, levels,and measurements before proceeding with formwork. B. Verify that anchors, seats,plates,reinforcement,and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed,held securely,and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. 3.02 FORMWORK DESIGN A. The design and engineering of the formwork,as well as the construction, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Design all formwork and formwork bracing,shoring,and reshoring in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI an 347. C. Design and execute all procedures,sequences and timing of removal forms, shores, and reshores in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 347. 3.03 FORMWORK PREPARATION A. Minimize form joints. Symmetrically align joints,and make watertight to prevent leakage of mortar. B. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping,so that concrete is not damage during its removal. w C. Obtain Architect/Engineer's approval for use of earth forms;hand-trim sides and bottoms of earth forms; remove loose dirt prior to placing concrete. D. Do not mix different form materials for same construction. No E. Patch all surface defects in reused form materials to ensure clean finish. F. Discard form materials which cannot be patched to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. OR G. All form materials for exposed surfaces shall be of good quality with minimal prior use at the start of work to ensure a good quality finish. no Page-8 Millbank Affordable Housing go 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE Provide material"Type","Grade",and"Class"to suit project requirements. 2.08 CONCRETE MIX A. Job Site Mixing:Mix materials for concrete in appropriate drum type batch machine mixer. For mixers of one cubic yard or smaller capacity,continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes,but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. For mixers of capacity large than one cubic yard, increase minimum 1-1/2 minutes of mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or fraction thereof. 1. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in work,indicating project identification name and number,date,mix,type,mix time,quantity and amount of water introduced. B. Ready-Mix concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94,and as herein specified. 1. During hot weather,or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete,a shorter mixing time than as specified in ASTM C 94 may be required. 2. When air temperature is between 85 deg F(30 deg C)and 90 deg F(32 deg C),reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes and when air temperature is above 90 deg F(32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. C. Provide concrete for the following characteristics for footings and walls: Unit/Normal Concrete Measurement Compressive Strength (28 days) 3000 psi Aggregate Size(maximum) 3/4-inch Air Entrainment(exterior exposure) 6 percent Maximum Slump 2-4 inches Sacks of Cement(minimum) 5-3/4 sack/cubic yd. D. Provide concrete of the following characteristics for slabs on grade&infill areas: Unit/Normal Concrete Measurement Compressive Strength(28 days) 3500 psi go Aggregate Size(maximum) 3/4-inch Air Entrainment(exterior exposure) 6 percent Maximum Slump 2-4 inches Sacks of Cement(minimum) 5-3/4 sack/cubic yd. E. Provide concrete for sidewalks and driveways with the following characteristics: Unit/Normal Concrete Measurement Compressive Strength(28 days) 4000 psi 3/4-Inch Crushed Stone 1080 lbs. '/2-Inch Crushed Stone 720 lbs. Sand 1300 lbs. Air Entrainment(exterior exposure) 5-7 percent Maximum Slump 3 inches Sacks of Cement(minimum) 7 sack//cubic yd. Page-7 Millbank Affordable Housing IM 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE wo C. Use of other admixtures requires the written approval of the Architect/Engineer. 2.05 ACCESSORIES/FORMWORK w� A. Form Ties: Removable,snap-off metal type of minimum working strength of 3,000 psi when assembled; free of defects and will leave holes no larger than 1"in concrete surface. B. Form Release Agent: Colorless material which will not stain concrete,absorb moisture, or impair natural ' bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete. C. Fillets for Chamfered Corners: Wood strips type; 1"x 1"(inch)size;maximum possible lengths. D. Nails, Spikes,Lag Bolts,Through-Bolts,Anchorages: Sizes as required;of strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. E. Pre-molded Joint Filler: 1/2-inch thick,pre-molded asphaltic board complete with anchorage. F. Formed Construction Joints: Minimum 24-gauge galvanized steel. G. Structural Plates and Angles: ASTM A36,of size and shape indicated in contract documents. Hot dip �w galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A525;2.5 oz./sq. ft. 2.06 ACCESSORIES/REINFORCEMENT A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type or acceptable patented system. B. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs,spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations,unless otherwise acceptable.All accessories for epoxy coated reinforcing shall be epoxy coated or stainless steel. C. For slabs-on-grade,use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. D. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces,where legs of supports are in contact with forms,provide supports with legs which are plastic protected(CRSI,Class i)or stainless steel protected(CRSI,Class 2). E. Anchor Rods: ASTM A307. 2.07 ACCESSORIES/CONCRETE A. Non-Shrink Grout: CRD-C 621,Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,cement,water- reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2400 psi in 2 days and 7000 psi in 28 days. B. Joint Filler: Premolded asphaltic type, 1/2-inch thick. C. Concrete Curing Products: « " 1. Damp Curing: a. Heavyweight burlap,cotton mats,or rugs kept continuously wet. b. Application of waterproof sheet materials conforming to"Specifications for Waterproof Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete";ASTM C 171. D. Vapor Barrier: 1. Under all slabs on grade, use 8-mil polyethylene sheet applied in widest possible width with 6-inch minimum lap joints,taped. E. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate,or acrylic base. F. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881,two component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Page-6 Millbank Affordable Housing ,,,�, 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE E. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood,lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two (2)edges and one side for tight fit. F. Form Coatings:Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond with,stain or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.02 MATERIALS/REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade billet steel deformed bars. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ANSI/ASTM A185,plain type in flat sheets or coiled roll. C. Smooth Dowels: ASTM A615,60 ksi yield grade billet steel plain bars. go D. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82,plain,cold-drawn, steel. E. Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A 497. F. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters,chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing,supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations,unless otherwise acceptable. G. For slabs-on-grade,use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. H. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces,where legs of supports are in contact with forms,provide supports with legs which are plastic protected(CRSI,Class 1 )or stainless steel protected(CRSI,Class 2). 2.03 MATERIALS/CONCRETE go A. Cement: ASTM C150,normal, Type 1,air entraining-Type IA Portland type,with low alkali content. Only one brand of cement shall be used for all concrete to be left exposed so that an even coloring is assured for all such surfaces. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33,. Grade according to ACI recommendations. Fineness modules (FM)shall not vary by more than 0.15 from FM used in mix design. 1. For exterior exposed surfaces,do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing spalling-causing go deleterious substances. 2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 but which have shown by special text or actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used when acceptable to Architect. C. Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali,organic matter,or other materials detrimental to concrete. D. Lightweight Aggregate: 1. All lightweight aggregate shall be expanded shale fully conforming to ASTM C330. Maximum size of the coarse aggregate shall be 3/4-inch,and the gradation requirements shall conform to ASTM C330. 2. Aggregate shall be Norlite or approved equal by Architect/Engineer. E. Calcium chloride is not permitted. 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Air-Entrainment: ASTM C 260. Entrain not less than 3 percent nor more than 6 percent of air by volume. B. Chemical Admixture: ASTM C494,Type A-water reducing,Type B-retarding,Type C-accelerating, and Type F-high range water reducing. Page-5 Millbank Affordable Housing 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement,name of concrete testing service,concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure,design compressive strength at 28 days,concrete mix proportions and materials;compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day test. 1.08 PRODUCT DATA OR A. Submit product data as requested. B. Provide product data for specified products. C. Submit manufacturer's instructions as requested. 1.09 SUBMITTALS w A. Refer to section 01300-SUBMITTALS for submittal provisions and procedures. B. Submit concrete mix designs for different strengths of normal concrete and lightweight concrete,with supporting mix-proportioning data. C. Product Data: Submit data for proprietary materials and items,including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures,patching compounds,waterstops,joint systems,dovetail slots,masonry anchors, curing compounds,dry-shake finish materials and others as requested by Architect,and/or indicated on the drawings. D. Shop Drawings-Reinforcement: Submit shop drawings for fabrication,bending and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315"Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete *�+ Structures"showing bar schedules,stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars,and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.Provide similar detailed drawings for all masonry reinforcing. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Protection of Footings Against Freezing: Cover completed work at footing level with sufficient temporary or permanent cover as required to protect footings and adjacent subgrade against possibility of freezing; maintain cover for the time period as necessary. 1.11 CLOSE-OUT REQUIREMENTS: A. Refer to section 01700-PROJECT CLOSE-OUT for punch list,record drawings, and other project close- out requirements and procedures. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS/FORMWORK A. Plywood: Douglas Fir exterior grade A-C; sound,undamaged sheets with straight edges and with visible APA grade stamp;minimum 5/8-inch thickness. B. Lumber: Douglas Fir species minimum construction grade,with grade stamp clearly visible or as required for strength. C. Steel: Minimum 16 gage,well-matched,tight fitting,stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearances of finished surfaces. D. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise indicated construct formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood metal,metal-framed plywood faced or other acceptable panel-type materials,to provide continuous, straight, smooth,exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practical size to minimize ' number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. Provide form materials with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection. Page-4 Millbank Affordable Housing ..r 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE D. Not less than four(4)6-inch x 12-inch test specimens and one(1)simultaneous slump test shall, except as herein noted,be made for each 50 cubic yards or less of each class. Additional sets for each 25 cu.yds. thereafter of each concrete class placed in any one day. w 1. One concrete test cylinder will be tested at seven(7)days;one tested at 28 days; one reserved for a 56 day test if directed by the Engineer and in accordance with ASTM C39. l 2. When frequency of testing will provide less than five(5)strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five(5)randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 3. Air content and one slump test will be taken at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of t concrete; additional tests are to be taken when the consistency seems to have changed. 4. For concrete cast during cold weather, an additional cylinder is to be cast. This cylinder is to be cured PW at the site under the same conditions as the in-place concrete is cured. Cylinder should be tested at 28 days in conformance with ASTM C39. 5. Where concrete is pumped,temperature,air entrainment,and slump shall be measured before pumping in accordance with ASTM C 172. 6. At the discharge of the pump,testing firm will take cylinders,measure temperature and air entrainment,and perform slump tests. E. Samples of concrete for test shall be at least one cubic foot in volume, shall be taken from the mixer,and shall always be within fifteen(15)minutes of removal from the mixer. Portions of the sample used for air entrainment tests shall be discarded and in no case remixed with the remainder of the sample or used for a clump or compression test specimen. F. All test samples and results of corresponding slump tests shall be delivered to the laboratory on the day following casting. During the transportation to the laboratory,test samples shall be adequately protected from temperature extremes and shall be carried in such a manner that they do not roll,bump,or jar against one another.All test samples shall be suitably identified in such a manner so that no doubt can ever exist as to what job,concrete, slump,or date they represent. G. Results of Seven-Day Tests: I. It shall be the responsibility of the testing laboratory to indicate on the seven-day test report whether or not the concrete as tested is expected to meet the specifications. 2. In the event that the seven-day test indicates the possibility or probability of a 28-day strength below specification,the Architect/Engineer's representative may require the Contractor,at the Contractor's expense and as directed by the Architect/Engineer's representative,to conduct further curing of the concrete represented by questionable specimen and/or to modify the mix for future work. H. Results of 28-Day Tests: 1. If the average strength of any set of 28-day test specimens is less than the requirement of the specification, all concrete represented by this test shall be classified as not being in conformance with the drawings and specifications and subject to the provisions of the paragraph"Defective Concrete". 1. In addition to the cylinder tests mentioned above,if there exists any evidence of faulty workmanship on the part of the Contractor,violation of contract documents,or likelihood of concrete having been damaged by frost,impact,or vibration,core and/or load tests may be required. These tests are to be performed at the Contractor's expense under the direction of the Architect/Engineer and shall conform to the ACI Code 318 and the ASTM Standards C42,C174,and C803. If core and/or load tests indicate placement of concrete below specification,the provisions of paragraph"Defective Concrete"shall apply. J. An accurate daily record of the locations in which concrete is placed shall be maintained by the Contractor. He shall furnish a certified copy of this record weekly to the Architect/Engineer. K. Test results will be reported in wiring to Architect and contractor within 24 hours that tests are made. Page-3 Millbank Affordable Housing am 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE M0 O. PS-1: Construction and Industrial Plywood P. ANSUAWS DIA: Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel Q. ASTM-A36: Steel R. ANSI/ASTM A82: Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement S. ANSUASTM A185: Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement T. ASTM A615: Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement U. ASTM C33: Concrete Aggregate V. ASTM C94: Ready-Mixed Concrete W. ASTM C150: Portland Cement X. ASTM C171: Specifications for Waterproof Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete Y. ASTM C260: Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete Z. ASTM C494: Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construction and erect concrete formwork in accordance with ACI 301 and 347. B. Perform concrete reinforcement work in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice and Documents 63 and 65. C. Conform to ACI 301,315, and 318. D. Inspection service to inspect all reinforcing placement for its conformance to the Contract Documents. Inspection service to report to Owner and Architect/Engineer before placement of concrete if placement does not conform to Contract Documents. E. Contractor to cooperate with the reinforcing inspection service and the Architect/Engineer to ensure that reinforcing is placed properly.Contractor to notify inspection service and Architect/Engineer 24 hours prior to time reinforcing can no longer be inspected due to formwork place and/or concreting. Contractor to rectify reinforcing placement errors that are identified by the inspection service and/or Architect/Engineer " at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Obtain materials from same source throughout the work. G. Testing: Tests for compressive strength in accordance with the ASTM Standard Method C39. IF 28 day cylinder tests are low or if 7 day tests indicate probability that 28 day results will be substandard,adjust the mix proportions. If the strengths fail to meet the requirements of ACI 318,Chapter 4,the Architect/ Engineer may require,at the Contractor's expense,the following: 1. Tests in accordance with the"Standard Method of Securing,Preparing,and Testing Specimens from Hardened Concrete for Compressive and Flexural Strength"ASTM C42. 2. Load tests for that portion of the structure where the questionable concrete has been placed. Such tests shall be in accordance with the provisions of ACI 318,Chapter 20. 3. In the event that concrete does not test satisfactorily,the Owner will order the work removed or strengthened properly at the Contractor's expense. 1.07 TESTING AND INSPECTIONS A. General testing and taking of cylinders for cast-in-place concrete shall be done by a testing laboratory designated by the Architect,and unless otherwise noted,all cost and expenses occasioned by the employment of such laboratory shall be borne by the Owner.Contractor shall pay for any additional testing w ordered by the Architect/Engineer or his representative when the material or structure so tested fails to comply with the contract documents. B. Testing firm will take cylinders,measure air entrainment, and perform slump tests in accordance with ASTM C 31,C 172,C231 and C 143. C. Compression tests shall be made in a laboratory in accordance with ASTM Standard C39. Page-2 Millbank Affordable Housing ,,, l 03300 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03300—CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PART I -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - Specification Sections apply to this Section. B. Provide all plant facilities, labor,materials,tools,equipment,transportation, supervision,and related work necessary to complete the work specified in this Section and as shown on the Drawings. C. Refer to sections 01600-MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT and 01631 -PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS for general requirements covering material storage,installation, and substitutions. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work shall include careful examination of the Drawings to determine quantities,options,locations, sizes,types, and details of work described in this Section,including but not limited to the following: 1. Footings and foundation walls, including retaining walls. 2. Slabs on grade inside and outside the building,walks,docks,platforms. 3. Concrete formwork, including shoring,bracing,anchorage,and openings for other trades. 4. Concrete reinforcement and accessories, including reinforcing bars,welded wire fabric,chairs,etc. 5. Equipment pads and bases. 6. Grouting of leveling plates, supply and install. 1.03 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Section 02220-Excavation and Backfill B. Section 05120-Structural Steel: Grout Pack for Leveling Plates C. Section 07900-Joint Sealer 1.04 RELATED WORK INSTALLED BUT NOT INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Expansion joint Covers and embedded items B. Miscellaneous anchoring devices furnished under other Sections 1.05 REFERENCES A. 780 CMR Commonwealth of Massachusetts State Building Code B. ACI-117: Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials C. ACI-301: Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings D. ACI-302.1: Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Finishing E. ACI-304: Recommended Practice for Measuring,Mixing,Transporting,and Placing Concrete F. ACI-305: Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting G. ACI-306: Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting H. ACI-308: Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete I. ACI-315: Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement J. ACI-318: Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete K. ACI-347: Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork L. CRSI-65: Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and Nomenclature M. CRSI-63: Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcement 'w N. CRSI: Manual of Standard Practice Page-1 Millbank Affordable Housing go on 02900 LANDSCAPE WORK- LAWNS AND PLANTING NO 5. Staking of Trees: Support trees immediately after planting. Stake trees as detailed and specified. NO EXCEPTIONS!! ALL TREES WILL BE STAKED. DECIDUOUS AND EVERGREEN. .�. a. Staking: Drive two (2) stakes per tree vertically into ground at least three (3') feet deep at 12 to 18 inches from tree trunk. Attach stakes to tree as detailed, at approximate five (5') foot height, using two (2) strands of wire and hose. b. Removal of staking materials is the responsibility of the Owner. c. Mulching: Mulch all tree pits and shrub beds with four (4) inch settled laver of organic mulch. Deposit mulch to entirely cover tree pit, saucer, or shrub bed to edge of paving or plant bed edge. ., E. Maintenance: Repair any damage to lawn areas resulting from planting operations. Maintain all planting until Substantial Completion by cultivating, spraying,weeding, watering, and other necessary operations. Weed beds and tree pits as directed by the Architect. F. Guarantee: All plant materials to be true to name and size and in vigorous growing condition. Guarantee healthy materials for one year from time of planting. Replace any dead, unhealthy, or unsightly plants as soon as weather permits. Contractor's responsibility ends with final (one year after Substantial Completion) acceptance, except any replaced material to be guaranteed for one year from date of replacement. END OF SECTION 02900 Page8 Millbank Affordable Housing �' 02900 LANDSCAPE WORK- LAWNS AND PLANTING 4. Hydrogel: Viterra Gelscape or approved equal. A granular, organic, super-absorbent hydro-gel which is non-phytotoxic and with a neutral pH. 5. Water: Clean, potable, available from on site. << 6. Organic Mulch: Required in all tree pits and shrub beds. Mulch to be shredded native hardwood and softwood bark. Submit sample for Architect's approval. Wood chips are ?! not acceptable. 7. Stakes: Sound wood--cedar or treated with wood preservatives. 8. Hose Friction Guards: New or used 1/2 inch diameter, two-ply reinforced rubber garden hose at least ten (10") inches long. 9. Wire: 12 gauge pliable new annealed iron. C. Existing work: Examine work prepared to receive planting and notify Architect of any defects. Commencement of this work implies acceptance by Planting Contractor of preparatory work by others. D. Installation and Workmanship 1. Layout: Take necessary field measurements to locate trees and shrubs where shown. Should obstructions above or below ground dictate, alternate locations will be designated by Architect. Planting Contractor to coordinate with General Contractor's superintendent regarding existing and new underground utilities presenting a hazard to his excavation work. 2. Planting Pits: Dig pits and prepare soil prior to moving plants to respective locations. Excavate circular pits with vertical sides unless plants are designated to be planted in �w beds. Diameter of pit to be two (2') feet greater than size of ball or spread of roots. Depth of pit to allow six (6") inches of prepared topsoil in tree pits and bottom of shrub beds. 3. Soil Preparation: Mix existing stockpiled topsoil to be used in planting as follows: five parts topsoil, one part peat humus, one part manure fertilizer. Except for ericaceous plants, very acid soils(pH less than 6)to be mixed with sufficient lime to produce a pH of 6 to 6.5. Mixing to be done prior to installation of topsoil into the beds. Notify Architect when this process will occur. Hold surface of topsoil at least four (4") inches below adjacent pavement of curbing to allow bark mulch to be installed flush with adjacent improvements. 4. Setting Plants: Plant vertically, faced to give best appearance of relationship to adjacent areas. Leave burlap in place, untie from crown and bury edges of burlap. Cut off all frayed or broken roots cleanly. Place prepared soil and carefully compact, avoiding injury to roots and filling all voids. Add water when hole is three-quarters full and allow to drain away. Fill hole to finished grade and form a shallow saucer around each plant. Later, add additional soil as needed. Pagel Millbank Affordable Housing OF 02900 LANDSCAPE WORK- LAWNS AND PLANTING B. Materials: ON 1. Plant Materials: ON a. Nursery-grown unless otherwise shown. b. Conform to American Association of Nurserymen's Standards for Nursery Stock for size, number of leaders, shape, health, etc. c. Plant names conform to Standardized Plant Names by American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature. d. If discrepancy exists between quantities shown on plan and plant list, those shown on the plan govern. .� e. Sizes given on plant list are minimum. All plants to equal or exceed those sizes. Plants to be sound, healthy, vigorous and free of plant pests, insects, disease,or injuries. f. Do necessary pruning at time of planting. g. No substitutions will be permitted except on submission of proof that any plant called for is unobtainable. h. Root Protection: (1) Plants designated "B&B" on plant list to be dug with firm, natural ball of earth large enough to encompass fibrous and seeding root system necessary for full plant recovery. Wrap with burlap and bind with twine or cord. When necessary to prevent ball from cracking, ball to be secured to a platform. (2) Protect"B&B"material which cannot be planted immediately on delivery from drying wind and sun by covering with moist soil or mulch. Water as necessary until planted. 2. Loam (topsoil): Available on site in plant beds by others. Surplus stockpile will be available on-site for landscaper's use during his operations. General Contractor will consolidate and fine-grade all surplus topsoil stockpiles as directed when landscaper has completed his work. 3. Fertilizer: w a. Commercially bagged or dehydrated cow manure such as Bovun , Dry-Conure, or Longhorn Brand manure. b. Chemical planting tablets such as A riform Planting Tablets by Leslie Agriform Corp., Newark, CA; Eesy-Grown S&D Products, Prairie du Chein, WI; or Rapid- Grow by R.G. Corp., Danville, NY. Page6 Millbank Affordable Housing 40 02900 LANDSCAPE WORK- LAWNS AND PLANTING 2. areas and spots not showing a prompt "catch" shall be scarified, refertilized, and reseeded at two-week intervals until 90% seed germination is attained; 3. no bare spots larger than one (1') foot square with less than 75% germination shall be evident; 4. no perennial or noxious weeds shall be evident. H. Maintenance: 1. Care for all new lawn areas (seed and sod) by watering, weeding, fertilizing, mowing, overseeding, rolling, and trimming, as needed and as directed throughout all constructed phases until acceptance by the Architect. The Contractor shall maintain all new lawns through a minimum of three (3) mowings. 2. Lawns are to be carefully mowed (except 2:1 slope embankments) to a 2-1/2 inch height when the average height of grass is 3-1/2 inches to 4 inches. Trim around all obstacles in the lawn areas (poles, hydrants, fences, etc.). Ensure string trimmers do no damage to tree bark. Remove any heavy clipping deposits. 3. All lawns are to be fertilized at four-month intervals through the entire maintenance period when growth is active. Apply a 10-6-4-50% organic fertilizer at 15 pounds per 1000 square feet. Notify Architect one (1)week prior to each fertilization. Within all lawn construction areas one final fertilizer application will be required 5-6 months following Architect's acceptance. Along with the final application include one application of pre-emergent weed killer (Tupersan) per manufacturer's recommendations. I. Acceptance: Final inspection of all lawn areas by the Architect will occur upon written request of the Landscape Contractor within one week of the "final" mowing. No acceptance of partial lawn areas will occur, and all required lawn maintenance shall be performed by the Landscape Contractor until acceptance by the Architect. 3.2 PLANTING A. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment required to complete this work including: 1. Excavation, topsoil preparation, and backfilling planting pits and beds. Additional topsoil, if necessary, will be provided by General Contractor in on-site stockpiles. 2. Furnish and install plant materials, mulch, fertilizer, and soil conditioners. 3. Watering: From on-site sources. 4. Staking, guying, wrapping, and mulching. 5. Clean-up, maintenance, guarantee. Page5 Millbank Affordable Housing MR 02900 LANDSCAPE WORK- LAWNS AND PLANTING 3. Approved topsoiled areas will then be scarified to two(2") inch depth and thoroughly settled prior to laying of sod, or sodding. C. After topsoil has been spread to required depths (6 inches to 8 inches in lawn areas, 15 inches in plant beds), apply fertilizer and lime in separate operations, and incorporate well into the soil by discing, tilling, or other approved method. Apply the balance to the sod four to six weeks later. Notify Architect when this application is scheduled to occur. D. For lawn bed preparation, all material shall be applied in accordance with topsoil test recommendations. Lime shall be applied evenly by mechanical means, spread at the rates called for. E. Hydraulic Seeding: Application of soil conditioners and seed to be accomplished in one w„ operation by use of approved mobile hydraulic system operated by experienced personnel. Materials to be mixed with water in slurry tank and kept in an agitated state so that materials will be uniformly suspended in the water. Spraying equipment to produce uniform and even distribution of materials on areas designated. Inadequately covered areas to be resprayed as necessary, or as designated by the Architect. 1. Soil conditioners and seed to be mixed for application as follows: a. Hydro-gel: 12-16 lbs./acre - add to water and dissolve prior to adding any other soil conditioners or amendments. b. Mulch: 1500 lbs./acre minimum c. Fertilizer (urea form): 400 lbs./acre (in addition to seed bed preparation.. d. Soil stabilizing agent: 106 lbs./acre e. Seed: 200 lbs./acre f. Water: 3000 gallons/minute 2. Conform to applicable requirements of Massachusetts D.P.W. "Standard Specifications" Section 765, Para. 756.64. F. Lawn Irrigation: If necessary, Landscape Contractor shall provide and install temporary, portable lawn irrigation systems for all areas of new lawn. Sources of water will be from on-site sources. The temporary systems shall provide enough water to ensure keeping seed constantly moist after germination. 1. The Landscape Contractor shall activate the watering systems as weather and seed conditions dictate on a schedule to ensure all areas receive ample water to protect it from die-back. The temporary systems are not to be terminated until approved by the Architect. Repair and maintain as necessary. G. Definition of an Acceptable Lawn: The stand of grass shall be well-rooted, thick, uniformly healthy in color, texture, and growth pattern and meet the following criteria: 1. a minimum germination rate of 90% for seeded lawns; Page4 Millbank Affordable Housing ' " 02900 LANDSCAPE WORK- LAWNS AND PLANTING certification. 2. Thickness of Cut: 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch exclusive of top growth and thatch. 3. Pad Size: a. Width: 12 inch to 18 inch (supplier's standard) b. Length: 2 feet to 6 feet (supplier's standard) 4. Broken, torn, or uneven pads will not be acceptable. Standard sections shall be strong enough to support their own weight when suspended vertically from a firm grasp on the upper 10 percent of the section. F. Crab Grass Preventative: Tupersan or approved equal. G Broad Leaf Weed Control: 2-4-D material, or approved equal. H. Soil Insect Control: Diazinon or Chlordane or approved equal. I. Hydro-mulch: Weyerhauser Silva-Fibre cellulose pulp with non-toxic coloring agent. J. Soil Stabilizing Agent: Weyerhauser Verdyol Complex. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. Take samples of screened topsoil as directed by Architect, and submit to approved testing laboratory for analysis to determine fertilizing and liming requirements and for physical analysis to determine the physical make-up and drainage characteristics of the topsoil. Send a copy of all test results to Architect. Rate of fertilizing and liming is to be based on this report. B. Before any lawn work, rake the finished surface to grade to form a smooth, friable, fine texture, free of hollows or depressions. Remove any stones larger than one (1") inch, sticks, roots, or other extraneous matter. Irrigate soil within 12 to 24 hours prior to laying sod. 1. Landscape Contractor shall fine-grade topsoil areas to remove any uneven transition areas or depressions over one (1") inch in depth. When completed, roll all topsoiled areas with a 200 pound water ballast roller to settle all grades in future lawn areas. Any unevenness shall be regraded utilizing on-site topsoil or by removing topsoil from high spots. 2. When this work has been completed, the Architect will approve the final grading of all lawns prior to any additional work. Page3 o, Millbank Affordable Housing .o X" 02900 LANDSCAPE WORK- LAWNS AND PLANTING phosphoric acid and potash shall be 10-6-4 ratio, 50 percent organic. C. Lime: Ground limestone (dolomite) 95 percent passing a number 100 mesh screen. D. Lawn Seed: Fresh, clean, new crop composed of the following varieties mixed in the proportions shown by weight and testing the minimum percentages of purity and germination. .� GRASS SEED MIXTURES* RATE AND CHART GENERAL LAWN AREAS Proportion Purity Germination Kind of Seed by Weight by Weight by Weight Kentucky Bluegrass - Merit 25 98 90 Kentucky Bluegrass 15 87 75 Chewing Fescue - Koket 15 98 75 Perennial Ryegrass - Palmer 45 98 90 Rate of Application: five pounds per 1000 square feet. *Landscape Contractor may adjust the mixtures with approval of the Landscape Architect. LAWN AREAS - 3:1 SLOPES AND GREATER Proportion Purity Germination *■ Kind of Seed by Weight by Weight by Weight Perennial Rye Grass 30 98 90 Kentucky 31 Tall Fescue 20 -- -- .. Creeping Red Fescue 40 98 75 Kentucky Bluegrass - Merit 10 98 90 Rate of Application: five pounds per 1000 square feet. Seed shall be delivered in unopened bags with label attached. Furnish dealer's guaranteed statement of composition of mixture and percentages of purity and germination. Submit tags to Owner's representative for approval. TEMPORARY GRASS AREAS Annual Rye Grass 45 Perennial Rye Grass 15 Creeping Red Fescue 15 Kentucky 31 Tall Fescue 15 Kentucky Blue Grass 10 E. Sod: Strongly rooted, eighteen months old, fresh cultivated turf grass sod; weed, disease and insect free. Sod shall be composed of 100 percent Kentucky Bluegrass in variety. 1. Bluegrass: two or more of these varieties: Merion, Fylking, Windsor. Submit Page2 Millbank Affordable Housing 02900 LANDSCAPE WORK- LAWNS AND PLANTING SECTION 02900 - LANDSCAPE WORK- LAWNS AND PLANTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Contractor under this section shall furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for construction and maintenance of all the lawns and planting in accordance with this section of the specifications and applicable drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. In general, the work of this section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Construction and maintenance of all new lawns (hydroseeded ) until completion of maintenance program as specified elsewhere herein 2. Planting, maintaining, and mulching of new trees and shrubbery. B. Related work: specified under other sections includes, but is not limited to: 1. Earthwork- Section 02200 1.4 LAWN CONSTRUCTION A. Seasons: Construct lawns during favorable season, preferably between August 15 and October 15. Contractor may do lawns during unseasonal conditions (except between June 1 and July 30), but no additional compensation will be allowed, and work is subject to Architect's approval as to time and methods of operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Available in place or in on-site stockpiles to be provided by General Contractor. General Contractor is to spread topsoil to rough grade (after mechanical screening through maximum one [1] inch screen) for all lawn work and install adequate depths in plant beds for topsoil improvements by Landscape Contractor. See Construction Methods specified elsewhere herein. B. Fertilizer: Commercial branded fertilizer with analysis stated on each bag. Nitrogen Pagel Millbank Affordable Housing t .■ 02368 ROLLED STEEL SECTION PILES 3.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. Owner to employ an inspector to provide on-site observations during the pile placement,to provide all necessary reports and to observe test pile. B. Accurately record the following: C. Sizes, lengths, and locations of piles. 1. Sequence of driving. 2. Drilling: Hole diameters. 3. Final base and head elevations 3.06 UNACCEPTABLE PILES A. Unacceptable Piles:Piles that fail tests, are placed out of position,are below cut-off elevations,or are damaged. B. Provide additional piles or replace piles to conform to specified requirements END OF SECTION ■u, w� Page-4 Millbank Affordable Housing ■* 02368 ROLLED STEEL SECTION PILES with the Work. D. Protect structures near the Work, from damage. tw E. Prepare to place piles from existing site elevations. 1.14 CLOSE-OUT REQUIREMENTS: A. Refer to section 01700-PROJECT CLOSE-OUT for punch list,record drawings,and other project close- out requirements and procedures. go PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Piles: ASTM A500,Grade B;structural steel,rolled HSS sections,minimum 42 ksi yield strength; sizes and lengths as indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Pile Cushion Cap: Formed and welded steel 2.02 MATERIALS/ACCESSORIES A. Points,driving cap;to suit pile shape. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify lines,levels,and measurements before proceeding with driven piles. 3.02 DRILLING A. Drill only through strata that obstructs driving and adjacent to existing structures when it is recorded that driving is adversely affecting the structure. B. Hole Diameter: Maximum 1 inch larger than pipe diameter 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Protect pile head during driving,using cushion cap with full bearing on pile butt for even distribution of hammer blow. OP B. Deliver hammer blows to central axis of pile. C. If driving is interrupted before refusal,drive an additional 12 inches before resuming recording of performance data. D. Re-drive piles,which have lifted due to driving adjacent piles,or by,soil uplift. E. Do not damage piles during driving operations. ON F. Cut off tops of piles to elevations indicated and prepare pile top to receive pile caps. 3.04 TOLERANCES on A. Maximum Variation from Vertical For Plumb Piles: 1 in 48. B. Maximum Variation from Required Angle For Batter Piles: 1 in 24. C. Maximum Variation from Pile Cut-off Elevation: 4 inches. D. Maximum Out-of-Position: 2 inches. Page-3 Millbank Affordable Housing 02368 ROLLED STEEL SECTION PILES 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspection service to inspect the pile layout for its conformance to the Contract Documents. Inspection service to report to Owner and Architect/Engineer before placement of piles if the placement does not conform to Contract Documents. B. Contractor to cooperate with the pile inspection service and the Architect/Engineer to ensure that the pile ** locations have been laid out properly. Contractor to notify inspection service and Architect/Engineer 24 hours prior to commencement of driving piles. Contractor to rectify pile placement errors that are identified by the inspection service and/or Architect/Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Obtain materials from same source throughout the work. 1.10 UNIT PRICES rwe A. Designed Piles: 1. Basis of Measurement and Basis of Payment: Described in Section 01025. on B. Actual Piles: 1. Determined by quantity of piles identified in the Contract Documents. ws 2. Determined by the 70-foot length of pile(below existing ground surface)as identified in the Contract Documents. C. Adjustments in Contract Price will be made due to changes in number and length of piles,based on unit no prices established in the Agreement as follows: 1. Actual Pile Quantity,and 2. Contract unit price per unit length including test piles,multiplied by the Actual Pile Length. Base measurement on total linear measurement of piling from base to cut-off elevation. D. Determination of Unit Measurements: Identified by site measurements and verified by the Architect/ Engineer. 1.11 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit product data as requested. we B. Provide product data for specified products. 1.12 SUBMITTALS an A. Refer to section 01300-SUBMITTALS for submittal provisions and procedures. B. Product Data:Provide details of collars,tips,splices and cushion blocks. C. Shop Drawings: These drawings shall show the pile member sizes,their arrangement and principal dimensions and all other necessary information. Indicate details and schedule of pile installation sequence. Identify pile length and shapes to suit design loads. Use or reproductions of Contract Document as shop drawing submittal will not be accepted and will be returned rejected. Facsimile,(faxed)submissions of shop drawings are not acceptable,will not be checked and no response will be made. .er D. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that steel casing meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.13 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Obtain prior approval of hammer type to be used. B. Use driving method which will not cause damage to nearby structures. C. Notify adjacent and affected landowners and building occupants with 30 days notice before proceeding Page-2 Millbank Affordable Housing w� 02368 ROLLED STEEL SECTION PILES SECTION 02368—ROLLED STEEL SECTION PILES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - Specification Sections apply to this Section. B. Provide all plant facilities, labor,materials,tools,equipment,transportation,supervision,and related work r necessary to complete the work specified in this Section and as shown on the Drawings. C. Refer to sections 01600-MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT and 01631 -PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS for general requirements covering material storage,installation, and substitutions. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work shall include careful examination of the Drawings to determine quantities,options, locations, sizes,types,and details of work described in this Section. 1.03 RELATED WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Section 02220-Excavation and Backfill B. Section 03300—Cast In Place Concrete #, C. Section 05120-Structural Steel: Grout Pack for Leveling Plates 1.04 RELATED WORK INSTALLED BUT NOT INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Miscellaneous anchoring devices furnished under other Sections 1.05 REFERENCES A. 780 CMR Commonwealth of Massachusetts State Building Code B. ASTM-A500: Round H.S.S. (Hollow Structural Shape) C. ANSUAWS DIA: Structural Welding Code 1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Drive piles to a load supporting capacity of 22 tons. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum(5)five years documented experience. B. Design and select pile components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work,verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months 1.08 SCHEDULING A. Schedule work under the provisions of Section 01300. B. Schedule Work to perform driving during hours outlined by the Owner Page-1 Millbank Affordable Housing 1P 02361 TERMITE CONTROL B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA- Registered Label instructions. D. Post warning signs in areas of application. E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 02361 Page4 Millbank Affordable Housing ,�,, 02361 TERMITE CONTROL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of the soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been ■r corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparing substrate. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil and around foundations. B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended by termiticide manufacturer. C. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products. 3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute the treatment evenly. 1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 3. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. Page3 Millbank Affordable Housing an 02361 TERMITE CONTROL as A. Applicator Qualifications: A PCO who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced and has completed termite control treatment similar to that indicated for this Project and whose work has a record of successful in-service performance. B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a Federal registration number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with EPA-Registered Label requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, and grading and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs, before construction. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of .� other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by applicator and Contractor certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. C. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent, and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to the product's EPA-Registered Label. WX Page2 Millbank Affordable Housing ,�„ 02361 TERMITE CONTROL SECTION 02361 - TERMITE CONTROL t_ PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following for termite control: 1. Soil treatment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency. B. PCO: Pest control operator. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Treatments and application instructions, including EPA-Registered Label. B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of termite control products certifying that treatments furnished comply with requirements. C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. D. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's record information, including the following as applicable: 1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used. + 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Pagel Millbank Affordable Housing an 02300 EARTHWORK 10. Testing equipment will be provided by and testing performed by the Testing Agency, except as otherwise provided by Contract. Upon request by the Owner, the Contractor shall ~` provide such auxiliary personnel and services as needed to accomplish testing work and to repair damage caused thereby to permanent work. 3.21 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 3.22 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02300 Page12 Millbank Affordable Housing ,�, 02300 EARTHWORK Field density and moisture testing shall also be performed whenever there is a change in the composition or moisture content of the material being placed or a change in placement of compaction procedures to include changes in lift thickness, compaction equipment or number of passes of compaction equipment. A minimum of 50 field density tests will be performed. 5. Building Interior Backfill: Field density-moisture testing shall be performed on all fill and backfill inside the building exterior foundation walls. One test is to be performed for each 1,000 sq. ft. of area, per lift. In addition to testing each 1,000 sq. ft. of area, per lift, field density-moisture testing shall also be performed to test the compaction of all existing material in the following locations: a. Continuous wall footings: At two (2) locations per each length of foundation wall, beginning and ending between any corner in the foundation wall. b. Isolated column footings: At eight (8) column locations. The Architect/Engineer shall designate the columns after award of the contract. 6. Laboratory moisture-density testing (ASTM Method D-1557) shall be performed for each type or source of fill or backfill material used and whenever gradation testing indicates that - the composition of the fill or backfill material has changed. 7. All testing shall be conducted in accordance with applicable ASTM standards. The testing agency shall be a certified testing laboratory in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, except that earthwork testing may be performed by an engineering firm provided the testing work is performed under the supervision of a registered professional engineer, who is experienced in soils and foundation engineering. Testing shall not be performed by the Contractor's employees or by any employees of Subcontractors other than the Testing Agency. The Architect will approve or select the Testing Agency from a list of at least three firms furnished by the Contractor. ! " 8. Initial gradation and laboratory moisture-density testing results shall be provided to the Architect at least five days in advance of use of the proposed moisture testing results shall be provided to the Architect, as soon as practical after testing, but, in no case, later than 8:30 AM on the day following testing. 9. Neither the presence of the Testing Agency or Architect nor any observation for testing performed shall excuse the Contractor from defects discovered in his work. Pagel1 Millbank Affordable Housing so 02300 EARTHWORK .� 3.19 DRAINAGE COURSE A. Under slabs-on-grade, install drainage fabric on prepared subgrade according to w manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. Place drainage course on drainage fabric and as follows: B. Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade and as follows: 1. Compact drainage course to required cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. �* 2. When compacted thickness of drainage course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer. 3. When compacted thickness of drainage course exceeds 6 inches, place materials �► in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted. 3.20 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Observations: 1. Refer to Section 01400 Quality Control Services a. Codes and Standards: Comply with all rules, regulations, laws and ordinances of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, and of all other governing authorities having jurisdiction. All labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to make the work comply with such requirements shall be provided without additional cost. b. Building Earthwork Observation and Testing: The Contractor is responsible for arranging testing of soils during the earthwork operations specified within this Section, in accordance with Section 01400 — Quality Control Services. The services of the Testing Agency shall include the following subject to the requirements indicated. 1. Laboratory testing and analysis of borrow and fill materials including on-site materials proposed for reuse as fill. *■ 2. Observation of fill and backfill methods for conformance with specification requirements and field density-moisture testing of compacted fill and backfill 3. Gradation analysis shall be performed periodically on borrow and fill materials with at least one test performed per every 100 cubic yards of each type of material placed. Gradation tests shall also be performed whenever there is a visual change in the composition of the material being used. " 4. Field density-moisture testing shall be performed periodically on all fill and backfill below proposed pavements with at least one test performed per every 50 cubic yards of fill placed. Page10 Millbank Affordable Housing 02300 EARTHWORK C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. 3.17 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE * A. Drainage Piping: Drainage pipe is specified in Division 2 Section "Foundation Drainage Systems." B. Subsurface Drain: Place a layer of drainage fabric around perimeter of drainage trench as indicated. Place a 6-inch course of filter material on drainage fabric to support drainage pipe. Encase drainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches of filter material and e• wrap in drainage fabric, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches. 1. Compact each course of filter material to 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. C. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches of final subgrade. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of drainage fabric, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches. 1. Compact each course of filter material to 95 percent of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 698. 2. Place and compact impervious fill material over drainage backfill to final subgrade. 3.18 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES A. Install separation fabric on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. B. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on separation fabric according to fabric manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: C. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared subgrade and as follows: 1. Place base course material over subbase. 2. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 3. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer. 5. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted. D. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory F soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. Page9 Millbank Affordable Housing 02300 EARTHWORK 1. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 3. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. 3.14 MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.15 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, ' and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight *� according to ASTM D 1557: 95 percent Method C. 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 92 percent. ' 3.16 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. ■" 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 112 inch. Page8 Millbank Affordable Housing 02300 EARTHWORK 3.11 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. PR 3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells,joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. e: C. Provide 4-inch- thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase. D. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system. E. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. F. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is removed. G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. 3.13 FILL a A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills. B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: Pagel Millbank Affordable Housing 02300 EARTHWORK *� 1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. .. 3. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. D. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to .A allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. 1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 3.8 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. 1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to .w Contract provisions for changes in the Work. C. Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades. D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect. 3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION "* A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by Architect. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect. 3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. ., Page6 Millbank Affordable Housing „� 02300 EARTHWORK 2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required. 3.3 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. 3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations from 12 inches above bottom of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades. 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: 12 inches on each side of pipe or conduit. 2. Clearance: As indicated. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. Pages Millbank Affordable Housing 02300 EARTHWORK E. Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. F. Base: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. G. Structural Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; 100 percent passing a 4-inch sieve 50-85 percent passing a 1/2-inch sieve, 40-75 percent passing a No. 4 sieve, 10-35 percent passing a No. 40 sieve, and 0-8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. H. Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. 2.2 ACCESSORIES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. Page4 Millbank Affordable Housing 02300 EARTHWORK B. The testing agency's presence does not include supervision or direction of the actual work by the Contractor, his employees or agents. Neither the presence of the testing performed by him shall excuse the Contractor from defects discovered in his work. C. Compaction Control: Wherever a percentage of compaction for backfill is indicated or specified, it shall be the in-place density divided by the maximum density and multiplied by 100. D. The maximum density shall be the density at optimum moisture as determined by ASTM Standard Methods of Test for Moisture — Density Relations of Soil Using 10-lb. Rammer and 18-inch Drop, Designation D1557-78. Where all of the material passes a No. 4 sieve, Method A shall be used, and where material is retained on the No. 4 sieve, Method D shall be used. E. The in-place density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method, Designation D 1556-64, or by Nuclear Resonator. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials. Page3 Millbank Affordable Housing 02300 EARTHWORK 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. I. Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for asphalt paving, or layer placed between the subgrade and a concrete pavement or walk. J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. K. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Owner reserves the right to retain an independent testing laboratory to perform on- site observation and testing during the following phases of the construction operations. Such testing is separate from, and does not relieve the contractor from related responsibilities and requirements of this Section and Section 01400 — Quality Control Services. The services of the testing laboratory may include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Observation during excavation and replacement of existing fill under building areas. •� 2. Observation during placement and compaction of fills. 3. Laboratory testing and analysis of fill and bedding materials specified, as required. 4. Observe construction and perform water content, gradation and compaction tests at a frequency and at locations determined by the testing agency. The results of these tests will be submitted to the Architect, copy to the Contractor, on a timely basis so that the Contractor can take such action as is required to remedy indicated deficiencies. 5. Observation of fills following interruptions by rains or other inclement weather. Page2 Millbank Affordable Housing i PR 02300 EARTHWORK SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade. 4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements. 5. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 6. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls." 2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course over vapor retarder. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Layer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving. C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. E. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water. F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations. 1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Architect. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet in width and pits more than 30 feet in either length or width. f Pagel Millbank Affordable Housing A 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES .m k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. *' I. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. m. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean ! exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. n. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. „ o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not bum waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01770 Page 7 Millbank Affordable Housing „�„ ATTACHMENT A 18. The owner of the property described in this Order must advise any potential buyer of the property that any construction or alteration to said property, including brush cutting or clearance,may require approval by the Northampton Conservation Commission. Any instrument conveying any or all of the owners' interest in said property or any portion thereof, shall contain language similar to the following: "This property is subject to the Northampton Wetlands Protection 5 Ordinance and/or Wetlands Protection Act. Any construction or G / maintenance work performed on this property requires an Order of / Conditions, and/or a Determination of Applicability from the Northampton Conservation Commission.,, 19. A copy of this Order and associated plans shall remain on site during all construction and/or building activities. The project manager and all equipment operators shall be r j familiar with the approved plans, and shall be informed of their location on the_site. G?!` This location shall be accessible to all contractors whenever work is occurring on site. 20. All required permits must be obtained from the Army Corp of Engineers (Section 404, Water Quality Certification), Planning Board, Zoning Board,Department of Public Works, or Building Inspector prior to the start of projects involving fill within any wetland resource area; 21. No disposal of soils or other materials shall be allowed within: a 100-year floodplain; 40 feet of the 100-year floodplain elevation; any wetland; or any area within 100-feet of a wetland, unless such areas are specifically approved by the Commission, in accordance with 310 CMR 10.00, and City of Northampton Ordinances - Chapter 24; 22. All revised plans,referenced within this Order of Conditions, shall be approved by the -Conservation Commission and incorporated into this Order by reference and shall be followed during the course of construction. Ongoing conditions that shall not expire with the issuance of a Certificate of Compliance are as follows: (Insert numbers). Maintenance of the Stormwater Management Facilities per No. 1. 24. Prior to the start of any site work, excavation or construction, a preconstruction conference shall be held on the site,between the contractor conducting the work, the site/project engineer, the applicant, and a member or agent of the Conservation Commission, in order to ensure that the requirements of this Order are understood by all" parties. Prior to the pre-construction meeting, all erosion control devices must be installed, also. Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection DEP File Number: ti }" = Bureau of Resource Protection - Wetlands 246-482 WPA Form 5 — Order of Conditions Provided by DEP Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act M.G.L. c. 131, §40 D. Recording Information (cont.) Detach on dotted line, have stamped by the Registry of Deeds and submit to the Conservation Commission. - ----------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------ I To: Northampton Conservation Commission j Conservation Commission Please be advised that the Order of Conditions for the Project at: Michelman Avenue 246-482 Project Location DEP File Number Has been recorded at the Registry of Deeds of: Hampshire County Book Page for Valley Millbank Limited Partnership do Valley Community Development Co Property Owner and has been noted in the chain of title of the affected property in: Book Page In accordance with the Order of Conditions issued on: January 18, 2001 Date If recorded land,the instrument number identifying this transaction is: Instrument Number If registered land, the document number identifying this transaction is: Document Number pa - Signature of Applicant wP.4 Form 5 Rev.02100 Page 7 of 7 DEP File Number: Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection _ Bureau of Resource Protection - Wetlands 246-482 WPA Form 5 - Order of Conditions Provided byDEP F� Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act M.G.L. c. 131, §40 rT C. Appeals The applicant, the owner, any person aggrieved by this Order, any owner of land abutting the land subject to this Order, or any ten residents of the city or town in which such land is located, are hereby notified of .■+ their right to request the appropriate DEP Regional Office to issue a Superseding Order of Conditions. The request must be made by certified mail or hand delivery to the Department, with the appropriate filing fee and a completed Appendix E: Request of Departmental Action Fee Transmittal Form, as provided in 310 CMR 10.03(7)within ten business days from the date of issuance of this Order, A cop;of the request shall at the same time be sent by certified mail or hand delivery to the Conservation Commission and to the applicant, if he/she is not the appellant. The request shall state clearly and concisely the objections to the Order which is being appealed and how the Order does not contribute to the protection of the interests identified in the Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act, (M.G.L. c. 131, §40)and is inconsistent with the wetlands regulations (310 CMR 10.00). To the extent that the Order is based on a municipal ordinance or bylaw, and not on the Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act or regulations, the Department has no appellate jurisdiction. D. Recording Information This Order of Conditions must be recorded in the Registry of Deeds or the Land Court for the district in which the land is located, within the chain of title of the affected property. In the case of recorded land,the Final Order shall also be noted in the Registry's Grantor Index under the name of the owner of the land subject to the Order. In the case of registered land, this Order shall also be noted on the Land Court Certificate of Title of the owner of the land subject to the Order of Conditions. The recording information .� on Page 7 of Form 5 shall be submitted to the Conservation Commission listed below. Northampton Conservation Commission w� �w w WPA Form 5 Rev.o2loo Page 5 of 7 Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection DEP File Number: 4 Q Bureau of Resource Protection - Wetlands 246-48�_ == WPA Form 5 — Order of Conditions Provided by DEP Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act M.G.L. c. 131, §40 B. Findings (cont.) Additional conditions relating to municipal ordinance or bylaw: This Order is valid for three years, unless otherwise specified as a special condition pursuant to General Conditions#4,from the date of issuance. January 18, 2001 Date This Order must be signed by a majority of the Conservation Commission.The Order must be mailed by certified mail (return receipt requested)or hand delivered to the applicant.A copy also must be mailed or hand delivered at the same time to the appropriate Department of Environmental Protection Regional Office (see Appendix A) and the property owner(if different from applicant). signatures: WIN r I 2 On. 18th Of January, 2001 Day -Month and Year before me personally appeared - JI�,11 r` L2l.i l .1 to me known to be the person described in and who executed the foregoing instrumen'' ,. .` acknowledged that he/she executed the same as his/her free act,and deed. Z Notary Public My Commission Expires t&K* � ••�: This Order is issued to the applicant as follows: e ❑ by hand delivery on © by certified mail, return receipt requested,on February 28 2001 Date Date Form 5 WP Date sent to DEP: February 28, 2001 Page 5of7 ,� Rev.02100 DEP File Number: Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection Bureau of Resource Protection - Wetlands 246-482 WPA Form 5 — Order of Conditions Provided by DEP := Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act M.G.L. c. 131, §40 .� B. Findings (cont.) .� 15. This Order of Conditions shall apply to any successor in interest or successor in control of the property subject to this Order and to any contractor or other person performing work conditioned by this Order. 16. Prior to the start of work, and if the project involves work adjacent to a Bordering Vegetated Wetland, the boundary of the wetland in the vicinity of the proposed work area shall be marked by wooden stakes or flagging. Once in place, the wetland boundary markers shall be maintained until a Certifcate of Compliance has been issued by the Conservation Commission. 17. All sedimentation barriers shall be maintained in good repair until all disturbed areas have been fully stabilized with vegetation or other means.At no time shall sediments be deposited in a wetland or -, water body. During construction, the applicant or his/her designee shall inspect the erosion controls on a daily basis and shall remove accumulated sediments as needed.The applicant shall immediately •� control any erosion problems that occur at the site and shall also immediately notify the Conservation Commission,which reserves the right to require additional erosion and/or damage prevention controls it may deem necessary. Sedimentation barriers shall serve as the limit of work unless another limit of work line has been approved by this Order. Special Conditions (use additional paper, if necessary): See Additional Conditions"Attachment A" wA Findings as to municipal bylaw or ordinance Furthermore, the Northampton hereby finds (check one that applies): w Conservation Commission ❑ that the proposed work cannot be conditioned to meet the standards set forth in a municipal ordinance or bylaw specifically: Name Municipal Ordinance or Bylaw Therefore, work on this project may not go forward unless and until a revised Notice of Intent is submitted which provides measures which are adequate to meet these standards, and a final Order of Conditions is issued. ❑ that the following additional conditions are necessary to comply with a municipal ordinance or bylaw, specifically: Name Municipal Ordinance or Bylaw The Commission orders that all work shall be performed in accordance with the said additional conditions and with the Notice of Intent referenced above. To the extent that the following conditions modifv or differ from the plans. specifications. or other or000sals submitted with the Notice of Intent. WPA Forth 5 Rev.02/00 Page 4 of 11R Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection DEP File Number: ' = . Bureau of Resource Protection - Wetlands 246-482 6- = WPA Form 5 - Order of Conditions Provided by DEP Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act M.G.L. c. 131, §40 B. Findings (cont.) 4. The work authorized hereunder shall be completed within three years from the date of this Order unless either of the following apply: a. the work is a maintenance dredging project as provided for in the Act; or -- b. the time for completion has been extended to a specified date more than three years, but less than five years, from the date of issuance. If this Order is intended to be valid for more than three years, a le extei�sio i date an�d the special cir cup i Staff ices warranting the extei ided 'time period are set forth as a special condition in this Order. 5. This Order may be extended by the issuing authority for one or more periods of up to three years each upon application to the issuing authority at least 30 days prior to the expiration date of the Order. C_ 6. Any fill used in connection with this project shall be clean fill.Any fill shall contain no trash, refuse, rubbish, or debris, including but not limited to lumber, bricks, plaster,wire, lath, paper, cardboard, pipe, tires, ashes, refrigerators, motor vehicles, or parts of any of the foregoing. 7. This Order is not final until all administrative appeal periods from this Order have elapsed, or if such an appeal has been taken, until all proceedings before the Department have been completed. 8. No work shall be undertaken until the Order,has become final and then has been recorded in the Registry of Deeds or the Land Court for the district in which the land is located,within the chain of title of the affected property. In the case of recorded land, the Final Order shall also be noted in the Registry's Grantor Index under the name of the owner of the land upon which the proposed work is to be done. In the case of the registered land, the Final Order shall also be noted on the Land Court Certificate of Title of the owner of the land upon which the proposed work is done.The recording information shall be submitted to this Conservation Commission on the form at the end of this Order, which form must be stamped by the Registry of Deeds, prior to the commencement of work. 9. A sign shall be displayed at the site not less then two square feet or more-than three square feet in size bearing the words, "Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection" [or, "MA DEP"] r ; "File Number 246-482 10. Where the Department of Environmental Protection is requested to issue a Superseding Order, the Conservation Commission shall be a party to all agency proceedings and hearings before DEP. 1 }j 11. Upon completion of the work described herein, the applicant shall submit a Request for Certificate of V L. Compliance (WPA Form 8A) to the Conservation Commission. R�4 12. The work shall conform to the plans and special conditions referenced in this order. 13. Any change to the plans identified in Condition#12 above shall require the applicant to inquire of the Conservation Commission in writing whether the change is significant enough to require the filing of a new Notice of Intent. 14. The Agent or members of the Conservation Commission and the Department of Environmental Protection shall have the right to enter and inspect the area subject to this Order at reasonable hours to evaluate compliance with the conditions stated in this Order, and may require the submittal of any data deemed necessary by the Conservation Commission or Department for that evaluation. WPA Form 5 Page 3 c(7 Rev.O?J00 - DEP File Number: Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection Bureau of Resource Protection - Wetlands we 246-482 WPA Form 5 - Order of Conditions Provided by DEP Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act M.G.L. c. 131, §40 B. Findings Findings pursuant to the Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act: Following the review of the above-referenced Notice of Intent and based on the information provided in this application and presented at the public hearing, this Commission finds that the areas in which work is proposed is significant to the following interests of the Wetlands Protection Act. Check all that apply: ❑ Public Water Supply ❑ Land Containing Shellfish ❑ Prevention of Pollution ❑ Private Water Supply ❑ Fisheries ® Protection of Wildlife Habitat ❑ Groundwater Supply ® Storm Damage Prevention ® Flood Control Furthermore,this Commission hereby finds the project,as proposed, is:(check one of the following boxes) Approved subject to: ® the following conditions which are necessary, in accordance with the performance standards set forth in the wetlands regulations, to protect those interests checked above.This Commission orders that all work shall be performed in accordance with the Notice of Intent referenced above, the following General Conditions, and any other special conditions attached to this Order.To the extent that the following conditions modify or differ from the plans, specifications, or other proposals submitted with the Notice of Intent, these conditions shall control. Denied because: ❑ the proposed work cannot be conditioned to meet the performance standards set forth in the wetland regulations to protect those interests checked above. Therefore,work on this project may not go w forward unless and until a new Notice of Intent is submitted which provides measures which are adequate to protect these interests, and a final Order of Conditions is issued. ❑ the information submitted by the applicant is not sufficient to describe the site, the work, or the effect w of the work on the interests identified in the Wetlands Protection Act.Therefore,work on this project may not go forward unless and until a revised Notice of Intent is submitted which provides sufficient information and includes measures which are adequate to protect the Act's interests, and a final .0 Order of Conditions is issued. A description of the specific information which is lacking and why it is necessary is attached to this Order as per 310 CMR 10.05(6)(c). General Conditions (only applicable to approved projects) 1. Failure to comply with all conditions stated herein, and with all related statutes and other regulatory measures, shall be deemed cause to revoke or modify this Order. 2. The Order does not grant any property rights or any exclusive privileges; it does not authorize any injury to private property or invasion of private rights. 3. This Order does not relieve the permittee or any other person of the necessity of comiplying with all other applicable federal, state, or local statutes, ordinances, bylaws, or regulations. WPA Forth 5 Rev.02100 Page 2 of 7 Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection DEP File Number: Bureau of Resource Protection -Wetlands 246-482 ` = WPA Form 5 - Order of Conditions Provided byDEP r Massachusetts Wetlands Protection Act M.G.L. c. 131, §40 A. General Information Important: From: When filling out forms on Northampton Conservation Commission the computer, Conservation Commission use only the tab key to This issuance if for(check one): move your Pit cursor_do Order of Conditions not use the return key. ❑ Amended Order of Conditions To: Applicant: Property Owner (if different from applicant): Valley Community Development Corporation Valley Millbank Limited Partnership,c/o Valley Name Community Development Co. Name 16 Armory Street 16 Armory Street Mailing Address Mailing Address Northampton MA 01060 Northampton MA 01060 City/Town State Zip Code City/Town State Zip Code 1. Project Location: Michelman Avenue Northampton Street Address Cityrrown 32C 141 ' Assessors Map/Plat Number Parcel/Lot Number 2. "Property recorded at the Registry of Deeds for: go Hampshire 4119 231 County Book Page NIA Certificate(if registered land) �l11 3. Dates: November 3, 2000 January 4, 2001 January 18 2001 Date Notice of Intent Filed Date Public Hearing Closed Date of Issuance 4. Final Approved Plans and Other Documents (attach additional plan references as needed): Topographic Survey of Existing Conditions (sheet 1) Site Plan (sheet 2) 11/20/00 Site Plan for Notice of Intent (sheet 2)revised 11/20/00 & 1216/00 11/3/00 Construction Details (sheets 3-5)prepared for Valley Millbank Limited Partnership by 11/3100 ' E B Holmberg &Associates 5. Final Plans and Documents Signed and Stamped by: Emily B Holmberg P.L.S. Name 6. Total Fee: $500 under WPA& S50 under Northampton Wetlands Protection Ordinance (from Appendix B:Wetland Fee Transmittal Form) Page 1 of 7 WPA Form S Rev.02100 1 r Planning Board - Decision City of Northampton File No.: PL-2002-0005 Date: .September 11, 2001 Pursuant to Massachusetts General Laws(MGL),Chapter 40A,Section 11,no Site Plan Approval, or any extension, modification or renewal thereof,shall take effect until a copy of the decision bearing the certification of the City Clerk that twenty days have elapsed after the decision has been filed,or if such an appeal has been filed that it has been dismissed or denied,is recorded in the Hampshire County registry of Deeds or Land Court, as applicable and indexed under the name of the owner of record or is recorded and noted on the owner's certificate of title.The fee for such recording or registering shall be paid by the owner or applicant.It is the owner or applicant's responsibility to pick up the certified decision from the City Clerk and record it at the Registry of Deeds.(Please call the City Clerk prior to picking up the decision.) The Northampton Planning Board hereby certifies that Site Plan Approval has been GRANTED and that copies of this decision and all plans referred to in it have been filed with the Planning Board and the City Clerk. Pursuant to Massachusetts General Laws,Chapter 40A,Section 15,notice is hereby given that this decision is filed with the Northampton City Clerk on the date below. w. If anyone wishes to appeal this action,an appeal must be filed pursuant to MGL Chapter 40A,Section 17,with the Hampshire County Superior Court or the Northampton District Court and notice of said appeal filed with the City Clerk within twenty days(20)of the date of that this decision was filed with the City Clerk. Applicant: Valley Community Development Corporation &HAP DECISION DATE: August 23,2001 ..DECISION FILED WITH THE CITY CLERK: September 11, 2001 IN- Planning Board - Decision City of Northampton File No.: PL-2002-0005 Date: September 11, 2001 Kenneth Jodrie votes to Grant MOTION MADE BY: SECONDED BY: VOTE COUNT: DECISION: " Anne Romano Kenneth Jodrie 6 Approved with Conditions MINUTES OF MEETING: Minutes are available in the Office of Planning 8 Development. CERTIFICATE OF SERVICE Pursuant to M.G.L. Chapter 40A, Section 11, I, Angela Dion, Board Secretary, hereby certify that I caused copies of this Decision to be mailed, postage- prepaid, to the Applicant and Owner on September 11, 2001. 11R GeoTMS®1998 Des Lauriers&Associates,Inc. Planning Board - Decision City of Northampton File No.: PL-2002-0005 Date: September 11, 2001 w 9. "First Floor Plan"prepared for Millbank Affordable Housing,Northampton,MA. Sheet A1.1,prepared by Carlson& Schmitt Architects, Inc.,dated July 2, 2001. 10. "Second Floor Plans"prepared for Millbank Affordable Housing,Northampton,MA.Sheet A1.2,prepared by Carlson& Schmitt ON Architects,Inc., dated July 2, 2001. 11. "Third Floor Plans"prepared for Millbank Affordable Housing,Northampton,MA.Sheet A1.3,prepared by Carlson &Schmitt Architects,Inc.,dated July 2, 2001. wu 11. "First Floor Plan"prepared for Millbank Affordable Housing,Northampton, MA.Sheet A 1.4,prepared by Carlson& Schmitt Architects,Inc.,dated July 2, 2001. w 13. "Exterior Elevations"prepared for Millbank Affordable Housing,Northampton;MA.Sheet AZ 1,prepared by Carlson&Schmitt Architects,Inc.,dated July 2,2001. In Approving the Site Plan, the Planning Board found: A. The requested use protects adjoining premises against seriously detrimental uses because the project is a further extension of existing use and the project allows for provisions for surface water drainage,sound and sight buffers and preservation of views,light and air as depicted on plans and information submitted with the application. B. The requested use will promote the convenience and safety of vehicular and pedestian movement within the site and on adjacent streets,minimize traffic impacts on the streets and roads in the area because the new walkways connect all three buildings and extend to the Michelman Street boundary. Additional parking spaces will be added and should relieve some of the on street parking on Miche/man.No additional driveway openings or curb cuts are plannned.New signs will help distribute traffic onto Millbank Place for safer access to Pleasant Street. C. The requested use will promote a harmonious relationship of structures and open spaces to the natural landscape,existing buildings and other community assets in the area because the project is proposed to minimally intrude into the wetlands buffer and it will be in keeping with the character of the existing neighborhood. D. Provisions for emergency vehicles,persons with disabilities and safe and convenient arrangement of parking and loading spaces have been incorporated into the plans submitted with the application. ICI► E. The requested use will not overload,and will mitigate adverse impacts on,the City's resources including the effect on the City's water supply and distribution system,sanitary and storm sewage collection and treatment systems,fire protection,streets and schools, because new stormwater management system complying with DEP regulations and approved by the Conservation Commission have been provided on-site. 40 F. The requested use meets all special regulations set forth in Section 11.6 of the Zoning Ordinance. In addition,in reviewing the Site Plan submitted, the Planning Board found that the application comp lied with the following technical performance standards. 1. No new curb cut is requested. 2.Pedestrian, vehicular and bicycle traffic are separated on site to the extent possible. !w The Planning Board voted 6:0 to Grant the waivers as requested in the application. COULD NOT DEROGATE BECAUSE: O FILING DEADLINE: MAILING DATE: HEARING CONTINUED DATE: DECISION DRAFT BY: APPEAL DATE: 71512001 7/19/2001 8/23/2001 916/2001 REFERRALS IN DATE: HEARING DEADLINE DATE: HEARING CLOSE DATE: FINAL SIGNING BY: APPEAL DEADLINE: 711212001 91912001 812312001 812312001 101112001 FIRST ADVERTISING DATE: HEARING DATE: VOTING DATE: DECISION DATE: 7/12/2001 712612001 8/23/2001 9/11/2001 SECOND ADVERTISING DATE: HEARING TIME: VOTING DEADLINE: DECISION DEADLINE: 711912001 9:30 PM 121812001 12/8/2001 MEMBERS PRESENT: VOTE: Anne Romano votes to Grant Julie Hooks Davis votes to Grant w George Kohout votes to Grant Keith Wilson votes to Grant Daniel Yacuzzo votes to Grant w GeoTMS®1998 Des Lauriers&Associates, Inc. Planning Board - Decision City of Northampton File No.: PL-2002-0005 Date: September 11, 2001 OR APPLICATION TYPE: SUBMISSION DATE: PS Major Site Plan 71612001 Applicant's Name: Owner's Name: Surveyor's Name: NAME: NAME: COMPANY NAME: VALLEY CDC VALLEY MILLBANK LTD PARTNERSHI ADDRESS. ADDRESS: ADDRESS: 16 ARMORY ST 16 ARMORY STREET TOWN: STATE: ZIP CODE: TOWN: STATE: ZIP CODE: TOWN: STATE: ZIP CODE: NORTHAMPTON MA 01060 NORTHAMPTON MA 01060 PHONE NO.: FAX NO.: PHONE NO.: FAX NO.: PHONE NO.: FAX NO.: (413)586-5855 EMAIL ADDRESS: EMAIL ADDRESS: EMAIL ADDRESS: Site Information: STREET NO.: SITE ZONING: 79 MICHELMAN AVE URC TOWN: SECTION OF BYLAW: NORTHAMPTON MA 01060 MAP: BLOCK: I LOT: MAP DATE: ACTION TAKEN: 32C 141 001 Approved With Conditions NATURE OF PROPOSED WORK: Rehabilitation of existing 6 unit building at 18 Michelman Ave. New 3 story building including 4 3-bedroom townhouses, 3 1-bedroom apartments and 3 2-bedroom apartments. HARDSHIP: CONDITION OF APPROVAL: 1. Signs shall be posted on site,directing traffic to exit onto Millbank Place; 2. As offered by the applicant a recordable easement document for a 10'public,pedestrian easement along the river corridor shall be submitted to the Office of Planning&Development prior to the issuance of a building permit. 3. A copy of the final covenant document specifying the owner's responsibility for maintenance of the, stormwater management facilities shall be submitted to the Office of Planning&Development prior to the issuance of a building permit. FINDINGS: The Planning Board GRANTED the Site Plan based on the following plans: 1. "Topographic Survey of Existing Conditions,Northampton,Massachusetts"Sheet L-1,prepared for Valley Millbank Limited Partnership,prepared by E.B.Holmberg&Associates,dated June 29, 2001. 2. "Site Layout Plan, Northampton,Massachusetts,Sheet L-2,prepared for Valley Millbank Limited Partnership,prepared by E.B. Holmberg&Associates,dated June 29,2001. 3. "Grading Plan,Northampton,Massachusetts,Sheet L-3,prepared for Valley Millbank Limited Partnership,prepared by E.B. Holmberg &Associates, dated June 29,2001. 4. "Construction Details-1,Northampton,Massachusetts, Sheet L-4,prepared for Valley Millbank Limited Partnership,prepared by E.B. vp Holmberg&Associates,dated June 29,2000. 5. "Construction Details-2,Northampton,Massachusetts,Sheet L-5,prepared for Valley Millbank Limited Partnership,prepared by E.B. Holmberg&Associates,.dated June 29,2001. 6. 'Construction Details-3,Northampton,Massachusetts, Sheet L-6,prepared for Valley Millbank Limited Partnership,prepared by E.B. Holmberg&Associates,dated June 29,2001 and revised August 14, 2001. 7. "Planting Plan"prepared for Millbank Affordable Housing,Northampton,MA. Sheet L-7,prepared by John C. Walker-Landscape Architecture,Inc., Granby, Conn.and Carlson&Schmitt Architects, Inc.,dated July 2,2001. 8. "Site Details"prepared for Millbank Affordable Housing, Northampton,MA.Sheet L-8 prepared by John C. Walker-Landscape Architecture,Inc., Granby, Conn.and Carlson&Schmitt Architects,Inc.,dated July 2,2001. �Ilt - GeoTMS®1998 Des Lauriers&Associates,Inc. PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT • CITY OF NORTHAMPTON Cith)Half• 2 i o Main Street,Room t i • Ivortljampton,MA o i o60-31 g8 (41 3)587-t 266 • Fxc:587-t 264 Wayne Feiilen, Director titan ning@a nortbamPtonplanning.org n+n-w.nortljcnmptonplanning.org PR September 11, 2001 Valley CDC 16 Armory Street Northampton, MA 01060 RE: Site Plan Map 32C, Parcel 141 Dear Sir or Madam: Enclosed please find a copy of the Decision filed today in the City Clerk's office. Please be advised that there is a twenty-day (20) appeal period before the Permit becomes effective. Once the twenty-day(20) appeal period has expired and no appeals have been filed, it is the applicant's responsibility to do the following: 1. Pick up a Certified copy of the Decision from the City Clerk's office. Please call the City Clerk's office prior to picking up the Decision at 587-1224, and 2. Record the Decision at the Hampshire County Registry of Deeds. The permit does not take effect until it has been recorded. Should you have any questions or concerns, please do not hesitate to contact me at 587-1262. Sincerely, r Angela Dion Board Secretary Enclosure plattniPy board-conservation commissiorn •zoning boa rdof appeals •Housing partnersljip •reilevelopmentautboritn nortliampton GIS econutnicdevelottnient •commli nitnilevelopment -fiiStOriC iliStTiCt COM mission •historical cot"mission-centralbwsinessarcbitectii re ,. q.iyindl t+intr+Inn aeve(r,1 name P1 LIMITATIONS 1. The observations presented in this report were made under the conditions described herein. The conclusions presented in this report were based solely upon the services described in the report and not on scientific tasks or procedures beyond the scope of the project or the time and budgetary constraints imposed by the client. The work described in this report was carried out in accordance with the Statement of Terms and Conditions attached to our proposal 2. The analysis and recommendations submitted in this report are based in part upon the data obtained from widely spaced subsurface explorations. The nature and extent of variations between these explorations may not become evident until construction. If variations then appear evident it may be necessary to reevaluate the recommendations of this report. 3. The generalized soil profile described in the text is intended to convey trends in subsurface conditions. The boundaries between strata are approximate and idealized and have been - developed by interpretations of widely spaced explorations and samples; actual soil transitions are probably more erratic.For specific information,refer to the boring logs. 4. In the event that any changes in the nature,design or location of the proposed structures are planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report shall not be considered valid unless the changes are reviewed and conclusions of this report modified or verified in writing by OReilly,Talbot&Okun Associates Inc. It is recommended that we be retained to provide a general review of final plans and specifications. 5. Our report was prepared for the exclusive benefit of our client.Reliance upon the report and its conclusions is not made to third parties or future property owners. !M ON O'REILLY, TALBOT& OKUNASSOCIATES, INC. ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING NS-6 Page I OF I PROJECT Mill Bank A a"memts LOCATION Northampton,MA PROJECT NO. 1030 46 02 DRJLLINO CONTRACTOR FOREMAN DATE STARTED DATE FOUSHED Seaboard Environmental Pilling Frank 031082001 031082001 DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV. B•53 P DATUM TYPE BrT Hollow Slem Au v SEZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No.Sample 2 UNDIST. CASING TIME FBtSi COMPL. HR. CASING HAMM. WEIGHT DROP WATER LEVEL(FT.) Nmne SAMPLER BORING SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION SouNof proposed buildin HAMMER 140 30' ENGINEERIGEOLOGIST Ashley Midcicwiczi SAMPLES SAMPLES DEPTH Pwrm REC. TYPE/ DESCRIPTION FMLD SOIL REMARKS FT. I RESIST. IN. NO. MEASUREMENTS DESCRIPTION 174. 2'ASPHALT 12/11/5/11 12124 S-1 Medium dense,light brown,fine to medium SAND and GRAVEL,trace silt 1.5 FILL (W-2) (dark staining,little ash and brick in bottom 5") X— 12MI0110 20!24 S-2 Top IO':Medium dense,SAND and GRAVEL,little silt 1.3 (20-47 Sonora 10^.Su R SILT and CLAY,trace sand,uwc gravd 5 AEI " to 3 l IS 20 25 .,arks: I. Soil scteened in field using TEl 5608 ic6cm ced to PPM of Benzene in air. Readings in ppm. 'ND'indicascs none detected O'REILL Y, TALBOT& OKUN ASSOCIATES, INC. ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING NS-5 Pe 1 of 1 PROJECT Mill Bank A uVnenu Page CONTRACTOR DR.II.LING LOCATION Northam ton,MA PROJECT NO 1030 46 02 FOREWN DATE STARTED DATE FINISHED Seaboard Environmental Drilling Frank 07/06/2001 031OM2001 DRII LING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH B-5) GROUND SURFACE ELEV. � 4' DATUM TYPE 8fC Hollow Stem Auger �SIZE �101FCORE BARREL No.Sam le 2 CASING UNDIST.TIME FIRST COMPL CASING MM. WEIGHT P WATER LEVEL .) None SAMPLER BORING SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION East of bu8din HAMMER 140 SAMPLES 30' 6 ENGWEER/GEOLOGISf AshAshley Micki SAMPLES DEPTH PENE'm REC TYPE/ DESCRIITION FIELD SOfL REMARKS Pill FT. RESIST. I.I. NO. r EL'S C(. T'S MEASUREMEN DESCRn nON I 2'ASPHALT 9/516/7 16(24 S-1 Medium dense,fine b medium SAND,little Gravel,little silt 1.7 FILL (0.2) 9/619/1 S V24 S•2 Top S':Medium dace,fine to medium SAND,link Gravel,link silt (74) (dark sWninp ash and brick in bouom 7) S 10 r 15 t 20 1 i 25 i i i .narks: L Soil ser"ned infield using TE15608 refcreneed to PPM ofBcuene in air. Readinp is ppm 'ND'indicates none detected. O'REILLY, TALBOT& OKUNASSOCIATES, INC.. ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING NS-4 Pate 1 OF 1 PROTECT Mill Bads A DRILLING CONTRACTOR LOCATION Nonho n MA P0.01ECT NO. 1030 46 02 FOREL" DATE STARTED DATE FIIJLSHED Seaboard&ww m wA Dn)fv S Frank 03/OV2001 03/08!2001 DRIIIING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV. B•53 4' DATUM TYPE BIT HoR w Stem Auger SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL Na 2 UNDLST, CASING TIME CDMP FIRST L KR - SAMPLER CASING HAMM. WEIGHT DROP WATER LEVEL(FT.) O SAMPLER BORING Nam SAMPLER SpliSpoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION - Cara of but3dit8 HAMMER 110 SO' FIiGTNEERlGEOLOGIST Ashley Micldewi¢ SAMPLES SAMPLES DEPTH PENETR. REC. TYPE! DESCRIPTION FIELD SOIL REMARKS FT. RESIST. IN. MEASUREMENTS DESCRIPTION BUG IN. 27NI041 V24 S•1 Tap V.,Still,heht brows,SILT ad fine to medium SAND F� (0'•2) (dark uai io&oah and brick n brown 37 VT/S!/ 8/24 S•2 Medium dote,b&brown,litc m medium SAND and SULT.vacs gavel,vacs ash,brisk 1.2 (2'4) S 10 IS 20 25 R=arts: Sad screened in field=*TEI 5808 mfermed to PPM of Ber=w it sir Reading in pptn 'ND'indieaes none detected ' OWEILLY, TALBOT& OKUN ASSOCIATES, INC. w* ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING NS-3 Page t OF I PROJECT Mill Bank Apannients LOCATION Northam ton,MA PROJECT NO. J030 46 02 -` DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOREMAN - DATE STARTED DATE FINISHED Seaboard Environmental Drilling Frank 03/09/2001 03109/2001 DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV. B-53 4- DATUM TYPE BIT Hollow Stem Au cr SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No.Sam le 2 IINDISi CASING TIME FBLST CGMPL HR. CASING HAMM. WEIGHT DROP WATER LEVEL(FT.) None SAMPLER BORING SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION North tenter of bolding HAMMER 140 70' ENGIKEER/GEOLOGIST lAshicy Miclo SAMPLES SAMPLES DEPTS PENCTR. REC. TYPE/ DIESC.'REMOK FIELD SOIL I REMARKS FT. RESIST. IN. NO. s MIEASUREMENTS DESCRIPTION 5:16 IN. 2'ASPHALT _X— 12/tO/7/6 12724 S-t Top 8': Medimn dense,brown,fine to coarse SAND,sane silt,little gravel 1.1 SAND (O-2) ('dark staining,glass,brick in bottom 47 4/4/414 624 S-2 Medium,black,fine to coarse SAND with soon ash,brick,adore (T-41 S 10 IS 20 25 arks: I. Soil screened in field using TEI 580B rcferrneed to PPM of Bcnaene in air. Readings in ppm. 'ND'indicates none detected. tea t O'REILL Y, TALBOT& OKUN ASSOCIATES, INC. � . ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING NS-2 Page l OF I PROTECT Mill Bank A artmenn LOCATION Nonharn on,MA PROJECT NO. 1030 e6 02 DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOREANN DATE STARTED DATE YU41SHED Seaboard Environmental Drilling Frank ONM001 03/03n001 DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV. 8-53 4- DATUM TYPE BrT Hollow Stem Au3er SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No.Sam e 2 UNDO CASING TIME FIRST COMPL HR. CASING HAMM. WEIGHT DROP WATER LEVEL(FT.) None SAMPLER BORING SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION Eartol7praposedbuil din HAMMER 140 70• ENGEJEEMEOLOGIST IeyMicld SAMPLES SAMPLES DEPTH FENETA REC. TYPE/ DESCRIPTION FIELD SOd REMARKS FT. RHS2ST. IN. NO. r MEASUREMENTS DESCRIPTION ays IM. xr 2•ASPHALT 13/l/15110 12/24 S-1 Medium dense,brown.Fine to medium SAND,some silt,trace gravel,trace ark,brick 1.2 FILL (T-2) 10/10/3/12 16f24 S-2 Top V�, Medium dense,bto vo,fine to medium SAND,some silt,dark staining,glass 1.1 (2-41 ash,debris,slight odor Bottom 10•:Stiff,brown,SILT and fine to medium SAND S 10 IS 20 Pp 25 narks: 1. Soil screened in field using TEI 5308 referenced to PPM of Benzene in air. Readings in ppm. TID•indicates none detected O'IEILLY, TALBOT& OKUAIASSOCIATES, INC. ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING NS-1 Page I OF 1 PROJECT Mill Bank Apartments LOCATION ton,MA PROJECT NO. )030 46 02 r DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOREMMI DATE STARTED DATE FINISHED Seaboard Envionmontal Frank 03!08/2001 03/08/2001 DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV B s3 4 DATUM TYPE BIT Hollow Stem Auga - SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No. 2 UNDIST. CASING TIME FIRST COMPL HR. CASINGHAMM. WEIGHT DROP WATER LEVEL FT.) None SAMPLER BORING SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION Nartbem entrance to existing.parkn bt HAMMER 140 30' ENGINEEWGEOLOGIST Ashley Mickicwicz SAMPLES SAMPLES DEPTH Pumm REC. TYPE/ DESCRnTON FIELD SOIL REMARKS FT. RESIST. IN. NO. MCA.SURCMFMS DESCRIPTION Bub IN. _. 2'ASPHALT 131101918 L24 S-1 Medium dense,tight brown,fine to medium SAND,Gins gravel,trace sat 1.3 FILL (0'-2) 5/61N4 10/24 S-2 Dark staining it top 6,little brick.clan 1.5 (74) Lick brown,fns to ne6um SAND.Wk gravel,trace sat S — 10 IS 20 k 25 Remarks: 1. Sod screened in field wing TE1580B referenced to PPM of Benzene in air. Readings in ppm 'ND'indicates none deteetal. r O'REILLY, TALBOT& OKUNASSOCIATES, INC. r> ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING MBA-13 Page I OF 1 11M1 PROTECT Mill Bank Aparturents LOCATION Northam MA PROJECT NO. 1070 46 02 DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOREMAN DATE STARTED DATE FINISHED Seaboard Environmental Drilling.., Frank 03/01!2001 03108(2001 DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV. B•53 12, DATUM TYPE BIT Hollow Stem Auger SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No.Sample I CASING UNDIST TIME FBLST COMPL HR. CASING HAMM. WEIGHT DROP WATER LEVEL(FT.) one SAMPLER BORING SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION NonMm section oC buildin HAMMER 140 r 30' ENGINEER/GEOLOGIST Ashley Micki-wi SAMPLES SAMPLES DEPTH PF.NLM REC. TYPE! DESCRIPTION HELD SOIL REMARKS FT. RESIST. IN. NO. r MSASURYMYNTS DESCRIPTION Will Pl. ! 5 10 514/4/8 12(24 S-1 Top 41.Medium dente,light brown,fine to medium SAND and SILT,trace gravel, 1.1 SAND and (IT.12� little brick,ash,dark sniniag,slight odor SILT _- Bottom C:Medium dense,light brown,fine to median SAND and SILT,trace gra dry IS � 20 25 aks: 1. Soil screened in field using TEL 5808 mfrrcreed to PPM of Benzene in air. Readings in ppm. 'ND'indiaea none detected OWEILLY, TALBOT t& OWN ASSOCIATES, INC. ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING MBA-12 rage I OF I PROJECT Mill Bank Apartmenes LOCATION Nonhampton,MA PROJECT NO. 1030 46 02 DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOREJAAN DATE STARTED DATE FINISHED Seaboard Enviroonaual Drilling Fmk 03/01/2001 03!082001 DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV. 8-53 IT DATUM TYPE BIT Hollow Stem Au SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No.Sarnple I UNDIST. CASING TIME FIRST COMPL. HIL CASING HAMM WEiGIfr DROP WATER LEVEL(FT.) None SAMPLER BORING SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION Northern section of proposed building HAMMER 140 30' ENG04EERJGEOLOGLST Ashley Mkkie = SAMPLES > SAMPLES DEPTH PENETR. REC. TYPEJ DESCRn-qON FIELD SOIL REMARKS FT. RESIST. IN. NO. MEASUREMENTS DESCREMOi4 61/6 IV. i 5 10 8/SKJB 16124 S-1 Medium dense,gmy,fine to medium SAND and SILT,moist,no odor 1.1 SAND and (10'-12y SILT -- End of exploration at 12• all IS 20 23 Retssarks: - I. Sod screened in field using TEI 580B referenced to PPM of Benww in air. Readings in ppm. 'ND'indicates none detected • r O'REILLY, TALBOT& OKUN A SSO CIA TE S, INC. ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS Pig LOG OF BORING MBA(M1)-1I Page 1 of 1 PROJECT Mill Bank A artmenu LOCATION Northampton.MA PROJECT NO 1010 as o2 DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOgEh4gN DATE STARTED DATE FTNISIIED Seaboard Environmental Dnllit Frank 03/01/2001 03/08/2001 DRR-LING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV. B-S3 22' DATUM TYPE BR Hollow Stcm Auger SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No.Sample 3 UNDISf. CASING TIME FIRST COMPL HR CASING HAMM. WEIGHT DROP WATER LEVEL(FT.) 14' SAMPLER BORING Southern section or proposed building SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION along edgeofpavcmenl HAMMER 140 30' ENGBJEER/GEOLOGIST Ashley Mickiewicz SAMPLES SAMPLES DEPTU PENETR REC. TYPE/ DES")PTION FIELD son. It EMAR" FT. RESIST. IN. No. r MEASUREMENTS DESCRIPTION - BUf B4. Top 2 1/2'ASPHALT pavement ASPHAI-T x 21115114n 20/24 S-1 Very stiff,olive sm.fine to coarse SAND and SILT,trace clay,little fine gravel, 1.0 FILL (v-z) trace clay,moist 4, y s Il ,�1 1 lF e 1 3/3/3/11 L24 S-2 Medium,dark brown,organic(some(throw)SILT and fine to coarse SAND, 1.2 FILL d ark (3'-7) linle Sian,ash,brick,slight odor,dry I : y to y' , 10/7/110/11 10124 S-3 Medium dense,medium to coarse SAND,some silt,trace gravel,some debris, 1.3 d' +p��`M14,'' k• (10'.12) glass,ash,brick,black staining,slight odor,moist eGµ�px h� jig 1� A s r SAND and q I P, �'� r M' 39/37/29/17 IM24 S.4 Very dense,brown,medium to coarse SAND and GRAVEL,little silt.wct GRAVEL T' Vin: I 20 Varved CLAY - with sill and sand lenses 2x1/712 24/24 S-5 Medium,gray,fine SAND and SILT,some clay,(varved),wct (20'-22) End of exploration at 2Y 25 --1------.�-_. _ Remarks: 1. Soil screened in field using TEI 5808 referenced to PPM o(Bosxerre in air. Readings in ppen. 'ND'indicates none detected 2. Well sm at 20,PVC screen(20.10),P VC riser(IO-groundsur6cc),Bentanite(T-8),Sand,(20'-9'and 8'-groundsurface).Concrete top 6' O'REILLY, TALBOT& OKUN ASSOCIATES, INC. ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING MBA(MW)-10 Page I OF I PROJECT Mill Bank Apartri LOCATION Northarnplon,MA PROJECT NO. J030 46 02 DRJLLJNG CONTRACTOR FOREMAN DATE STARTED DATE FINISHED Seaboard Environatental Drilling Frank 03/0&12001 03/0812001 DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV. B-53 27 DATUM -- TYPE BIT Hollow Stem Auger SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No.Siample 5 UNDIST CASING TIME FIRST COMPL HR CASING HAMM. WEIGHT DROP WATER LEVEL(FT.) 14 SAMPLER BORING Northern section of proposed budding SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION along edge of pavernent HAMMER 1 30' ENGINEER/GEOL.OGIST Ashley Mkkiewicz SAMPLES ON SAMPLES Drr711 METR. REC. MFJ DESCRIP'T'ION FIELD SOIL REMARKS FT. RESIST. I W. NO. MEASUREMENTS DESCRIPTION Bus IN. Top3'ASPHALT ASPHALT 21/14/14/12 16124 S-1 Very stUE olive gray with brown motding,SILT•sons fine sand,fink cky, I.4 flLL t� 3. w" (0'-21 little fie gravel,moist ruw.yn, � z 11 � ,gN 12161617 8124 S-2 Sti brown SILT and CLAY,little brie 2 k.ash,black rtawng,slight odor,moist 1.0 T. 2/4/6/6 20124 S-3 Stiff,olive gray with brown mottling.organic SILT and fine to medium SAND, 1.2 +� ry 1µs.^ ' (10'-12� lark fibrous ogania,moat r N � +.J�}M, 1 �,p w 8/I I19f7 9l24 S-4 Medium deroe,brown,eoane SAND and GRAVEL,pieces of brick,net IT ry. W:x 20 VarvedCLAS „ with sih and sand lenses 3/21113 24124 S-5 Soft,gray.SAND sorts sik,some clay.(roved),wet - (20.221 End of exploration at 22' I 25 i Ranrks: 1. Soil screened in field using TEI 5808 referenced 10 PPM of Bmaene in air. Readings in ppm 'ND'indicates none detected 2. Well set at 20'.PVC screen(2(r-10'),PVC riser(10•-grourdsarfaee).Bentonite(7-81,Sand,(20',V and r-groiurisurface)Concrete top 6' O JREILLY, TALBOT& OKUN ASSOCIATES, INC. ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS 4!9 LOG OF BORING MBA-9 Page I OF 1 PROJECT Mill Banc ApartmeriLs LOCATION Northampton,MA PROJECT NO. 030 46 02 DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOREMAN DATE STARTED DATE FINISHED Seaboard Environmental Drilling Justin 11/30/2000 11/30!2000 DR1LLlNG EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEv. 8-53 29 DATUM TYPE BIT Hallow Stem Auger SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No.Sample 6 UNDIST. CASING TIME I FIRST COMPL. H—P- CASING HAMM- WEIGHT DROP WATER LEVEL FT.) IS.S IS.S 0.43 SAMPLER BORING Along southwest edge of proposed building in wooded area . SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION HAMMER 140 30' ENGINEER/GEOLOGIST N Mickie..iez SAMPLES SAMPLES DEPTH PENYTRL REC. TYPE! vacita'TJON SOfl. REMARKS FT. RESIST. W. NO. DESCiurnON nub IN. 2/7R4/23 U' S-1 Dane,brown,tine to medium SAND and SILT,*IL gravel,moist. Slight Odors i3 3 43/2/3 —6' S-2 Loose,brown,SAND and SILT,littk gravel moist. Sand and Sik(fill) 10 313/46 No Recovery . I7 3144113 Is, S3 Lowe,gray.fine SAND,some silt.moist. 9/WI0f22 14' S•4 Medium done,medium to coax SAND and GRAVEL,trace silt,bottom wet. Sand IS and Gravel _X_ 20!32/31!26 Ir S-3 Very dense,rust mlor d,medium to coarx SAND and GRAVEL,little sih,brick,wet 26M312 16' S-6 Top 6':Dense,/tut colored,coarse SAND and GRAVEL,trace stk,wet 18.5 Bottom 10':Medium,blue/gray,varved CLAY. Valved Clay 20 End of Exploration at 20 feet. 25 Remarks O'REILLY, TALBOT& OKUNASSOCIATES, INC. ?* ENVIRONNMNTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING MBA-8 Page 1 OF 1 PROJECT Mill Bank Apartirricrats LOCATION Northarripion,MA PROJECT NO. 030 46 02 DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOREMAN DATE STARTED DATE FINISHED Seaboard EnvirorvrsaW Drilling Justin 11/3012000 11130Roo0 t DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV. B-53 20' DATUM TYPE BIT Hollow Stem Au er SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No.Sample 6 UNDIST. CASING TIME FIRST COWL I HR. CASING HAMM. WEIGHT IDROP WATER LEVEL 16' 16' 0.45 SAMPLER BORING 40'southwest of southwestern edge of proposed building in SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION wooded rem. HAMMER 140 30' ENGINEER/GEOLOGIST I Ashley Mickiecvins SAMPLES SAMPLES DEPTH PENETIL REC. TYPE! DESCRITTION SOIL REMARKS FT. RESIST. W. NO. DESCRIPTION BI/6 IN. 2/141/23 I r S-1 Dense,brown SAND and GRAVEL,some asphalt pieces,waist. 1 2 614/414 10' S-2 Median dose.brown,medium to coarse SAND,sorts gravel,rphak pieces,moist. Said and Gravel Orgwics Fill 10 1(r 51101101 No Recovery 3 6/6/619 24' S-3 Medium dcme,gray,fur SAND,little silt,moist. Sand 9/7/316 3' S-4 Medium dense,dark brown,fine to mcditun SAND and SILT,trace clay,moat. and _ 15 Snit 16' 51/l I/6 IT S-5 Medium deme.mat colored,coarse SAND and GRAVEL,trace a,wet. Sand and Gravel 2/2/2!3 24' S-6 Top 4':Loose,gray,coarse SAND.trace snit,wet. 18 T Bottom 20':Soft,blue/gray.varved CLAY,weL Vrved Clay 20 End of Espksrrion at 20 felt. !8� 25 Rensuits: _ 1.Ground surface 1 foot above pavemot area. 2.Slight coal tar odors(T•121. 3.Ruck in nose of sa"Icr. ! O'REILLY, TALBOT& OKUNASSOCIATES, INC ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING MBA-7 Page 1 OF 1 PROJECT Mil Bank Apartments LOCATION Non on,MA PROJECT NO. 030 46 02 DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOREMAN DATE STARTED DATE FTMSHED Seaboard Envion nenal Drilling Justin 11/302000 11!30/2000 DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV. &53 Ig DATUM TYPE BIT Hallow Stem Auger SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No.S 6 UNDIST. CASING TIME FIRST COMPL HR CASING HAMM- WEIGHT DROP WATER LEVEL FT.) IS IS 043 SAMPLER BORING Inside proposed budding footprint,in existing parking area. SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION HAMMER 140 30- ENGB4EER/GEOLOGIST Ashley Mickiewicz SAMPLES SAMPLES DEPTH P"rM REC TYPE/ DESCRLTLTON SOIL REMARKS Fr. RESIST. IN. NO. DESCRIPTION BU6 IN. 7IN71 12' S-1 Medium dense,brown,medium to coarse SAND and GRAVEL,little silt,dry. No Odor _ 5 4/3/X] 3' S-2 Loose.multi-colored SAND and GRAVEL,trace sat,ash,concrete,brick,dry. Sand and Gravel Organics(fi q 10 3/7/3/4 is, S-3 Medium dense,light brown.fine SAND,some sat.moist. Sit and Fuse Sand 2111/3 20' S-4 Soft,ofi-Jgray SILT wd fuse SAND,little clay,slightly plastic,moist. IS 1 11/4/8 IT S-3 Top g-:Soft,olivdgray SILT,some fine sand.little clay,wet. Is Bottom 4 Medium dense,rust colored SAND and GRAVEL,little silt,wet. Sand � ud Gravel 7/51415 6- S-6 Loose,brown(some redlwhite),coarse SAND and GRAVEL,little sit,wet. End of Exploration at 20 feet. 20 25 Remarks: Pill O'REILLY, TALBOT& OK UN A SSO CIA TES, INC. ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECI-INICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING MBA-6 Page t OF I PROJECT Mill Bank Apartments LOCATION North on,MA PROJECT NO. 030 46 01 ' DRILLING CONTRACTOR fOREMAN DATE STARTED DATE FINISHED Seaboard En iromnctnal Drilling Juste 11/30/2000 1 lfm000 DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV. 13-53 27 DATUM TYPE BIT Hollow Stem Auger SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No.Sarnple 7 UNDIST. CASING TIME FIRST COMPL I HR. CASING HAMM. WEIGHT DROP WATER LEVEL .) IS IT 1 0.43 SAMPLER BORING Inside of footprint of proposed building along existing SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION P4 cement HAMMER 140 30' ENGINEERIGEOLOGIST I Ashley Miekiew= SAMPLES SAMPLES DEPTH PKNrm REC. TYt£J DCSCRUTfON SOUL REMARKS FT. RESIST. IN. NO. Di:SCRIMON BL/6 IN. ` 4!1/10/13 lo' S-1 Medium dense,brown,SAND and GRAVEL,voce sih,dry. 3 5/4/413 8' S-2 Loose.multi-eolond SAND and GRAVEL,trace sat.some ash,glass.dry. 1 Sand and Gravel some Organcv(60 to 10/9/9/8 4' SJ Medium dense,multi-colored SAND and GRAVEL,some peat,little silt,moist. t 412/16115 16' S4 Top 12':Loose,gray,rime SAND,some peat,some sib,moist. �XBottom 4':Dune,gray,coarse SAND and GRAVEL,some sih,little peat,moist. 14/9/1/3 10' S-1 Top 4':Duce,gray,malium to coarse SAND and GRAVEL,vacs sih,wet. �X15 - Bottom 6':Medium dense,gray,foe to medium SAND,little sat,wet. 5/712/3 8' S-6 Loose,brown GRAVEL,some sand.little$111,wet 7/3/312 24' S-7 Top 8':Medium dense,brown SAND and GRAVED little sik,wet. Bottom 12':Medium,bhudgray.varved CLAY,wcL 17 Vwvcd Clay 20 End of Explo stun at 20 feet 21 liemarks: 1.Coal tar odor for all samples 5-19'. O`REILLY, TALBOT& OK UN A SSO CIA TES, INC. ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHIVICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING MBA-5 Page I OF I PROJECT Mill Bank Apartments LOCATION Northampton,MA PROJECT NO. 030 46 02 DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOREMAN DATE STARTED DATE FINISHED Seaboard Environmental Drilling lusts 11/308000 11/30/2000 pq DRILLING EQUIPMENT. COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV. B-53 20' DATUM TYPE BIT Hollow Stem Auger SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No.S 7 UNDLST, CASING TIME FIRST COMPL HR. CASING HAMM. WEIGHT IDROP WATER LEVEL FT. 15' ly I SAMPLER BORING [wide footprint of proposed building along existing SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION pavement HAMMER 140 Yr ENGINEERIGEOLOGIST Ashley Micldewiez SAMPLES SAMPLES DErrH PENItT7t. RSC. TYPE/ D£SC.Rl!'110N SOU. REMARKS FI. RPSL4T. IN. NO. DCSCREMON EU6 31H. 7/614/5 6• S-1 Medium dense,brows SAND and GRAVEL,some salt,moist. 9/9/11112 16' S-2 Medium dense,brown,(some md/wbac(black)SAND,some gravel.trace sih,brick,moist. t0 Sad and Gravel 18/1/2 12' S-3 Soft,black Organics,mot. some Organic Vm 1 1I 1I3ng 16' S•4 Top Ir:Light pay.fine SAND.some peat.moist _ Bottom 4':Dense,gray,gorse SAND and GRAVEL,little sih,moist 12/23/9/12 26' S-5 Top I0':Very dense.gray,coarse SAND and GRAVEL,trace sit,moist. �X15 Bosom 10":Medium dense,multi-colored.fate to cone SAND,some gravel.trace jilt.wet 7/13/14/10 g' S-6 Medium dome,rust cokxed SAND and GRAVEL,little sik,wet,brick. lr No Odor VI/1/2 4- S-7 Soft,bluelgray.varved CLAY.wet Varved Clay 20 End of Exploration at 20 feet. 25 Remarks: 1.Coal tar odor for all samples 5-1 F. ■i siwa 0FREILLY, TALBOT& OKUN A SSO CIA TES, INC. ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING MBA4 Page 1 OF— I PROJECT Mill Bank Apstimcnits LOCATION Nonharripton,MA PROJECT NO. 30 46 02 DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOREMAN DATE STARTED DATE FINISHED Seaboard Environmental Dnlin Justin 11502000 1 1/302000 DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV. B-53 20' DATUM TYPE BIT Hollow Stem Auger SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No. 6 UNDIST. CASING TIME FIRST COMPL 11R. CASING HAMM. WEIGHT DROP WATER LEVEL .) I IS IS 1 SAMPLER BORING Inside lbotprint of proposed building in existing parking area SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION HAMMER 140 30' ENGMEER/GEOLOGiST Ashley Mickiewia SAMPLES SAMPLES DEPTH PENETR. REC. IYlE! DESCRIFLION SOIL REMARKS rr. RESIST. IN. NO. I DESCREMON BL/6 IN. 950/24140 3' Dean,browdwhite SAND and GRAVEL,trace sib,moist. OR ON S M5/69 P S-1 Medium done,rrsik eokuol,medium to coarse SAND and GRAVEL,trace snit,some ash,moist. � Sartd and Gravel, 1 some Organics(fiT 2 10 251'212 No Recovery I 49/36146 16' S-2 Top 2':Pew. Sand Middle 4':Medium dense SAND avid GRAVEL,trace silt,moist. tad Bottom 4':Medium dense,rust colored SAND and GRAVEL,trace silt,moist. Gravd 14/4856162 14' S-3 Very dense,rust colored coarse SAND and GRAVEL,little slat,wet. _ �x13 11/12/1417 S-4 Medium dense,nut colored coarse SAND and GRAVEL,trace silt,wet. IS Ill/l/l 12' S-3 Soft,blodgray,rarved CLAY.wet Va^'ed Clay End of Eaploratwn.0 20 Ceet. 2s Rennrks: . 1.Cuttings are peat. .. 2.Coal tar odor(1-18). W LOG OF BORING MBA-3 Shea 2 or 2 Project N. 30 16 01 SAMPLES DKrrH P6NWM ACC. TYPV DFSCRlrrloK SOS. REMARKS Fr. RESIST. IN. MO. DKSCRItttON avcm. 30 111!1/2 24' S•7 Soo Lr+Y.va-*cd CLAY and SILT.trace GnveL Fad of Exploration at 37. 3S 40 45 i SO SS B• O'REILLY, TALBOT& OKUNASSOCIATES, INC. ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING MBA-3 Page I OF 2 PROJECT Miff Bank Apartments LOCATION Northampton.MA PROJECT NO. 030 46 01 DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOREMAN DATE STARTED DATE FINISHED Seaboard Environmoual Drilling Justin t 1/07/2000 11/07/5000 DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV. B-53 32' DATUM TYPE BIT Hollow Stem Auger SIZE d:TYPE OF CORE BARREL No. le 7 IINDIST. CASING TIME FIRST COWL HR, CASING HAMM. WEIGHT DROP WATER LEVEL FT.) 14.5 14.5 1 SAMPLER BORING Center oJwest edge of building SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION HAMMER 140 30' ENGINEER/GEOLOGIST Ashley Mkknewicx SAMPLES SAMPLES DEPTH PENVM REC. TYPPI DESCRiMom Sou- REMARKS FT. RESIST. IN. NO. DESCREMON JIU6 IN. 4110/13/6 12- S-1 Medium deruq brown SAND and GRAVEL,dry. Said S 617/616 12' S-2 Medium dense brown Silty SAND,some Gravel,dry. and Gravel 10 31413/4 6- S-3 Medium,dark brown,fibrous PEAT,moot. � 11' Peat 15 10/9/514 20' S-4a Top 10':Dark brown,fine pained PEAT,wet. S-4b Borrorn Light brown,coarse SAND and GRAVEL,wet. 16' Sad and x... Gravel 20 30/6/314 Is* S-5a Top 6':Dense,light brown,wane SAND and GRAVEL Middle 6':Dente,redlbrown,coarse SAND and GRAVEL. 20.5 S-5b Bottom 6':MedurM1 gray,varved SILT and CLAY. Varied Clay 25 III/I/t 20' S-6 Soft,gray,varved CLAY ad SILL Remarks: Pill LOG OF BORING MBAR Sheet s of s Pro No. 1030 46 02 SAMPLES DEM PENETR. REC. TYPE/ DESCRIP170N SOIL REMARKS FT. RESIST. IN. NO. DESCRIPTION BU61N. Il0 t 113 CLAY 120 123 130 13r SAND 133 iW26l37/42 20/24 S-9 Very dense,fie to comm SAND,little silt,wet (l3S•1371 loop EM of explo mion at 137' 140 LOG OF BORING HBA:2A. Shed 4 a( s Pro' t No. )30.4602 SAMPLES DEM PENETR. REC. TYPE/ DESCRD`TION SOQ. REMARKS FT. RESIST. 94. NO. DESCRIPTION EUCIN. 90 2/3/3/4 24124 S-S Mediu N red-pay,CLAY,wet r CLAY 93 100 to I03 IIO 103 im LOG OF BORING MBA=1A. Sheet 5 of 5 rProjeR N. 130-4142 SAMPLES DE M PENETR. REC. ME/ DCSCRRTION SOIL REMARKS FT. RESIST. U4. NO. DLSCRQifON DL6Il1. 60 1713/4 24/24 S-S Medium,Ray,CLAY,wet (ET-62� CLAY 65 70 212!2/2 2u24 S-6 Medium,Fry.CLAY.wet (7a-721 75 so I15/NS 24124 S-7 Medium,gray,CLAY,trace silt,wet(vYved) (SO'•g2� 95 LOG OF BORING MBA-2A Sheet 2 or s Project No. 1070 46 0, SAMPLES DEPTH PENETIL REC. TYPE/ DESCRIPTION SOIL REMARKS FT. RESIST. IN. NO. DESCRIPTION BU61N. wF 30 r 75 1/d0/3 11/24 S-1 Vety tod,pay,clay,wet Vancd CLAY 1. (3SJ71 40 UI/I/I 2484 S-2 Very soft.pay,CLAY,fine to coast(up to In").wet (40-4r) 45 2/112/2 24/24 S-3 SoR pay,clay.wet i (4s-4r) 50 3/4/5/6 24/24 S4 Stiff pay,CLAY,wet (50-227 SS O'REILLY, TALBOT& OWN ASSOCIATES, INC ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING MA-2A Page I OF s PROIECC Mill Bank menu LOCATION Non ,MA PROJECT NO. )030 46 02 DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOREMAN DATE STARTED DATE FHVISHED Scshord E virmurental Frank 04/24/2001 04/24x2001 DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV. 11.53 135' DATUM TYPE BIT SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No. 9 61ST. UNDLST. CASING 3 inch TDdE FIRST COMPL HR. CASING HAMM. casing WEIGHT 300 DROP WATER LEVEL .) SAMPLER BORING SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION East come of proposed binding HAMMER 140 30' Ashley MKkiew><x SAMPLES SAMPLES DErM PENrM REC, TYPE/ DESCRl71 om SOIL REMARKS Ff. RESLST. DN. NO. DFSCRIMON EU4 I N. Straight drill,WAT.Cooditioru suralar to boring MBA-2 S 10 _ IS 20 25 Rcn rks: 1 Weight otAuge(WOH) I +w LOG OF BORING MBA-2 Sheet 2 _Of . 2 'eU NO. 70 16 01 SAMPLES DEM PENICTR. AEC. ME/ DESCRIPTION SOIL REMARKS FT. MUST. IN. NO. DESCRIPTION auto+. 30 1nnn 24' S-7 Son pay SILT,6m SAND mtd CLAY laua(varved Clay),wct pm 75 Mr= 21- S•S Sort.Say.vwved CLAY. vwvw CLAY pm 10 2rMI4 21' S-9 Solt,pay,varved CLAY. End of Exploration at 12 feet IS 50 55 0"REILLY, TALBOT& OKUNASSOCIATES, INC. ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING MBA-2 Page I OF 2 PROJECT Mill Bank Apartments LOCATION Northantaon,MA PROJECT NO. 030 46 01 DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOREMAN DATE STARTED DATE FINISHED Seaboard Envkom mW twilling Justin 11/0712000 1 1/07/2000 DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV. B-53 3T DATUM TYPE BIT Hollow Stem Augm SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No.Smsnp k 9 UNDiST CASING TIME FIRM---T COMPL HR. CASING HAMM. WEIGHT IDROP WATER LEVEL 14 SAMPLER BORING Southeast corner of build ng SAMPLER Split Spoon WEIGHT DROP LOCATION HAMMER 140 30' ENGINEER/GEOLOGIST Ash Mickkwicz sAMrL.Es sAMr1.CS DEPTH PF.NXTX REC. TYPFJ D£SCRLPpor4 SOIL R£MARICS FT. RESIST. IN. NO. DFSCREMON arc Br. 10/2026/13 6' S-1 Ikvue,brown SAND and GRAVEL !! Sand and Gravel S 7 11IR13 P S-2 Med'wn dame,muki-colored SAND,soar Gravel. s.s Sandy 10 12/3/4 22' S-3 Mediums ohvdgray SILT and Fine SAND,moist. Sih 15 5/11/11/13 14' S-4 Medium dense,eoaae SAND and GRAVEL,wet. ISS Sand ad Gmvel 17 20 3/2/1!1 20' S-5 Soft,gray SILT,fine SAND and CLAY knees(raved Clay),wet. V awed Clay 25 I/I/l/I 24' S-6 Soft,gray SILT,Fuze SAND and CLAY knees,(varved Clay),wet. Renuvuks LOG OF BORING MBA-1 Shen 2 of 2 Project Na. 30 46 O l SAMPLES DCPTII PEAIYTR. AEG ME! DESCRIYTION SOQ: REMARKS bT. RESIST. !N. NO. DESCUMON RI/fD4. 30 VV213 24• S•7 Soft bludsw SILT,Une SAND and CLAY lass(varved Clay).wcL End of Eaploratian at 32' 33 40 45 50 55 11 0 FREILL Y, TALBOT& OK UN ASSOCIATES, INC. ENVIRONMENTAL AND GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LOG OF BORING MBA-1 Page I OF 2 PROJECT Mill Bank Aparunew LOCATION Northampton,MA PROJECT NO. 030 46 01 DRILLING CONTRACTOR FOREMAN DATE STARTED DATE FINISHED Seaboard Enwonmrntal Drilling Justin 11/07/2000 11/07/2000 DRILLING EQUIPMENT COMPLETION DEPTH GROUND SURFACE ELEV. B-33 32' DATUM TYPE BIT Hollow Stem Auger SIZE&TYPE OF CORE BARREL No.Sample 7 UNDIST- CASING I TIME FIRST COMPL IIR CASING HAMM. WEIGHT IDROP WATER LEVEL FT. 14 14 2 SAMPLER BORING Northeast coma of budding SAMPLER Split Spooa WEIGHT DROP LOCATION HAMMER 140 30' ENGINEER/GEOLOGIST Ashley Mickum= SAMPLES SAMPLES DEPTH PENETR REC. TYPE/ DESCRUTON SOIL REMARKS F7. RESIST. IN. NO. DESCRITTION BUG IN. 14/14/3/3 14• S-1 Medium demo,brawn SAND and GRAVEL Fill Fill 3. 3 314/212 g' S-2 Medium brown SILT and fins SAND,tree Clay Sandy Silt r r _ 10 3!3/2/3 Ig' S-3 Medium oliwJgray SILT and fine SAND,trace Clay,moist. IS =/615 r S4 Top 2':Medwm o6w(gray SILT and fine SAND,some Clay,slightly plastic,wet. Bottom 6•:Lapse,brown,coarse SAND and GRAVEL,wet is Said and G1a1el 14 20 I/l/l/I 24• S-3 Soft,blue/gray CLAY,two fine Sand,plastic,wet. Clay 25 1/1/7!2 24' S-6 Soft,blue/gray CLAY and SILT lemes,plastic,wet(,awed Clay). Rcmaaks: - . a•� LEGEND: �-OTO BORING LOCATIONS r �- OTO MONITORING WELL LOCATIONS M I C H E L M A N A V E N U E MBA-1 MBA-7 Will MBA 11 N —3 MB —11 A MBA-8 BA-12 EXISTING BUILDING MBA-6 MBA-3 MBA-5 MBA-9 MBA-4 PROPOSED NEW---"O"' EW 0. BUILDING LOCAAON MBA-10 0 SCALE I MBA-2 W 0' 15' 30' 60' � I W m MILL BANK o;effLtY T"or oxVY .!S.SDCJ ms,, Jwc MICHELMAN AVENUE SITE PLAN N J NORTHAMPTON. MASSACHUSETTS � DATE: MAY 2001 fICURE No: INFO + c.ivktcC lid q ' •. 1- �91 Bridge '\ - Y� � N` °•� •' \1 � �° � Z vim._Y .�OS�� 'z �w 1 • (v\ � ryL . o- `Center ,. '� -6t _ +lA � ...z+ •?off`, '"+4 � � ..�.: � x, x •u o tl� 3C `� a:, OR SITE a 3t t on /1• ' h . p Station of -M ERCHANGE ^' 4 °♦ �f¢ is AN w O'Reilly, Talbot & Okun Associates, Inc. Mill Bank Apartments Site Locus Northampton, Massachusetts May 2001 Figure 1 , r - O'Reilly, Talbot & Okun T Mll Bank Apartments +! t A s S o c 1 A r e s ~ 1 --► Geotechnlcal Recommendations We understand that the proposed construction will involve the construction of paved access roadways and parking areas. Vehicle access is expected to consist of mostly passenger cars.The proposed design section is provided on Table 3. Table 3 Pavement Design Section Asphalt Finish Course 1 inch Asphalt Binder Course 1-1/2 inches Gravel Base Course 6 inches Sand&Gravel Subbase 6 inches If you have any questions,please do not hesitate to call. Very truly urs illy, of&O Associates,Inc. Michael J. albot,P. P Principal Attachments: Figurts(Site Plan),Boring Logs, 1 Page 5 OR ' t Mll Bank Apartments O'Reilly, Talbot & O k u n 4—411CCaM3EMP—' Geotechnical Recommendations ( A S S 0 C ( A T E S ] i Floor Slabs Given the significant amount of organic mater (such as peat and wood) present in the near surface fill, the fill may settle over time, even if the building is founded on piles and no additional load is placed on the fill. To avoid removing and replacing the fill and peat layers which underlay the site we recommend that a structural(framed) concrete or wood deck slap be used for the first floor level. If a concrete slab on grade is used,the concrete floorslabs should bear on at least 6 inches of compacted Sand and Gravel to provide uniform support and a capillary moisture break The subgrade beneath slabs should be compacted to treat any loose areas disturbed during excavation. Any debris of stones greater than 4-inches diameter encountered in the slab subgrade should be removed and replace with compacted sand and gravel. Soil which cannot be recompacted due to excessive disturbance or moisture content, should be replaced with compacted Sand and Gravel. Fill supporting slabs should be placed in accordance with the recommendations for gradation and compaction provided below. Earthwork Recommendations ! Earthwork for this project will primarily consist of filling to level the site for the building slab and for pavements. The existing asphalt,any vegetation and organic soils or debris in the top 12-inches should be removed from beneath the proposed structure and pavements,Topsoil or organic soils stripped from the excavation should not be reused as fill beneath structures and pavements. To avoid point loads any cobbles or boulders larger than 4 inch diameter encountered at the subgrade for slabs-on-grade should be removed and replaced with compacted sand and gravel fill. The slab subgrade should be densified prior to the construction to provide a uniform firm bearing surface. Densification should achieve at least 95% of the Modified Proctor dry density as defined in ASTM D1557,Method G Sand and Gravel beneath concrete slabs and footings should be compacted to at least 95% Modified Proctor density as defined by ASTM D1557, Method Q and should meet the grain size requirements on Table 2. The fill deposits present at the site may become unstable where excavations extend deeper than five feet and shoring or sloping may be necessary to protect personnel and to provide stability. All excavations should conform to current OSHA requirements. Table 2 Grain Size Requirements � f Sanif a dGravel f;t � ,, �x �Percent Finer l y /e'ight 4 inch 100 1/2 inch 50-85 No.4 40-75 *�+ No.40 10-35 No. 200 0-8 enn Flexible Pavement Page 4 w O'Reilly, Talbot & O k u n j —► Mill Bank Apartments [ A s s 0 C t A T e s 1 Geotechnical Recommendations PM We recommend that the piles be designed for a maximum capacity of 22 tons, to avoid the premium costs associated with a pile load test. Assuming a nominal skin friction value for the soft varved clay present in the upper 50 feet and using the assumed skin friction values presented in the MSBC;we recommend that the piles be embedded 50 feet into the varved clay layer,or to a depth o(70 feet below existing ground surface. ±! Pile caps for the driven piles should be based on a minimum pile spacing of 2.5 pile diameters. Earthquake Design Earthquake loading must be considered under requirements in Section 1113.4.1.3 and 1113.8 of the MSBC Section 1113.4.1.3 covers lateral forces imposed on structures from earthquake "M shaking and Section 1113.8 relates to the liquefaction potential of the underlying soils. Given the fill, peat and medium dense sand present in the upper 20 feet, the site would be considered Class S3 soils under section 113.4.1.3.Therefore an "S" factor of 1.5 should be used to compute lateral forces. The varved clay beneath the site would not be considered susceptible to liquefaction given its high silt content. In addition, since the structure will be founded on deep foundations it is unlikely that it would fail due to loss of bearing capacity or excessive settlement should liquefaction occur. Lateral Forces/Resistance The MSBC contains requirements regarding the interconnection of pile caps. It is required that pile caps be tied together to carry 10 percent of load in the larger pile loading unless it can be demonstrated that equal restraint can be provided by other means. Such other means can include the lateral earth pressure on the sides of pile caps and the lateral resistance of individual piles.For this building,costs savings may be realized by using the lateral resistance of individual piles to omit grade beams. s We have computed the lateral resistance per foot against the side of the pile cap for caps of varying embedment. These assume the pile caps are backfilled with structural fill. The required lateral limits of compacted structural(sand and gravel) fill and the magnitude of resistance force for various pile caps embedments are shown on Table 1.The lateral resistance against individual piles has been computed assuming 1-inch of lateral deflection. For 8-inch diameter steel pipe pile the lateral capacity would be 5 tons. Table 1 Design Lateral Resistance Against Pile Ca s PP :Pild,Cap Lateral Forces 'Width of Sand and Embe"dment (tons/foot) Gravel Fill :(feet) PP 3 1 5.8 4 2 7.5 5 3 9.5 The piles can also be used to resist uplift loads. For design purposes we recommend that a capacity of 10 tons per pile be used. u�u Page 3 OP T Mill Bank Apartments O'Reilly, Talbot & O k u n Geotechnical Recommendations .® [ A S S O C I A T E S i SUBSURFACE EXPLORATIONS AND TESTING Subsurface explorations consisted of 13 soil borings performed by Seaboard Environmental and Geotechnical Drilling of Chicopee, Massachusetts between October 2000 and April 2001. Each boring was observed and logged by an OTO field engineer. Twelve of the borings (MBA-1 through MBA 12) were performed to a depth of between 32 and 42 feet, using hollow stem augers. Subsurface conditions observed in the boring logs consisted of up to 16 feet of fill which consisted of a mixture of brick, concrete, metal, sand and gravel,and peat.The fill was observed to be underlain by a varved silt and clay.The fill was reportedly placed during the 1950s or 1960s to fill the site. As is discussed below,this fill is an unsuitable bearing material for the proposed building. Approximate test boring locations are shown on Figure 2.Boring logs are attached. In April 2001, boring MBA 2A was performed to a depth of 137 feet to evaluate the thickness and consistency of the varved clay which underlies the site.This boring was performed adjacent + to boring MBA-2, in the souther part of the building footprint. Subsurface conditions at this location consisted of approximately 20 feet of fill,underlain by varved silt and clay. The varved clay extended from a depth of 20 feet to approximately 134 feet below ground surface. A very dense sand was observed in the bottom of boring MBA 2A.The consistency of the varved clay was observed to be soft to very soft from a depth of 20 to 47 feet.Below a depth of 50 feet the consistency of the varved clay was medium stiff to stiff. CONCLUSIONS As we have discussed previously the presence of the debris fill and peat layers in the upper 20 ■* feet preclude the use of shallow spread footings to support the site building unless the fill and peat are removed and replaced with compacted granular fill. Based upon various design issues and cost, removal of the fill does not appear to be economical for this project. The structure can also be supported on deep foundations (piles) bearing in the underlying natural soils. Recommendations for a pile foundation are presented below. Pile Type Selection Based upon the relatively low structural loads imposed by the proposed building and the thickness of the varved clay(135 feet), the most economical foundation alternative at the site appears to be piles deriving their capacity from skin friction in the varved silt and clay. Based upon our discussions with local pile driving contractors,an 8 inch diameter pipe pile is the most economical pile type available and therefore,should be used at the site. *� Requirements for friction piles are presented in Section 1817.3.2 of the Massachusetts State Building Code (NISBQ. For friction piles the MSBC allows for the use of presumed values to avoid requirements for a pile load test. Since the cost of a pile load test would likely be on the , order of$40,000 (which is a significant portion of the total foundation cost for this project),we recommend that the presumed values be used.The MSBC limits the capacity of friction piles to 22 tons, unless a pile load test is performed to confirm greater capacities. The MSBC also allows for the use of an assumed skin friction of 500 pounds per square foot (pso of pile surface for piles deriving their resistance from a medium stiff to stiff clay(Class 10 material). Page 2 EnvironmentalSafetyHealthGeotechnica T O'Reilly, Talbot & Okun 4133M319MBP 293 Bridge Street [ A S S O C I A T E S ] Suite 500 Springfield,MA 01103 Tel 413 788 6222 J030-46-01 Fax 413 788 8830 May 28,2001 Email office@oto-env.com Valley Community Development Corporation 16 Armory Street Northampton,Massachusetts 01060 Attention: Mr.Patrick McCarthy Re: Supplemental Results of Soil Sampling and Analyses NO Bank Apartments, 18/79 Michelman Avenue Northampton,Massachusetts Dear Mr.McCarthy. Attached are the geotechnical recommendations for the proposed NUbank Apartment building project the located at 18/79 Michehnan Avenue in Northampton, Massachusetts. As we have discussed, the primary geotechnical engineering concern at the site is the presence of up to 20 feet of non engineered fill is present within the footprint of the proposed building. PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION The proposed construction will consist of an approximately 4,300 square foot (plan) two story apartment building with associated paved parking and buried utilities. We understand that the first floor elevation will be near existing ground surface.The location of the proposed building is shown on Figure 2. The proposed building will be wood framed with a concrete slab on grade or wood deck Structural loads will be carried by isolated interior columns and load bearing walls. Maximum column loads will likely be less than 50 kips (dead load). Wall loads will be less than 2 kips per linear foot. Paved access roads and parking areas will be located around the building. !" GEOTECHNICAL ISSUES Based on our review of the proposed construction plans and the results of our subsurface investigations at the site (discussed below),the significant geotechnical issues for the proposed construction addressed in this report are: 1. The distribution and thickness of the fill and peat layers which underlie the site; 2. Foundation type,pile capacity and settlement; 3. Design sections for pavements and support of concrete floor slabs;and 4. construction related issues. on Page 1 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1. System design and operational philosophy. 2. Review of documentation. 3. Operations. 4. Adjustments. 5. Troubleshooting. 6. Maintenance. 7. Repair. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. , Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. d. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. f. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. g. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. .� h. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision- obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged .. transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. i. Remove labels that are not permanent. go j. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidance of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Page 6 Millbank Affordable Housing 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (115-by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title 'WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance ' manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 3. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice. 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction, and course content. B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for the following: Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data, where applicable. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. Operation Data: a. Emergency instructions and procedures. b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. C. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations. d. Description of controls and sequence of operations. e. Piping diagrams. 2. Maintenance Data: a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts. b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier. C. Maintenance procedures. d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. e. Maintenance record forms. f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. g. Copies of maintenance service agreements. h. Copies of warranties and bonds. B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents. 1.8 WARRANTIES Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing 01770 ! ' CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A' A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from = that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings. 2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. _ 3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable. 5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional �. items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. am 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION 00 A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: ,0 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing 01770 OR CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. +! 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. 5. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 6. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 'Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for products of those Sections. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing an 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION no A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations. .. B. Patching: Comply with Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 01732 Page 6 Millbank Affordable Housing 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before !! selective demolition operations began. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining ' construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. ? ' 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. 10. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. w B. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition operations. C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS Page 5 , , Millbank Affordable Housing 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris- removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. 2. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 4. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around ., perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. C. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. 3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Dust Control: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. 1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution. 2. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas. B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing .. 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials. B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. D. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. C. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. 3.3 PREPARATION Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. ■* C. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect , them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building or structure. 2. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary"for use of the premises and phasing requirements. 2. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. 3. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for selective demolition operations. 4. Division 15 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items. 5. Division 16 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.5 SUBMITTALS Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing op 01731 "' CUTTING AND PATCHING 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an " even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. �s END OF SECTION 01731 Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION •• A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to minimize interruption of services to occupied areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. ,0 Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing �, 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS r A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. a. Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. 2. Vertical Openings: Close openings of 25 sq. ft. or less with plywood or similar materials. 3. Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-bearing, wood-framed construction. 4. Install tarpaulins securely using fire-retardant-treated wood framing and other materials. 5. Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 sq. ft. in area, use fire- retardant-treated material for framing and main sheathing. ** 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. 2. Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END QF SECTION 01500 Page 8 Millbank Affordable Housing •- am 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited. 2. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of waste materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide detailed information for on-site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials. Provide information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be used to dispose of all waste materials. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site. B. Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. C. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from construction damage. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. D. Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a local exterminator or pest-control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests. Engage this pest-control service to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. E. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, install portable chain-link enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates. Locate where indicated, or enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and other construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys. on F. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. Page 7 Millbank Affordable Housing no 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS e. Owner's office. 2. Furnish superintendent with electronic paging device for use when away from field office. H. Fax Machine: Provide temporary fax machine/service throughout the period for common use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Fax Machine may share phone line with the required temporary phone service. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: .� 1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. 2. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 3. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections for temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included in individual Sections. Where feasible, use same facilities. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining property nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, provide temporary drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed. 3. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. *R C. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other signs in sizes indicated. Install signs where indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. 1. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification signs. The contractor shall, within thirty (30) days of commencement of construction, erect a temporary project sign. The sign shall be plywood, MDO Exterior APA (4' x 6") or (3' x 5") supported on two 4" x 4" pressure treated posts with adequate bracing or otherwise securely mounted. The sign shall include the •• project name; owner's name and name of each project-funding source. Sign layout and location approved by owner. 2. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors. 3. Construct signs of exterior-type Grade B-B high-density concrete form overlay plywood in sizes and thicknesses indicated. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel. 4. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. Page 6 Millbank Affordable Housing ,,, op 01500 w TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS C. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 1. Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F in permanently enclosed portions of building for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F for finishing activities and areas where finished Work has been installed. D. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. E. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment. 1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio. 2. Provide warning signs at power outlets other than 110 to 120 V. 3. Provide metal conduit, tubing, or metallic cable for wiring exposed to possible damage. Provide rigid steel conduits for wiring exposed on grades, floors, decks, or other traffic areas. 4. Provide metal conduit enclosures or boxes for wiring devices. 5. Provide 4-gang outlets, spaced so 100-foot extension cord can reach each area for power hand tools and task lighting. Provide a separate 125-V ac, 20-A circuit for each outlet. F. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp per 500 sq. ft., uniformly distributed, for general lighting, or equivalent illumination. 3. Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp per story in stairways and ladder runs, located to illuminate each landing and flight. 4. Install exterior-yard site lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations, traffic conditions, and signage visibility when the Work is being performed. G. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common-use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install separate telephone line for each field office and first-aid station. 1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing an 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed. F. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light. G. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available, provide trucked-in services. 3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose. B. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material. , 2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. 3. Locate toilets so personnel need not walk more than two stories vertically or 200 feet (60 m) horizontally to facilities. Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing �•• 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8- inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD comer and pull posts. C. Tarpaulins: Fire-resistive labeled with flame-spread rating of 15 or less. D. Water: Potable. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Field Offices: Prefabricated Mobile units with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes; heated and air conditioned; on foundations adequate for normal loading. 1. Furnish field office with table and chairs to allow for project meetings, and seating for eight. C. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. D. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. E. Heating Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing on 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS to and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 1.4 USE CHARGES OR A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Owner's construction forces. 2. Occupants of Project. 3. Architect. 4. Testing agencies. 5. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage, by all parties engaged in construction, at Project site. C. Electric Power Service: Use electric power from Owner's existing system without metering and without payment of use charges. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges, whether metered or ..� otherwise, for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241. *� 1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. 2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over «� from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing �, 01500 ! TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS tm PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Sewers and drainage. 2. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, and wash facilities. 3. Heating and cooling facilities. 4. Electric power service. 5. Lighting. 6. Telephone service. C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Dewatering facilities and drains. " 2. Project identification and temporary signs. 3. Waste disposal facilities. D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Environmental protection. 2. Stormwater control. 3. Tree and plant protection. 4. Pest control. 5. Site enclosure fence. 6. Temporary enclosures. E. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 2. Division 2 Section "Termite Control' for pest control. 3. Divisions 2 through 16 for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing 01420 REFERENCES LBNL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-5605 www.lbi.gov F NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (202) 693-1999 www.osha.gov RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) TRB Transportation Research Board P (202) 334-2934 www.nas.edu/trb USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com D. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CAPU (See CPUC) C CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs (800) 952-5210 Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation (916) 445-1254 www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (415) 703-2782 www.cpuc.ca.gov TFS Texas Forest Service (936) 639-8180 Forest Products Laboratory //txforestservice.tamu.edu PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01420 Page 15 ,�, Millbank Affordable Housing 01420 REFERENCES Officials (The) www.iapmo.org ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (800) 284-4406 www.icbo.org (562) 699-0541 ICC International Code Council (703) 931-4533 (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) " www.inticode.org SBCC Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (205) 591-1853 www.sbcci.org C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-0990 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.doc.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 260-2090 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (202) 366-4000 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (202) 418-0190 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov GSA General Services Administration (202) 708-5082 www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory (See LBNL) Page 14 Millbank Affordable Housing ,�, 01420 REFERENCES UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (800) 704-4050 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 e• UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org Pip USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488 www.culturenet.ca/usitt (315) 463-6463 USP U.S. Pharmacopeia (800) 822-8772 www.usp.org (301) 881-0666 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau p (800) 283-1486 t www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (800) 506-4653 (Formerly: AWCMA -American Window Covering (212) 661-4261 Manufacturers Association) www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window& Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and (847) 299-5200 Door Association) www.wdma.com WIC Woodwork Institute of California (916) 372-9943 www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (708) 799-2300 www.bocai.org CABO Council of American Building Officials (See ICC) IAPM International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical (909) 595-8449 0 Page 13 Millbank Affordable Housing 01420 REFERENCES SPI The Society of the Plastics Industry (202) 974-5200 www.plasticsindustry.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPI/SPFD The Society of the Plastics Industry Spray Polyurethane Foam Division •� (See SPFA) SPRI SPRI (781) 444-0242 ., (Single Ply Roofing Institute) www.spd.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSMA Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (312) 456-5590 (Formerly: MUSFA- Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association) www.ssma.com SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (800) 837-8303 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 .� STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700 Industries Alliance „ www.tiaonline.org TPI Truss Plate Institute (608) 833-5900 , TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 705-9898 UFAC Upholstered Furniture Action Council (336) 885-5065 www.ufac.org Page 12 Millbank Affordable Housing 01420 REFERENCES //pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu PIMA Photographic& Imaging Manufacturers Association (914) 698-7603 (Formerly: NAPM - National Association of Photographic Manufacturers) www.pima.net RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 Vie• www.boitcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (Contact by mail only) RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 www.calredwood.org (415)382-0662 RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association (800) 220-7620 www.rma.org (202) 682-4800 SAE SAE International (724) 776-4841 www.sae.org SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 462-1930 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org w SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (843) 689-6878 www.sefalabfurn.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 www.sigmaonline.org/sigma SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org Page 11 Millbank Affordable Housing ON 01420 REFERENCES am NFPA National Fire Protection Association (800) 344-3555 www.nfpa.org (617) 770-3000 NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-6372 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (703) 442-4890 www.glass.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933?0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 *. NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.niga.org NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 www.nofma.org NPA National Particleboard Association (See CPA) NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSA National Stone Association (800) 342-1415 www.aggregates.org (703) 525-8788 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc. (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (703) 779-1022 NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (See WDMA) PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (703) 359-0826 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (508) 230-3516 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 Page 10 Millbank Affordable Housing .. 01420 OW REFERENCES (See SSMA) MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org NAAMM North American Association of Mirror Manufacturers (See GANA) NACE NACE International (281) 228-6200 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) www.nace.org NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 (The) www.naima.org NAMI National Accreditation and Management Institute, Inc. (304) 258-5100 NAPM National Association of Photographic Manufacturers (See PIMA) NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (414) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable Television Association (202) 775-3669 www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org N ECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (303) 697-8441 www.netaworld.org Page 9 Millbank Affordable Housing 01420 REFERENCES www.igcc.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com IRI Industrial Risk Insurers (800) 243?8308 www.industrialrisk.com (860) 520?7300 ITS Intertek Testing Services (800) 345-3851 www.itsglobal.com (607) 753-6711 IWS Insect Screening Weavers Association (Now defunct) KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LGSI Light Gage Structural Institute (972) 370-0967 www.loseke.com LMA Laminating Materials Association (201) 664-2700 (Formerly: ALA -American Laminators Association) www.Ima.org LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 " www.lightning.org (847) 577-7200 LSGA Laminated Safety Glass Association (See GANA) MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MCA Metal Construction Association (312) 201-0193 www.metalconstruction.org MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 MGPHO Medical Gas Professional Healthcare Organization, Inc. (877) 238-5157 www.mgpho.org (913) 681-6548 MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (614) 228-6194 www.marble-institute.com MUSFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association Page 8 Millbank Affordable Housing •® 01420 REFERENCES (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 (Formerly: FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association) www.glasswebsite.com/gana GRI Geosynthetic Research Institute (215) 895-2343 www.drexel.edu/gd GTA Glass Tempering Division of Glass Association of North America (See GANA) HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700 HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood &Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IAS International Approval Services (See CSA International) IMP ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (508) 394-4424 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute (The) (703) 450-0116 www.icd.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 4122 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 Page 7 Millbank Affordable Housing 01420 REFERENCES CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 (Formerly: National Particleboard Association) www.pbmdf.com CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet& Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSA CSA International (800) 463-6727 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 www.csa-international.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA/TIA Electronic Industries Alliance/Telecommunications Industry (703) 907-7500 Association www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eifsfacts.com (770) 968-7945 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org FCI Fluid Controls Institute (216) 241-7333 www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association (See GANA) FM Factory Mutual System (See FMG) FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 Page 6 Millbank Affordable Housing Op 01420 OP REFERENCES www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) www.bifma.com CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 www.carpetcushion.org CCFSS Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures (573) 341-4471 www.umr.edu/—ccfss CDA Copper Development Association Inc. (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263 www.canelect.ca ' CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 412-0900 www.cganet.com CGSB Canadian General Standards Board (819) 956-0425 www.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing ■m 01420 REFERENCES ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts (402) 476-3852 www.aosaseed.com APA APA- The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (941) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ad.org ASCA Architectural Spray Coaters Association (609) 848-6120 www.ascassoc.com ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703)295-6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 Air-Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (212) 591-7722 International) www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials (610) 832-9585 www.astm.org �* AWCI AWCI International (703) 534-8300 (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International) www.awci.org AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (See WCMA) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (817) 326-6300 " Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing .�, 01420 REFERENCES AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org AFPA American Forest& Paper Association (See AF&PA) AF&PA American Forest& Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org AHA American Hardboard Association (847) 934-8800 www.ahardbd.org ! AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org Al Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (202) 626-7300 www.e-architect.com AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALA American Laminators Association (See LMA) ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (800) 395-2522 www.alca.org (703) 736-9666 ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee (301) 972-1700 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANLA American Nursery & Landscape Association (202) 789-2900 (Formerly: AAN - American Association of Nurserymen) www.anla.org Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing 01420 REFERENCES being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. K. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (202) 862-5100 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 www.aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AAN American Association of Nurserymen (See ANLA) AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials www.aashto.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (919) 549-8141 wo (The) www.aatcc.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org ACI American Concrete Institute/ACI International (248) 848-3700 www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org ADC Air Diffusion Council (312) 201-0101 www.flexibleduct.org Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing ., 00 01420 REFERENCES SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. 40 F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, * assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. J. "Experienced": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; Pagel Millbank Affordable Housing 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1. Approved, Approved As Noted, Not Approved, Revise & Resubmit, and Action Not Required. C. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 Page 5 Millbank Affordable Housing .SIR 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Templates and patterns. g. Schedules. h. Compliance with specified standards. i. Notation of coordination requirements. j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. 4. Number of Copies: Submit Five blue- or black-line prints of each submittal, unless prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five prints where prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architectwill retain Four prints; remainder will be returned. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal.number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810 . 4. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). " e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. i. Remarks. j. Signature of transmitter. I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit Five copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architectwill return Four copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's product specifications. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Standard color charts. d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. f. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. g. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. h. Notation of coordination requirements. Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing go 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES "' 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent .� submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is required, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 3. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 4. Allow 15 days for processing each resubmittal. 5. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. ., 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. �+ h. Other necessary identification. F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract , Documents on submittals. G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. 2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken and will be returned. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 1A° 1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal. Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures"for submitting Applications for Payment. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties Project Record Documents. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES "•' I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). ■* 4. Copies of building permits. 5. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 6. Performance and payment bonds. 7. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. • K. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not .. limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 3. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. ..� PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01290 Page 4 Millbank Affordable Housing 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return s incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of mechanic's lien for construction period covered by the application. a. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from 1P every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. G. Equal Opportunity, Affirmative Marketing and Section 3: See Section "Instructions to Bidders" for requirements. H. Minority Employment/Business Forms: With each application for payment, submit Minority Employment Figures and Minority Business Enterprise Requisition Payment Report, for the period covered by the previous application. 1. Sample forms are included at the end of this section. - Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. C. Contractor's name and address. d. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Name of subcontractor. C. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. d. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued .� evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required. 6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing '" 00 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. C. This project is sales tax exempt. Valley Community Development Corporation's sales tax exempt number is 222-906-466 expiring on 01/04/04. DEFINITIONS D. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01250 Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing •• 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES W PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS OR A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements for handling and processing allowances. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.4 ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar V margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution - of overhead costs and other margins claimed. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 21 days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than 21 days after such authorization. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing 01210 r ALLOWANCES 3. Hardware Allowance: $9,250.00. 4. Sheet Vinyl Allowance: $25.00 per yard, material and installation, including floor preparation, see Section 6 for underlayment. END OF SECTION 01210 �w Page 3 Millbank Affordable Housing go 01210 ALLOWANCES 1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTING ALLOWANCES A. Testing and inspecting allowances include the cost of engaging testing agencies, actual tests and inspections, and reporting results. B. The allowance does not include incidental labor required to assist the testing agency or costs for retesting if previous tests and inspections result in failure. C. Costs of services not required by the Contract Documents are not included in the allowance. D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the testing and inspecting allowance to Owner by Change Order. 1.6 UNUSED MATERIALS A. Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1. If requested by Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is not economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed by Architect, deliver unused material to Owner's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is Contractor's responsibility. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowances: 1. Include Soils and Concrete Testing as specified in Division 2, Section "Earthwork" and Division 3, Concrete: $2,500.00. 2. Carpet Allowance: $14.00 per yard, material and installation, including floor preparation — see Section 6 for underlayment. Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing 01210 ! " ALLOWANCES SECTION 01210 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1. Certain materials and equipment are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. In some cases, these allowances include installation. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. B. Types of allowances include the following: 1. Lump-sum allowances. 2. Testing and inspecting allowances. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. 2. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of allowances for testing and inspecting. 1.3 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work. B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing 01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS .� 3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will provide, operate, and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01140 Page2 Millbank Affordable Housing �' _ 01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS SECTION 01140 - WORK RESTRICTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General an Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this PIN Section. 1.2 USE OF PREMISES A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to areas of construction. 2. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of site and specifically to 18 Michelman Ave., where renovations are extensive, and occupancy will be required throughout the duration of work, and 79 Michelman Ave, which is scheduled for HVAC & plumbing work, the apartments will be occupied throughout renovations. 3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. 4. Contractors are required to attend the prebid conference, familiarize themselves with the drawings and specs, and be prepared to work around and within tenant occupied apartments. B. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. 1.3 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner reserves the right to occupy as Completion,d to place provided equipment in completed areas of building, before Su such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy. Pagel Millbank Affordable Housing 01100 SUMMARY 1. Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents. .A B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION "" END OF SECTION 01100 .� Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing •• 01100 SUMMARY SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL" 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Project consists of three separate buildings and associated site work. Building One: 18 Michelman Avenue, a 6 unit building to be renovated Building Two: 34 Michelman Avenue, a new 10 unit wood frame structure. Building Three: 79 Michelman Avenue, existing 8 units (second and third floor) to receive mechanical/plumbing upgrade. 1. Project Location: Michelman Ave, Nothampton, MA 2. Owner: Millbank Associates, Inc., 16 Armory Street, Northampton, MA 01060. B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated Wednesday, November 23, 2001, were prepared for Project by Carlson &Schmitt Architects, Inc. 1.3 CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract. 1.4 WORK SEQUENCE A. The Work shall be conducted in one phase. 1.5 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. 1.6 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS + ► A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. Pagel Millbank Affordable Housing SGC Supplemental General Conditions labor costs shall be figured based on direct salary plus insurance and benefits. If deductions are ordered, the credit shall be computed at net cost. Among the items to be considered as overhead are insurance, other than as mentioned above, bond or bonds, supervision, superintendents, supervising, foremen not directly attributable to the change, timekeepers, clerks, watchmen, use of small tools, incidental job burdens and general office expenses, and other items not included in cost as herein defined. Layout work by field engineer incidental to Change Orders shall be considered as overhead. Article 11, Insurance an 11.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance 11.1.2 Change to read as follows: "...for not less than the limits specified below and shall include...", etc. 11.1.2 Add the following: (A) Contractor shall carry the following insurance coverage: 1) Comprehensive General Liability and Property Damage on an occurrence basis. Minimum Limits: a) $500,000 per person; $1,000,000 per accident bodily injury. b) $250,000 property damage (coverage to include explosion, blasting, underground damage and collapse). 2) Vehicle Liability and Property Damage: a) All-owned Vehicles: Limits of Liability $300,000 per person; $500,000 per accident; $100,000 property damage. b) Non-owned Vehicles: Limits of Liability $300,000 per person; $500,000 per accident; $100,000 property damage. (B) Contractor shall either (1) require each of his sub-contractors to procure and to maintain during the life of his subcontract Subcontractor's Public Liability and Property Damage of the type and in the same amounts as specified in the preceding paragraph, or(2) insure the activities of his subcontract as in.his own policy. (C) All insurance described in Article 11.4 of the General Conditions shall be provided and paid for by the Owner. Page2 Millbank Affordable Housing "° SGC Supplemental General Conditions CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT - PART II THE GENERAL CONDITIONS The General Conditions of the Contract is the American Institute of Architects Document A201- 1997 "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" hereinafter referred to as the "AIA General Conditions". t Article 7, Changes in the Work 7.2.2 Add the following new subparagraph 7.2.2.1: 7.2.2.1 Method of determining overhead and profit for Change Orders shall be in compliance with Subparagraphs 7.2.3 and 7.2.3.1 7.2.3 Add the following new subparagraph 7.2.3: Upon request of the Owner or the Architect, the contractor shall, without cost to the Owner, submit to the Architect, in such form as the Architect may require, an accurate written estimate of the cost of any proposed extra work or change. The estimate shall indicate the quantity and unit cost of each item of material, and the number of hours of work and hourly rate for each class of labor, as well as the description and amounts of all other costs chargeable under the terms of this Article. Unit labor costs for the installation of each item of materials shall be shown and shall be as indicated in the schedule of Prevailing Wages, if any, included in the Contract Documents. The contractor shall promptly revise and resubmit such estimate if the Architect determines that it is not in compliance with the requirements of this Article, or that it contains errors of facts or mathematical k errors. In order to establish the exact cost of new work added or of previously required work omitted, the Contractor shall obtain and furnish to the Architect !" bona fide proposals from recognized suppliers for furnishing any material included in such work. Such estimates shall be furnished promptly so as to occasion no delay in the Work, and shall be furnished at the Contractor's sole expense. 7.2.3.1 For extra work performed by the General Contractor's own forces, the cost to the Owner may include an allowance for overhead and profit not to exceed 10 percent of the net cost of the work as defined and modified below: 1. For extra work performed by a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractors, the cost to the Owner may include the net cost to the Subcontractors or Sub- "' subcontractor's overhead and profit and not to exceed 10 percent for the General Contractor's overhead and profit. The Subcontractor shall be allowed a 10 percent markup over net cost of a Sub-subcontractor's extra work. 2. A Net Cost, as used herein, shall not include a percentage for overhead and profit on items of social security, health and welfare, old age and unemployment insurance, contributions to pension funds, education and training funds, industry improvement funds, and similar fringe benefits. All labor costs shall be figured based on the Wages indicated for that trade category. If there are no prevailing wage rates indicated for the trade, Pagel Millbank Affordable Housing .. 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay or interruption as described in Subparagraph 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent: 1 that performance is,was or would have been so suspended,delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible;or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.4.1 The Owner may,at any time,terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall: THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN .2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH preservation of the Work;and RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA termination stated in the notice,terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. DOCUMENT D401. This document has been approved and I 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be endorsed by The Associated General entitled to receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such Contractors of America. termination,along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. a� ®1997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ))Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 0 1997 by The ww American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 44 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Subparagraph 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days' written notice to the Owner and Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials,equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead,profit and damages. 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 6o consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 14.1.3. 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: O DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL y CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ! 1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled ATTORNEY is ENCOURAGED WITH workers or proper materials; RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THI5 the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA ! s DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA .3 persistently disregards laws,ordinances, or rules,regulations or orders of a public DOCUMENT M1. authority having jurisdiction;or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract This document has been approved and Documents. endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist,the Owner, upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or '!P remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: Will 1 take possession of the site and of all materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Paragraph 5.4;and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Subparagraph 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived,such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may 'L�— be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE +s,;�,i 14.3.1 The Owner may,without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend,delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. ®1997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS Of THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 19511 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 0 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/V2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 43 13.6 INTEREST 13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. 13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD 13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: 1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion; .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment;and MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY U51NG AIA applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of DOCUMENT D401. action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the This document has been approved and *o. date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty endorsed by The Associated General provided under Paragraph 3.5,the date of any correction of the Work or failure to Contractors of America. correct the Work by the Contractor under Paragraph 12.2, or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner,whichever occurs last. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub- subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons: 1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which requires all Work to be stopped; .2 an act of government,such as a declaration of national emergency which requires all Work to be stopped; .3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in *+� Subparagraph 9.4.1,or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents;or .4 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor's request,reasonable evidence as required by Subparagraph 2.2.1. 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the ff• Contractor, repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Paragraph 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than loo percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion,or 12o days in any 365-day period,whichever is less. 01997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ))Copyright 1911, 1415, 1 918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, ® 1997 y T e � American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. user Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 42 shall assume the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder,except as may be specifically ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH agreed in writing. RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having DOCUMENT D401. jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor This document has been approved and Im shall make arrangements for such tests,inspections and approvals with an independent testing endorsed by The Associated General laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner,or with the appropriate public authority,and shall Contractors of America. bear all related costs of tests,inspections and approvals.The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Subparagraph 13.5.1,the Architect will,upon written authorization from the Owner,instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of PIP when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs,except as provided in Subparagraph 13.5.3,shall be at the Owner's expense. 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and = 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses shall be at the Contractor's expense. 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing,inspection or approval shall,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract 4 Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made 01997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 19 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 0 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia—5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 41 an correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner ■w has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the no Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect,the Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 2.4. w 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Paragraph 12.2. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the DOCUMENT D401. Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of Contractors of America. limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced,nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. .ee ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, .� assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Subparagraph 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent,that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to an AIArDOCUMENT A201- 1997 institutional lender providing construction financing for the Project. In such event,the lender GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION >)Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 0 1997 by The �w American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 40 cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary.The Owner shall OR deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4.6. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience, replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7. 11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner's exercise of this power, if such objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved as provided in Paragraphs 4.5 and 4.6. The Owner as fiduciary shall, in the case of arbitration, make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitrators.If distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required,the arbitrators will direct such distribution. 11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL FM 11.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds c overing CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arisin g thereunder as RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS date of execution of the Contract. ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY U51NG AIA 11.5.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of DOCUMENT MI. bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK Contractors of America. 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,costs of uncovering and replacement shall,by appropriate Change Order,be at the Owner's expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents,correction shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation 4* for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor's expense. 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION +, .+ 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.5,if,within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Subparagraph 9.9.1,or by terms of an 01997 AIA® applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION *Copyriclii 11,1111, 19151 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 0 1997 y T e American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 39 Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. 11.4.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner's property,including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. 11.4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall,if possible,include such insurance,and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. 11.4.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from THI5 DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL those insuring the Project,or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS Subparagraph 11.4.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate ELECTRONICAuY DRAFTED AIA ► property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA endorsement or otherwise. DOCUMENT 0401. 11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur,the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy This document has been approved and of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.4. Each policy endorsed by The Associated General shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements Contractors of America. related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced,until at least 3o days' prior written * + notice has been given to the Contractor. 11.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors, agents and employees,each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6,if any,and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents and employees,for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, '" except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor,as appropriate,shall require of the Architect,Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors,sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would .� otherwise have a duty of indemnification,contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. 11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear,subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph u.4.10. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the , T Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall �+ 'i require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. IA 11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon AIA AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties. The GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 0 1997 y T e American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects ` quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. user Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 38 11.3.2 To the extent damages are covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance,the Owner,Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance.The policy shall provide for such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. 11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner,Architect or other persons or entities as additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under Paragraph im. 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder's risk"all-risk"or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others,comprising total value for the entire Project at the site THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance,until final payment RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR has been made as provided in Paragraph 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF TH15 has an insurable interest in the property required by this Paragraph u.4 to be covered, ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY U51NG AIA Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Project. DOCUMENT D401. 11.4.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an "all-risk" or equivalent policy form and shall This document has been approved and include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and endorsed by The associated General physical loss or damage including,without duplication of coverage,theft,vandalism,malicious Contractors of America. mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. 11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing,then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. 11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. " ! 11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site,and also portions of the Work in transit. 11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9.9 shall not commence r_ until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, • without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that .�• ;T would cause cancellation,lapse or reduction of insurance. 11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler 01997 AIA® ! I and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION >)Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976' 1987, ® 997 y e A ! American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced ,'w with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a2ol.aia--511/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 513112002. 37 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1 claims under workers' compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed; .� .2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor's employees; .3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees; .4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage; .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL destruction of tangible property,including loss of use resulting therefrom; CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN .6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH damage arising out of ownership,maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR .7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS and ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA No DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA .8 claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractors DOCUMENT D401. obligations under Paragraph 3.18. This document has been approved and 44 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph u.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits endorsed by The Associated General of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is Contractors of America. greater.Coverages,whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis,shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and no termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph u.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 3o days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are reasonably available,an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate,or both,shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief. 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance. 11.3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.3.1 Optionally, the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project Management Protective Liability insurance from the Contractors usual sources as primary coverage for the Owner's, Contractor's and Architect's vicarious liability for construction operations under the Contract. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of �f• ; � "" purchasing and maintaining such optional insurance coverage,and the Contractor shall not be responsible for purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner.The minimum Emits of liability purchased with such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits 01997 AIA® required for Contractor's Liability Insurance under Clauses u.1.1.2 through u.1.1.5. AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, ® 1997 y T e American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 36 w 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance,including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. 10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and,in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to verify that it has been rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance.The Contractor ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall DOCUMENT MI. resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the This document has been approved and Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut-down, delay and start-up, which adjustments endorsed by The Associated General shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7. contractors of America. 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor,Subcontractors,Architect,Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages,losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Subparagraph 10.3d and has not been rendered harmless,provided that such claim,damage,loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property(other than the Work itself) and provided that such damage, loss or expense is not due to the sole negligence of a party seeking indemnity. 10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Paragraph 10.3 for materials and substances brought to the site by the Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents. 10.5 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing ? ! Work as required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. 10.6 EMERGENCIES '= 10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph 4.3 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 01IA7DOCUMENT A201- 1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, ® 1997 y T e American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 35 .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; w. or .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. w 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL reasonable protection to prevent damage,injury or loss to: CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITHAN 1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA rw Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors;and DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY U51NG AIA .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns,walks, DOCUMENT D401. pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. This document has been approved and w1 endorsed by The Associated General 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, Contractors of America. regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage,injury or loss. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract,reasonable safeguards for safety and protection,including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards,promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work,the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss �*+ insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor,a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor,or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2 *"t and 10.2.1.3,except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them,or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents.This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. 01997 AIA® IR AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 19 18, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, m 1997 y T e American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until *� the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 34 " 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon,partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly lllw make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL belief, and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF TH15 that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA final payment have been fulfilled. DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401. 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and This document has been approved and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the endorsed by The Associated General Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered(less amounts withheld by Owner)have Contractors of America. been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 3o days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract,to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner,the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are -- made,the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien,including all costs and reasonable attorneys'fees. w 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it , shall not constitute a waiver of claims. I v 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from: 01"7 AIA® .1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 unsettled; GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ))Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, ® 1997 y T e American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia 5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 33 e. the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be .■, extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shut-down,delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. ON 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit wd to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make an inspection to CONSEQUENCES.ENCOURAGED WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list, MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA + Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or DOCUMENT D401. correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. This document has been approved and "M endorsed by The Associated General 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect Contractors of America. will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, go maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate.Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of 00 Substantial Completion. 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and .■ Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof.Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the +�* Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Clause u.4.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any,security, maintenance,heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and , commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor . considers a portion substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work 01997 AIA® shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 agreement is reached,by decision of the Architect. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ))Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, ® 1997 by The w American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 32 .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or another contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;or .7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. w 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents,and shall so THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL notify the Architect. CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR from the Owner,out of the amount aid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractors MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS P ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA MR portion of the Work,the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled,reflecting percentages DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY U51NGAIA actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion DOCUMENT D401. of the Work. The Contractor shall,by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable,information Contractors of America. regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such '• Subcontractor. 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2,9.6.3 and 9.6.4. 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment,a progress payment,or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner.Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of !� trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT +' '� 9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the 01997 AIA® w Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration,then the AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 Contractor may, upon seven additional days'written notice to the Owner and Architect,stop CONTRACT CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 0 1997 y T e The American Institute of Architects violates the copyright American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA Washin ton,D.C.20006-5292 States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. 8 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 31 shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment.The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work. 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT *� 9.4.1 The Architect will,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment,with a copy to the Contractor,for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as CONSEQUENCES.CONS UL TATIONWITHAN ®" provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated DOCUMENT 0401. and that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents.The foregoing representations are subject This document has been approved and +� to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial endorsed by The Associated General Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations Contractors of America. from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect.The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However,the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. + 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner.The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence,may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued,to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Subparagraph 3.3.2,because of 1 defective Work not remedied; f, ,A .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor, .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for 01997 A,A® labor,materials or equipment; AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE - CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 0Copyr4 t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 198 , m 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects .� quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--511/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 30 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. f 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire,unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration, or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Paragraph 4.3. TH15 DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 8.3.3 This Paragraph 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO/T5 COMPLETION OR ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS 9.1 CONTRACT SUM ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA }IIR DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and,including authorized adjustments, DOCUMENT D401. is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Contractors of America. 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require.This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers,and reflecting retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. 9.3.1.1 As provided in Subparagraph 7.3.8, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders. 9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless = such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on e1 account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent ff•,yM;y� incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned 01997 AIA® 111! upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and CONTRACT CONDITIONS ITIONS OF THE »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, ® 1997 by T e The American Institute of Architects violates the copyright �Ilt American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 29 M 4W 7.3.7 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase,if any,with respect to that change. 7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties' agreement with part or all of such costs.For any portion of such cost that remains in dispute,the Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs. That determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with Article 4. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK DOCUMENT D401. 7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with This document has been approved and the intent of the Contract Documents.Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall endorsed by The Associated General be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders Contractors of America. promptly. ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time,including authorized .w adjustments,allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Paragraph 9.8. 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly,except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article u to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner.The date , of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. ., Unless the date of commencement is established by the Contract Documents or a notice to proceed given by the Owner,the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of 01997 AiA® w mortgages,mechanic's liens and other security interests. AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, ® 1997 y T e American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until w` the date of expiration as noted below. user Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/3112002. 28 .a� .3 the extent of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Time. 7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Subparagraph 7.3.3• I� 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN OR 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR .l mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS lt�lr substantiating data to permit evaluation; ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; DOCUMENT MI. .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee;or This document has been approved and .4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6. endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. a 7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly ter proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 1 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum,a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Clause 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of this Subparagraph 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following: 1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers' compensation _ insurance; 2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed; .3 rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of hand tools,whether rented ,A A from the Contractor or others; .4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work;and AIAO .5 additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to AIA�DOCUMENT A201- 1997 the change. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 976, 1987, 0 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects s provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. quotation of it States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 27 am 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable r. opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. so 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor,the Contractor shall,prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. �* 6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL which are payable to a separate contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities or CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN defective construction of the Contractor. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for ATTORNEY/S ENCOURAGED WITH costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities,damage to the RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR Work or defective construction of a separate contractor. MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF TH15 ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA + + 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate DOCUMENT 0401. contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. This document has been approved and wI. 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for endorsed by The Associated General cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Subparagraph 3.14. Contractors of America. 6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor,separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 GENERAL 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work,subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect w and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS �, ,� ��. `� 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the � Owner,Contractor and Architect,stating their agreement upon all of the following: 01997 AIA® I1R 1 change in the Work; AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 .2 the amount of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum;and GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE _ CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »»Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, ® 1997 y T e American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution.WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced w with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 26 the Contractor that the Contractor,by the Contract Documents,has against the Owner.Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub- subcontractors. 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to go the Owner provided that: 1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Paragraph 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN "•' writing;and g ATTORNEY/S ENCOURAGED WITH .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety,if any,obligated under bond RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR relating to the Contract. MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 3o days, the DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from DOCUMENT D401. the suspension. This document has been approved and ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Paragraph 4.3• 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor,separate contractors and the Other until subsequently revised. ° 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those !� stated in Article 3,this Article 6 and Articles 1o,a and 12. ®1997 AIA® 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, ® 1997 y T e 0 American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American In of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced 01 with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 25 am 4.6.6 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators Oft shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS am 5.1 DEFINITIONS 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub- THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor. CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITHAN ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR THE WORK MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY U51NG AIA DOCUMENT D401. Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal This document has been approved and no portion of the Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating endorsed by The Associated General whether or not the Owner or the Architect,after due investigation,has reasonable objection to Contractors of America. any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. w 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor,the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of *� performing the Work,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. However,no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitute. 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractors Work, which the Contractor, by these , , W ew Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall ,4w preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will 01"7 AIA® not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1 925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 19 7, ® 1997 y T e American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until *� the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 24 ± 4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Request for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association.The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand for arbitration but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or 41 equitable proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 6o days from the date of filing,unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. 4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements tew in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4.6 ARBITRATION THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 4.6.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraphs 4.3.10,9.10.4 and 9.10.5, shall, ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH after decision by the Architect or 3o days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR subject to arbitration. Prior to arbitration, the parties shall endeavor to resolve disputes by MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS mediation in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 4.5. ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA 4.6.2 Claims not resolved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration which, unless the DOCUMENT D40I. parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry This document has been approved and Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect.The demand for endorsed by The Associated General arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Contractors of America. Arbitration Association,and a copy shall be filed with the Architect. sr 4.6.3 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Subparagraphs 4.4.6 and 4.6.1 as applicable,and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen, and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of po limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph 13.7. 4.6.4 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract shall include,by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner,the Architect, the Architect's employees or consultants, except by written consent containing specific reference to the Agreement and signed by the Architect, Owner, Contractor and any other person or entity sought to be joined.No arbitration shall include,by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, parties other than the Owner, Contractor, a separate contractor as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration. No person or entity other than the Owner,Contractor or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall 40 be included as an original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsibility is insubstantial.Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of a Claim not described therein or with a person or entity not named or described therein. The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the 1 Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4.6.5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filing a notice of demand for f arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration ' is permitted to be demanded. 01997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ))Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, ® 1997 y The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 23 > and Owner arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 3o days have passed after the 4„ Claim has been referred to the Architect with no decision having been rendered by the Architect. The Architect will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. no 4.4.2 The Architect will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Architect is unable to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Architect concludes that, in the Architect's sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Claim. 4.4.3 In evaluating Claims, the Architect may, but shall not be obligated to,consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Architect in rendering a decision. The Architect may request the Owner to THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL authorize retention of such persons at the Owners expense. CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH 4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION I AT I ww request, and shall either provide a response on the requested supporting data, advise the DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY U51NGAIA Architect when the response or supporting data will be furnished or advise the Architect that no DOCUMENT D401. supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any,the Architect will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General 4.4.5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision, which shall state the Contractors of America. reasons therefor and which shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both.The approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architect shall be final and *� binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration. 4.4.6 When a written decision of the Architect states that(i)the decision is final but subject to mediation and arbitration and (2) a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 3o days after the date on which the party making the demand receives the final written decision, then failure to demand arbitration within said 3o days' period shall result in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor. If the Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned. 4.4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter, the Architect or the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety,if any,of the nature and amount of the Claim.If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default,the Architect or the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. 4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the Claim by the Architect,by mediation or by arbitration. 4.5 MEDIATION 4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraphs 4.3.10, 9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall, after initial decision by the Architect or 3o days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution of legal or 01997 AIA® equitable proceedings by either party. AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE _ CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, ® 1997 y T e American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until ` the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 22 proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Paragraph io.6. 4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to(i) a written interpretation from the Architect,(2) an order by the Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault,(3) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner,(5)termination of the Contract by the Owner, (6) Owner's suspension or (7) other reasonable grounds, Claim shall be Piled in accordance with this Paragraph 4.3. 4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time 4.3.7.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time,written notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. THI5 DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 11MI► 4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time,such Claim CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS po scheduled construction. ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY U51NG AIA 4.18 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers DOCUMENT D401. injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose ads such party is legally responsible,written notice of such injury or damage, This document has been approved and whether or not insured,shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding endorsed by The Associated General 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to Contractors of America. investigate the matter. 4.3.9 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon,and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work I proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor,the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 4.3.10 Claims for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes: 1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons;and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing,business and reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable,without limitation,to all consequential damages due to either !wr party's termination in accordance with Article 14.Nothing contained in this Subparagraph 4.3.10 =� shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated direct damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ,i 4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims,including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding those arising under Paragraphs 10.3 through 10.5, shall be referred initiallv to the Architect for decision.An initial decision by the Architect shall be required as a 01997 AIA® condition precedent to mediation,arbitration or litigation of all Claims between the Contractor AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ))Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 0 1997 y T e American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C. 20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced With permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 21 Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2,then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them. 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of w drawings. When making such interpretations and initial decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor,will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. THI5 DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN 4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion b one of the parties seeking, as a RESPECT COMPLETION WITH y P g RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money,extension MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.The term"Claim"also includes ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA w other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA relating to the Contract. Claims must be initiated by written notice. The responsibility to DOCUMENT D401. substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. This document has been approved and 4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after endorsed by The Associated General occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first Contractors of America. recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim,whichever is later.Claims must be initiated by written notice to the Architect and the other party. 4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Subparagraph 9.7.1 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions.If conditions are encountered at the site which are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time .� required for, performance of any part of the Work,will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified,the Architect shall so notify the Owner and 1 w• Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. Claims by either party in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given notice of the decision. If the conditions encountered are materially different, the Contract Sum and Contract Time 1 shall be equitably adjusted, but if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in . . _ . -V *�! the Contract Sum or Contract Time,the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial determination,subject to further proceedings pursuant to Paragraph 4.4• 4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an 01997 AIA®AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 0 1997 by T e American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--511/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 20 Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. 4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized,the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment,the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable,the Architect CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with RESPECT Y 15 E COMPLETION ENCOURAGED WITH T Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3,whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or DOCUMENT MI. employees,or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. This document has been approved and 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the endorsed by The Associated General Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the Contractors of America. limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Architect's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors,while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of I determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems,all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents.The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the t obligations under Paragraphs 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures.The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4• 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion, will receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner's review and records,written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project ,� , representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, L responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. ®1997 AIA® 41 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ))Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, ® 1997 by T e American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. user Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 19 attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property(other than the Work itself),but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3.18. war 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Paragraph 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Subparagraph 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts,disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH 4.1 ARCHITECT RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA lawfully practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Architect" means the DOCUMENT MI. Architect or the Architect's authorized representative. This document has been approved and 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the endorsed by The Associated General Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of Contractors of America. the Owner,Contractor and Architect.Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a new Architect against whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Architect. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be an Owner's representative (1) during construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the one-year period for correction of Work described in Paragraph 12.2. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract. 4.2.2 The Architect, as a representative of the Owner, will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the Contractor's operations (1) to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, (2) to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work, and(3) to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over or charge of, nor be responsible for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since ,. these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, :�• • � '""' except as provided in Subparagraph 3.3.1. 4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work W997 Ame ow in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ))Copyright 1911, 191RNEREM 25, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, ® 1997 y T e , American Institute cts. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provout written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subjelate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and wthe violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of t can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document: 97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 1$ services, certifications or approvals performed by such design_professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Subparagraph 3.12.10, the Architect will review, approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. 3.13 USE OF SITE 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances,permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to TH15 DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting,patching or MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written DOCUMENT MAY 8E MADE BY USING AIA consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor;such consent shall not be unreasonably DOCUMENT D401. withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General 3.15 CLEANING UP Contractors of America. 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools,construction equipment,machinery and surplus materials. 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. ' 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS 3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings,Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However,if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design,process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect. 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 11.3, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold 01997 AIA® harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ))Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 0 1997 by T e American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 17 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required by the Contract Documents the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph r„s 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. '! Submittals which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN submittals, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA ww requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract DOCUMENT D401. Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data,Samples or similar This document has been approved and „® submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Am Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (t) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's approval thereof. w 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data,Samples or similar submittals,to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means,methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or SM a u certifications by a design professional related to systems,materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design profess ,% ional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings,calculations,specifications,certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional,if prepared by others, 01997 AIA® shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 ' and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy,accuracy and completeness of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE »Copyii 8 t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, ® 1997 y T e CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 16 wr .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site,labor,installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; .3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances,the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Clause 3.8.2.1 and(2)changes in Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.2.2. 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in sufficient time to avoid delay in the Work. 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITHAN shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written ATTORNEY is ENCOURAGED WITH request in each case. RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS PIP 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract,shall prepare and submit DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY U51NG AIA for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. DOCUMENT D401. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be This document has been approved and revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project,shall be endorsed by The Associated General related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall Contractors of America. provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. 1A1 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings,Specifications,Addenda,Change Orders and other Modifications,in good order and marked currently to record field changes and selections made during construction, and one record copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES - 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor,manufacturer,supplier wlt or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information Furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials,equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 01997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 0 1997 y T e American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--511/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 15 an 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's am employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. 3.5 WARRANTY 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN 3.6 TAXES ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales,consumer,use and similar taxes for the Work provided MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS by the Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA an whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT MI. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure This document has been approved and 40 and pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America. inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or negotiations concluded. 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws,ordinances,rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations. However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith,the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner,the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. 3.8 ALLOWANCES 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents: 1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes,less applicable trade discounts; 01997 AIA® � AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, Q 1997 y The CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 14 I shall be reported promptly to the Architect as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. 3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the Architect,but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, !" ordinances, building codes,and rules and regulations,but any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect. 3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions issued by the Architect in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.6 and 4.3.7. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2,the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. The CON5EQUENCE5.CON5ULTATION WITH AN Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents or for differences between field RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS such error, inconsistency, omission or difference and knowingly failed to report it to the ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA Architect. DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES This document has been approved and 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill endorsed by The Associated General and attention.The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction Contractors of America. means, methods,techniques,sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods,techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe,the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor,the Owner shall be solely responsible for any resulting loss or damage. 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractors employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials,equipment, tools,construction equipment and machinery,water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. ®1997 Auke 3.4.2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 0 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C. 20006-5291 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 13 furnished by the Owner after receipt from the Contractor of a written request for such ., information or services. 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work. 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work,or any portion thereof,until the cause for such order �. has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity,except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITHAN ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA "* promptness, the Owner may after such seven-day period give the Contractor a second written DOCUMENT MAYBE MADE BY USING AIA notice to correct such deficiencies within a three-day period. If the Contractor within such DOCUMENT D401. three-day period after receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, This document has been approved and • correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting endorsed by The Associated General from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such Contractors of America. deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1 GENERAL 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor"means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. *" 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary,before starting each portion of the Work, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work,as well as the information furnished - by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing �� conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors,omissions,or inconsistencies in the Contract 01997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997 Documents; however, any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by the Contractor GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 198 , 0 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 12 them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyrights. All copies of Instruments of Service, except the Contractor's record set, shall be 5. returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub- subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect's consultants.The Contractor,Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the FIR Contract Documents. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the statutory copyright notice,if any,shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL sin construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants'copyrights CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITHAN or other reserved rights. ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR ARTICLE 2 OWNER MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS 2.1 GENERAL ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred DOCUMENT MI. to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all This document has been approved and matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in endorsed by The Associated General Subparagraph 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term "Owner" means the Contractors of America. Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the properly on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner's interest therein. 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 The Owner shall,at the written request of the Contractor,prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract.Furnishing of such evidence shall be a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work. After such evidence has been furnished, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees,including those required under Subparagraph 3.7.1,which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents,the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals,easements,assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. 2.23 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. '{ �V�;� 2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness. Any other information or services OW AIA® relevant to the Contractors performance of the Work under the Owners control shall be AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION <opyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 0 1991-by T e 1.0 American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced qp with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 11 The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials,equipment,systems,standards and workmanship for the Work,and performance of related services. 1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements,sample forms,Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. THI5 DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and CONSEQUENCES.CONSUL TATION WITH AN *� ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA ws 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance DOCUMENT MI. with such recognized meanings. This document has been approved and 1.3 CAPITALIZATION endorsed by The Associated General 1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are (i) specifically Contractors of America. defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles and identified references to Paragraphs, w Subparagraphs and Clauses in the document or(3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. 1.4 INTERPRETATION 1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. 1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor. If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents upon request. 1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site,become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE 1.6.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic form, prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may retain one record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications 01997 AIA® and other documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants, and unless AIA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997 otherwise indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig 1t 911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 10 1997 y T e American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects w� quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 10 Work,Definition of 4.6.5,5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10,10.2.2,10.3, u.1.3, 1.1.3 u.4.6,12.2.2,12.2.4, 13.3,14 Written Consent Written Orders 1.6,3.4.2,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,4.3.4,4.6.4,9.3.2, 1.1.1,2.3,3.9,4.3.6,7,8.2.2,11.4.9,12.1,12.2, 9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3,11.4.1, 13.2,13.4.2 13-5.2,14-3.1 Written Interpretations 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 Written Notice 2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.91 3.12.10,4.3,4.4.8, ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL Op The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN (hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS PIP Contract.A Modification is(1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties,(2) ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA a Change Order,(3)a Construction Change Directive or(4) a written order for a minor change DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the DOCUMENT MI. Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders,sample forms,the Contractor's bid This document has been approved and by or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements). endorsed Contractors The Associated General Contract of America. 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification.The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Architect and Contractor, (2)between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and Architect or(4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract IF intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. 1.1.3 THE WORK The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. 1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or w by separate contractors. 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details,schedules and diagrams. 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS 01997 AIA® AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, ® 1997 y T e rial herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the mate quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 9 A. Subcontractors,Work by TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.1,4.2.3,5.2.3,5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2, CONTRACT 9.6.7 14 Subcontractual Relations Tests and Inspections 5.3, 5.4,9.3.1.2,9.6,9.10 10.2.1,u-4.7,11-4.8, 3.1.3,3.3.3,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2, w 14.1,14.2.1,14.3.2 Submittals 9.10.1'10-3.2,U-4.1-1,12.2.1,13.5 1.6,3.10,3.u,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.6,9.2, TIME 9.3,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3,u.1.3 8 Subrogation,Waivers of Time,Delays and Extensions of 6.1.1,u.4.5, 11.4.7 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1, Substantial Completion 7.4-1,7.5.1,8.3,9.5-1,9-7-1,10-3.2, 1o.6a,14.3.2 4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, Time Limits w, 9.10.4.2,12.2,13.7 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3,3.10,3.u,3.12.5,3.15.1, Substantial Completion,Definition of 4.2,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,5.2,5.3,5.4, 6.2.4,7.3, 9.8.1 7.4,8-2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8, THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL Substitution of Subcontractors 9.9,9-10,11-1.3,u.4.1.5, u.4.6,u.4-10,12.2,13.5, CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN "*I 5.2.3,5.2.4 13-7,14 ATTORNEY 15 ENCOURAGED WITH Substitution of Architect Time Limits on Claims RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR 4.3.2,4.3.4,4.3.8,4.4,4.5,4.6 4. MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS Substitutions ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA of Materials Title to Work DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE By USING AIA 3.4.2,3.5.1>7.3.7 9.3.2,9.3.3 Sub-subcontractor,Definition of UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF DOCUMENT D901. 5.1.2 WORK This document has been approved and Subsurface Conditions 12 endorsed by The Associated General 4.3.4 Uncovering of Work Contractors of America. Successors and Assigns 12.1 13.2 Unforeseen Conditions go Superintendent 4-3-4,8-3-1,10-3 3.9, 10.2.6 Unit Prices Supervision and Construction Procedures 4.3.9,7.3.3.2 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4,3.12.10, 2.2 2. 4• ,4• 7 4.3.3>6•1•3, Use of Documents 6.2-4,7-1.3,7-3.6,8.2,8.3.1,9.4.2,10, 12,14 1.1.1,1.6,2.2.5,3.12.6,5.3 Surety Use of Site 4.4.7,5.4.1.2,9.8.5,9.10.2,9.10.3,14.2.2 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 Surety,Consent of Values,Schedule of 9.10.2,9.10.3 9.2,9.3.1 Surveys Waiver of Claims by the Architect 2.2.3 13.4.2 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 14.4 4.3.10,9.10.5,U-4.7,13-4.2 Suspension of the Work Waiver of Claims by the Owner 5.4.2,14.3 4-3-10,9-9-3,9.10.3,9.10.4,11-4.3,U-4.5,11-4.7, Suspension or Termination of the Contract 12.2.2.1,13-4.2,14.2.4 4.3.6,5.4.1.1,u•4.9,14 Waiver of Consequential Damages Taxes 4.3.10,14.2.4 3.6,3.8.2.1,7.3.6.4 Waiver of Liens Termination by the Contractor 9.10.2,9.10.4 4.3.10, 14.1 Waivers of Subrogation Termination by the Owner for Cause 6.1.1,11.4.5, 11.4.7 ., ,a 4.3-10,5.4.1.1, 14.2 Warranty. *" Termination of the Architect 3.5,4.2.9,4.3-5.3,9.3-3,9.8-4,9.9-1,9.10.4, 4.1.3 12.2-2,13.7-1.3 Termination of the Contractor Weather Delays 01997 AIA® wee 14.2.2 4.3.7.2 AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, ® 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 8 OF Review of Shop Drawings,Product Data and 10 Samples by Contractor Polychlorinated Biphenyl 3.12 Rights and Remedies 10.3.1 Product Data,Definition of 1.1.2,2.3,2.4,3.5.1,3.15.2,4.2.6,4.3.4>4.5,4.6, 3.12.2 5.3,5.4,6.1,6.3,7.3.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7, 10.2.5,10.3, Product Data and Samples,Shop Drawings 12.2.2,12.2.4, 13.4,14 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 Royalties,Patents and Copyrights Progress and Completion 3.17 4.2.2,4.3.3,8.2,9.8,9.9.1,14.1.4 Rules and Notices for Arbitration Progress Payments 4.6.2 4.3.3,9.3>9.67 9.8.5,9.10-37 13.6,14.2.3 Safety of Persons and Property 10.2,1o.6 Project,Definition of the Safety Precautions and Programs 1.1.4 Project Management Protective Liability 3.3.1,4.2.2,4.2.7,5.3.1, 10.1,10.2,1o.6 THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL Insurance Samples,Definition of CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN 11.3 3.12.3 ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH Project Manual,Definition of the Samples,Shop Drawings,Product Data and RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR 1.1.7 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS Project Manuals Samples at the Site,Documents and ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 3.11 DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA 2.2.5 Project Representatives Schedule of Values DOCUMENT D401, 4.2.10 9.2,9.3.1 This document has been approved and Property Insurance Schedules,Construction endorsed by The Associated General 10.2.5, 11.4 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 Contractors of America. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND Separate Contracts and Contractors PROPERTY 1.1.4,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,4.2.7,4.6.4,6,8.3.1, 11.4.7, 12.1.2,12.2.5 10 Shop Drawings,Definition of Regulations and Laws 3.12.1 1.6,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6, Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples 9.6-4,9.9.1,10.2.2,11.1,11.4,13.1, 13.4,13.5.1, 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 13-5.2,13.6,14 Site,Use of ,. Rejection of Work 1 6.1.1,6.2.1 3.5.1,4.2.6,12.2.1 3. Releases and Waivers of Liens Site Inspections 9.10.2 1.2.2,3.2.1,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.10.1, Representations 13.5 1.5.2,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.4.2,9.5.1, Site Visits,Architect's ! 9.8.2,9.10.1 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1,13.5 Representatives Special Inspections and Testing 2.1.1,3.1.1,3.9,4.1.1,4.2.1,4.2.10,5.1.1,5.1.2, 4.2.6,12.2.1,13.5 Specifications,Definition of the 13.2.1 1.1.6 Resolution of Claims and Disputes Specifications,The 4.4,4.5,4.6 1.1.1, 1.1.6,1.1.7,1.2.2,1.6,3.11,3.12.10,3.17 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work Statute of Limitations 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, 10 4.6.3,12.2.6,13.7 Retainage Stopping the Work 2.37 4.3.6,9.7,10.3,14.1 9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 Stored Materials Review of Contract Documents and Field z •-w 6.2.1,9-3.2,10.2.1.2,10.2-4,11.4.1.4 ! Conditions by Contractor Subcontractor,Definition of 1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3,3.12.7,6.1.3 5.1.1 Review of Contractor's Submittals b y Owner and SUBCONTRACTORS 01997 AIA® go Architect AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.11,3.12,4.2,5.2,6.1.3,9.2,9.8.2 5 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ))Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 197 , 1987, ® 1997 y T e American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American In of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--511/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 7 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.6,7.1,7.4 11.2 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Owner's Loss of Use Insurance 13 11.4.3 Modifications,Definition of Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.1 1.1.2,5.2,5.3,5.4,9.6.4,9.10.2,14.2.2 Modifications to the Contract Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work 1.1.1,1.1.2,3.7.3,3.11,4.1.2,4.2.1,5.2.3,7,8.3.1, 2.4,12.2-4-14.2.2.2 9.7,10-3.2,11.4.1 Owner's Right to Clean Up Mutual Responsibility 6.3 .e 6.2 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of Award Separate Contracts 9.6.6,9.9.3, 12.3 6.1 Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Owner's Right to Stop the Work Correction of 2.3 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.6,6.2.5,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.3, Owner's Right to Suspend the Work THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 9.10.4,12.2.1,13.7.1.3 14.3 CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN *� Notice Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH 2.2.1,2.3,2.4,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.7.2,3.7.4,3.12.9,4.3, 14.2 RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR 4.4.8,4.6.5,5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10,10.2.2,11.1.3, Ownership and Use of Drawings,Specifications MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS 11-4.6,12.2.2,12.2-4,13-3,13-5-1,13-5.2,14.1,14.2 and Other Instruments of Service ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA �s Notice,Written 1.1.1, 1.6,2.2.5,3.2.1,3.11.1,3.17.1,4.2.12,5.3 DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA 2.3,2.4,3.3.1,3.9,3.12.9,3.12.10,4.3,4.4.8, Partial Occupancy or Use DOCUMENT D401. 4.6.5,5.2.1,8.2.2,9.7,9.10,10.2.2,10.3, 11.1.3, 9.6.6,9.9,11-4-1-5 11.4.6,12.2.2,12.2.4, 13.3, 14 Patching,Cutting and This document has been approved and Notice of Testing and Inspections endorsed by The Associated General 13-5.1,13-5.2 3.14,6.2.5 Contractors of America. Patents Notice to Proceed 317 8'2'2 Payment,Applications for Notices,Permits,Fees and 8 93 2.2.2,3.7,3.13,7-3.6-4,10.2.2 4.2.5,7.3. >9.2,9. 3,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3,9.7.1, Observations,Contractor's 9.8-5,9.10.1,9.10.3,9.10.5,U-1.3,14.2-4,14-4.3 1.5.2,3.2,3-7-3,4-3-4 Payment,Certificates for Occupancy 4.2-5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6-6,9.7.1, 2.2.2,9.6.6,9.8,11-4-1-5 9.10.1,9.10.3,13.7,14.1.1.3,14.2.4 Orders,Written Payment,Failure of 1.1.1,2.3,3.9,4.3.6,7,8.2.2,U-4.9,12.1,12.2, 4.3.6,9.5.1.3, 9.7,9.10.2,14.1-1.3,14.2.1.2,13.6 13.5.2,14.3.1 Payment,Final OWNER 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10,11.1.2,1-1-1-3,11-4-1, 2 11.4.5,12.3.1,13.7,14.2.4,14.4.3 Owner,Definition of Payment Bond,Performance Bond and 2.1 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3,11.4.9, 11.5 Owner,Information and Services Required of Payments,Progress the 4.3.3,9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3,13.6,14.2.3 wr 2.1.2,2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.10,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 9 10-3.3,11.2,u.4,13.5.1,13.5.2,14.1.1.4,14.1.4 Payments to Subcontractors Owner's Authority 5.4.2,9-5-1-3,9.6.2,9.6-3,9.6-4,9.6-7,11-4.8, 1.6,2.1.1,2.3,2.4,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.12.10,3.14.2, 14.2.1.2 4.1.2,4.1.3,4.2.4,4.2.9,4.3.6,4.4.7, 5.2.1,5.2.4, PCB 5.4.1,6.1,6.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,8.2.2,8. .1, 10.3.1 3 9.3.1,9.3.2, � 9.5• ,9.9.1,9.10.2, 10. .2,11.1. ,11. .1,U-4-3, Performance Bond and Payment Bond 1 3 3 3 +=•�•i: 11.4.10,12.2.2,12.3.1,13.2.2,14.3,14.4 7.3.6.4,9.6.7,9.10.3,11-4-9, 11.5 Owner's Financial Capability Permits,Fees and Notices 2.2.1,13.2.2,14.1.1.5 2.2.2,3.7,3.13,7.3-6.4,10.2.2 01997 AIAM Owner's Liability Insurance PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 19 6, 1987, ® 1997 y T e American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. states and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until .� the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 6 1 13.6 Governing Law Interpretation 13.1 1.2.3, 1.4,4.1.1,4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2,8.1.4 Guarantees(See Warranty) Interpretations,Written 1! Hazardous Materials 4.2.11,4.2.12,4.3.6 10.2.4, 10.3,10.5 Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required Identification of Contract Documents 4.6.4 1.5.1 Judgment on Final Award Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 4.6.6 5.2.1 Labor and Materials,Equipment Indemnification 1.1-3,1,1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13, 3.17,3.18,9.10.2,10-3.3,10.5,11.4-1.2,11.4.7 3.15.1,42.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3, Information and Services Required of the Owner 9.5.1.3,9.10.2,10-2.1,10.2-4,14.2.1.2 2.1.2,2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.10,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, Labor Disputes 6.1.4,6.2.5,9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2, 9.10.3, 8.3.1 THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL r 10-3.3,11.2,11.4,13-5.1,13-5.2,14.1-1.4,14,1.4 Laws and Regulations CONSEOUENCES.CONSULTATION WITHAN Injury or Damage to Person or Property 1.6,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8,4.6, ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH 4.3.8,10.2,1o.6 9.6.4,9.9.1,10.2.2,11.1,11.4,13.1, 13-4,13-5-1, RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR Inspections 13.5.2,13.6,14 MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS RN 3.1.3,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.2, Liens ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 9.8-3,9.9.2,9.10.1,12.2.1,13.5 2.1.2,4.4.8,8.2.2,9.3.3,9.10 DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY U51NG AIA Instructions to Bidders Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder DOCUMENT D401. 1,1.1 4.6.4 Instructions to the Contractor Limitations,Statutes of This document has been approved and 3.2.3,3.3.1,3.8.1,4.2.8,5.2.1,7,12,8.2.2,13-5.2 4.6.3,12.2.6,13.7 endorsed by The Associated General Insurance Limitations of Liability Contactors of America. 3.18.1,6.1.1,7.3.6,8.2.1,9.3.2,9.8.4,9.9.1, 2.3,3.2.1,3.5.1,3.7.3,312.8,3.12.10,3.17,3.18, 9.10.2, 9.10.5,U 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.12,6.2.2,9.4.2,9.6.4, 9.6.7, Insurance,Boiler and Machinery 9.10.4,10-3.3,10.2-5,11.1.2,11.2.1,U-4.7,12.2-5, 11.4.2 13.4.2 Insurance,Contractor's Liability Limitations of Time T1.1 2.1.2,2.2,2.4,3.2.1,3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1, Insurance,Effective Date of 4.2.7,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,5.2,5.3, 5.4,6.2.4,7.3, 8.2.2,U.1.2 7.4,8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8, Insurance,Loss of Use 9.9,9-10,u-1-3,u-4-1-5,U-4.6,u.4.10,12.2,13.5, 11.4.3 13.7,14 Insurance,Owner's Liability Loss of Use Insurance 11.2 11.4.3 iR Insurance,Project Management Protective Material Suppliers Liability 1.6,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,5.2.1,9.3,9.4.2,9.6, 11.3 9.10.5 Insurance,Property Materials,Hazardous 10.2-5, 11.4 10.2.4,10.3,10.5 Insurance,Stored Materials Materials,Labor,Equipment and 9.3.2,11.4.1.4 1.1.3,1.1.6,1.6.1,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.23,3.12,3.13, INSURANCE AND BONDS 3.15.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1, 7.3.6,9.3.2,9.3.3, 11 9.5-1.3,9.10.2,10.2.1,10.2-4,14.2.1.2 O Means,Methods,Techniques,Sequences and Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Procedures of Construction Occupancy 3.3.1,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,9.4.2 9.9-1,U-4-1.5 Mechanic's Lien .�►, .+ Insurance Companies,Settlement with 8 ". 11.4.10 414- Intent of the Contract Documents Mediation 1.2.1,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13,7.4 041,4.4.51 4.4.6,4.4.8,4.5,4.6.1,4.6.2,8.31, 01997 AIA® Interest 5 AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 Minor Changes in the Work GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 0 1997 y T e American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C. 20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia -5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 5 M Contractor's Review of Contract Documents 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.3.4,4.4.1, •■, 1.5.2,3.2,3.7.3 4.4.5,4.4.6,4.5,6.3,7.3.6,7.3.8,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2, Contractor's Right to Stop the Work 9.4,9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1,13.5.2,14.2.2,14.2.4 9.7 Decisions to Withhold Certification Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 9.4.1,9.5,9.7,14.1.1.3 00 4.3-10,14.1 Defective or Nonconforming Work,Acceptance, Contractor's Submittals Rejection and Correction of 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.6,9.2,9.3, 2.3,2.4,3.5.1,4.2.6,6.2.5,9.5.1,9.5.2,9.6.6, 9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11-1.3,U-5.2 9.8.2,9.9.3,9,10.4,12.2.1,13.7-1.3 a Contractor's Superintendent Defective Work,Definition of 3.9,10.2.6 3.5.1 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Definitions Procedures 1.1,2.1.1,3.1,3.5.1,3.12.1,3.12.2,3.12.3,4.1.1, 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,4.3.3,6.1.3, 4.3.1,5.1,6.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.3.6,8.1, 9.1,9.8.1 6.2.4,7.1.3,7.3.4,7.3.6,8.2,10,12,14 Delays and Extensions of Time Contractual Liability Insurance 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2• , 2.1, TH15 DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 1f.1.1.8,11.2,11.3 3 7• 7.3.1, � Coordination and Correlation 7.4.1,7.5.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7-1,10-3.2, 1o.6.1,14.3.2 CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN Disputes ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH 1.2,1.5.2,3.3.1,3.10,3.12.6,6.1.3,6.2.1 4.1.4,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.6,6.3,7.3.8 RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR Copies Furnished of Drawings and Documents and Samples at the Site MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS Specifications 3.11 ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA "� 16 . 5 311 Drawings,Definition of DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY U51NGAIA Copyrights gs, DOCUMENT D401. 1.6,3.17 1.1.5 Correction of Work Drawings and Specifications,Use and This document has been approved and 2.3,2.4,3.7.4,4.2.1, Ownership of endorsed b The Associated General 9.4.2,9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1, Y 12.1.2,12.2,13.7.1.3 1.1-1,1.3,2.2.5,3.11,5.3 Contractors of America. Correlation and Intent of the Contract Effective Date of Insurance Documents 8.2.2,11.1.2 w 1.2 Emergencies Cost,Definition of 4.3.5, 10.6,14.1.1.2 7.3.6 Employees,Contractor's Costs 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6,10.2, •"' 2.4,3.2.3,3.7.4,3.8.2,3.15.2,4.3,5.4.2,6.1.11 10.3,11-1.1,11-4.7,14.1,14.2.1.1 6.2.3,7.3.3.3,7.3.6,7.3.7,7.3.8,9.10.2,10.3.2, Equipment,Labor,Materials and 10.5,11.3,11.4,12.1,12.2.1,12.2.4,13.5,14 1.1-3,1.1.6,3.4,3.5.1,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, Cutting and Patching 4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3, 6.2-5,3.14 9.5-1.3,9.10.2,10.2.1,10.2-4,14.2.1.2 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Execution and Progress of the Work Contractors 1.1-3,1.2.1,1.2.2,2.2.3,2.2.5,3.1,3.3,3.4,3.5,3.7, so 10, 12, 1 ,4.2.2,4.2. , 3.14.2,6.2.4,9.2.1.5,10.2.1.2,10.2.5,10.6,u.l, 3• 3• 3. 4 3 4.3.3,6.2.2>7.1.3, 11.4,12.2.4 7.3-4,8.2,9.5,9.9-1,10.2,10.3,12.2,14.2,14,3 Damage to the Work Extensions of Time 3.14.2,9.9.1,10.2.1.2,10.2.5,1o.6,11.4,12.2.4 3.2.3,4.3.1,4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3, w Damages,Claims for 7-4-1,9-5-1,9.7.1,10.3.2,io.6.i,14.3.2 3.2.3,3.18,4.3.1o,6.1.1,8. . Failure of Payment 3 ,3 9.5.1,9.6.7,10.3.3, 11.1.1,11.4.5,11.4.7,14.1.3>14.2.4 4.3.6,9.5-1.3,9.7,9.10.2,14.1.1.3,14.2.1.2,13.6 Damages for Delay Faulty Work 6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7,10.3.2 (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Date of Commencement of the Work, Final Completion and Final Payment Definition of 4.2.1,4.2.9,4.3.2,9.8.2,9.10,11.1.2,11.1.3,11.4.1, 8.1.2 11.4.5,12.3.1,13.7,14.2.4,14.4.3 ,: wee Date of Substantial Completion,Definition of Financial Arrangements,Owner's 's'+ 'ir 8.1.3 2.2.1,13.2.2,14.1-1.5 Day,Definition of Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance 8.1.4 11.4 01997 AIA® Decisions of the Architect GENERAL PROVISIONS AIA DOCUMENT A201 - 1997 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 0 1997 by The CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects .w quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington,D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 4 !> 3.2.3,4.3.4,4.3.7,6.1.1,8.3.2,10-3.2 1.1.2 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR s 4.3.4 SUSPENSION OF THE Claims for Damages 5.4.1.1,11.4.9, 14 3.2.3,3J8,4.3.io,6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7,10.3.3, Contract Administration 11.1.1,11.4.5,11.4.7,14.1.3,14.2.4 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 Claims Subject to Arbitration Contract Award and Execution,Conditions 4.4.1,4.5-1,4-6.1 Relating to Cleaning Up 3.7.1,3.10,5.2,6.1,11-1.3,11-4.6,11-5.1 3.15,6.3 Contract Documents,The Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period 1.1,1.2 13.7 Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use Commencement of the Work,Conditions of - 1.6,z.2.5,5.3 Relating to 2.2.1,3.2.1,3.4.1,3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12.6,4.3.5,5.2.1, Contract Documents,Definition of THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 5.2.3,6.2.2,8.1.2,8.2.2,8.3.1,11.1, 11.4.1,11.4.6, 1.1.1 CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN U-5.1 Contract Sum ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH Commencement of the Work,Definition of 3.8,4.3.4,4.3.5,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2,7.3,7.4,9.1, RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR 8.1.2 9.4.2,9.5.1.4,9.6.7,9.7,10.3.2,1141, 14.2.4, MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF TH15 Communications Facilitating Contract 14.3.2 ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA Contract Sum,Definition of DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA Administration ` 1 4ion 9.1 DOCUMENT MI. 39 Completion,Conditions Relating to Contract Time This document has been approved and 1.6.1,3.4.1,3.11,3.15,4.2.2,4.2.9,8.2,9.4.2,9.8, 4.3.4,4.3.7,4.4.5,5.2.3,7.2.1.3,7.3,7.4,8.1.1, endorsed by The Associated General 9.9.1,9.10,12.2,13.7,14-1.2 8.2,8.3.1,9.5.1,9.7,10-3.2,12.1.1, 14.3.2 Contractors of America. COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND Contract Time,Definition of 9 8.1.1 CONTRACTOR Completion,Substantial 3 4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, Contractor,Definition of 9.10.4.2,12.2,13.7 Compliance with Laws 3.1,6.1.2 1.6.1,3.2.2,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,4.1.1,4.4.8, Contractor's Construction Schedules 4.6.4,4.6.6,9.6.4,10.2.2,11.1,11.4,13.1,13.4, 1.4.1.2,3.10, 3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 13.5.1,13.5.2,13.6,14.1.1,14.2.1.3 Contractor's Employees Concealed or Unknown Conditions 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8-1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6,10.2, 4-3.4,8.3.1,10.3 10.3,11.1.1,11.4.7,14.1,14.2.1.1, Conditions of the Contract Contractor's Liability Insurance 1.1.1,1.1-7,6.1.1,6.1.4 11.1 on Consent,Written Contractor's Relationship with Separate 1.6,3.4.2,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2>4.3.4,4.6.4,9.3.2, Contractors and Owners Forces 9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3,11.4.1, 13.2,13.4.2 3-12-5,3-14.2,4.2-4,6,U-4-7,12.1.2,12.2.4 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors "I SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.18.1,3.18.2,5,9.6.2,9.6.7,9.10.2, 11.4.1.2,11-4-7,11-4.8 Construction Change Directive,Definition of Contractor's Relationship with the Architect 1.1.2,1.6,3.1.3,3.2.1,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.3.1,3.4.2, !alt 7.3.1 1 l0, 11, 12, 16, 18, 1 2 1 Construction Change Directives 3.5• ,3.7.3,3• 3• 3- 3• 3• 4• • >4• •3, 1.1.1,3.12.8,4.2.8,4.3.9,7.1,7.3,9.3.1.1 4.2,4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.7,5.2,6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2, 9.3,9.4,9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2-6,10.3,11.3, Construction Schedules,Contractors 2% 11.4.7,12,13.4.2,13.5 1.4.1.2,3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.3.7.2,6.1.3 Contractor's Representations Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 1.5.2,3.5.1,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.8.2 5.4, 14.2.2.2 Contractor's Responsibility for Those Continuing Contract Performance Performing the Work 01997 AIA® !" 4.3.3 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,5.3.1,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 Contract,Definition of 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION »Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961,P 963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, ® 1997 Y T e The American Institute of Architects American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material h la or substantial 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United Washin ton,D.C.20006-5292 States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. g copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5131/2002. 3 Aesthetic Effect 1.1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6,9.6.3,9.6-4,11-4.7 ,.� 4-2.13,4.5.1 Architect's Representations Allowances 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 3.8 Architect's Site Visits All-risk Insurance 4.2.2,4.2.5,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2. 11.4.1.1 9.10.1,13.5 w Applications for Payment Asbestos 4.2.5,7.3.8,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.6.3,9.7.1,9.8.5, 10.3.1 9.10,u.1.3,14.2.4,14.4.3 Attorneys'Fees Approvals 3.18.1,9.10.2,10.3.3 2.4,3.1.3,3.5,3.10.2,3.12,4.2.7,9.3.2,13.4.2, Award of Separate Contracts 13.5 6.1.1,6.1.2 Arbitration Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for 4.3.3,4.4,4.5.1,4.5.2,4.6,8.3.1,9.7.1,11.4.9, Portions of the Work 11.4.10 5.2 Architect Basic Definitions TH15 DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL 4.1 1.1 CONSEQUENCES.CONSULTATION WITH AN �w Architect,Definition of Bidding Requirements ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH 4.1.1 1.1.1,1.1.7,5.2.1,11.5.1 RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR Architect,Extent of Authority Boiler and Machinery Insurance MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS 2.4,3.12.7,4.2,4.3.6,4.4,5.2,6.3,7.1.2,7.3.6, 11.4.2 ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 00 7.4,9.2,9.3.1,9.4,9.5,9.8.3,9.10.1, 9.10.3,12.1, Bonds,Lien DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA 12.2.1,13-5.1,13-5.2,14.2.2,14.2.4 9.10.2 DOCUMENT D401. Architect,Limitations of Authority and Bonds,Performance,and Payment This document has been approved and No Responsibility 7.3.6-4,9.6-7,9.10.3,11-4.9,11.5 endorsed by The Associated General 2.1.1,3.3.3,3.12.4,3.12.8,3.12.10,4.1.2,4.2.1, Building Permit Contractors of America. 4.2.2,4.2.3,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.10,4.2.12,4.2.13, 3.7.1 4.4,5.2.1,7.4,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.6 Capitalization w Architect's Additional Services and Expenses 1.3 2.4,11.4.1.1,12.2.1,13.5.2,13.5.3,14.2.4 Certificate of Substantial Completion Architect's Administration of the Contract 9.8.3,9.8.4,9.8.5 3.1.3, 4.2,4.3.4,4.4,9.43 9.5 Certificates for Payment Architect's Approvals 4-2-5,4.2.9,9-3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7-1, 2.4,3.1.3,3.5.1,3.10.2,4.2.7 9.10.1,9-10-3,13-7,14.1-1.3,14.2.4 Architect's Authority to Reject Work Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval 3.5.1,4.2.6,12.1.2,12.2.1 13.5.4 - a* Architect's Copyright Certificates of Insurance 1.6 9.10.2,11-1.3 Architect's Decisions Change Orders 4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,4-3-4,4.4.1, 1.1.1,2.4.1,3.4.2,3.8.2.3,3.11.1,3.12.8,4.2.8, OR 4.4.5,4.4.6,4.5,6.3,7.3.6,7.3.8,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2, 4.3.4,4.3.9,5.2.3,7.1,7.2,7.3,8.3.1,9.3.1.1, 9.4,9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1,13.5.2,14.2.2,14.2.4 9.10.3,11.4.1.2,11.4.4,11.4.9,12.1.2 Architect's Inspections Change Orders,Definition of 4.2.2,4.2.9,4.3.4,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1,13.5 7.2.1 go Architect's Instructions CHANGES IN THE WORK 3.2.3,3.3.1,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.8,7.4-1,12.1,13-5.2 Architect's Interpretations 3.11,4.2.8, 7,8-3.1,9.3-1.1,11-4-9 4.2.11,4 212 4 3 6 Claim,Definition of Architect's Project Representative 4.3.1 4.2.10 Claims and Disputes Architect's Relationship with Contractor 3.2.3,4.3,4.4,4.5,4.63 6.1.1,6.3,7.3.8,9.3.3, ti , 1.1.2,1.6,3.1.3,3.2.1,3.2.2,3.2.3,3-3-1,3.4.2, 9.10.4,10.3.3 ys+airy:. we 3.5.1,3.7.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18,4.1.2,4.1.3, Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 4.2,4.3.4,4.4.1,4.4.7,5.2,6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2, 4.6.5 9.3,9.4,9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6,10.3,11.3, Claims for Additional Cost 01997 AIA® 11.4.7,12,13.4.2,13.5 3.2-3,4.3-4,4.3.5,4.3.6,6.1-1,7-3.8,10-3.2 AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors Claims for Additional Time GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ))Copyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 0 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue,N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.This document was electronically produced with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 2 1997 Edition - Electronic Format AIA Document A201 - 1997 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction TABLE OF ARTICLES 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS 2. OWNER THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEOUENCES.CONSULTATION WITHAN 3. CONTRACTOR ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT MODIFICATION.AUTHENTICATION OF THIS A ELECTRONICALLY DRAFTED AIA 5. SUBCONTRACTORS DOCUMENT MAY BE MADE BY USING AIA DOCUMENT D401. 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General 7. CHANGES IN THE WORK Contractors of America. 8. TIME 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS PIP 14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT INDEX Addenda Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 1.1.1,3.0 9.6.6,9.93,12.3 Additional Costs,Claims for Acceptance of Work 4.3.4,43.5,4.3.6,6.m,10.3 9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3,12.3 Additional Inspections and Testing Access to Work 9.8.3,12.2.1,13.5 Additional Time,Claims for �► , �=� 3.16, 6.2.1,12.1 Accident Prevention 4.3-4,4.3.7,8.3-2 4.2.3,10 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT Acts and Omissions 3.13,4,949-5 3.2,3.3.2,3.12.8,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.8,4.4.1,8.3.1, Advertisement or Invitation to Bid ®1997 MAO AIA DOCUMENT A201- 1997 9.5-1,10.2.5,13-4.2,13.7,14.1 1.1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION opyrig t 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 95 , 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 9 98 , ® 1997 by Me OR American Institute of Architects. Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial The American Institute of Architects quotation of its provisions without written permission of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. States and will subject the violate to legal prosecution. WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. Washington, D.C.20006-5292 copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution. This document was electronically produced ! I with permission of the AIA and can be reproduced in accordance with your license without violation until the date of expiration as noted below. User Document:97a201.aia--5/1/2001.AIA License Number 1005645, which expires on 5/31/2002. 1 ow j D. In submitting his bid, it is understood that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids of the General Bidders and to waive any informalities ,. in bidding, if it be in the Owner's interest to do so. It is also agreed that this bid may not be withdrawn within sixty (60) days of the receipt of bids, Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded. E. The undersigned agrees that if he is selected as General Contractor he will within five days, Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded, .. after presentation thereof by the Owner, execute a contract in accordance with the terms of this General Bid. (Name of General Bidder) .� (Business Address) By Title Date 2 • FORM FOR GENERAL BID BIDDER RE. Miilbank Affordable Housing Michelman Avenue Northampton, MA BIDS DUE: Until 1:00 PM on Friday, December 21, 2001 Carlson & Schmitt Architects, Inc. One South End Bridge Circle Agawam, MA A. Having carefully examined the Bid Form and the Drawings numbered and entitled as above, dated , and addendum, the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, services and insurance required for the proposed construction in strict accordance with said documents for the Contract Amount set forth herein. B. The proposed Contract Price is DOLLARS ($ ). C. Subcontractor's Bid Breakdown —The following amounts are to be included and are part of the total Contract Price, item B. above. Trade Contractor's Name Bid Site (including paving and landscape Concrete (including piles) Roofing Flooring Painting Fire Protection Heating Plumbing 1p Electrical � 1 Instructions To Bidders ITB ,- receive, any such interpretations shall not relieve any bidder from any obligation under his bid as submitted. EXAMINATION OF SITE, DRAWINGS, ETC. Each bidder shall visit the site of the proposed work and fully acquaint himself with the circumstances and conditions relating to the entire project as they exist so that he may fully understand the facilities, difficulties and restrictions attending the execution of the work under his contract. Bidders shall also thoroughly examine and be familiar with the drawings and the specifications. The failure or omission of any bidder to receive or examine any form, instrument or document, or to visit the site and acquaint himself with conditions there existing shall in no way relieve the bidder from any obligation with respect to his bid. By submitting a bid, the bidder agrees and warrants that he has examined the site and the specifications and drawings and where the specifications and drawings require in any of the work a given result to be produced, that the specifications and drawings are adequate and the required result can be produced. No claim for any extra or alleged damage due to delay will be allowed because of alleged impossibilities in the production of the results specified or because of inadequate or improper plans and specifications, and whenever a result is required, the successful bidder shall furnish any and all extras and make any changes needed to produce, to the satisfaction of the Awarding Authority, the required result. PERMITS AND FEES The Contractor is to give proper authorities notice relating to the work, obtain official permits when required, and pay all proper fees for same. TAX STATUS This job is sales tax exempt. Valley Community Development Corporation's sales tax exempt number is 222-906-466 expiring on 01/04/04. rw Pages Millbank Affordable Housing Instructions To Bidders ITB 3. Will, to the greatest extent feasible, provide opportunities for training and employment to lower income residents of the project area and contracts for work in connection with the Project be awarded to business concerns, which are located in or owned in substantial part by persons residing in the area of the Project. Implementation The Owner will require: 1. That no person be discriminated against based race, color, national origin, sex, age, handicap, religion, religious preference or sexual orientation 2. Positive efforts to utilize local, small business, minority-owned firms, and women's business enterprises and to employ low- income local workers, minorities and females, whenever possible. The Owner will: 1. Ensure that small businesses, minority-owned firms, and women's business enterprises are used to the fullest extent practicable, 2. Make information on forthcoming opportunities available and arrange time frames for purchases and contracts to encourage and facilitate participation by small business, minority-owned firms, and women's business enterprises, 3. Consider in the contract process whether firms competing for larger contracts intend to subcontract with small business, minority-owned firms, and women's business enterprises, 4. Encourage contracting with consortiums of small businesses, minority-owned firms and women's business enterprises when a contract is too large for one of these firms to handle individually, and 5. Use the services and assistance, as appropriate, of such organizations as the Small Business Administration and the Department of Commerce's Minority Business Development Agency in the solicitation and utilization of small businesses, minority-owned firms and women's business enterprises. INTERPRETATIONS No oral interpretations will be made to any bidder as to the meaning of the drawings and .� specifications. Every request for such an interpretation shall be made in writing by a general bidder and addressed and forwarded to Carlson & Schmitt Architects, Inc., One South End Bridge Circle, Agawam, MA 01001. No inquiry received within five days of .. the date fixed for opening of general bids will be given consideration. Every interpretation made to a bidder will be in the form of an addendum to the specification, which, if issued, may be sent as promptly as is practicable to all persons to whom the drawings and specifications have been issued. All such addenda shall become a part of the contract documents. Failure of the Awarding Authority to send, or of any bidder to Page4 Millbank Affordable Housing Instructions To Bidders ITB Mortgagors: Massachusetts Housing Partnership Fund Two Oliver Street 40 Boston, MA 02109 Department of Housing and Community Development • One Congress Street Boston, MA 02114 Massachusetts Housing Investment Corporation 70 Federal Street Boston, MA 02110 Office of Planning and Development City of Northampton Northampton, MA 01060 Affordable Housing Trust Fund MassHousing One Beacon Street Boston, MA 02108 MINORITY BUSINESS PARTICIPATION The following are target (goal) percentages for minority business participation. Each contractor shall strive to comply with the following: fifteen (15%) percent of the total contract amount of this construction contract must be awarded to qualified minority subcontractors and fifteen (15%) percent of the total number of contracts awarded to subcontractors for this project must be awarded to qualified minority contractors. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY, AFFIRMATIVE MARKETING AND SECTION 3 General Work to be performed on the Millbank Apartments project is subject to the +,rr requirements of Equal Opportunity, Affirmative Marketing and of the Housing and Urban Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 1701u (Section 3). Valley Millbank Limited Partnership (the "Owner") wishes to comply with these requirements and will: 1. Ensure that no otherwise qualified person shall be excluded from participation or employment, denied program benefits, or subjected to discrimination based on race, color, national origin, sex, age, handicap, religion, religious preference or sexual orientation, ! ' 2. Comply with procedures undertaken in accordance with affirmative marketing requirements and the use of Minority and Women's Business Enterprises, and Page3 Millbank Affordable Housing am Instructions To Bidders ITB •�. WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS Any bid may be withdrawn by written or telegraphic request dispatched by a general in time for delivery in the normal course of business prior to the hours fixed respectively for the opening of such bids. Prior to such hours, telegraphic withdrawal of bids must be confirmed over the signature of the bidders by written notice deposited in the United States mail. BIDDING PROCEDURE Bid documents submitted by all bidders to the Owner shall be enclosed in a single envelope which shall be sealed and clearly labeled with the words "Bid Documents," the project name, firm name, firm name of the bidder, and an envelope containing sub-bids with the title and number of the specification section being bid. Envelopes shall be addressed to Joanne Campbell, Millbank Associates, c/o Carlson & Schmitt Architects, Inc. AWARD OF CONTRACT Contract shall be awarded to the lowest responsible and eligible General Bidder on the basis of competitive bids in accordance with the procedures set forth herein. The award of the contract will be made within thirty days—Saturdays, Sundays and legal holidays excluded—after the opening of the general bids. If the General Bidder selected as the General Contractor fails to perform his agreement to execute a contract in accordance with the terms of his general bid and furnish a performance bond and also a labor and materials or payment bond as stated in his general bid, an award shall be made to the next lowest responsible and eligible General Bidder. REJECTION OF BIDS , In inviting bids, the Owner shall reserve the right to reject any or all such bids, if it be in his interest to do so. �. BONDS The Owner will require the successful general bidder to furnish a performance bond and also a labor and materials or payment bond, and a lien bond, each of a surety company qualified to do business under the laws of the Commonwealth and satisfactory to the Owner and each in the sum of one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, the premiums for which are to be included in the contract price. All bonds are to be provided on behalf of the Owner and all lending institutions herein listed: Name of Owner: Valley Millbank Limited Partnership 16 Armory Street Northampton, MA 01060 Page2 Millbank Affordable Housing �. Instructions To Bidders ITS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 40 BIDDING DOCUMENTS Plans and specifications for the Millbank Affordable Housing, Michelman Avenue, Northampton, MA, may be obtained from Carlson & Schmitt Architects, Inc., One South End Bridge Circle, Agawam, MA on Tuesday, November 27, 2001. Deposit for each set is $100; check made payable to Millbank Associates. Deposits will be returned within seven (7) days after award of contract upon return of plans and specifications in good condition. BIDDING—GENERAL The Owner will receive sealed bids for the project entitled: Millbank Affordable Housing Bids are to be based on the lump sum contract for the entire project as specified and as shown on the drawings. ►► PLACE FOR RECEIVING BIDS Bids of General Contractors will be received at the office of Carlson &Schmitt Architects, Inc., One South End Bridge Circle, Agawam, MA. TIME FOR RECEIVING BIDS Bids of General Bidders will be received by the Owner and will be due on or before 1:00 4W PM Friday, December 21, 2001. Bids of General Bidders received prior to the time established herein for the opening of such bids will be securely kept, unopened. The officer whose duty it is to receive and to open all bids will decide when to open bids. No responsibility will attach to an officer for premature opening of a bid not properly addressed and identified. w No bids of General Bidders will be received by the Owner after the times respectively established herein. PRE-BID CONFERENCE A pre-bid meeting will be held at the site on Thursday, December 6, 2001 at 10:00 AM at the Michelman Avenue site for the purpose of examining the premises and answering pre-bid questions. Pagel Millbank Affordable Housing m Millbank Affordable Housing -Table of Contents SECTION 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES a SECTION 11451 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES SECTION 12356 KITCHEN CASEWORK SECTION 12491 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION SECTION 15400 PLUMBING SECTION 15600 HVAC SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL .� w w�a Page 2 of 2 `, Miilbank Affordable Housing -Table of Contents TS TITLE SHEET TOC TABLE OF CONTENTS ITB INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS GB FORM FOR GENERAL BID GC-AIA,A201 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION,AIA A201 SGC SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 01100 SUMMARY SECTION 01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS SECTION 01210 ALLOWANCES SECTION 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 01420 REFERENCES SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION 01731 CUTTING AND PATCHING SECTION 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ENVIRONMENTAL/SOIL BORING REPORT NORTHAMPTON PLANNING BOARD DECISION/CONDITIONS ORDER OF CONDITIONS-NORTHAMPTON CONSERVATION COMMISSION SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK SECTION 02361 TERMITE CONTROL SECTION 02368 ROLLED STEEL SECTION PILES SECTION 02900 LANDSCAPE WORK-LAWNS AND PLANTING SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 04901 CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06176 METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK SECTION 07115 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING SECTION 07190 WATER REPELLENTS SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION SECTION 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES SECTION 07460 SIDING SECTION 07710 MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08163 ALUMINUM-STORM DOORS SECTION 08212 PANEL DOORS SECTION 08550 VINYL WINDOWS SECTION 08711 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09652 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 09680 CARPET SECTION 09912 PAINTING SECTION 10100 SHELVING SECTION 10520 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES SECTION 10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES 5 Page 1 of 2 i a a i a a 1 1 7 Millbank Affordable Housing Michelman Avenue Northampton, MA Owner Mortgager: Valley Millbank LLC 16 Armory Street, Northampton, MA HAP, Inc. 322 Main Street, Springfield, MP, ; Developer/Sponsor: Valley Community Development Corp. 16 Armory Street, Northampton, MAf Development Consultant: MBL Housing & Development 971 Main Street, Springfield, MA Carlson & Schmitt Architects, Inc. 1 South End Bridge Circle, Agawam, MA E.B. Holmberg & Associates Easthampton,MA Engineering Design Associates Springfield, MA Robert W. Hall Consulting Engineers Agawam, MA _ November 21, 2001 R � LL -- �� -- � - . Q III ► ;; 11111 ° Q OL Jow CD z Lv le O l r ! tq .e g > s � 6 �g 7 - 8 Ti a MA L 00-00 kN eta _. a all S M M M�M� •O—,O� —M N o o 0 0 0 ell Oil MA m t �! - _rr� 3 All CIO �C J m Q Q � 4 d Q L LL Y p 0 Z C3 a <Z2 2=J °z t--a Fa p Ell a ` a I It ? Ln % z " LO f 0 CM CL 0 s w . m Q 4 4 d N L Q z ZU' a Q? g I mj H JQ it z Fb-- r y ® 0 9 _Ada CD Al d Y LO N � 7N N C W 1 W ca hfi Q a �� 7 e LL X1411oaoaoaoa Y o 3 Z o a. <Z2 _ Q Q m=om _ �t� o 0 �I Z iN arau tro� i t t 9 � k � Win �i i 1 II a i a all { at q Eirt all _ i G� i tt g ITU g G � 01270 UNIT PRICES PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 LIST OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit Price No. One-Rolled Steel Section Piles: 1. Description: According to Division 4 Section "Rolled Steel Section Piles." 2. Unit of Measurement: linear foot. END OF SECTION 01270 Page 2 Millbank Affordable Housing 01270 UNIT PRICES SECTION 01270 -UNIT PRICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedures for using unit prices to adjust quantity allowances. 2. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. 3. Division 2 Section"Rolled Steel Section Piles". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is an amount proposed by bidders, stated on the Bid Form, as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, overhead, and profit. B. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. D. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. Page 1 Millbank Affordable Housing FORM FOR GENERAL BID Millbank Affordable Housing D. Provide cost per linear foot of Rolled Steel Section Piles, installed, per requirements of 02368, Section 1.10 Unit Prices. Unit Price No. 1: $ per linear foot, installed. E. In submitting his bid, it is understood that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids of the General Bidders and to waive any informalities in bidding, if it be in the Owner's interest to do so. It is also agreed that this bid may not be withdrawn within sixty (60) days of the receipt of bids, Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded. F. The undersigned agrees that if he is selected as General Contractor he will within five days, Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excluded, after presentation thereof by the Owner, execute a contract in accordance with the terms of this General Bid. (Name of General Bidder) By (Business Address) Title Date 2 21. In the Previous Electrical Addendum, Items in that addendum shall be referred to as following: Refer to Electrical Drawing E1.1 for items 1, 3, 5, and 8, Drawing E1.2 for items 2, 5, and 8, Drawing E1.4 for items 5, 10, 11, and 15, and Drawing E1.5 for items 5, 10, 11, 12, and 13. End Of This Addenda 4 7. Provide Four (4) System Smoke Detectors in basement located 30 feet apart between them and not more than 15 feet from each side walls, and wire them to FACP. 8. Provide Two (2) Horn/Strobe Units, locate one near exit door in basement and one near boiler room wall in basement, and wire them to FACP. 9. Provide one (1) Manual pull station, locate it near exit door in basement, and wire it to FACP. 10. Provide Two (2) System Heat Detectors in attic, locate them 25 feet apart in the center of attic, and wire them to FACP. 11. Provide Six (6) Horn/Strobe Units, locate them one in each apartment, in hallways outside of bedrooms, and wire them to FACP. 12. Provide Y2" conduit with 4#14 form FACP and extend the same to near existing Telephone Main Board in basement for the owner to tie to the security system monitoring agency. 13. Change normal receptacle shown above kitchen counter in unit-5 to GFI type receptacle. 14. Normal receptacle shown near kitchen counter in unit-4 shall be converted to GFI type receptacle. 15. Provide two new GFI type receptacle, install them above kitchen counter, between sink and cooking stove in unit-2, wire them to apartment tenant panel, with a dedicated individual circuit to each one of them. 16. Provide two new GFI type receptacle, install them above kitchen counter, one on each side of sink in unit-6, wire them to apartment tenant panel, with a dedicated individual circuit to each one of them. 17. Provide one self-contained meter with a main circuit breaker of 2P-125A at existing metering bank in existing building. Provide tap and new 125 Amps feeder to new owners panel that shall be located in existing building as directed by owner. Provide one 200 Amps owner's panel board (MP) 120/240V, single phase-3 wires with 42 circuits. 18. Provide one type "N" light fixture and switch in basement in new building, wire them to panel MP. 19. Provide one power receptacle in basement in new building, wire it to panel MP. 20. All panel boards in new and existing apartments, and MP panel board shall be single phase, 3 wire, 120/240V with a 125 Amps, 2 poles, main circuit breaker. Provide a 125 Amps feeder from existing metering system to all apartments new panels and to panel MP. 3 A1.8 79 MICHELMAN TYPICAL UNIT PLAN Existing ceiling are to be demolished —reduce area to approximately 24" times width of the entry hall; and closet. Coordinate exact dimensions with HVAC. Prime and texture, paint finish. A3.4 18 MICHELMAN ELEVATIONS Detail C/A 1.5—Change to read "grind and repoint" ......... Clarifications: L-6 —Typical pavement cross sections shall be referenced in this bid. L-8 — Delete reference to paving type "K and "B" and related designations on L-7. See L-2, L-3, L-4, L-5, and L-6 for side layout materials designation. ELECTRICAL ADDENDUM #2: Items 1 through 17 are applicable to 18 Michelman Building Only, Items 18 & 19 are applicable to New Building only, Item 20 is applicable to both 18 Michelman and New Building. 1. Provide 120V Smoke Detectors with Relay, Battery back up, and sounder base, install them in all bedrooms, and in hallways just out side of all bedrooms, wire them in tandem so that activation of any one of these 120V detector shall sound all detectors. Typical for all Six(6) Apartments. 2. Delete the location of Heat detector shown in plans, and located Heat Detector within six feet of the exit door in living room. This detector shall be wired to the building Fire Alarm Control Panel (FRCP). 3. Provide One Fire Alarm Control Panel (FRCP) in Basement, one Red Beacon on outside door leading out of basement, and wire it to FACP. FACP Shall be located near the entry door in basement as directed by Fire Department. Provide 120V branch circuit to FACP from Owner's Power Panel in basement. 4. Provide System Smoke Detectors in each stairwell at the ceiling, typical for Two (2) in this building, and wire them to FACP. 5. Provide Horn/Strobe Units in each stairwell, and wire them to FACP, typical for Two (2) in this building. 6. Provide Two (2) System Manual Pull Stations, one each near entry doors on first floor level in common stairwells and wire them to FACP. 2 r Carlson&Schmitt Architects,Inc. Millbank Affordable Housing Addendum #2 December 18, 2001 SPECIFICATIONS GB — FORM FOR GENERAL BID Page 2 revised — Unit Prices added; see attached. 01270— UNIT PRICES This section added; see attached. 04901 — CLAY MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 1.2 SUMMARY, Paragraph C. Delete reference to unit prices. 10520— FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES Locate as follows: 18 Michelman—One (1) at Stair#5 34 Michelman —One (1) at each common stair hall room # U-18, first floor. DRAWINGS L-2 SITE LAYOUT Coordinate site utility entrances/layout with mechanical specifications for each structure. A1.1 FIRST FLOOR PLAN Typical unit separation walls to be wall type 'A". Note: Staggered 2 x 4 stud wall requirements. Separation wall to extend full height, tight to roof sheathing. A1.6 18 MICHELMAN 2"D FLOOR PLAN Provide aluminum gutter and downspouts at"Rear Porch" only. Remove and reinstall existing at"Front Porch". 1 1 South End Bridge Circle Agawam,Massachusetts 01001 (413)7865556 telephone (413)786-6130 fax www.carlson-schmitt.com v LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE NO MANUt= CATALOG NUMBER LAMPS VOLT MOUNTING REMARKS NO I TYPE REC IPEND SURF A MIDWEST PR232SS0120 2 32W-T8 120 X 1x4 WRAPAROUND B LIGHTOLIER 10324AZ 2 40W-T8 X APT, CORRIDOR C LIGHTOLIER 5481 2 20W-T12 X APT. OVER MIRROR D PROGRESS P7303-31 1 13W-CF X APT, STAIRS, E SEAGULL 7772-62 3 60W X APT. DINING, F LIGHTOLIER 5928-15 4 13W-CF X APT BEDROOM & LIVING ROOM G LITHONIA LHQMSWIR120H 2 6W HAL. X EMERGENCY LIGHT H WESTERFIELD 1400,671 2 13W-CF X WALK-IN CLOSET I BROAN 4CK06 - - X BATH, FAN LIGHT J LIGHTOLIER 6586 2 9W-TT X OUTDOOR LIGHT K SEAGULL 5911-68 2 34W-T12 X APT. KITCHEN L LITHONIA 2UC 1 17 120 LP 1 17W-T8 X UNDER CABINET M SEAGULL 8927-15 1 13W-CF X APT. BALCONY, N LITHONIA UN 2 32 120 2 32W-T8 X ATTIC LIGHTING, O PROGRESS P7121-60 1 - X APT. INTERNAL STAIRS, t L L i U-OB DOWN TO PILOT SWUR LOCATED IN CORK TO CIRC$38 L BETWEEN UNITS 4 A 1 5. IN TENANT U-10 PANEL BEDROOM U-OB TO CIRC•e N N TO CIRC$38 F-6 IN TENANT IN TENANT PANEL. f-S F-4 OPEN TO BELO ELECTRICAL ATTIC PLAN: 18 MICHELMAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" 18, 34, 79 MICHELMAN AVE. MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING NORTHAMPTON , MA. Carlson&SchmittAmhitects,lnt E S K 1 i ae,.ee sra�ta..t. ywm,H4 oi0a1 c.y ala.TaO.afN raa alanaa.ala0 LIVING ROOM KITCHEN mn BATHROOM °\J BATHROOM PROVDE NEW GAS—FIRED CONDENSING FURNACES P C VENT D FOR EACH UNIT ON THE 2ND AND 3RD FLOORS. MECH STION REMOVE EXISTING FAN COIL UNITS, ROOF—TOP LOSET NJU HEAT PUMPS AND ALL ASSOCIATED PIPING AND UP THROUG ROOF?OsET CONTROLS. CONNECT NEW FURNACE DUCTWORK THREE (3) TO EXISTING IN MECH. ROOM MAKING ALL NE PER UN_ . NECESSARY DUCT TRANSITIONS TO ACCOMMODATE NEW UNIT. CLOSET Joe CONNECT NEW DRAIN LINE TO EXISTING WITH CLOSET VEN A Ok. FROM NEW LITTLE GIANT CONDENSATE PUMP. DRAIN R U BEDROOM TO EXISTING FAN COIL DRAIN LOCATION. PROVIDE CONCENTRIC VENT KIT FOR ROOF PENETRATION WITH EXTERIOR VENT CAP. INSTALL FURNACE AND CONCENTRIC VENT KIT IN STRICT CONFORMANCE WITH BEDROOM MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. EXTEND VENT 3'-0' ABOVE ROOF LINE. PR❑VIDE ROOF PENETRATION THIMBLE FOR VENT KITS. FURNACES SHALL BE BASED ON CARRIER MODEL 5SMSA-040 HIGH EFFICIENCY GAS—FIRED CONDENSING FURNACE. UNITS SHALL INCLUDE. PROVIDE CONTROL THERMOSTAT — HEATING ONLY. UNITS SHALL BE VERTICALLY MOUNTED WITH SIDE RETURN. PROVIDE ONE SET OF SPARE FILTERS. 18 , 34 , 79 MICHELMAN AVE. MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING NORTHAMPTON , MA. DATE: 12/05/01 Carlson&Schmitt Architects,Inc. S K M 1 f 9onln End Brid.a Cfrcl a w. Y� of OOf lN.41 .>e0-666e !:11»ee_el,e � n • c-oof D. CNTR. E GE 4 BACK OF GAB'T AGE 'PICAL- IF E 05ED A5C I VE EX15. - - - -- WIN. PILL __l I I I I I I L- A4 C 1 A2.3 BI A23 co �I 84 5 ■ I _ � r N I I ri.i I < /A I r- FINI5HEO END I PANEL 5v. I —� EX15. WOOD f KITCHEN PLAN UNIT 1/41 PLAN UNIT 6 v 1.5/ 1/4'z r-0- v4-=r-0- FILLER WC 2130 WC3318 WC 2430 WC 18SC W 2430 W 3318 W.1230 d t J W I 3 � Y I ' II� $ 2 8 21 SB33 08 15 8 21 B 24 58 33 o a ANGLED PANEL B1 1ALLOW BASE CABINET t r ELEVATION EVATION ma Ra 1/4"=r—o- v4--r—o' C y W 3315 = E WC 2730 W 3018 2130 FILLER � g J 4I j it EX15. WI+ �� !! 3 iv f� l ii BEYOND is >< II! FIELD M, d GOOK= � RANGE HOOD GAB' 0 G i r =a B 21 30" RANGE BBC 48/51 Al FINISHED FACE ELEVATION EVATION V4"=r—T v4-=r—o- When performing exterior deleading work, tarps and polyethylene-sheets will be installed each day to catch all scrapings and debris generated from this exterior work. These tarps will be installed over grass, shrubbery, railings etc. At the and of the work day, windows, trim and porch floors will be hepa-vacuumed to remove loose flakes, chips and. debris. At the end of each-day wrap up tarps and collect all chips for proper disposal. Patrol the work area and pick up all errant paint -chips and debris and dispose.of property- WORK: DOORS: (Interior)All positive doors will be removed. DOOR JAMBS: . (Interior) Door jambs will be wet scraped in piece. Use only caustic chemical paint removers-in paste form such as PEEL AWAY (sodium hydroxide) or approved equal. Any chemical agent must be accepted under current,regulations Removers containing methyl — chloride are not al owed. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage. Jamb shall be scraped to header. Scraping to 5' will not be acceptable. All surfaces shall be free of jagged rough edges, snags or residue which would interfere with the new paint's ability to bridge and seal any remaining gaps. Secure any loose or split wood trim, caulk any gaps to provide sound surfaces. Review all headers to insure paint is intact. CELLAR WINDOWS: Remove all window sashes, casings and frames. Protect all adjacent surfaces from damage: DOORS and TRIM: (Exterior) Exterior door jambs and casings will be removed. Protect all adjacent surfaces from-damage. EXTERIOR SIDING: Exterior siding will be scraped to make intact and ready for vinyl siding. EXTERIOR UPPER TRIM: The upper trim will be wet scraped to make intact and .-spot primed so all upper trim wood is coated with a minimum of one coat of exterior-oil based primer. Protect adjacent spaces with plastic sheeting to collect chips and clean-up as noted above. The surfaces shall be ready for final coats) of paint by painting contractor — no other scraping or sending will be necessary. Prior to demobilizing the.deieading contractor will schedule a meeting with the painting contractor, the general contractor and the architect to verify the painting prep work is complete. cancelled within 24 hours of there-inspection by contractor will result in a late cancellation fee at no additional cost to the owner. FINAL INSPECTIONS FOR FULL DELEADING COMPLIANCE It is the responsibility of the Contractor to bring all-units into compliance with 105 CMR 460.000, and obtain -a Certificate of Full Deleading Compliance. Any surfaces listed on the report containing lead based paint above .9 mg/c rW and "A/M' (accesible/mOLdhable), "M/I"-(movable/impacted) or "V (loose) must be addressed. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all items that require deleading are deleaded to the satisfaction of the owner, architect and lead paint inspector, whether or not they are--discussed in detail anywhere in this specification. The lead paint inspector who performed the initial and re-occupancy inspections will perform all final inspections for full compliance. Four day notification Is required for these re-inspections. Scheduled re-inspections cancelled within 24 hours of the re4rispection by contractor will result in a late cancellation fee at no additional cost to the owner. GENERAL CONDITIONS These specifications shall complement and coordinate with the project specifications prepared by Carlson & Schmitt Architects, Inc. If conflicts occur, pertaining to the.deleading work it is the contractors responsibility to notify the architect and lead paint consultant so all parties may determine the best course of action. Work which in the opinion of the owner, architect or lead inspector that is not . completed in conformance with this specification will be removed and replaced, or corrected in the field, to the satisfaction of the owner, architect and lead inspector prior to payment for said work to the contractor_ /ill contractors will conform to these specifications as well as the 6th edition of the MASS Building Code as well as all local ordinances. Remove all excess material, demo'd material, packing materials, dust, and paint chips from each work area, as the work progresses. Remove all debris from the property on a daily basis. All debris and wastewater removed from the site will be disposed of in compliance with all current EPA and DEP regulations, 310 CMR 30.000, concerning the handling, hauling and disposal of all waste generated during this project. DELEADIMSPICIFICATIONS Project: 18 Michslman Avenue, Apartments 1 -6, Northampton, MA Owner: Milibank Affordable Housing Architect: Carlson & Schmitt Architects,Inc. Lead Paint Consultant: ACLIN Inc. Lead Paint Inspection Service The Contractor must be licensed with the Massachusetts Department of Labor end-Workforce Development. All deleading will be done in accordance with the Department of Labor , and Workforce Development 454 CMR 22.000 and Department of Public Health Regulations 105 CMR 460.160 items (A) through (D) including the specified use of a.HEPA filtered vacuum. It is the responsibility of the Deleading Contractor.to bring the above mentioned properties into full compliance with 105 CMR 460.000, Commonwealth of Massachusetts - `lead Poisoning Prevention and Control" and 24 CFR Part 35 HUD's Regulations on Lead Based Paint Hazards. The Deleading Contractor shall perform all work in accordance with these specifications and with all local, state and federal laws governing lead based paint abatement. RE-OCCUPANCY INSPECTIONS The Contractor will be required to pass a re-occupancy or clearance inspection for all apartments at the above mentioned property. In addition to the visual inspection of all surfaces deleaded, the contractor will be required to comply with the following clearance lead dust wipe sample prot000ls: Floors Below 40 micrograms/square foot Window sill = Below 250 micrograms/square foot ` Window well = Below 400 micrograms/square foot The Contractor will be required to perform additional dean-up in accordance with 454 CMR 22.000 if the dust levels are above the required limits or at the discretion of the lead paint inspector. This additional dean-up and dust sampling will be at no additional cost to the owner. All re-occupency inspections will be performed by the lead inspector who performed the initial lead inspections of the above mentioned properties. Four day notification is required for these re-inspections. Scheduled re-inspections Date: December, 12,2001. MILLBANK AFFORDABLE HOUSING ELECTRICAL ADDENDUM 1. Electric Unit heater's to be: "F"Series Fan Forced Ceiling Mounted Heaters. Catalog#: F-4804,240/208 volts,4800/3600 Watts,20.1/17.3 Amps,AWG 10. Manufactured by Marley Electric Heating. "Typical for two" Electric Unit Heaters,to be furnished, installed and wired by electrical contractor. Change Unit Heater circuit breaker size from 1P-40A to 2P-30A,homerun should be 3#10 in %2"Conduit to Panel "MP". "Typical for two" 2. Provide a telephone outlet near panel PP-313 and PP-4B in unit's 3B and 4B. 3. Provide a telephone outlet in kitchen in unit's 4A and 3A. 4. On drawing E1.3,lights inside stairwell at third floor level ceiling,to be type"F",typical for four(4). 5. Delete one type`B"fixture from hallway in each of the units 1,2,5,6 and six existing units, and provide with two type"F"placed ten(10) feet a part at each location. 6. Delete the lighting fixture schedule shown in drawing E1.7,the new light fixture schedule shall be according to the attached sheet. 7. Panels to be 120/240 volts, single phase,4 wires. 8. Provide two type"F"light fixture on each level in the common stairwell and wire with type"A"fixture. "Typical for eight(8)light fixtures" 9. Subscript numbers written adjacent to a light fixture and receptacles designate a circuit number, to which they should be wired to the panel board respective to their unit. 10. Relocate existing wiring to existing range that is to be relocated to a new location in each of the six(6)units,provide extension of conduits wires and new junction boxes and receptacles as required. 11. Provide new receptacle for refrigerator in units 1,2 and 5 and wire them to their respective unit panels,use spare dedicated circuits. 12. Provide new type"K"fixture in kitchen in unit six; also provide a light switch to control that fixture. Locate the switch at the entry door near range. Wire the new light to the lighting circuit. 13. In the corridor between units 4 and 5 provide one smoke detector,one horn/strobe, and one type "G"emergency light. Wire the light to a non-switched lighting circuit.Also provide one light switch with pilot light for attic lights. 14. All new fire alarm system devices to be wired to existing fire alarm panel. "Verify location in field". 15. Delete two (2)type"D"fixtures in outside back stairwell.Wire one (1)type"D"fixture to owner's circuit,verify in field. 16. In Building#79, Remove existing wiring to eight(8)existing roof mounted heat pump and its fan coil unit located in respective mechanical room and provide new 120v, 20A dedicated circuit breaker from each of the ten unit panel to a new furnace located in each of the ten unit mechanical rooms,provide new disconnect switch for each furnace. Typical for eight(8)units in building#79. 17. Delete references in electrical specification for charges to Power Company to be paid by either Electrical Contractor or General Contractor.All charges involved to be paid to power company electric service for this project shall be paid by owner. ESK1: ATTIC PLAN. 1. Addition as specified on drawing. 1 1 � 1 P1.6 79 Michelman Plumbing Plan #79 Michelman—Clarification to new gas fired equipment. Baystate Gas Company is responsible for providing a new gas service and gas meters to all in building. Plumbing contractor shall start his work from the outlet side of each meter, provide 12 separate gas lines into building to supply gas to new water heaters and furnaces in each unit. The installation and location of gas piping to each unit must be verified in field. Plumbing Contractor shall coordinate all pipe installation with that of the general contractor. Total Gas load each unit: 90 CFH Water heater: 50 CFH Furnace: 40 CFH Provide gas cocks and sediment traps at all gas fired equipment installed, Building#34 Michelman, Building#79 Michelman and Building#18 Michelman. M1.5 Second Floor&Attic HVAC Plan: 18 Michelman New HVAC equipment installation— Equipment to be delivered/installed through attic scuttle (General Contractor to widen if required) or through roof dormer windows (General Contractor to remove existing windows and mullion and reinstall as required). Attachments: Revised Drawings P1.1, P1.2, P1.3, P1.4; New Plumbing drawings 34 Michelman Avenue— New 10 unit building. Note: Full scale drawings distributed to General Contractors and Plumbing Contractors only. Reduced plans distributed to all other parties. Attachments: Additional Drawings Deleading Specifications (three pages ). SK—A2.3, 18 Michelman: Kitchen Casework Elevations & Details\ SK-M1: 79 Michelman Ave: New Furnace plan and specifications. 6 i � t • 1 A2.1 Door Schedule— New Building, Door#1 Provide 12"wide sidelight, glazed sash with muntins over raised panel, steel insulated construction, factory mull to entry door. A4.2 Stair Handrails All handrails to be 1 Y4" pipe, with wall returns at ends; wall brackets as required— prime and paint. Provide one rail at each side of each stair in common. Basement Stair— Provide non-slip vinyl treads and risers and stringers. All Stairs— Provide vinyl skirt trim. Townhouse Stairs— Provide Brosco#75 fir handrail. One rail at one side with wall brackets as required; prime and paint. P1.5/A1.5 and A1.6 Provide wood furring and gypsum board enclosure to conceal new gas piping. General Contractor to core drill/provide floor/ceiling openings and fine caulk/stop all new penetrations. P1.5 18 Michelman Plumbing Plan #18 Michelman—(Replacing sinks in at existing location) Remove existing sinks and trim thereto, in each unit. Remove existing garbage disposal in each unit. Furnish and Install new sinks and trim as specified on plans. Remount existing garbage disposal to new sinks. Provide new 3/8"copper or flex tubing from faucet set,reconnect into existing hot water/cold water supply lines. Provide all new waste, p-trap and reconnect into existing at walls. #18 Michelman—(Replacing sinks in new locations) Remove existing sinks and trim and all associated piping thereto. Cap off beyond finished walls, basement areas or above ceilings. Plumbing Sub-contractor is responsible for furnishing and installing new sinks and trim as specified at new locations as indicated on plans. (Refer to Architecturals) Provide all new water,waste and vent piping. Extend new piping as required, reconnect into existing in walls, ceilings or in basement areas. Remount existing garbage disposal on new sinks. Plumbing Sub-contractor is responsible for offsetting any vents in Attic space if required, for new installation of mechanical units. 5 1 ; 1 A1.1 First Floor Plan Unit 1 and unit 6 Laundry Room: Provide 3/4"furring on exterior wood studs (to allow for water supply piping) and install 5/8" gypsum board finish wall. A1.3 Third Floor Plan Relocate attic scuttle (detail 3/A4.2) to Laundry Room U-20. A1.3 &A1.4 Maintain %Z" plywood/gypsum board draftstop between unit 5 and attic above unit 4C and unit 2 and attic above unit 3C. A1.5/A1.6 and A2.1 Door Schedule 18 Michelman Unit 3: Bathroom, closet UO3, bedroom 1 and 2 doors to be removed per deleading specifications—provide new six panel hollow core door with hardware to fit existing openings. Unit 4: Provide new six panel colonist door and hardware (to fit existing two of closet U-02, where door is removed under deleading contract. Unit 5: Prime and paint doorjamb of closet U-02 specified to be stripped by deleading contractor. General Note: Coordinate all doors and frames to be demolished with scope and specifications for deleading. A1.6 Revise second general note to read: Demo all walls, doors, frames, kitchen cabinets and fixtures—where existing shown dashed and/or as required to facilitate new work. A2.1 — 18 Michelman — Room Finish Schedule Where new wall and ceiling finish specified, existing light fixtures, device trim, etc. to be removed and reinstalled. Stair#5, Room 004 (first and second floors)— Existing hardwood floor and stair treads to be sanded, stained, and polyurethaned (2 coats minimum). A2.1 Room Finish Schedule: 18 Michelman Painting: All surfaces to be painted to receive light sanding and repair/filling of holes; i.e. nail holes, pin holes, etc. 4 I � 1 y 15300— FIRE PROTECTION Page 1, 1.01 SCOPE, Paragraph A: Furnish design build services for.... Change scope to include only one building, 34 Michelman Avenue, the new 10-unit structure. The existing buildings, numbers 18 and 79 Michelman do not receive fire protection systems. DRAWINGS Title Sheet Delete reference to E1.5 existing building second floor electrical plan. L-2 —Site Work and Project Schedule/Coordination Tenant occupancy will require parking throughout construction. Contractor to make 14 parking spaces available (in Northwest Parking Area) throughout term of construction. L-7 Planting Plan: Delete reference to parking area/configuration shown this sheet, refer to L-2 Site Layout Plan for correct layout information. Adjust planting locations as needed to coordinate with all site layout elements. Delete P.O./4, C.crab/3, S.Ash/1, P.O./3, & D.Vib/15 shown to the north east of the existing twelve unit apartment building ( 79 Michelman). Where new trees scheduled in exis. lawn areas, provide lawn patch as required, and maintain per project specifications. Where any planting conflicts with work limit line shown on L-2, Provide plantings and loam bed/lawn topping and lawn work required per planting plan and specification. Provide Lawn surrounding 34 Michelman, Till, Grade, and Seed and maintain per project specifications. Coordinate with revised swale at Southeast side of the structure, and new stair/walk construction. L-8 Site Details Detail 10; Provide four additional site sign assemblies, details similar to Handicapped parking sign; standard text/signage to read "Entrance Only" or"Exit Only" or similar. Final text and location to be verified on site with Owner. 3 i risk to construction workers at the site. A copy of OTO's July 26, 2001 Response Action Outcome (RAO) report is attached to the contract documents. However, as specified below, concentrations of OHM in near surface soils are above certain regulatory limits and cannot be removed from the site for unrestricted use elsewhere. 3.22— DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS B. As was discussed above, near surface soils at the site contain levels of Oil and Hazardous Materials (OHM) above certain regulatory limits. Therefore, any surplus on site soils generated by the contractor's activities will not be allowed to leave the site. These materials may be reused as fill beneath pavements and floor slabs, and as backfill in landscaped areas or on the outside foundation walls provided they are covered with a minimum one foot of clean imported fill. 08163—ALUMINUM STORM DOORS 2.4 INSECT SCREENS—Change item 1. Glass fiber mesh to Duramesh II, .023-inch diameter, 12 x 12 mesh wire cloth, electrogalvanized and Duracoated, or equal. 09912— PAINTING See attached lead test/report and deleading specifications, coordinate specifications with project requirements; i.e. doors, hardware, vinyl siding, etc. 10100—SHELVING Page 1, SUMMARY OF WORK—Add to schedule 18 Michelman, A1.5 and A1.6 Unit 1, closet U-07, closet U-09, unit 3, closet U-07 and U-09, unit 4 closet U-09, and U-07, unit 5 closet U-09, and U-07 and unit 6 closet U-07 1 shelf and rod at each closet. Unit 6 closet U-02, 1 shelf and rod Unit 2, and unit 3, 1 Shelf and rod 11451 — RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES Page 1: 1.2 SUMMARY, B.4— Delete reference to hot water dispensers. Page 5: Common Area Laundry: Change to Maytag Stackable Washer/Dryer model#MLE19PD, provide heavy duty braided hoses at washer connections. 2 a.. Carlson &Schmitt Architects, Inc. C, I Millbank Affordable Housing Addendum #1 December 12, 2001 SPECIFICATIONS ITB— INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 2: Change name of owner to "Valley Millbank LLC" FORM FOR GENERAL BID Trade breakdown— Heating: To include both "Forced-Air" and "Hydronic" systems as designed for 18, 34, and 79 Michelman. 01140—WORK RESTRICTIONS Page 1, 1.2 USE OF PREMISES— 18 Michelman; Owner will vacate two apartments (one at first floor, and one above at the second floor) for a period of two weeks per pair. Tenant furnishings will be moved to the center of each room; Contractor to provide protective/dust control. 01500—TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Electric Service: Contractor not allowed to utilize individual tenant power; Contractor to provide temporary power/meter for all construction activities. 01732- SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Section 1.7 Project Conditions, item D, Hazardous Materials, small amounts of lead have been found in 18 Michelman, Refer to attached lead abatement specifications. Coordinate the scope abatement, as required before commencing demolition/construction. 02300— EARTHWORK Part Two: Products and Part Three: execution- coordinate with the requirements and recommendations highlighted in the ENVIRONMENTAL SOIL REPORT included in the project specification. 2.2—CONTAMINATED SOILS A. Oil and Hazardous Materials (OHM), as defined in the Massachusetts Contingency Plan (MCP), have been identified in soils at the site. Of particular concern at the site is the presence of elevated concentrations of lead in near surface soils at the site. Investigations conducted by O'Reilly, Talbot& Okun Associates, Inc. (OTO) have indicated that the concentrations of OHM would not pose a significant 1 1 South End Bridge Circle Agawam,Massachusetts 01001 (413)786-5556 telephone (413)786-6130 fax www.carlson-schmitt.com